JP7430582B2 - gaming machine - Google Patents

Description

The present invention relates to a gaming machine that can be controlled to advantageous conditions that are advantageous to players.

In conventional gaming machines, a meter whose display mode can be changed from level 1 to bell 4 is displayed on the image display device, and based on the display mode of the meter becoming level 4, multiple super reach There is one in which any one of the reach effects is executed (for example, see Patent Document 1).

JP2015-221121A

However, in Patent Document 1, the problem is that one of the plurality of reach effects of super reach is only executed based on the change in the display mode of the meter to level 4, and the enjoyment of the game cannot be improved. There is.

The present invention has been made with attention to such problems, and an object of the present invention is to provide a gaming machine that can improve gaming enjoyment.

The gaming machine of means A is
A gaming machine that can be controlled to an advantageous state advantageous to a player,
A plurality of types of suggestion performances including a first suggestion production, a second suggestion production, a third suggestion production, and a fourth suggestion production can be executed as the suggestion production suggesting that the control is to be carried out in the advantageous state. Suggestion performance execution means,
The first development performance can be executed before the performance result of the first suggestion performance is announced, and the first development performance can be performed after the fact that the control is not controlled to the advantageous state as a performance result of the second suggestion performance is announced. A development performance execution means capable of executing a second development performance different from the first development performance;
a chance-up performance execution means capable of executing a chance-up performance with different expectations to be controlled to the advantageous state depending on the number of times the suggestion performance is executed;
a resurrection special performance execution means capable of executing a resurrection special performance that notifies that the control will be in the advantageous state after the suggestive performance is executed and it is announced that the control will not be in the advantageous state as a result of the performance;
a display means having a display area capable of displaying an image;
a storage means capable of storing image data of an image displayed in the display area;
an image processing means having a plurality of display layers in which images based on the image data can be arranged, and capable of generating an image to be displayed in the display area by superimposing and synthesizing each image arranged in the plurality of display layers; ,
Equipped with
The suggestive performance execution means is
The third suggestion performance can be executed after the first development performance is executed,
The fourth suggestion performance can be executed after the second development performance is executed,
The chance up effect execution means is
The number of times the chance-up effect is executed while the third suggestion effect is being executed is greater than the number of times the chance-up effect is executed when the first suggestion effect is being executed. It is possible to perform the above-mentioned chance-up production as follows,
The number of executions of the chance-up effect executed when the fourth suggestion effect is executed is set to be equal to or less than the number of executions of the chance-up effect executed when the second suggestion effect is executed. It is possible to perform the above-mentioned chance-up production,
The resurrection special effect execution means does not execute the resurrection special effect when the fourth suggestion effect is executed after the second development effect is executed.
It is characterized by
According to this feature, the interest in the game can be improved.
The gaming machine of means 1 is
A gaming machine (for example, Pachinko gaming machine 1) that can perform variable display and can be controlled to an advantageous state (for example, a jackpot gaming state) that is advantageous to the player,
Suggestion performances that suggest being controlled to the advantageous state include a special suggestion performance (e.g., reach performance I) and a first suggestion performance (for example, Executing multiple types of suggestion performances including reach performance A), second suggestion performance (for example, reach performance B), third suggestion performance (for example, reach performance F), and fourth suggestion performance (for example, reach performance E) Possible suggestive effect execution means (for example, a portion where the effect control CPU 120 executes the effect processing during variable display shown in FIG. 10),
It is possible to execute the special development performance as the first development pattern before the performance result of the first suggestion performance is announced (for example, as shown in FIG. In the variable display, the part where the highly anticipated reach performance development notification performance is executed during the execution of the reach performance A), and the special development is performed after it is announced that the advantageous state will not be controlled as a result of the second suggestion performance. A special development performance different from the performance can be executed as a second development pattern (for example, as shown in Figure 11-8, in a variable display with a variation pattern of super reach ζ, the variable display result ( A development performance execution means (for example, a part where the performance control CPU 120 executes the variable displaying performance process shown in FIG. 10),
Development suggestion performance execution means (for example, performance control CPU 120) capable of executing at least a development suggestion performance (for example, a meter performance, a reach performance E development suggestion performance, a reach performance G development suggestion performance) that suggests execution of the special development performance. Deciding to execute the meter effect in the meter effect determination process shown in FIG. 11-23, deciding to execute the reach effect E development suggestion effect in the reach effect E development suggestion effect determination process shown in FIG. 11-26, After deciding to execute the reach effect G development suggestion effect in the reach effect G development suggestion effect determination process shown in -29, a part that executes the variable displaying effect processing shown in FIG. 10);
It has a display area that can display images, and the display area contains game-related information regarding the progress of the game (for example, the number of reserved special symbols, the number of reserved special symbols, and the small display area that is smaller than the decorative symbols). a display means (for example, an image display device 5) capable of displaying a display image (for example, a first interface image 006SG005I or a second interface image 006SG005J);
a storage means (for example, CGROM 205) capable of storing image data including at least a specific image (for example, a decorative pattern or a background image) displayed in the display area and a display image of the game-related information;
A plurality of display layers in which images based on the image data can be arranged (for example, a layer 1 image drawing area, a layer 2 image drawing area, a layer 3 image drawing area, a displacement image creation area, a display image creation area shown in FIG. 12-5) etc.), and is capable of generating an image to be displayed in the display area by superimposing and synthesizing each image arranged in the plurality of display layers (for example, display control unit 123 and SDRAM 210);
a performance execution means capable of executing a performance of displaying the specific image in the display area (for example, a portion where the performance control CPU 120 executes a variable display performance process shown in FIGS. 12-17);
Equipped with
The suggestive performance execution means is
When the first development pattern is executed by the development effect execution means, after the execution of the special development effect, it is possible to execute the third suggestion effect, which has a higher expectation level than the first suggestion effect (for example, , as shown in FIG. 11-8, in the variable display of the variation pattern of super reach η, a high expectation level reach performance development notification performance is executed from the execution of reach performance A, and then a portion where reach performance F is further executed) ,
When the second development pattern is executed by the development effect execution means, the fourth suggestion effect can be executed after the execution of the special development effect (for example, as shown in FIG. 11-8, super reach In the variable display with the variation pattern of ζ, after the variable display result (missing) is once notified as the performance result of reach performance B, the reach performance E development notification performance is executed, and the part where reach performance E is further executed),
The development suggestion performance execution means executes, as the development suggestion performance, a special development suggestion performance that suggests execution of the special development performance during the execution period of the first suggestion performance and during the execution period of the second suggestion performance. (For example, as shown in Figures 11-7 and 11-8, in the variable display of variation patterns of super reach α, super reach β, super reach δ, super reach ζ, and super reach η) , the part where the meter effect can be executed during the execution of reach effect A and the execution of reach effect B),
The performance period of the special development performance is longer than the performance period of the special development performance (for example, as shown in FIGS. 11-8 and 11-9, the length of the execution period of the high expectation level reach performance development notification performance) L7 is the part longer than L6b, which is the execution period of reach performance E development notification performance),
The special development effects include a primary effect in which the visibility of the effect image is reduced (for example, a blackout effect shown in FIGS. 11-10 and 11-55), and a effect executed after the first effect. A secondary effect (for example, the first effect shown in FIG. 11-10 and FIG. 11-55) in which the first stage information is displayed in a visible manner; A tertiary presentation (for example, the subsequent presentation shown in FIGS. 11-10 and 11-55) in which subsequent information with a higher degree of emphasis than the information is visibly displayed,
The period from when the special development performance is executed until it is announced that the advantageous state will be controlled is longer than the period from when the special development performance is executed until it is announced that the advantageous state will be controlled. The period is shorter (for example, as shown in Figures 11-8 and 11-9, the period from the start timing of the highly anticipated reach performance development notification performance to the end timing of the reach performance I (the notification timing of the variable display result) The length L13 and the length L12 of the period from the start timing of the highly anticipated reach performance development notification performance to the end timing of the reach performance F are the length L12 from the start timing of the reach performance E development notification performance to the end timing of the reach performance E ( (the part set longer than the length L11 of the period up to (the notification timing of variable display results)),
The storage means changes the display position of at least some of the specific images in the display area from a first position (for example, in the case of characteristic part 006SG, the center of the display area of the image display device 5) to the first position. can store display position displacement information for displacing to a different second position (for example, in the case of the characteristic part 006SG, an upper position or a lower position of the display area of the image display device 5) (for example, the CGROM 205 can store display position displacement information (the part where image data is stored),
The image processing means can generate a displacement specific image in which the specific image placed in the specific display layer based on the image data is displaced based on the display position displacement information (for example, as shown in FIG. 12-23). A displacement target image is created by superimposing a decorative pattern drawn in the layer 2 image drawing area and a background image drawn in the layer 3 image drawing area, and a displacement image is applied to the displacement target image. As a result, the images of the left area 006SG005L and the right area 006SG005R move upward, and the image of the middle area 006SG005C moves downward as the display images displayed on the image display device 5 during the development suggestion performance. the part that creates the image),
The effect executing means is capable of executing a specific effect (for example, a development suggestion effect in the feature section 006SG) of displaying the displacement specific image generated by the image processing means in the display area during variable display,
The display image of the game-related information is arranged in a special display layer where the arranged image is preferentially displayed in the display area than the specific display layer (for example, as shown in FIG. 12-26, the first interface Image 006SG005I and second interface image 006SG005J are parts drawn in the layer 1 image drawing area that has the highest image display priority),
It is characterized by
According to this feature, when the fourth suggestion effect is executed after the execution of the special development effect, the period until the control to be controlled to an advantageous state is announced is excessively long, which reduces the interest in the game. In addition to suppressing the decline, in the case where the special suggestion performance is executed after the execution of the special development performance, it is possible to suitably make the player pay attention to the special suggestion performance before being informed that the advantageous state will be controlled. Therefore, it is possible to improve the interest in the game. Further, during the execution period of the first suggestion performance and during the execution period of the second suggestion performance, the special development suggestion performance can arouse the player's sense of expectation for the execution of the special development performance. In addition, a displacement specific image in which at least a part of the specific image displayed in a predetermined effect is displaced can be generated from the image data of the specific image and display position displacement information and displayed in the specific effect. A specific effect can be executed with a smaller amount of data than when image data of a specific image is exclusively stored. Furthermore, it is possible to prevent the display image of the game-related information from being displaced due to the displacement of the specific image during execution of the specific performance, thereby preventing the visibility of the display image of the game-related information from decreasing.

Furthermore, the embodiments for carrying out the invention described below include the invention related to the gaming machine of means 2 below. Conventionally, in gaming machines, an image displayed on an image display device (display means) is broken at a specific timing such as during a reach effect during variable display, as shown in Japanese Patent Application Laid-Open No. 2019-141396. There was something that could perform a scattering effect (specific effect). However, in such gaming machines, the effect is simply that the image breaks and scatters, so it is possible to improve the effect by performing the effect while other images are being displayed on the image display device. However, in this case, dedicated image data must be created for each image displayed on the image display device to execute the effect, and the amount of data to be stored in the storage means would be limited. There is a problem that the size may become excessively large, and in view of this point, there is a need to provide a gaming machine that can suppress the amount of data stored in the storage means in order to execute a specific performance.

The gaming machine of means 2 is
A gaming machine (for example, a pachinko gaming machine 1 or a slot machine) that can perform variable display,
It has a display area that can display images, and the display area contains game-related information regarding the progress of the game (for example, the number of reserved special symbols, the number of reserved special symbols, and the small display area that is smaller than the decorative symbols). a display means (for example, an image display device 5) capable of displaying a display image (for example, a first interface image 006SG005I or a second interface image 006SG005J);
a storage means (for example, CGROM 205) capable of storing image data including at least a specific image (for example, a decorative pattern or a background image) displayed in the display area and a display image of the game-related information;
A plurality of display layers in which images based on the image data can be arranged (for example, a layer 1 image drawing area, a layer 2 image drawing area, a layer 3 image drawing area, a displacement image creation area, a display image creation area shown in FIG. 12-5) etc.), and is capable of generating an image to be displayed in the display area by superimposing and synthesizing each image arranged in the plurality of display layers (for example, display control unit 123 and SDRAM 210);
a performance execution means capable of executing a performance of displaying the specific image in the display area (for example, a portion where the performance control CPU 120 executes a variable display performance process shown in FIGS. 12-17);
Equipped with
The storage means changes the display position of at least some of the specific images in the display area from a first position (for example, in the case of characteristic part 006SG, the center of the display area of the image display device 5) to the first position. can store display position displacement information for displacing to a different second position (for example, in the case of the characteristic part 006SG, an upper position or a lower position of the display area of the image display device 5) (for example, the CGROM 205 can store display position displacement information (the part where image data is stored),
The image processing means can generate a displacement specific image in which the specific image placed in the specific display layer based on the image data is displaced based on the display position displacement information (for example, as shown in FIG. 12-23). A displacement target image is created by superimposing a decorative pattern drawn in the layer 2 image drawing area and a background image drawn in the layer 3 image drawing area, and a displacement image is applied to the displacement target image. As a result, the images of the left area 006SG005L and the right area 006SG005R move upward, and the image of the middle area 006SG005C moves downward as the display images displayed on the image display device 5 during the development suggestion performance. the part that creates the image),
The effect executing means is capable of executing a specific effect (for example, a development suggestion effect in the feature section 006SG) of displaying the displacement specific image generated by the image processing means in the display area during variable display,
The display image of the game-related information is arranged in a special display layer where the arranged image is preferentially displayed in the display area than the specific display layer (for example, as shown in FIG. 12-26, the first interface Image 006SG005I and second interface image 006SG005J are parts drawn in the layer 1 image drawing area that has the highest image display priority),
It is characterized by
According to this feature, a displacement specific image in which at least a portion of a specific image displayed in a predetermined effect is displaced can be generated from the image data of the specific image and display position displacement information and displayed in the specific effect. Therefore, the specific effect can be executed with a smaller amount of data compared to the case where the image data of these displacement specific images is stored exclusively. Furthermore, it is possible to prevent the display image of the game-related information from being displaced due to the displacement of the specific image during execution of the specific performance, thereby preventing the visibility of the display image of the game-related information from decreasing.

Note that the present invention may have only the matters specifying the invention described in the claims of the present invention, or may have configurations other than the matters specifying the invention together with the matters specifying the invention described in the claims of the present invention. It may be something.

It is a front view of the pachinko game machine in this embodiment. It is a rear perspective view of the pachinko game machine in this embodiment. It is a configuration diagram showing various control boards etc. installed in the pachinko game machine. It is a flowchart showing an example of game control main processing. It is a flowchart showing an example of timer interrupt processing for game control. It is a flowchart showing an example of special symbol process processing. FIG. 3 is an explanatory diagram showing a display result determination table. It is a diagram showing the numerical range of the jackpot and the numerical range of the loss with the time saving in the variable display of the first special figure in the normal state or the time saving state. It is a flowchart which shows an example of production control main processing. It is a flowchart which shows an example of production control process processing. (A) and (B) are diagrams illustrating production control commands. It is an explanatory diagram showing each random number. FIG. 3 is an explanatory diagram showing a display result determination table. (A) is a diagram showing a configuration example of a jackpot type determination table, and (B) is a diagram showing contents of various jackpots. FIG. 3 is a diagram illustrating a variation pattern. It is an explanatory diagram showing a variable display result, a fluctuation pattern, and a relationship. It is a timing chart showing the production period in each variation pattern. It is a timing chart showing the production period in each variation pattern. It is a timing chart showing the production period in each variation pattern. (A) is a diagram showing the details of the performance in the case of executing the high expectation level reach performance development notification performance, and (B) is a diagram showing a comparison between the first stage performance and the second stage performance. FIG. 2 is an explanatory diagram showing an image display device. It is an explanatory diagram of a data holding area for game control. (A) is an explanatory diagram of the performance control data holding area, and (B) is an explanatory diagram of the reception command buffer at the time of starting winning. It is a flowchart which shows an example of starting prize winning determination processing. It is a flowchart showing an example of winning random value determination processing. It is a flowchart showing an example of special symbol normal processing. 3 is a flowchart illustrating an example of a variation pattern setting process. It is a flowchart showing an example of special symbol stop processing. It is a flowchart showing an example of jackpot termination processing. It is a flowchart which shows an example of a look-ahead notice performance setting process. It is a figure which shows the determination ratio of the display pattern and the presence or absence of execution of a pre-read notice effect. 3 is a flowchart illustrating an example of variable display start setting processing. It is a flowchart which shows an example of meter effect determination processing. (A) is a diagram showing whether or not a meter performance is executed and the determination ratio of performance patterns, and (B) is an explanatory diagram of each performance pattern. 5 is a timing chart showing first to fifth timings in each variation pattern. It is a flowchart which shows an example of reach performance E development suggestion performance determination processing. It is a flowchart which shows an example of branch destination suggestion performance decision processing. (A) is a diagram showing whether or not branch destination suggestion performance is executed and the determination ratio of the performance pattern, and (B) is an explanatory diagram of the performance pattern of branch destination suggestion performance. It is a flowchart which shows an example of reach performance G development suggestion performance determination processing. (A) is a diagram showing the ratio of ready-to-reach effects determined when hitting the jackpot, (B) is a diagram showing the ratio determining ready-to-reach effects when winning, and (C) is a diagram showing a comparison between reach effects C and D. , (D) is an explanatory diagram of the difference in the determination ratio of reach effect C and reach effect D in the variation pattern of super reach θ and the variation pattern of super reach κ at the time of jackpot, and (E) is an explanatory diagram of the difference in the determination ratio of reach effect C and reach effect D in the variation pattern of super reach θ at the time of jackpot, and (E) It is an explanatory diagram of the difference in the determination ratio of reach effect C and reach effect D in the variation pattern of reach θ and the variation pattern of super reach κ. It is a flowchart which shows an example of a chance up effect decision process. It is an explanatory diagram of an executable period of chance up performance during each reach performance. It is an explanatory diagram of a performance that can be executed as a chance-up performance. (A) to (D) are diagrams showing whether or not the chance-up performance is executed in each reach performance and the performance pattern, and (E) and (F) are explanatory diagrams of the performance pattern of the chance-up performance in each reach performance. be. It is a figure which shows the performance mode in the variable display of super reach. It is a figure which shows the performance mode in the variable display of super reach. It is a figure which shows the performance mode in the variable display of super reach. It is a figure which shows the performance mode in the variable display of super reach. It is a figure which shows the performance mode in the variable display of super reach. It is a figure which shows the performance mode in the variable display of super reach. It is a figure which shows the performance mode in the variable display of super reach. It is a figure which shows the performance mode in the variable display of super reach. It is a figure which shows the performance mode in the variable display of super reach. It is a figure which shows the performance mode in the variable display of super reach. It is a figure which shows the performance mode in the variable display of super reach. It is a figure which shows the performance mode in the variable display of super reach. It is a figure which shows the performance mode in the variable display of super reach. It is a figure which shows the performance mode in the variable display of super reach. It is a figure which shows the performance mode in the variable display of super reach. It is a figure which shows the performance mode in the variable display of super reach. It is a figure which shows the performance mode in the variable display of super reach. It is a figure which shows the performance mode in the variable display of super reach. It is a figure which shows the performance mode in the variable display of super reach. It is a figure which shows the performance mode in the variable display of super reach. It is a figure which shows the performance mode in the variable display of super reach. It is a figure which shows the performance mode in the variable display of super reach. It is a figure which shows the image display apparatus in a modification. It is a figure which shows the change rate of the display mode of active display in a modification. FIG. 7 is a diagram showing whether or not a branch destination suggestion performance is executed and the determination ratio of a performance pattern in a variable display of a variation pattern of super reach κ in a modified example. FIG. 7 is a diagram showing whether or not a chance-up effect is executed and the determination ratio of the effect pattern in a variable display of the variation pattern of super reach κ in a modified example. FIG. 7 is an explanatory diagram of the length of a revival performance in a modified example. It is a block diagram showing an example of a circuit configuration in an effect control board. FIG. 2 is an explanatory diagram showing a layer configuration. FIG. 7 is an explanatory diagram of generation of a displacement image when a displacement image is applied to a displacement target image. FIG. 7 is an explanatory diagram showing an example of application of a displacement image to a displacement target image. FIG. 2 is an explanatory diagram showing the contents of VRAM. (A) and (B) are diagrams illustrating production control commands. It is an explanatory diagram showing each random number. 2 is an explanatory diagram showing a display result determination table 1. FIG. (A) is a diagram showing a configuration example of a jackpot type determination table, and (B) is a diagram showing contents of various jackpots. FIG. 3 is a diagram illustrating a variation pattern. It is an explanatory diagram showing a variable display result, a fluctuation pattern, and a relationship. It is a flowchart showing an example of special symbol normal processing. 3 is a flowchart illustrating an example of a variation pattern setting process. It is a flowchart showing an example of special symbol stop processing. It is a flowchart showing an example of jackpot termination processing. It is a part of a flowchart which shows an example of production control process processing. It is a flowchart which shows an example of production processing during variable display. 3 is a flowchart illustrating an example of display image processing processing. FIG. 2 is an explanatory diagram showing a generated image and an area that can be displayed on an image display device. (A) is a diagram showing a display mode of decorative symbols in a normal state, and (B) is a diagram showing a display mode of decorative symbols in a time saving state. It is a figure which shows the production|presentation aspect of development suggestion production. It is a figure which shows the production|presentation aspect of development suggestion production. FIG. 3 is an explanatory diagram of an image generated in a development suggestion performance. It is a figure which shows the production|presentation aspect of the reach suggestion production in a modification. It is a figure which shows the production|presentation aspect of the reach suggestion production in a modification. It is an explanatory view of an image generated in a reach suggestion performance in a modified example. It is a figure which shows the performance mode of the revival performance in a modification. It is a figure which shows the performance mode of the revival performance in a modification. It is an explanatory view of an image generated in a revival performance in a modified example. FIG. 7 is a diagram showing the determination ratio of the display color of a crack effect image in a revival effect in a modified example. It is a figure which shows the performance aspect of the pre-read preview performance in a modification. FIG. 7 is an explanatory diagram of an image generated in a prefetch preview effect in a modified example. FIG. 12 is a diagram showing the determination ratio of the display color of the cutting effect image in the pre-read preview performance in a modified example. It is a figure which shows the change pattern of the display color of the cutting effect image in the pre-read preview performance in a modification. It is a figure which shows the performance aspect of the promotion performance in a modification. FIG. 7 is an explanatory diagram of an image generated in a promotion effect in a modified example. FIG. 7 is an explanatory diagram showing an image generated in a modification and an area that can be displayed on an image display device. It is a figure which shows the performance aspect of the promotion performance in a modification. It is a figure which shows the performance aspect of the promotion performance in a modification. It is a figure which shows the performance aspect of the temporary stop suggestion performance in a modification. It is a figure which shows the performance aspect of the temporary stop suggestion performance in a modification. It is a figure which shows the performance aspect of the temporary stop notification performance in a modification. FIG. 7 is an explanatory diagram of an image generated in a temporary stop suggestion effect and a temporary stop notification in a modified example. FIG. 7 is an explanatory diagram of displaying a stereoscopic image in a modified example. It is a figure which shows the performance mode of the preview performance during a variable display, and development suggestion performance in a modification. It is an explanatory view when the present invention is applied to a slot machine in a modified example.

(Basic explanation)
First, the basic configuration and control of the pachinko gaming machine 1 (also the configuration and control of a general pachinko gaming machine) will be explained.

(Configuration of pachinko machine 1, etc.)
FIG. 1 is a front view of a pachinko gaming machine 1, showing the layout of the main components. A pachinko game machine (game machine) 1 is roughly divided into a game board (gauge board) 2 that constitutes a game board surface, and a game machine frame (base frame) 3 that supports and fixes the game board 2. A game area is formed on the game board 2, and a game ball as a game medium is fired from a predetermined ball launcher into this game area.

Note that "variable display" of special symbols means, for example, displaying a plurality of types of special symbols in a variable manner (the same applies to other symbols described later). The variations include updated display of a plurality of symbols, scroll display of a plurality of symbols, deformation of one or more symbols, enlargement/reduction of one or more symbols, and the like. In the variation of special symbols and normal symbols described below, a plurality of types of special symbols or normal symbols are updated and displayed. In the variation of decorative patterns described below, a plurality of types of decorative patterns are scrolled or updated, or one or more decorative patterns are deformed or enlarged/reduced. Note that the variation also includes a mode in which a certain symbol is displayed blinking. At the end of the variable display, a predetermined special symbol is stopped and displayed (also referred to as derivation or derivation display) as a display result (the same applies to the variable display of other symbols described later). Note that the variable display may be expressed as a variable display or fluctuation.

The special symbol variably displayed on the first special symbol display device 4A is also referred to as a “first special symbol”, and the special symbol variably displayed on the second special symbol display device 4B is also referred to as a “second special symbol”. Further, a special map game using the first special map is also referred to as a "first special map game", and a special map game using the second special map is also referred to as a "second special map game". Note that there may be only one type of special symbol display device that performs variable display of special symbols.

An image display device 5 is provided near the center of the game area on the game board 2. The image display device 5 is composed of, for example, an LCD (liquid crystal display), an organic EL (electro luminescence), or the like, and displays various effect images. The image display device 5 may include a projector and a screen. The image display device 5 displays various effect images.

For example, on the screen of the image display device 5, in synchronization with the first special pattern game and the second special pattern game, decorative patterns (such as patterns showing numbers, etc.) as multiple types of decorative identification information different from the special pattern are displayed. A variable display is performed. Here, in synchronization with the first special figure game or the second special figure game, decorative figures are displayed variably (for example, up and down direction (scroll display and update display). In addition, the variable display of the special figure game and the decorative pattern which are executed synchronously is collectively referred to as simply variable display.

A display area may be provided on the screen of the image display device 5 for displaying a pending display corresponding to a variable display whose execution is pending, and an active display corresponding to a variable display currently being executed. The pending display and the active display are collectively referred to as a variable display compatible display corresponding to the variable display.

The number of pending variable displays is also called the number of pending memories. The number of pending memories corresponding to the first special figure game is also referred to as the first number of pending memories, and the number of pending memories corresponding to the second special figure game is also referred to as the second number of pending memories. The sum of the first number of pending memories and the second number of pending memories is also referred to as the total number of pending memories.

A first hold indicator 25A and a second hold indicator 25B each including a plurality of LEDs are provided at predetermined positions on the game board 2. The first hold display 25A displays the number of first hold memories based on the number of lit LEDs. The second hold display 25B displays the second hold storage number based on the number of lit LEDs.

A winning ball device 6A is provided below the image display device 5, and a variable winning ball device 6B is provided on the right side of the winning ball device 6A.

The winning ball device 6A forms a first starting winning hole that is always kept open to allow game balls to enter, for example, by a predetermined ball receiving member. When a game ball enters the first starting winning hole, a predetermined number (for example, three) of winning balls are paid out, and the first special symbol game can be started.

The variable prize winning ball device 6B (normal electric accessory) forms a second starting prize opening that changes between a closed state and an open state by a solenoid 81 (see FIG. 3). The variable prize winning ball device 6B includes, for example, an electric tulip-shaped accessory having a pair of movable wing pieces, and when the solenoid 81 is in the OFF state, the movable wing pieces are in a vertical position, so that the tips of the movable wing pieces are comes close to the winning ball device 6A, and enters a closed state in which the game ball does not enter the second starting winning opening (also referred to as the second starting winning opening enters a closed state). On the other hand, when the solenoid 81 is in the ON state, the movable wing pieces of the variable winning ball device 6B are in the tilted position, so that the variable winning ball device 6B enters an open state in which the game ball can enter the second starting winning hole (second starting winning ball). It is also said that the prize opening will be open.) When the game ball enters the second starting winning hole, a predetermined number (for example, three) of winning balls are paid out, and the second special symbol game can be started. The variable winning ball device 6B may be any device that can change between a closed state and an open state, and is not limited to one that includes an electric tulip type accessory.

At predetermined positions on the game board 2 (in the example shown in FIG. 1, three locations on the lower left side of the game area and one location above the variable winning ball device 6B), there are always kept in a constant open state by predetermined ball receiver members. A general prize opening 10 is provided. In this case, when entering any of the general winning holes 10, a predetermined number (for example, 10) of game balls are paid out as prize balls.

A special variable winning ball device 7 having a big winning hole is provided between the winning ball device 6A and the variable winning ball device 6B. The special variable winning ball device 7 is equipped with a big winning hole door that is driven to open and close by a solenoid 82 (see FIG. 3), and has a big winning hole as a specific area that changes between an open state and a closed state by the big winning hole door. Form.

As an example, in the special variable winning ball device 7, when the solenoid 82 for the big winning hole door (special electric accessory) is in the OFF state, the big winning hole door closes the big winning hole, and the game ball is You will not be able to enter (pass through) the prize opening. On the other hand, in the special variable winning ball device 7, when the solenoid 82 for the big winning hole door is in the on state, the big winning hole door opens the big winning hole so that the game ball can easily enter the big winning hole. Become.

When game balls enter the grand prize opening, a predetermined number (for example, 14) of game balls are paid out as prize balls. When the game ball enters the big winning hole, more prize balls are paid out than when the game ball enters the first starting winning hole, the second starting winning hole, and the general winning hole 10, for example.

Entering the game ball into each winning hole including the general winning hole 10 is also referred to as "winning". In particular, winning in the starting opening (first starting winning opening, second starting winning opening) is also referred to as starting winning.

A normal symbol display 20 is provided at a predetermined position on the game board 2 (in the example shown in FIG. 1, at the lower left of the game area). As an example, the normal symbol display 20 is composed of a 7-segment LED, etc., and performs variable display of normal symbols as multiple types of normal identification information different from special symbols. The normal symbols are represented by numbers indicating "0" to "9" and lighting patterns such as "-". The normal pattern may include a pattern in which all LEDs are turned off. This variable display of ordinary symbols is also called a ordinary symbol game.

A passage gate 41 through which game balls can pass is provided on the right side of the image display device 5. Based on the game ball passing through the passage gate 41, a common figure game is executed.

A normal symbol holding display 25C is provided below the normal symbol display 20. The Fuzu-zu pending display 25C is configured to include, for example, four LEDs, and displays the Fuzu-zu pending storage number, which is the number of Fuzu games whose execution is pending, by the number of lit LEDs.

In addition to the above structure, the surface of the game board 2 is provided with a windmill that changes the downward direction and speed of the game ball and a large number of obstacle nails. At the bottom of the gaming area, there is provided an out opening into which game balls that have not entered any of the winning openings are taken in.

At the left and right upper positions of the gaming machine frame 3, speakers 8L and 8R are provided for reproducing and outputting sound effects and the like. A main lamp 9a is provided above the image display device 5 in the gaming machine frame 3, and frame lamps 9b are provided on the left and right sides of the main lamp 9a so as to surround the gaming area. Furthermore, an attacker lamp 9c is provided at a position near the special variable winning ball device 7 on the game board 2.

A movable body 32 is provided at a predetermined position on the game board 2 (a position above the image display device 5 in FIG. 1) that operates according to the performance. Further, the movable body 32 is provided with a movable body lamp 9d. The movable lamp 9d, the main lamp 9a, the frame lamp 9b, and the attacker lamp 9c described above may be collectively referred to as a game effect lamp 9. Note that the main lamp 9a, frame lamp 9b, attacker lamp 9c, and movable lamp 9d include LEDs.

At the lower right position of the gaming machine frame 3, a ball-hitting operation handle (operation knob) 30 is provided which is operated by a player or the like in order to fire a game ball toward a gaming area using a ball-launching device.

At a predetermined position of the gaming machine frame 3 below the gaming area, game balls paid out as prize balls and game balls lent out by a predetermined ball rental machine are held (stored) so that they can be supplied to the batted ball firing device. ) is provided with a batted ball supply tray (upper tray). Incidentally, the gaming machine frame 3 may be provided with a payout section (hit ball supply tray) apart from the upper tray from which prize balls are paid out when the upper tray is full.

A stick controller 31A that can be held and tilted by a player is attached to a predetermined position of the gaming machine frame 3 below the gaming area. The stick controller 31A is provided with a trigger button that can be pressed down by the player. An operation on the stick controller 31A is detected by a controller sensor unit 35A (see FIG. 3).

At a predetermined position of the gaming machine frame 3 below the gaming area, a push button 31B is provided that allows the player to perform a predetermined instruction operation by pressing the button or the like. An operation on push button 31B is detected by push sensor 35B (see FIG. 3).

In the pachinko game machine 1, a stick controller 31A and a push button 31B are provided as detection means for detecting a player's movement (operation, etc.), but detection means other than these may be provided.

FIG. 2 is a rear perspective view of the pachinko gaming machine 1. A main board 11 housed in a board case 201 is mounted on the back of the pachinko game machine 1. The main board 11 is provided with a setting key 51 and a setting changeover switch 52. The setting key 51 functions as a lock switch for switching to a setting change state or a setting confirmation state. The setting changeover switch 52 functions as a setting switch for changing set values such as jackpot winning probability and ball payout rate in a setting change state. The setting key 51 and the setting changeover switch 52 may be attached to the outside of the main board 11, for example, at a predetermined position on the power supply board 17.

A display monitor 29 is arranged at the center of the back surface of the main board 11, and a display changeover switch 31 is arranged on the side of the display monitor 29. The display monitor 29 may be configured using, for example, a 7-segment LED display device. The display monitor 29 and the display changeover switch 31 are arranged in front of the main board 11 when the back side of the game board 2 is viewed with the gaming machine frame 3 open.

The display monitor 29 can display winning information such as consecutive ratios, winning ratios, and bases. The consecutive ratio is the ratio of the number of prize balls that land in the big prize opening (attacker) out of the total number of prize balls. The winning ratio is the ratio of the number of prize balls that land in the second starting prize opening (electronic chew) and the number of prize balls that land in the grand prize opening (attacker) out of the total number of prize balls. The base is the ratio of the total number of prize balls to the number of game balls launched. When in the setting change state or setting confirmation state, the display monitor 29 can display the setting values in the pachinko gaming machine 1. The display monitor 29 only needs to be capable of displaying setting values to be changed or checked when the settings are changed or checked.

The setting key 51 and the setting changeover switch 52 cannot be operated from the front side of the pachinko gaming machine 1 when the gaming machine frame 3 is in a closed state. The gaming machine frame 3 is rotatably provided with a glass door frame 3a having a glass window, and the gaming area can be opened and closed by the glass door frame 3a. When the glass door frame 3a is closed, the game area can be seen through the glass window.

In the pachinko gaming machine 1, a security cover 50A is attached to the right end portion of the outer frame 1a formed in the shape of a vertically long rectangular frame. The security cover 50A covers the right side of the board case 201 including the setting key 51 and the setting changeover switch 52 from the back side when the gaming machine frame 3 is closed. The security cover 50A is a substantially L-shaped member including a short piece 50Aa and a long piece 50Ab, and may be made of transparent synthetic resin.

(Summary of game progress)
When a player rotates a ball-hitting operation handle 30 provided in the pachinko game machine 1, a game ball is launched toward a game area. When the game ball passes through the passage gate 41, the normal pattern display 20 starts the normal pattern game. In addition, if the game ball passes through the passage gate 41 during the period during which the previous Fuzu game was being executed (the game ball passed through the passage gate 41, but the Fuzu game based on the passage cannot be executed immediately), , the game based on the passage is suspended up to a predetermined upper limit (for example, 4).

In this general pattern game, if a specific normal pattern (a pattern per normal pattern) is stopped and displayed, the display result of the normal pattern becomes ``a common pattern hit''. On the other hand, if a normal symbol other than the ordinary symbol (ordinary symbol missed symbol) is stopped and displayed as a confirmed ordinary symbol, the display result of the ordinary symbol becomes "ordinary symbol missed". When it becomes a "normal map hit", opening control is performed to keep the variable winning ball device 6B open for a predetermined period of time (the second starting winning opening is brought into the open state).

When the game ball enters the first starting winning hole formed in the winning ball device 6A, the first special symbol game by the first special symbol display device 4A is started.

When a game ball enters the second starting winning hole formed in the variable winning ball device 6B, a second special symbol game by the second special symbol display device 4B is started.

In addition, if the game ball enters the starting winning hole (winning) during the period when the special drawing game is being executed or during the period when the jackpot game state described below is being controlled (a starting winning has occurred, but the starting winning is based on the starting winning). If the special figure game cannot be executed immediately), the execution of the special figure game based on the entry is suspended until a predetermined upper limit number (for example, 4).

In the special pattern game, if a specific special pattern (a jackpot pattern, e.g. "7", the actual pattern differs depending on the jackpot type described later) is stopped and displayed as a confirmed special pattern, it becomes a "jackpot" and the jackpot pattern If a special symbol (missing symbol, for example "-") different from the above is stopped and displayed, it becomes a "missing" symbol. It should be noted that the "loss" in this pachinko game machine 1 includes the "loss with time saving" which is controlled from the next variable display to a high base state (time saving state) without going through the jackpot game.

After the display result in the special figure game becomes a "jackpot", the game is controlled to be in a jackpot game state as an advantageous state for the player.

In the jackpot game state, the jackpot formed by the special variable winning ball device 7 is opened in a predetermined manner. The open state is determined by the timing when a predetermined period of time (for example, 29 seconds or 1.8 seconds) elapses, or the timing until the number of game balls that enter the grand prize opening reaches a predetermined number (for example, 9 balls). This will continue until the earliest of the two. The predetermined period is the upper limit period during which the big prize opening can be opened in one round, and hereinafter also referred to as the upper limit opening period. One cycle in which the big prize opening is opened in this way is called a round (round game). In the jackpot game state, the round can be repeated until it reaches a predetermined upper limit number of times (15 or 2 times).

In the jackpot game state, the player can receive a prize ball by entering the game ball into the jackpot opening. Therefore, the jackpot gaming state is an advantageous state for the player. The greater the number of rounds in the jackpot gaming state and the longer the open upper limit period, the more advantageous it is for the player.

In addition, the jackpot type is set in "Jackpot". For example, we prepare multiple types of opening modes for the jackpot (number of rounds and maximum opening period) and gaming states after the jackpot gaming state (normal state, time-saving state, variable probability state, etc.), and set the jackpot type accordingly. has been done. As the jackpot types, there may be provided a jackpot type in which many prize balls can be obtained, a jackpot type in which few prize balls can be obtained, or a jackpot type in which few prize balls can be obtained.

After the jackpot gaming state ends, depending on the above-mentioned jackpot type, it may be controlled to a time saving state or a variable probability state.

In the time-saving state, control (time-saving control) is executed to shorten the average special symbol variation time (period for varying the special symbol) compared to the normal state. In the short time state, by shortening the average fluctuation time (period for changing the general pattern) than in the normal state, and by increasing the probability of hitting the normal pattern in the general drawing game compared to the normal state, etc. Control (high opening control, high base control) that makes it easier for game balls to enter the second starting prize opening is also executed. The time saving state is a state in which the variation efficiency of the special symbols (especially the second special symbol) is improved, so it is an advantageous state for the player.

In the variable probability state (probability variable state), in addition to the time saving control, variable probability control is executed in which the probability that the displayed result is a "jackpot" is higher than in the normal state. The variable probability state is a state that is more advantageous to the player because it improves the efficiency of changing the special symbols and is also a state where it is easy to hit the jackpot.

The time saving state and the variable probability state continue until any one of the end conditions is met first, such as the execution of the special figure game a predetermined number of times and the start of the next jackpot game state. A condition where the termination condition is that the special figure game has been executed a predetermined number of times is also called number-cutting (number-cutting time reduction, number-cutting probability variable, etc.).

A normal state is a gaming state other than a special state such as an advantageous state such as a jackpot game state that is advantageous to the player, a time saving state, or a variable probability state, and the display result in the Fuzu game is "Fuzu hit". The pachinko game machine 1, such as the probability and the probability that the display result in the special figure game will be a "jackpot", is set to the initial setting state of the pachinko game machine 1 (for example, when a system reset is performed, a predetermined return after the power is turned on). This state is controlled in the same way as when no processing is executed).

A state in which variable probability control is being executed is also referred to as a high probability state, and a state in which variable probability control is not executed is also referred to as a low probability state. A state in which time saving control is being executed is also referred to as a high base state, and a state in which time saving control is not being executed is also referred to as a low base state. Combining these, the time-saving state is also called a low-probability high-base state, the variable-probability state is a high-probability high-base state, and the normal state is called a low-probability low-base state. The high certainty state and low base state is also referred to as the high certainty low base state.

Note that the gaming state may change based on the fact that the game ball has passed through a specific area (for example, a specific area within the big winning opening) during the jackpot gaming state. For example, when the game ball passes through a specific area, the control may be changed to a variable probability state after the jackpot game state.
(Progress of production, etc.)

In the pachinko game machine 1, various effects (effects for notifying the progress of the game or for enlivening the game) are executed according to the progress of the game. The performance will be explained below. The effect is performed by displaying various effect images on the image display device 5, but in addition to or in place of the display, audio output from the speakers 8L and 8R and the game effect lamp 9 are performed. It may be performed as an effect using lighting or extinguishing of the lights, movement of the movable body 32, or any effect device including some or all of these.

As a performance executed according to the progress of the game, the "left", "middle", "right" decorative pattern display areas 5L, 5C, and 5R provided on the image display device 5 display the first special pattern game or the first special pattern display area 5L, 5C, and 5R. 2. Corresponding to the start of the special figure game, variable display of decorative symbols is started. At the timing when the display result (also referred to as a fixed special pattern) is stopped and displayed in the first special pattern game or the second special pattern game, the fixed decorative pattern (a combination of three decorative patterns) that is the display result of the variable display of the decorative pattern ) is also stopped and displayed (derived).

During the period from when the variable display of the decorative symbols starts until it ends, the mode of the variable display of the decorative symbols may become a predetermined reach mode (reach is established). Here, the reach mode refers to the variable display of decorative symbols that are not yet displayed while the decorative symbols that are stopped and displayed on the screen of the image display device 5 form part of a jackpot combination that will be described later. This refers to the manner in which the situation continues.

Furthermore, a ready-to-win effect is executed in response to the above-mentioned ready-to-win mode being set during the variable display of the decorative symbols. In the pachinko gaming machine 1, the percentage of display results (display results of special pattern games and display results of variable display of decorative symbols) becoming a "jackpot" (also referred to as jackpot reliability or jackpot expectation level) is determined depending on the performance mode. A plurality of different types of reach effects are executed. The reach performance includes, for example, normal reach and super reach, which has higher jackpot reliability than normal reach.

When the display result of the special figure game becomes a "jackpot", a fixed decorative pattern that becomes a predetermined jackpot combination is derived as a display result of the variable display of decorative patterns on the screen of the image display device 5 (decorative pattern). The display result of the variable display of symbols is a "jackpot"). As an example, the same decorative symbols (for example, "7", etc.) are all stopped and displayed on predetermined valid lines in the "left", "middle", and "right" decorative symbol display areas 5L, 5C, and 5R. .

In the case of a "probable variable jackpot" that is controlled to a variable probability state after the end of the jackpot gaming state, odd-numbered decorative symbols (for example, "7", etc.) are stopped and displayed, and the variable probability state is changed after the jackpot gaming state ends. In the case of an uncontrolled "uncertain variable jackpot (normal jackpot)", even-numbered decorative symbols (for example, "6", etc.) may be stopped and displayed all together. In this case, the odd-numbered decorative patterns are also referred to as variable probability patterns, and the even-numbered decorative patterns are also referred to as non-probable variable patterns (normal patterns). After reaching the reach mode with non-probability variable symbols, a promotion performance that ultimately becomes a "probability variable jackpot" may be executed.

When the display result of the special pattern game is "miss", the mode of variable display of the decorative pattern does not become the reach mode, and the display result of the variable display of the decorative pattern is a fixed decorative pattern (" ) may be stopped and displayed (the display result of the variable display of the decorative pattern may be "non-reach out"). In addition, if the display result is "miss", after the variable display mode of the decorative pattern becomes the reach mode, the display result of the variable display of the decorative pattern is a predetermined reach combination that is not a jackpot combination ("reach is off"). '') may be displayed in a stopped state (the display result of the variable display of the decorative pattern may be "out of reach").

The performances that can be performed by the pachinko gaming machine 1 also include displaying the above-mentioned variable display compatible display (pending display and active display). In addition, as other effects, for example, a preview effect that foretells the reliability of the jackpot is executed during the variable display of the decorative symbols. The preview performance includes a preview performance that foretells the reliability of a jackpot in a variable display that is currently being executed, and a preview performance that foretells the reliability of a jackpot in a variable display before execution (a variable display whose execution is pending). As the pre-read preview performance, a performance that changes the display mode of the variable display compatible display (suspended display or active display) to a different mode than usual may be performed.

In addition, in the image display device 5, by temporarily stopping the decorative pattern during the variable display of the decorative pattern and then restarting the variable display, one variable display can be made to appear pseudo as multiple variable displays. A pseudo-continuous performance may also be executed.

Even during the jackpot game state, a jackpot performance for notifying the jackpot game state is executed. As the jackpot performance, a performance that notifies the number of rounds or a promotion performance that indicates that the value of the jackpot game state is improved may be executed.

Further, for example, when a special figure game or the like is not being executed, a demonstration image is displayed on the image display device 5 (a customer waiting demonstration effect is executed).

(Substrate configuration)
The pachinko game machine 1 is equipped with a main board 11, an effect control board 12, an audio control board 13, a lamp control board 14, a relay board 15, etc. as shown in FIG. 3, for example. In addition, various boards such as a payout control board, an information terminal board, a firing control board, etc. are arranged on the back of the pachinko game machine 1. Furthermore, a power supply board 17 is also mounted. Various control boards are not only electronic circuit boards such as printed wiring boards with conductor patterns on which electrical components can be mounted, but also electronic circuit boards that are configured to have electrical components mounted on them to achieve specific electrical functions. This concept includes electronic circuit mounting boards.

A power switch 91 is connected to the power supply board 17, and by operating the power switch 91 (turning it on), power from an AC power source such as AC 100V in an external power supply such as a commercial power supply is transferred to the power supply board 17. It can be supplied to electrical components including various control boards such as the main board 11 and the production control board 12. The power supply board 17 includes, for example, a rectifier circuit for converting alternating current (AC) into direct current (DC), a power supply circuit for converting a predetermined direct current voltage into a specific direct current voltage (for example, 12 V direct current, 5 V direct current, etc.), etc. We are prepared.

The main board 11 is a control board on the main side, and includes the progress of the above-mentioned games in the pachinko gaming machine 1 (execution of the special drawing game (including management of reservations), execution of the general drawing game (including management of reservations), jackpot, etc. It has a function to control the gaming state, gaming state, etc.). The main board 11 includes a game control microcomputer 100, a switch circuit 110, a solenoid circuit 111, and the like.

The game control microcomputer 100 mounted on the main board 11 is, for example, a one-chip microcomputer, and includes a ROM (Read Only Memory) 101, a RAM (Random Access Memory) 102, and a CPU (Central Processing Unit) 103. , a random number circuit 104, and an I/O (Input/Output port) 105.

The CPU 103 performs processing for controlling the progress of the game (processing for realizing the functions of the main board 11) by executing a program stored in the ROM 101. At this time, various data stored in the ROM 101 (variation patterns described later, production control commands described later, data such as various tables referred to when making various decisions described later) are used, and the RAM 102 is used as the main memory. . The RAM 102 serves as a backup RAM in which the stored contents are saved for a predetermined period even if the power supply to the pachinko gaming machine 1 is stopped, in part or in whole. Note that all or part of the program stored in the ROM 101 may be loaded into the RAM 102 and executed on the RAM 102.

The random number circuit 104 updatesably counts numerical data indicating various random numbers (gaming random numbers) used when controlling the progress of the game. The gaming random number may be updated by the CPU 103 executing a predetermined computer program (updated by software).

The I/O 105 includes, for example, an input port into which various signals (detection signals to be described later) are input, and various signals (first special symbol display device 4A, second special symbol display device 4B, normal symbol display device 20, first pending). It is configured to include an output port for transmitting a signal for controlling (driving) the display 25A, the second hold display 25B, the ordinary card hold display 25C, etc., and a solenoid drive signal.

The switch circuit 110 receives detection signals (when a game ball passes or A detection signal indicating that the switch has entered and the switch has been turned on) is taken in and transmitted to the game control microcomputer 100. The transmission of the detection signal means that the passage or entry of the game ball has been detected.

A reset signal, a power-off signal, and a clear signal from the power supply board 17 are taken into the switch circuit 110 and transmitted to the game control microcomputer 100. The reset signal is an operation stop signal for stopping the operation of a control circuit such as the game control microcomputer 100, and can be output using either a power supply monitoring circuit, a watchdog timer built-in IC, or a system reset IC. Good to have. The power-off signal becomes an OFF state when a predetermined power supply voltage used in the pachinko game machine 1 exceeds a predetermined value, and becomes an ON state when a period in which the predetermined power supply voltage is below a predetermined value continues for a power-off reference time or longer. Become. The clear signal is turned on, for example, when a clear switch 92 provided on the power supply board 17 is pressed.

The solenoid circuit 111 sends a solenoid drive signal (for example, a signal to turn on the solenoid 81 and the solenoid 82) from the game control microcomputer 100 to the solenoid 81 for the normal electric accessory and the solenoid 82 for the big prize opening door. Transmit.

A display monitor 29, a display changeover switch 31, a setting key 51, a setting changeover switch 52, and a door open sensor 90 are connected to the main board 11. The door opening sensor 90 detects opening of the gaming machine frame 3 including the glass door frame 3a.

The main board 11 (game control microcomputer 100) is a production control board that sends production control commands (commands that specify (notify) the progress of the game, etc.) according to the progress of the game as part of the control of the progress of the game. Supply to 12. The production control command output from the main board 11 is relayed by the relay board 15 and supplied to the production control board 12. The performance control command includes, for example, various decision results on the main board 11 (for example, display results of the special figure game (including jackpot type), fluctuation patterns used when executing the special figure game (details will be described later), etc. )), game status (for example, start and end of variable display, opening status of big prize opening, occurrence of winnings, number of pending memories, game status), occurrence of errors, etc. are included.

The production control board 12 is a sub-side control board independent of the main board 11, and receives production control commands and performs production (various productions according to the progress of the game) based on the received production control commands. It has a function of executing various notifications (including various notifications such as driving the movable body 32, notification of errors, notification of power outage recovery, etc.).

The performance control board 12 is equipped with a performance control CPU 120, a ROM 121, a RAM 122, a display control section 123, a random number circuit 124, and an I/O 125.

The production control CPU 120 executes a program stored in the ROM 121 to perform processing together with the display control unit 123 to execute the production (processing for realizing the above-mentioned functions of the production control board 12; (including decisions, etc.). At this time, various data (data such as various tables) stored in the ROM 121 are used, and the RAM 122 is used as the main memory.

The performance control CPU 120 displays execution of the performance based on detection signals from the controller sensor unit 35A and the push sensor 35B (a signal that is output when an operation by a player is detected, and a signal that appropriately indicates the operation content). The control unit 123 may also be instructed.

The display control unit 123 includes a VDP (Video Display Processor), a CGROM (Character Generator ROM), a VRAM (Video RAM), etc., and executes a performance based on a performance execution instruction from the performance control CPU 120.

The display control unit 123 causes the image display device 5 to display a performance image by supplying a video signal corresponding to the performance to be executed to the image display device 5 based on a performance execution instruction from the performance control CPU 120. The display control unit 123 further supplies a sound designation signal (a signal that designates the sound to be output) to the sound control board 13 in order to output sound in synchronization with the display of the effect images and turn on/off the game effect lamps 9. or supplies a lamp signal (a signal specifying the lighting/extinguishing mode of the lamp) to the lamp control board 14. Further, the display control unit 123 supplies a signal for operating the movable body 32 to the movable body 32 or a drive circuit that drives the movable body 32.

The audio control board 13 is equipped with various circuits that drive the speakers 8L and 8R, and drives the speakers 8L and 8R based on the sound designation signal, and outputs the sound specified by the sound designation signal from the speakers 8L and 8R. let

The lamp control board 14 is equipped with various circuits that drive the game effect lamps 9, drives the game effect lamps 9 based on the lamp signals, and turns on/off the game effect lamps 9 in a manner specified by the lamp signals. do. In this way, the display control unit 123 controls the audio output and the lighting/extinguishing of the lamp.

Note that the production control CPU 120 executes audio output, control of lamp lighting/extinguishing (supply of sound designation signals and lamp signals, etc.), and control of the movable body 32 (supply of signals for operating the movable body 32, etc.). You can do it like this.

The random number circuit 124 updatesably counts numerical data indicating various random numbers (random numbers for effects) used to execute various effects. The random number for presentation may be updated by the presentation control CPU 120 executing a predetermined computer program (updated by software).

The I/O 125 mounted on the production control board 12 is an input port for receiving production control commands transmitted from the main board 11, for example, and for transmitting various signals (video signal, sound designation signal, lamp signal). It consists of an output port and an output port.

Boards other than the main board 11, such as the production control board 12, the audio control board 13, and the lamp control board 14, are also referred to as subboards. A plurality of sub-boards may be provided for each function as in the pachinko gaming machine 1, or one sub-board may be configured to have a plurality of functions.

(motion)
Next, the operation (function) of the pachinko gaming machine 1 will be explained.

(Main operations of main board 11)
First, the main operations of the main board 11 will be explained. When power supply to the pachinko game machine 1 is started, the game control microcomputer 100 is activated, and the CPU 103 executes game control main processing. FIG. 4 is a flowchart showing the game control main processing executed by the CPU 103 on the main board 11.

In the game control main process shown in FIG. 4, the CPU 103 first sets interrupts to be prohibited (step S1). Next, necessary initial settings are performed (step S2). The initial settings include stack pointer settings, register settings for built-in devices (CTC (counter/timer circuit), parallel input/output ports, etc.), settings to make the RAM 102 accessible, and the like.

Next, it is determined whether the recovery conditions are satisfied (step S3). The recovery condition can be satisfied when the clear signal is off, there is backup data, and the backup RAM is normal. If, for example, a clear switch provided on the power supply board 17 is pressed when power supply to the pachinko game machine 1 is started, an on-state clear signal is input to the game control microcomputer 100. If such an on-state clear signal is input, it may be determined in step S3 that the recovery condition is not satisfied. It is sufficient that the backup data can be stored in the RAM 102, which serves as a backup RAM for game control. In step S3, the presence or absence of backup data, the presence or absence of data errors, etc. may be confirmed or inspected to determine whether the recovery conditions can be met.

If the recovery condition is satisfied (step S3; Yes), the setting confirmation process (step S5) is executed after executing the recovery process (step S4). Through the recovery process in step S4, a work area is set based on the contents stored in the RAM 102. By setting the work area using the backup data stored in the RAM 102, the gaming state can be restored to the state it was in when the power supply stopped. For example, if the special symbols are changing, the special symbol can be changed from the state before the stoppage. It is sufficient if the fluctuation of the symbols can be resumed.

If the recovery condition is not satisfied (step S3; No), initialization processing (step S6) is performed, and then setting change processing (step S7) is performed. The initialization process in step S6 includes a clear process for clearing the flags, counters, and buffers stored in the RAM 102, and initial values are set in the work area by executing the clear process.

In the setting confirmation process of step S5, it is determined whether predetermined setting confirmation conditions are satisfied. The setting confirmation condition is satisfied, for example, when the detection signal from the door open sensor 90 is on and the setting key 51 is turned on when power supply is started. The setting confirmation process in step S5 is executed when the recovery conditions including that the clear signal is in the OFF state are satisfied in step S3. Therefore, since the setting confirmation condition can be satisfied only when the clear signal is in the OFF state, the fact that the clear signal is in the OFF state can also be included in the setting confirmation condition.

If the setting confirmation conditions are satisfied in the setting confirmation process in step S5, the setting confirmation state is reached in which the setting values set in the pachinko gaming machine 1 can be confirmed, and the settings are changed from the main board 11 to the performance control board 12. A confirmation start command is sent. In the setting confirmation state, the setting values set in the pachinko gaming machine 1 can be confirmed by the display on the display monitor 29. When ending the setting confirmation state, a setting confirmation end command is transmitted from the main board 11 to the production control board 12.

When the pachinko game machine 1 is in the setting confirmation state, it may be in a game stop state in which the progress of the game in the pachinko game machine 1 is stopped. When the game is in the stopped state, firing of game balls by operating the batting operation handle, detection of game balls by various switches, etc. are stopped, and the first special symbol display device 4A, second special symbol display device 4B, and normal symbols are stopped. The display 20 may be controlled to stop displaying losing symbols or the like, or to display a display corresponding to a game stop state different from losing symbols. When the setting confirmation state ends, the accompanying game stop state may also end.

In the setting change process of step S7, it is determined whether predetermined setting change conditions are satisfied. The setting change condition is satisfied, for example, when the detection signal from the door open sensor 90 is on and the setting key 51 is turned on when power supply is started. The setting change condition may include that the clear signal is in the on state.

If the setting change conditions are satisfied in the setting change process in step S7, the setting change state is entered in which the setting values set in the pachinko gaming machine 1 can be changed, and the settings are changed from the main board 11 to the performance control board 12. A start change command is sent. In the setting change state, the setting value is displayed on the display monitor 29, and the numerical value displayed on the display monitor 29 is sequentially updated and displayed every time an operation of the setting changeover switch 52 is detected. Thereafter, based on the setting key 51 being turned off by an operation by an attendant at the game parlor, etc., the setting value displayed on the display monitor 29 is stored (updated storage) in the backup area of the RAM 102, and the setting value displayed on the display monitor 29 is stored (updated storage). Turn off the light. When ending the setting change state, a setting change end command is transmitted from the main board 11 to the production control board 12.

When the pachinko game machine 1 is in the setting change state, the pachinko game machine 1 may be placed in the game stop state, similar to when it is in the setting confirmation state. When the setting change state ends, the accompanying game stop state may also end.

On the production control board 12 side, when receiving the setting confirmation start command or the setting change start command, control may be performed to notify that the settings are being confirmed or that the settings are being changed. For example, a predetermined image may be displayed on the image display device 5, a predetermined sound may be output from the speakers 8L and 8R, or a light emitting member such as a game effect lamp 9 may be caused to emit light in a predetermined manner.

The clear signal is turned on, for example, by pressing down a clear switch provided on the power supply board 17. Therefore, when the power supply is started, if the detection signal from the door open sensor 90 is on and the setting key 51 is on, then if the clear switch is on, the initialization process of step S6 and step The setting change process in S7 is executed to enable control to the setting change state, and if the clear switch is off, the recovery process in step S4 and the setting confirmation process in step S5 are executed to enable control to the setting confirmation state. When power supply is started, if the detection signal from the door open sensor 90 is off or the setting key 51 is off, the initialization process of step S6 is executed if the clear switch is on. However, if the clear switch is off, the recovery process in step S4 is executed, but the setting confirmation state is not controlled.

After executing the setting confirmation process or the setting change process, the CPU 103 executes a random number circuit setting process to initialize the random number circuit 104 (step S8). Then, the register of the CTC built in the game control microcomputer 100 is set so that a timer interrupt is periodically generated every predetermined time (for example, 2 ms) (step S9), and the interrupt is permitted (step S10). ). After that, loop processing begins. Thereafter, an interrupt request signal is sent from the CTC to the CPU 103 at predetermined intervals (for example, 2 ms), and the CPU 103 can periodically execute timer interrupt processing.

When the CPU 103 that has executed such game control main processing receives the interrupt request signal from the CTC and accepts the interrupt request, it executes the game control timer interrupt process shown in the flowchart of FIG. When starting the game control timer interrupt process shown in FIG. It is determined whether detection signals are received from various switches such as the switch 22B and the count switch 23 (step S21). Next, by executing a predetermined main-side error process, the pachinko gaming machine 1 is diagnosed for abnormality, and a warning can be issued if necessary according to the diagnosis result (step S22). Thereafter, by executing a predetermined information output process, for example, jackpot information (information indicating the number of jackpot occurrences, etc.) and starting information (starting Data such as information indicating the number of winnings, etc.) and probability fluctuation information (information indicating the number of times the probability variable state has been reached, etc.) are output (step S23).

Following the information output process, a gaming random number updating process is executed to update at least a part of the gaming random numbers used on the main board 11 side by software (step S24). After this, the CPU 103 executes special symbol process processing (step S25). The CPU 103 executes special symbol process processing for each timer interrupt, thereby realizing management of execution and suspension of the special symbol game, control of the jackpot game state, control of the game state, and the like.

Following the special symbol process, the normal symbol process is executed (step S26). The CPU 103 executes the normal pattern process processing for each timer interrupt, thereby managing execution and suspension of the normal pattern game based on the detection signal from the gate switch 21 (based on the passing of the game ball to the passing gate 41), This makes it possible to control the opening of the variable winning ball device 6B based on the "normal map hit". The normal pattern game is executed by driving the normal pattern display 20, and the number of normal patterns pending is displayed by lighting the normal pattern pending display 25C.

After executing the normal symbol process processing, processing when a power outage occurs, processing for paying out prize balls, etc. may be performed as part of the game control timer interrupt processing. After that, the CPU 103 executes command control processing (step S27). The CPU 103 may set transmission control commands in each of the above processes. In the command control process of step S27, a process is performed in which the effect control command set for transmission is transmitted to a sub-side control board such as the effect control board 12. After executing the command control process, interrupts are permitted, and then the game control timer interrupt process is ended.

FIG. 6 is a flowchart showing an example of the process executed in step S25 shown in FIG. 5 as the special symbol process process. In this special symbol process, the CPU 103 first executes a starting winning determination process (step S101).

In the starting winning determination process, a process is executed to detect the occurrence of a starting winning, store pending information in a predetermined area of the RAM 102, and update the pending storage number. When a starting prize occurs, a random number value for determining the display result (including the type of jackpot) and fluctuation pattern is extracted and stored as pending information. Furthermore, processing for pre-reading and determining display results and fluctuation patterns may be performed based on the extracted random number values. After storing the pending information and the number of pending memories, transmission settings are made to the production control board 12 to send a production control command for specifying the occurrence of a starting prize, the number of pending memories, and judgment results such as pre-reading judgment. be exposed. The performance control command at the time of start winning that is set to be transmitted is transferred from the main board 11 to the performance control board 12 by, for example, executing the command control process in step S27 shown in FIG. 4 after the special symbol process process is completed. transmitted to.

After executing the starting winning determination process in step S101, the CPU 103 selects and executes any of the processes in steps S110 to S120 according to the value of the special symbol process flag provided in the RAM 102. In addition, in each process (steps S110 to S120) of the special symbol process process, transmission settings are made to transmit the performance control command corresponding to each process to the performance control board 12.

The special symbol normal process in step S110 is executed when the value of the special symbol process flag is "0" (initial value). In this special symbol normal processing, it is determined whether or not to start the first special symbol game or the second special symbol game based on the presence or absence of reservation information. In addition, in the special symbol normal processing, based on the random number value for determining the display result, the display result determines whether or not the display result of the special symbol or decorative symbol is a "jackpot" and if it is a "jackpot", the jackpot type. is determined (predetermined) before it is derived and displayed. Further, in the special symbol normal processing, a confirmed special symbol (either a jackpot symbol or a losing symbol) to be stopped and displayed in the special symbol game is set in accordance with the determined display result. After that, the value of the special symbol process flag is updated to "1", and the special symbol normal processing ends. Note that the special pattern game using the second special pattern may be executed with priority over the special pattern game using the first special pattern (also referred to as special pattern 2 priority consumption). Further, the winning order of the game balls in the first starting winning hole and the second starting winning hole may be stored, and the starting conditions for the special figure game may be established in the winning order (also referred to as winning order completion).

When making various decisions based on random numbers, various tables (tables in which decision values to be compared with random numbers are assigned to decision results) stored in the ROM 101 are referred to. The same applies to other decisions on the main board 11 and various decisions on the production control board 12. In the production control board 12, various tables are stored in the ROM 121.

The variation pattern setting process in step S111 is executed when the value of the special figure process flag is "1". This fluctuation pattern setting process includes a process of determining one of multiple types of fluctuation patterns using a random value for determining the fluctuation pattern, based on the pre-determined result of whether or not the display result is a "jackpot". It is included. In the variation pattern setting process, when the variation pattern is determined, the value of the special figure process flag is updated to "2", and the variation pattern setting process ends.

The variation pattern includes the execution time of the special figure game (special figure variation time) (also the execution time of the variable display of decorative symbols), the variable display mode of the ornamental symbols (the presence or absence of reach, etc.), and the variable display period of the decorative symbols. It specifies the content of the performance (type of reach performance, etc.), and is also called a variable display pattern.

The special symbol variation process in step S112 is executed when the value of the special symbol process flag is "2". This special symbol variation process includes a process of making settings for varying the special symbol in the first special symbol display device 4A and second special symbol display device 4B, and the elapsed time since the special symbol started to fluctuate. It includes processes such as measuring. It is also determined whether the measured elapsed time has reached the special figure fluctuation time corresponding to the fluctuation pattern. Then, when the elapsed time after starting the variation of the special symbol reaches the special symbol variation time, the value of the special symbol process flag is updated to "3" and the special symbol variation process ends.

The special symbol stop process in step S113 is executed when the value of the special symbol process flag is "3". In this special symbol stopping process, the fluctuation of the special symbol is stopped in the first special symbol display device 4A and the second special symbol display device 4B, and the finalized special symbol that becomes the display result of the special symbol is stopped and displayed (derived). Contains processing to configure settings for Then, when the display result is a "jackpot", the value of the special figure process flag is updated to "4". When the display result is "lost", the game state is also updated when the time saving state or the variable probability state is controlled, and when the end of the number cut is established. When the value of the special symbol process flag is updated, the special symbol stop processing ends.

The jackpot opening preprocessing in step S114 is executed when the value of the special figure process flag is "4". This jackpot opening pre-processing includes processing to start a round in the jackpot game state and set the jackpot opening state based on the display result being a "jackpot", etc. It is. When the big winning opening is opened, a process is executed to supply a solenoid drive signal to the solenoid 82 for the big winning opening door. At this time, for example, depending on the jackpot type, the opening upper limit period for keeping the jackpot open and the upper limit number of rounds to be executed are set. When these settings are completed, the value of the special figure process flag is updated to "5", and the jackpot release preprocessing is completed.

The jackpot opening process in step S115 is executed when the value of the special figure process flag is "5". This jackpot opening process includes a process of measuring the elapsed time since the jackpot opening is opened, and a process of measuring the elapsed time from when the jackpot opening is opened, and based on the measured elapsed time and the number of game balls detected by the count switch 23, the jackpot opening This includes processing for determining whether it is time to return the switch from an open state to a closed state. Then, when returning the big prize opening to the closed state, after executing a process such as stopping the supply of the solenoid drive signal to the solenoid 82 for the big winning opening door, the value of the special figure process flag is updated to "6", The jackpot opening process ends.

The jackpot opening process in step S116 is executed when the value of the special figure process flag is "6". This jackpot opening process includes a process to determine whether the number of rounds to open the jackpot has reached the set upper limit number of runs, and a process to enter the jackpot game state when the upper limit number of runs has been reached. This includes processing to make settings for terminating the process. When the number of executions of the round has not reached the upper limit number of executions, the value of the special figure process flag is updated to "5", while when the number of executions of the round has reached the upper limit number of executions, the value of the special figure process flag is updated to "5". The value is updated to "7". When the value of the special figure process flag is updated, the jackpot release post-processing ends.

The jackpot end process in step S117 is executed when the value of the special figure process flag is "7". This jackpot ending process includes a process of waiting until the waiting time corresponding to the period in which the ending performance is executed as a performance operation to notify the end of the jackpot gaming state, and a process of waiting until the waiting time corresponding to the end of the jackpot gaming state has changed. It includes processing to perform various settings for starting control and time-saving control. When such settings are made, the value of the special figure process flag is updated to "0", and the jackpot ending process ends.

The pachinko game machine 1 is configured such that the jackpot winning probability and ball payout rate change depending on the set value. For example, in the special symbol normal processing of the special symbol process processing, by using a display result determination table (winning probability) according to the set value, the jackpot winning probability and ball payout rate are changed. For example, the set value has six levels from 1 to 6, where 6 has the highest probability of winning the jackpot, and as the value decreases in the order of 6, 5, 4, 3, 2, and 1, the probability of winning the jackpot decreases. In this example, when 6 is set as the setting value, it is the highest advantage for the player, and as the value decreases in the order of 6, 5, 4, 3, 2, and 1, the advantage gradually decreases. . If the probability of winning the jackpot changes according to the set value, the ball payout rate may also change according to the set value. While the probability of winning a jackpot is constant regardless of the set value, the number of rounds in the jackpot game state may vary depending on the set value. The pachinko gaming machine 1 may be configured to be able to set any one of a plurality of setting values that have different degrees of advantage for the player. The setting values set in the pachinko gaming machine 1 are notified by transmitting a setting value designation command from the main board 11 side to the performance control board 12 side.

FIG. 7 shows an example of the configuration of the display result determination table. FIG. 7(A) shows a configuration example of the display result determination table for the first special symbol used when the variable special symbol is the first special symbol, and FIG. 7(B) shows a configuration example of the display result determination table for the first special symbol used when the variable special symbol is the second A configuration example of a second special figure display result determination table used in the case of a figure is shown. The display result determination table is a collection of data stored in the ROM 101. In the display result determination table, the hit determination value compared with the random value MR1 is assigned to the special symbol display result, which is a variable display result of the special symbol, according to the set value. The random number value MR1 is a random number value for determining the display result, and the value is randomly updated in the range of 0 to 65535. As the display result determination table, a common display result determination table may be used for the first special figure and the second special figure.

As shown in FIG. 7(A), when the variable special figure is the first special figure, if the setting value is 1 and the gaming state is the normal state or the time saving state, it is in the range of 0 to 65535. It is a numerical value that can take a value, and among the hit judgment values that are compared with the random number MR1 for judging the special figure display result, 1020 to 1237 are assigned to "jackpot", and 65317 to 65535 are assigned to "time saving". Other numerical ranges are assigned as "outliers". In addition, if the setting value is 1 and the gaming state is variable probability, of the hit determination values mentioned above, 1020 to 1346 are assigned to "jackpot", and the other numerical ranges are assigned to "miss". Assigned. In addition, the case where the setting value of the first variable special figure is 2 to 6 and the gaming state is the normal state or the time saving state is as shown in FIG. 7(A).

As shown in FIG. 7(B), when the variable special figure is the second special figure, if the setting value is 1 and the gaming state is the normal state or the time saving state, it is in the range of 0 to 65535. It is a numerical value that can take a value, and among the hit judgment values that are compared with the random number MR1 for judging the special figure display result, 1020 to 1237 are assigned to "jackpot", and 65317 to 65425 are assigned to "time saving". Other numerical ranges are assigned as "outliers". In addition, if the setting value is 1 and the gaming state is variable probability, of the hit determination values mentioned above, 1020 to 1346 are assigned to "jackpot", and the other numerical ranges are assigned to "miss". Assigned. Incidentally, the case where the set value of the second variable special figure is 2 to 6 and the gaming state is the normal state or the time saving state is as shown in FIG. 7(B).

Here, if we pay attention to the numerical range of the hit judgment value assigned to "Jackpot" and "Time-saving loss" in each display result judgment table, as shown in Fig. 8, when the gaming state is normal state or time-saving state In the first special figure display result determination table, the range from 1020 to 1237 of the hit determination values is set as a common numerical range of jackpot determination values for determining a jackpot regardless of the set value.

In addition, when the setting value is 1, only the common numerical range of jackpot determination values for determining jackpots is set (1020 to 1237 are assigned to "jackpot"), while setting value 2 ~ In the case of the setting value 6, the numerical range corresponding to each setting value from 1238 is set as the non-common numerical range of the jackpot determination value so as to be continuous from the common numerical range of the jackpot determination value. The non-common numerical range of this jackpot judgment value is the range of 1238 to 1253 for setting value 2, the range of 1238 to 1272 for setting value 3, the range of 1238 to 1292 for setting value 4, and the range of 1238 to 1317 for setting value 5. , the setting value 6 is set in the range of 1238 to 1346, respectively.

In other words, in the first special figure display result determination table when the gaming state is the normal state or the time saving state, if the setting value is 1, the common hit determination value that can take a value in the range of 0 to 65535 is selected. Only numbers within the numerical range (1020-1237) are assigned to the "jackpot", while if the set value is 2 or more, the non-common numerical range is added to the common numerical range of the jackpot judgment values. Numbers within the range are assigned a "jackpot". Furthermore, the non-common numerical value range increases from 1238 as the set value increases.

For this reason, the jackpot probability is set at 1020 as the standard value for the jackpot determination value (jackpot standard value), and as the set value increases, the non-common numerical range that is continuous with the common numerical range increases, so the jackpot probability increases. go.

Furthermore, in the display result determination table for the first special figure when the gaming state is the normal state or the time-saving state, the range from 65317 to 65535 among the winning determination values determines whether the time-saving win or loss occurs regardless of the set value. It is set in the common numerical range of the time saving judgment value. If we pay attention to the case where the setting value is 6, as mentioned above, 1020 to 1346 of the hit judgment values are set in the numerical range of the jackpot judgment value, and there is also a time saving function. The loss judgment value is in the range of 65317 to 65535, with 65317 as the reference value for loss with time saver (loss reference value with time saver), in a numerical range different from the jackpot judgment value range (1020 to 1346) of the previous setting value 6. This setting prevents the numerical range of the time saving loss judgment value from overlapping with the range of the jackpot judgment value which changes according to each set value.

In addition, in the first special figure display result determination table when the gaming state is in a variable probability state, the range from 1020 to 1346 of the hit determination values is the jackpot determination value for determining a jackpot regardless of the setting value. It is set to a common numerical range.

When the setting value is 1, only the common numerical range of jackpot judgment values for determining jackpots is set (1020 to 1346 are assigned to "jackpot"), while setting value 2 to setting In the case of the value 6, the numerical range corresponding to each set value from 1347 is set as the non-common numerical range of the jackpot determination value so as to be continuous from the common numerical range of the jackpot determination value. The non-common numerical range of this jackpot judgment value is the range of 1347 to 1383 for setting value 2, the range of 1347 to 1429 for setting value 3, the range of 1347 to 1487 for setting value 4, and the range of 1347 to 1556 for setting value 5. , and the setting value 6 is set in the range of 1347 to 1674.

In other words, in the first special figure display result determination table when the gaming state is variable probability state, when the set value is 1, among the hit determination values that can take values in the range of 0 to 65535, the common numerical range ( 1020 to 1346) are assigned to the "jackpot", but if the set value is 2 or more, the jackpot judgment value within the range of the common numerical value range plus the non-common numerical range A numerical value is assigned to a “jackpot.” Furthermore, the non-common numerical value range increases from 1347 as the set value increases.

For this reason, the jackpot probability is set at 1020 as the standard value for the jackpot determination value (jackpot standard value), and as the set value increases, the non-common numerical range that is continuous with the common numerical range increases, so the jackpot probability increases. go.

In the second special figure display result determination table when the gaming state is the normal state or the time saving state, the range from 1020 to 1237 among the hit determination values is the jackpot determination value for determining a jackpot regardless of the set value. is set to a common numerical range.

In addition, when the setting value is 1, only the common numerical range of jackpot determination values for determining jackpots is set (1020 to 1237 are assigned to "jackpot"), while setting value 2 ~ In the case of the setting value 6, the numerical range corresponding to each setting value from 1238 is set as the non-common numerical range of the jackpot determination value so as to be continuous from the common numerical range of the jackpot determination value. The non-common numerical range of this jackpot judgment value is the range of 1238 to 1253 for setting value 2, the range of 1238 to 1272 for setting value 3, the range of 1238 to 1292 for setting value 4, and the range of 1238 to 1317 for setting value 5. , the setting value 6 is set in the range of 1238 to 1346, respectively.

In other words, in this pachinko game machine 1, when the setting value is 1 in the second special symbol display result determination table when the gaming state is the normal state or the time saving state, the value can be taken in the range of 0 to 65535. Among the hit judgment values, only the numbers within the common numerical range (1020 to 1237) are assigned to the "jackpot", while if the set value is 2 or more, the common numerical range of the jackpot judgment values is assigned. Numerical values within the range plus the non-common numerical value range are assigned to the "jackpot". Furthermore, the non-common numerical value range increases from 1238 as the set value increases.

For this reason, the jackpot probability is set at 1020 as the standard value for the jackpot determination value (jackpot standard value), and as the set value increases, the non-common numerical range that is continuous with the common numerical range increases, so the jackpot probability increases. go.

Furthermore, in the second special figure display result determination table when the gaming state is the normal state or the time-saving state, the range from 65317 to 65425 among the winning determination values determines whether the time-saving win or loss occurs regardless of the set value. It is set in the common numerical range of the time saving judgment value. If we pay attention to the case where the setting value is 6, as mentioned above, 1020 to 1346 of the hit judgment values are set in the numerical range of the jackpot judgment value, and there is also a time saving function. The loss judgment value is in the range of 65317 to 65425, with 65317 as the reference value for loss with time saver (loss reference value with time saver), in a numerical range different from the jackpot judgment value range (1020 to 1346) of the setting value 6. This setting prevents the numerical range of the time saving loss judgment value from overlapping with the range of the jackpot judgment value which changes according to each set value.

In the display result determination table for the second special figure when the gaming state is in a variable probability state, the range from 1020 to 1346 among the hit determination values is the common numerical value of the jackpot determination value for determining a jackpot regardless of the set value. The range is set. The characteristics of the other second special figure display result determination table are the same as the first special figure display result determination table.

As mentioned above, in this pachinko gaming machine 1, when the variable special symbol is the first special symbol, regardless of the setting value, 65317 to When the range of 65535 is set to the common numerical range with and without time saving, and the variable special symbol is the second special symbol, the setting value will be changed in both the normal state and the time saving state. Regardless, the range of 65317 to 65425 is set as a common numerical range with and without time saving. In other words, when the gaming state is normal and when the time-saving state is set, the rate at which the variable display result is a loss with time-saving is the same for all setting values, so depending on the setting value, the gambling can be prevented from becoming excessively high. Furthermore, regarding the time saving error, which is assigned a common judgment value number for each setting value, all setting values are set in a continuous numerical range from 65317, which is the reference value for the time saving error, so the display is variable. This makes it possible to reduce the processing load on the CPU 103 related to determining whether the result is a time saving or not.

In addition, in this pachinko gaming machine 1, the settable setting values are six from 1 to 6, but the setting values that can be set in the pachinko gaming machine 1 may be 5 or less or 7 or more. . Furthermore, the smaller the set value set in the pachinko game machine 1, the more advantageous it may be to the player.

The jackpot type may be determined at different rates depending on the setting value based on the allocation of judgment values in the jackpot type judgment table. Alternatively, the jackpot type may be determined by a common ratio regardless of the setting value. The fluctuation pattern may be determined at different rates depending on the set value, based on the assignment of determination values in the fluctuation pattern determination table. Alternatively, the variation pattern may be determined at a common rate regardless of the set value. The setting value may be suggested by the frequency with which normal reach and super reach are performed by varying the execution rate of normal reach and super reach depending on the setting value. Alternatively, the execution rate of normal reach and super reach may be the same regardless of the setting value. In addition, it may be possible to perform arbitrary setting suggestion effects at different rates depending on the setting value.

(Main operations of the production control board 12)
Next, the main operations in the production control board 12 will be explained. When the effect control board 12 receives power supply voltage from a power supply board or the like, the effect control CPU 120 is activated and executes effect control main processing as shown in the flowchart of FIG. When the production control main process shown in FIG. Performs register settings for the installed CTC (counter/timer circuit). In addition, initial operation control processing is executed (step S72). In the initial operation control process, control is executed to perform the initial operation of the movable body 32, such as driving the movable body 32 to return it to the initial position and checking a predetermined operation.

Thereafter, it is determined whether the timer interrupt flag is on (step S73). The timer interrupt flag is set to an on state every time a predetermined time (for example, 2 milliseconds) elapses, based on, for example, a register setting of the CTC. At this time, if the timer interrupt flag is off (step S73; No), the process of step S73 is repeatedly executed and the process waits.

Furthermore, on the side of the production control board 12, an interrupt for receiving a production control command from the main board 11 is generated in addition to a timer interrupt that occurs every time a predetermined time elapses. This interrupt is, for example, an interrupt that occurs when the effect control INT signal from the main board 11 is turned on. When an interrupt occurs due to the production control INT signal being turned on, the production control CPU 120 automatically disables interrupts, but if a CPU that does not automatically disable interrupts is used, interrupts are disabled. It is desirable to issue a prohibition order (DI order). The production control CPU 120 executes, for example, a predetermined command reception interrupt process in response to an interrupt caused by the production control INT signal being turned on. In this command reception interrupt process, an effect control command is taken in from a predetermined input port included in the I/O 125 that receives a control signal transmitted from the main board 11 via the relay board 15. The production control command taken in at this time is stored in a production control command reception buffer provided in the RAM 122, for example. After that, the production control CPU 120 sets the interrupt permission, and then ends the command reception interrupt process.

If the timer interrupt flag is on in step S73 (step S73; Yes), the timer interrupt flag is cleared and turned off (step S74), and command analysis processing is executed (step S75). In the command analysis process, for example, after reading various production control commands transmitted from the game control microcomputer 100 of the main board 11 and stored in the production control command reception buffer, the read production control commands are Corresponding settings and controls are performed. For example, the read performance control command may be stored in a predetermined area of the RAM 122 or stored in the RAM 122 so that the performance control command received and the contents specified by the performance control command can be confirmed in the performance control process processing. Turn on the provided reception flag. Further, when the performance control command specifies a gaming state, the display control unit 123 may be instructed to display a background according to the gaming state.

After executing the command analysis process in step S75, the production control process process is executed (step S76). In the effect control process processing, for example, the display operation of the effect image in the display area of the image display device 5, the sound output operation from the speakers 8L and 8R, the lighting operation of the decorative light emitters such as the game effect lamp 9 and the decorative LED, and the movable body 32. Control is performed to operate various presentation devices, such as driving operations. Further, regarding the content of control of performance operations using various performance devices, judgments, decisions, settings, etc. are performed in accordance with performance control commands transmitted from the main board 11.

Following the performance control process processing in step S76, a performance random number update process is executed (step S77), and at least a portion of the performance random numbers used on the performance control board 12 are updated by software. Thereafter, the process returns to step S73. Other processes may be executed before returning to the process of step S73.

FIG. 10 is a flowchart showing an example of the process executed in step S76 of FIG. 9 as the production control process process. In the performance control process shown in FIG. 10, the performance control CPU 120 first executes a pre-read notice setting process (step S161). In the pre-read preview setting process, for example, based on the performance control command at the time of start-up winning that is transmitted from the main board 11, judgments, decisions, settings, etc. for executing the pre-read preview performance are performed. Further, processing for displaying a pending display is executed based on the number of pending memories specified from the production control command.

After executing the process of step S161, the production control CPU 120 selects and executes one of the following processes of steps S170 to S175, depending on the value of the production process flag provided in the RAM 122, for example.

The variable display start waiting process in step S170 is a process that is executed when the value of the production process flag is "0" (initial value). This variable display start waiting process is a process of determining whether or not to start variable display of decorative patterns on the image display device 5 based on whether or not a command specifying the start of variable display has been received from the main board 11. Contains such as. When it is determined to start variable display of decorative symbols on the image display device 5, the value of the production process flag is updated to "1", and the variable display start waiting process is ended.

The variable display start setting process in step S171 is a process that is executed when the value of the production process flag is "1". In this variable display start setting process, based on the display result and fluctuation pattern specified by the production control command, the display result of the variable display of the decorative pattern (determined decorative pattern), the mode of variable display of the decorative pattern, the reach effect, etc. It determines whether or not various performances such as preview performances are to be executed, their mode, execution start timing, and the like. Then, a performance control pattern (a collection of control data for instructing the display control unit 123 to execute the performance) that reflects the determination result etc. is set. Thereafter, based on the set performance control pattern, the display control unit 123 is instructed to start executing the variable display of decorative symbols, the value of the performance process flag is updated to "2", and the variable display start setting process is ended. The display control unit 123 causes the image display device 5 to start variable display of decorative symbols in response to an instruction to start variable display of decorative symbols.

The variable display effect processing in step S172 is a process that is executed when the value of the effect process flag is "2". In this variable display performance process, the performance control CPU 120 instructs the display control unit 123 to display a performance image based on the performance control pattern set in step S171 on the display screen of the image display device 5. , driving the movable body 32 , outputting audio and sound effects from the speakers 8L and 8R by outputting a command (sound effect signal) to the audio control board 13 , and outputting a command (illumination signal) to the lamp control board 14 . Various performance controls are executed during variable display of decorative patterns, such as turning on/off/flashing the game effect lamp 9 and decorative LEDs by outputting the output. After performing such performance control, for example, a termination code indicating the end of the variable display of decorative patterns has been read from the performance control pattern, or a command has been received from the main board 11 specifying that fixed decorative patterns should be stopped and displayed. In response to what has been done, etc., the determined decorative pattern that becomes the display result of the decorative pattern is stopped and displayed. When the fixed decorative pattern is stopped and displayed, the value of the production process flag is updated to "3", and the variable display production process is completed.

The special figure hit waiting process in step S173 is a process that is executed when the value of the production process flag is "3". In this special figure winning waiting process, the performance control CPU 120 determines whether or not a performance control command has been received from the main board 11 that designates starting a jackpot game state. Then, when receiving a production control command specifying to start a jackpot game state, the value of the production process flag is updated to "4". In addition, if the waiting time for receiving the command elapses without receiving a command specifying the start of the jackpot game state, the display result in the special figure game is determined to be a "loss", and the presentation process flag is flagged. The value of is updated to the initial value "0". When the value of the production process flag is updated, the waiting process for each special figure ends.

The jackpot performance process in step S174 is a process that is executed when the value of the performance process flag is "6". In this jackpot performance process, the performance control CPU 120 sets, for example, a performance control pattern corresponding to the performance content in the jackpot game state, and executes various performance controls in the jackpot game state based on the set content. In addition, in the jackpot production process, for example, in response to receiving a command from the main board 11 to specify ending the jackpot game state, the value of the production process flag is set to "5", which is a value corresponding to the ending production process. ” and ends the jackpot performance process.

The ending effect processing in step S175 is a process that is executed when the value of the effect process flag is "7". In this ending performance processing, the performance control CPU 120 sets a performance control pattern corresponding to the end of the jackpot game state, for example, and performs various performance controls of the ending performance at the end of the jackpot game state based on the setting contents. Execute. Thereafter, the value of the production process flag is updated to the initial value "0", and the ending production process is ended.

(Variation example of basic explanation)
This invention is not limited to the pachinko gaming machine 1 explained in the basic explanation above, and various modifications and applications are possible without departing from the spirit of the invention.

The pachinko gaming machine 1 described above is a payout type gaming machine that pays out a predetermined number of game media as prizes based on the occurrence of winnings, but the game media is enclosed and points are awarded based on the occurrence of winnings. It may also be an enclosed game machine.

Only one type of symbol (for example, a symbol indicating "-") may be displayed during the variable display of the special symbol, and the variable display may be performed by repeatedly displaying and extinguishing the symbol. Further, even if the symbol is displayed during the variable display, the symbol does not need to be displayed when the variable display is stopped (the symbol indicating "-" does not need to be displayed as a display result).

In the above basic explanation, the pachinko gaming machine 1 was shown as a gaming machine, but medals are inserted and a predetermined number of bets are set, and multiple types of symbols are rotated according to the operation of the operating lever by the player. A slot machine that can execute a game in which a predetermined number of medals are paid out to the player when the combination of stopped symbols becomes a specific combination of symbols when the symbols are stopped in response to the operation of the stop button (for example, a big bonus , regular bonus, RT, AT, ART, and CZ (hereinafter referred to as bonus, etc.).

The program and data for realizing the present invention are not limited to the form in which they are distributed and provided to a computer device included in the pachinko game machine 1 using a removable recording medium, but are provided in advance in a form such as a computer device, etc. The software may also be distributed by being installed on a storage device owned by the software. Furthermore, by providing a communication processing unit, the program and data for realizing the present invention can be distributed by being downloaded from other devices on a network connected via a communication line or the like. I don't mind.

The game can be executed not only by attaching a removable recording medium, but also by temporarily storing the program and data downloaded via a communication line in internal memory, etc. It may also be executed directly using hardware resources of other devices on a network connected via a communication line or the like. Furthermore, the game may be executed by exchanging data with other computer devices via a network.

In addition, in this specification, expressions that compare various proportions such as the execution rate of production (expressions such as "high", "low", "different", etc.) do not mean that one is a proportion of "0%". May include. For example, one of the ratios is "0%" and the other is "100%" or a ratio of less than "100%".

(Explanation regarding characteristic part 029SG in embodiment of the present invention)
Next, the characteristic part 029SG in the embodiment of the present invention will be explained. This feature section 029SG includes invention 029SG and invention 033SG.

The gaming machine of form 1 of invention 029SG is
In a gaming machine (for example, Pachinko gaming machine 1) that can be controlled to an advantageous state (for example, a jackpot gaming state) that is advantageous to the player, a special suggestion performance is used as a suggestion performance that suggests that the machine will be controlled to the advantageous state. (for example, reach performance I), a first suggestion performance (for example, reach performance A), a second suggestion performance (for example, reach performance B), a second suggestion performance (for example, reach performance B), which has a lower expectation level to be controlled to the advantageous state than the special suggestion performance. Suggestion performance execution means (for example, a performance control CPU 120 shown in FIG. (for example, the part that executes the production process during variable display), and the special development production can be executed as the first development pattern before the production result of the first suggestion production is announced (for example, as shown in FIG. 11-8). As shown, in the variable display of the variation pattern of the super reach η, in the part where the high-expectation reach performance development notification performance is executed during the execution of the reach performance A), the advantageous state is reached as a result of the second suggestion performance. It is possible to execute a special development performance different from the above-mentioned special development performance as a second development pattern after it is notified that the super reach ζ will not be controlled. , the part where the reach performance E development notification performance is executed after the variable display result (missing) is once notified as the performance result of the reach performance B). (a portion that executes a production process during display), and when the first development pattern is executed by the development production execution means, the suggestive production execution means executes the first development pattern after execution of the special development production. It is possible to execute the third suggestion effect, which has a higher level of expectation than the suggestion effect (for example, as shown in Figure 11-8, in the variable display of the variation pattern of super reach η, it is possible to When the second development pattern is executed by the development effect execution means (the part where the expectation level reach effect development notification effect is executed and the reach effect F is further executed), when the second development pattern is executed by the development effect execution means, the second development pattern is executed after the execution of the special development effect. (For example, as shown in Figure 11-8, in a variable display with a variation pattern of super reach ζ, a variable display result (miss) is once notified as a result of reach effect B. Later, the reach performance E development notification performance is executed, and the reach performance E is further executed), and the performance period of the special development performance is longer than the performance period of the special development performance (for example, the part in which the reach performance E development notification performance is executed and the reach performance E is further executed). As shown in 11-9, the length L7 of the execution period of the high expectation reach performance development notification performance is longer than the length L6b of the execution period of the reach performance E development notification performance), and the special development performance is Primary effects that reduce image visibility (for example, blackout effects shown in Figures 11-10 and 11-55), and effects that are executed after the primary effects and the preceding information is visible. (for example, the first part effects shown in FIGS. 11-10 and 11-55), and the second part effects that are executed after the second part and have a higher degree of emphasis than the first part information. A tertiary effect in which subsequent stage information is displayed in a visible manner (for example, the subsequent stage effects shown in FIGS. 11-10 and 11-55), and after the special development performance is executed, the advantageous state is controlled. The period from the execution of the special development effect until the notification that the advantageous state is controlled is shorter than the period from the execution of the special development effect to the notification that the advantageous state will be controlled (for example, FIGS. 11-8 and 11 -9, the length L13 of the period from the start timing of the high expectation level reach performance development notification performance to the end timing of the reach performance I (notification timing of the variable display result) and the length of the period L13 from the high expectation level reach performance development notification performance timing The length L12 of the period from the start timing to the end timing of reach effect F is the length L11 of the period from the start timing of reach effect E development notification effect to the end timing of reach effect E (notification timing of variable display results). (the part that is set for a long time),
It is characterized by
According to this feature, when the fourth suggestion effect is executed after the execution of the special development effect, the period until it is announced that the advantageous state is controlled becomes excessively long, and the game interest is reduced. In addition to suppressing the decline, in the case where a special suggestion performance is executed after the execution of a special development performance, it is possible to suitably make the player pay attention to the special suggestion performance before being informed that the situation is controlled to be advantageous. Therefore, it is possible to improve the interest in the game.

The gaming machine of Form 2 of invention 029SG is the gaming machine described in Form 1,
The performance period of the second suggestion performance is longer than the performance period of the first suggestion performance (for example, as shown in FIG. 11-7, the length L2 of the execution period of the reach performance B is longer than the execution period of the reach performance A (the part set longer than the period length L1),
It is characterized by
According to this feature, it is possible to draw the player's attention to the second suggestion effect for a longer period of time than the first suggestion effect, thereby improving the player's interest in the game. In addition, unlike the first suggestion performance, the second suggestion performance does not execute the development performance before the performance result is announced, so even if the special development performance is not performed, the corresponding It is possible to surely draw the attention of the player to whether or not control to an advantageous state is reported as a performance result of the 2-suggestion performance.

The gaming machine of Form 3 of Invention 029SG is the gaming machine according to Form 1 or Form 2,
Development suggestion performance execution means (for example, performance control CPU 120) capable of executing at least a development suggestion performance that suggests the execution of the special development performance (for example, a meter performance, a reach performance E development suggestion performance, a reach performance G development suggestion performance) In the meter performance determination process shown in FIG. 11-23, it is decided to execute the meter performance, in the reach performance E development suggestion performance determination process shown in FIG. 11-26, the execution of the reach performance E development suggestion performance is determined, After determining execution of the reach effect G development suggestion effect in the reach effect G development suggestion effect determination process shown in -29, the variable displaying effect process shown in FIG. 10 is executed.
The development suggestion performance execution means is
As the development suggestion performance, a special development suggestion performance that suggests execution of the special development performance can be executed both during the execution period of the first suggestion performance and during the execution period of the second suggestion performance ( For example, as shown in FIGS. 11-7 and 11-8, in the variable display of the variation patterns of super reach α, super reach β, super reach δ, super reach ζ, and super reach η, when reach effect A is being executed and Part where meter effect can be performed while reach effect B is being executed),
It is characterized by
According to this feature, during the execution period of the first suggestion performance and during the execution period of the second suggestion performance, it is possible to arouse the player's sense of expectation for the execution of the special development performance by the special development suggestion performance. can.

The gaming machine of Form 4 of Invention 029SG is the gaming machine according to any one of Forms 1 to 3,
When the special suggestion performance is executed without executing the first suggestion performance and the second suggestion performance, the development performance execution means executes the special development performance for the first time before the special suggestion performance is executed. (For example, as shown in Figures 11-9 and 11-25, in the variable display of the fluctuation pattern of super reach λ, it is possible to execute as three development patterns without going through the execution of reach effect A or reach effect B. At the second timing, the meter 029SG005M increases to the 5th stage at once and the high expectation reach performance development notification performance is executed),
It is characterized by
According to this feature, even if the first suggestion performance and the second suggestion performance are not executed, the special development performance is executed and the player is made to pay attention to whether or not the highly anticipated special suggestion performance will be executed. As a result, the player's interest in playing the game can be improved.

The gaming machine of Form 5 of Invention 029SG is the gaming machine according to Form 4,
During the period from when the special development performance is executed until when the special suggestion performance is executed and it is announced that the advantageous state is controlled, the third suggestion performance is executed after the special development performance is executed. (For example, as shown in Figures 11-8 and 11-9, the period from the start timing of high expectation level reach performance development notification performance to the time when the reach performance is controlled to be in the advantageous state is announced) The length L13 of the period up to the end timing of I (notification timing of variable display results) is set longer than the length L12 of the period from the start timing of the high expectation reach performance development notification performance to the end timing of the reach performance F. ),
It is characterized by
According to this feature, by lengthening the period until notification when a special development effect with high expectations is executed, it is possible to effectively increase the sense of expectation of being controlled to an advantageous state.

The gaming machine according to Form 6 of Invention 029SG is the gaming machine according to any one of Forms 1 to 5,
Development suggestion performance execution means (for example, performance control CPU 120) capable of executing at least a development suggestion performance (for example, a meter performance, a reach performance E development suggestion performance, a reach performance G development suggestion performance) that suggests execution of the special development performance. Deciding to execute the meter effect in the meter effect determination process shown in FIG. 11-23, deciding to execute the reach effect E development suggestion effect in the reach effect E development suggestion effect determination process shown in FIG. 11-26, After deciding to execute the reach effect G development suggestion effect in the reach effect G development suggestion effect determination process shown in -29, the variable display processing shown in FIG. 10 is executed.
The development suggestion performance execution means includes a special development suggestion performance (for example, a meter performance) that suggests execution of the special development performance by changing the performance mode in stages, and a special development suggestion performance (for example, a meter performance) that suggests the execution of the special development performance by changing the performance mode in stages. It is possible to perform a special development suggestion performance (for example, a reach performance E development suggestion performance) that suggests the execution of a special development performance,
The rate at which the performance mode changes to the specific number of stages in the special development suggestion performance is higher than the rate at which the performance mode changes to the specific number of stages in the special development suggestion performance (for example, as shown in FIGS. 11-24 and 11-54 As shown, the meter effect changes the display mode of the meter 029SG005M in 5 steps (6 steps if you include the state where the meter effect is not executed), whereas the reach effect E development suggestion effect changes the display mode of the reach effect E development suggestion image. (the part where changes in two steps),
It is characterized by
According to this feature, it is possible to draw the player's attention to the first suggestion performance in which a special development suggestion performance is executed and the second suggestion performance in which a special development suggestion performance is executed. Since it is easier to change to a specific number of stages than with a suggestive presentation, it is possible to draw attention to whether or not the number of stages changes to a specific number, thereby improving the interest in the game.

The gaming machine according to Form 7 of Invention 029SG is the gaming machine according to Form 6,
The period in which the special development suggestion performance is performed is longer than the period in which the special development suggestion performance is performed (for example, as shown in Figures 11-7 to 11-9, the period in which the special development suggestion performance is executed is In the variable display with a variable pattern, the length L5 of the meter performance executable period is set longer than the length L6a of the reach performance E development suggestion performance executable period),
It is characterized by
According to this feature, after the execution of the special development performance is suggested, the fourth suggestion performance indicates that the third suggestion performance, which has higher expectations than the first suggestion performance, will be executed after the special development performance is executed. Since the suggestion can be made for a longer period of time than the execution, the interest of the special development suggestion production can be improved.

The gaming machine of Form 8 of Invention 029SG is the gaming machine according to Form 6 or Form 7,
In the case where the second suggestion performance is executed, the development suggestion performance execution means does not execute the special development suggestion performance until the performance result of the second suggestion performance is notified (for example, a reach performance). E development suggestion performance is the part that can be executed after the variable display result (missing) is announced as the performance result of reach performance B),
It is characterized by
According to this feature, when the special development suggestion performance is executed during the execution of the second suggestion performance, the player recognizes that the player is informed that the player will not be controlled to an advantageous state as a result of the second suggestion performance. It is possible to prevent a decline in gaming interest due to

The gaming machine according to Form 9 of Invention 029SG is the gaming machine according to any one of Forms 1 to 8,
An advantageous result suggesting performance (for example, a chance-up performance) that suggests that the performance result of the suggesting performance will be an advantageous result for the player during the execution of the suggesting performance, and a configuration that constitutes the advantageous result suggesting performance. Advantageous result suggestion performance execution means that makes the suggestion based on the number of executions of the performance (for example, the variable display shown in FIG. 10 after the performance control CPU 120 decides to execute the chance up performance in the chance up performance determination process shown in FIG. 11-31) (a part that executes mid-production processing),
The number of executions of the constituent effects when the third suggestion effect is being executed is greater than the number of executions of the constituent effects when the first suggestion effect is being executed (for example, as shown in FIG. 11-34). Thus, while the reach effect F is being executed, a total of three effects are displayed as effects that constitute the chance-up effect: the red display of the reach title, the movement of the movable body 32, and the display of the image of the stick controller 31A as an operation promotion image. While it is possible to execute the chance-up effect in Pattern S, Pattern T, and Pattern U, while reach effect A is being executed, the reach title is displayed in red as a part of the chance-up effect. A total of two performances of the movement of the movable body 32 can be executed (the part where the chance-up production can be executed in pattern P and pattern Q),
The number of executions of the constituent effects when the fourth suggestion effect is being executed is less than or equal to the number of executions of the constituent effects when the second suggestion effect is being executed (for example, as shown in FIG. 11-34). As shown in the above, while the reach effect E is being executed, a total of two effects can be executed as effects that constitute the chance increase effect: the red display of the reach title and the movement of the movable body 32 (the chance increase effect is set to pattern S and pattern Q). On the other hand, during the execution of reach effect B, a total of three effects, including the red display of the reach title, the movement of the movable body 32, and the display of cut-in image 029SG200, are performed as effects that constitute the chance-up effect. The part where the effect can be executed (the chance-up effect can be executed in pattern P, pattern Q, pattern R),
It is characterized by
According to this feature, in the case where the special development performance is executed and the third suggestion performance is further executed before the performance result of the first suggestion performance is announced, the first suggestion performance is executed. By increasing the number of executions of the component effects when the third suggestion effect is being executed than when the third suggestion effect is being executed, it is possible to draw the player's attention to the effect of the third suggestion effect more favorably. Regarding the case where the special development performance is executed and the fourth suggestion performance is further executed after it is announced that the control is not controlled to an advantageous state as a result of the second suggestion performance, the configuration performance when the fourth suggestion performance is being executed. The number of executions of is equal to or less than the number of executions of the component effects when the second suggestion effect is being executed, so that it is possible to prevent the player from drawing too much attention to the effect of the fourth suggestion effect. You can improve your interest in gaming.

The gaming machine according to Form 10 of Invention 029SG is the gaming machine according to Form 9,
The advantageous result suggestion performance execution means is capable of executing the advantageous result suggestion performance (for example, chance up performance) in a plurality of modes including a common mode,
Even if the advantageous result suggestion performance of the common aspect is executed, the expectation level differs depending on the type of the suggestion performance in which the advantageous result suggestion performance was executed (for example, as shown in Modification Example 029SG-12, reach title (The part where the jackpot expectation level differs depending on whether the common presentation of the red display and the operation of the movable body 32 is executed in any of the reach presentations A to F.)
It is characterized by
According to this feature, it is possible to suppress an increase in the number of modes of advantageous result suggestion effects and to draw the player's attention to which suggestion effect is executed during which common modes of advantageous result suggestion effects are executed. As a result, you can increase your interest in playing games.

The gaming machine of Form 11 of Invention 029SG is the gaming machine according to Form 9 or Form 10,
The suggestion performance execution means is capable of displaying an expectation level corresponding image corresponding to the expectation level of the suggestion performance when executing the suggestion performance, and displays the expectation level corresponding image when the advantageous result suggestion performance is executed. (For example, as shown in Modified Example 029SG-5, if the text of the reach title image is changed to red from the middle as a chance-up effect, it is displayed together with the reach title image. Changing the display mode of the expectation image showing the expected jackpot expectation (increasing the number of stars displayed as the expectation image),
It is characterized by
According to this feature, since the image corresponding to the expectation level changes with the execution of the effect suggesting an advantageous result, it is possible to increase attention to the image corresponding to the expectation level, so that it is possible to accurately inform the player of the expectation level of the effect suggesting an advantageous result. can be recognized.

The gaming machine of Form 12 of Invention 029SG is the gaming machine described in Forms 1 to 11,
A specific image suggestion effect (for example, deformation) that is different from the suggestion effect and that suggests that the advantageous state is controlled by the display mode of a specific image (for example, active display) displayed during the suggestion effect. A specific image suggestion effect execution means (for example, an active display effect provided in the display area of the image display device 5 as shown in FIG. 11-57 as a modified example 029SG-1) that can execute The active display is displayed in one of a plurality of display modes in the display area 029SG005F, and the jackpot expectation level is varied depending on which display mode the active display is displayed.
The specific image suggestion performance execution means is capable of executing a common specific image suggestion performance as the specific image suggestion performance in common among all of the different types of suggestion performances (for example, by setting the active display to a white round shape, Areas that can be displayed as blue circles and red circles),
The rate at which the common specific image suggestion effect is executed during the execution of the first suggestion effect that is executed before the special development effect in the first development pattern is that the common specific image suggestion effect is executed after the special development effect is executed. Lower than the rate at which the common specific image suggestion effect is executed during execution of the third suggestion effect (for example, as shown in FIG. 11-58 as modification 029SG-1, variable display as a result of reach effect A) In the variable display of the fluctuation pattern of the super reach η, in which the highly anticipated reach performance development notification performance is executed before the result is announced and the reach performance F is further executed, an active display is displayed while the reach performance A is being executed. The rate P2 at which the aspect changes from a white circle or a blue circle to a red circle is the same as when the display aspect of the active display changes from a white circle or a blue circle to a red circle while reach effect F is being executed. (portion lower than P3),
The rate at which the common specific image suggestion effect is executed during the execution of the third suggestion effect that is executed after the special development effect is executed in the first development pattern is the same as the rate at which the common specific image suggestion effect is executed in the second development pattern. is higher than the rate at which the common specific image suggestion effect is executed during the execution of the fourth suggestion effect that is executed after the execution of the fourth suggestion effect (for example, as shown in FIG. The rate P3 at which the display mode of the active display changes from a white circle or a blue circle to a red circle during the execution of the reach effect F in the variable display of the variation pattern of the reach η is the effect of the reach effect B. Display mode of active display during execution of reach effect E in variable display of variable pattern of super reach ζ in which reach effect E development notification effect is executed after variable display result (missing) is announced and reach effect E is further executed is higher than P1, where the rate of change from white or blue to red is higher than P1),
It is characterized by
According to this feature, when the first suggestion effect is executed and the third suggestion effect is executed, the third suggestion effect is executed by executing the specific image suggestion effect before the start of the special development effect. It is possible to reduce the possibility that the player will recognize this in advance, and in the third suggestion performance and the fourth suggestion performance, the common specific image suggestion performance is appropriately executed according to the level of expectation, so that the enjoyment of the game can be improved. .

The gaming machine according to Form 13 of Invention 029SG is the gaming machine according to Form 12,
The specific image suggestion performance execution means changes the display mode of the specific image from a first mode (for example, a white circle or a blue circle) to a second mode with higher expectations than the first mode (for example, It can be changed into any of multiple aspects including red round shape),
The rate at which the display mode of the specific image changes to the second mode before the development effect is lower than the rate at which the display mode of the specific image changes to the second mode after the development effect is executed ( For example, as shown in modification 029SG-2, in a variable display with a variation pattern of super reach η, the display mode of the active display changes from a white circle or a blue circle to a red circle while the reach effect F is being executed. In addition to setting the rate P3 of the change in the shape of the active display to be higher than the rate P2 of the display mode of the active display changing from a white circle or a blue circle to a red circle during execution of reach effect A, super reach ζ In the variable display of the fluctuation pattern, the rate P1 at which the display mode of the active display changes from a white circle or a blue circle to a red circle during the execution of the reach effect E is set to (The part where the display mode is set higher than the rate at which the display changes from a white circle or a blue circle to a red circle)
It is characterized by
According to this feature, it is possible to make it easier for the player to recognize the degree of expectation that is controlled to an advantageous state depending on the display mode of the specific image, and the display mode of the specific image changes to the second mode before the development effect, so that the game It is possible to reduce the possibility that interest in the game will decrease due to the player being recognized in advance as having high expectations.

The gaming machine of Form 14 of Invention 029SG is the gaming machine according to Form 12 or Form 13,
When the special suggestion performance is executed without executing the first suggestion performance and the second suggestion performance, the development performance execution means executes the special development performance for the first time before the special suggestion performance is executed. (For example, as shown in Figure 11-9, in the variable display of the fluctuation pattern of super reach λ, high expectations can be achieved from the timing before reach when reach effect A or reach effect B is not executed. The part where reach performance development notification performance is executed),
The rate at which the display mode of the specific image changes to the second mode before the special suggestion effect in the third development pattern is the rate at which the specific image is displayed after the special suggestion effect is executed in the third development pattern. (For example, as shown in Modification 029SG-3, in the variable display of the variation pattern of super reach λ, the display mode of the active display is higher than the rate at which the mode changes to the second mode.) The rate P5 at which the icon changes from a white circle or a blue circle to a red circle is determined by the display mode of the active display changing from a white circle or a blue circle to a red circle after the start of reach effect I. (the part set higher than the ratio P6),
It is characterized by
According to this feature, by changing the display mode of the specific image to the second mode before the special suggestion performance, it is possible for the player to easily recognize that the special suggestion performance will be executed.

The gaming machine according to Form 15 of Invention 029SG is the gaming machine according to any one of Forms 12 to 14,
A gaming machine (for example, pachinko gaming machine 1) capable of executing variable display,
A suspension storage means (for example, a portion where the CPU 103 executes the starting winning determination process shown in FIGS. 11-14) capable of storing information regarding the variable display as a suspension storage;
A determining means (for example, a part where the CPU 103 executes the variable pattern setting process shown in FIGS. 11-17) capable of determining that the advanced effect is executed when starting the variable display;
Regarding the variable display corresponding to the suspended memory, a determining means capable of determining that the advanced effect is executed before the determination by the determining means (for example, in the winning random value determination process of Modification 029SG-4, the CPU 103 When the variation pattern (variation category) is determined to be super reach, it is further determined which super reach variation pattern from super reach α to super reach λ (which of reach effect A to reach effect I is executed during variable display) (the part that determines whether the
Equipped with
The specific image suggestion performance execution means includes, as the specific image suggestion performance, a performance that suggests that the special development performance is to be executed based on the determination result of the determination unit, and a performance that suggests that the special development performance is to be executed. (For example, in modification 029SG-4, in addition to a round shape, triangles, squares, star shapes, etc. are provided as display formats for the pending memory table display, and the pending memory display is Depending on whether the shape is displayed, it is possible to suggest which reach effect will develop into reach effect E, reach effect F, reach effect G, reach effect H, or reach effect I),
It is characterized by
According to this feature, it is possible to draw the player's attention to the specific image suggestion performance even before the start of the variable display, thereby improving the interest in the game.

Furthermore, the gaming machine of Form 1 of invention 033SG is
A gaming machine that can be controlled to an advantageous state that is advantageous to the player (for example, a jackpot gaming state),
Suggestion performances that suggest being controlled to the advantageous state include a special suggestion performance (for example, reach performance I), and a first suggestion performance that has a lower expectation level of being controlled to the advantageous state than the special suggestion performance (for example, , reach performance C), second suggestion performance (for example, reach performance D), and special suggestion performance (for example, reach performance G). (a part in which the CPU 120 executes the variable display processing shown in FIG. 10);
It is possible to execute a special development performance as a first development pattern before the performance result of the first suggestion performance or the second suggestion performance is announced (for example, as shown in FIG. 11-9, super reach In the variable display of the variation pattern of κ, the part where the high expectation level reach performance development notification performance is executed during the execution of reach performance C or reach performance D), the part where the first suggestion performance or the second suggestion performance is executed After it is announced that the advantageous state will not be controlled as a result of the performance, a special development performance different from the special development performance can be executed as a second development pattern (for example, as shown in FIG. 11-8, the variation of super reach θ In the variable display of the pattern, the development effect execution means (for example, the part where the reach effect G development notification effect is executed after the variable display result (missing) is notified as the effect result of the reach effect C or the reach effect D) (a part in which the CPU 120 executes the variable display processing shown in FIG. 10);
In the first development pattern, before the special development effect is executed, a predetermined effect execution means (for example, the effect control CPU 120 shown in FIG. 10) capable of executing a predetermined effect (for example, the precursor effect shown in FIG. (the part that executes the variable display processing shown),
Equipped with
The first suggestion performance and the second suggestion performance have different expectations (for example, as shown in FIG. 11-30(C), reach performance D has a higher jackpot expectation level than reach performance C),
The suggestive performance execution means is
When the first development pattern is executed by the development effect execution means, the special suggestion effect can be executed after the execution of the special development effect (for example, as shown in FIG. 11-9, the super reach κ In the variable display of the fluctuation pattern, the high expectation level reach performance development notification performance is executed from the execution of reach performance C or reach performance D, and the part where reach performance I is further executed),
When the second development pattern is executed by the development effect execution means, the special suggestion effect can be executed after the execution of the special development effect (for example, as shown in FIG. 11-8, the super reach In the variable display with a variation pattern of θ, after the variable display result (missing) is once notified as the performance result of reach performance C or reach performance D, reach performance G development notification performance is executed, and then reach performance G is further executed. part),
When the special development performance is not executed after the predetermined performance is executed, it is possible to execute a specific suggestion performance that is different from the special suggestion performance (for example, as shown in FIG. 11-9, In the variable display of the super reach ι in a variable pattern, after the precursor performance is executed, the reach performance H development notification performance is executed, and then the reach performance H is further executed),
When controlled to be in the advantageous state, the rate at which the special development effect is executed is higher than the rate at which the special development effect is executed (for example, as shown in FIG. 11-6, the variable display result is In the case of a jackpot, that is, when selecting the jackpot fluctuation pattern determination table, the determination ratio of the super reach κ jackpot fluctuation pattern (PB1-9) in which the high expectation level reach performance development notification performance is executed during the variable display is variable. The portion higher than the determination rate of the super reach θ jackpot fluctuation pattern (PB1-7) where the reach effect G development notification effect is executed during the display),
The performance period of the special development performance is longer than the performance period of the special development performance (for example, the length L7 of the execution period of the high expectation reach performance development notification performance is the length of the execution period of the reach performance G development notification performance) The part that is set longer than L8),
The special development effects include a primary effect in which the visibility of the effect image is reduced (for example, a blackout effect shown in FIGS. 11-10 and 11-55), and a effect executed after the first effect. A secondary effect (for example, the first effect shown in FIG. 11-10 and FIG. 11-55) in which the first stage information is displayed in a visible manner; A tertiary presentation (for example, the subsequent presentation shown in FIGS. 11-10 and 11-55) in which subsequent information with a higher degree of emphasis than the information is visibly displayed,
The rate at which the special development performance is performed after the predetermined performance is performed in the first suggestion performance, and the rate at which the special development performance is performed after the predetermined performance is performed in the second suggestion performance. Different (for example, as shown in Figures 11-30 (A) to 11-30 (C), when reach effect C is executed, the rate at which high expectation level reach effect development notification effect is executed after the precursor effect) is the part that is higher than the rate at which the high-expectation level reach performance development notification performance is executed after the precursor performance when reach performance D is executed),
It is characterized by
According to this feature, it is possible to diversify the presentation by combining the types of suggestion presentation and the type of development presentation, and it is also possible to create a predetermined relationship between suggestion presentation and development presentation. It can improve the interest of the performance.

The gaming machine of Form 2 of Invention 033SG is the gaming machine described in Form 1,
The development performance execution means executes a specific development performance different from the special development performance and the special development performance before execution of the specific suggestion performance if the special development performance is not performed after the predetermined performance is executed. possible (for example, as shown in FIG. 11-9, in a variable display with a variation pattern of super reach ι, the part where the reach performance H development notification performance is executed after the execution of the precursor performance),
A development advance performance execution means capable of executing a development advance performance before the special development performance or the specific development performance is executed (for example, a reach performance H development notification performance in a variable display of a variation pattern of super reach ι) (The part where the advance performance is executed from a timing earlier than the high expectation level reach performance development notification performance in the variable display of the variation pattern of super reach κ),
The development advance performance execution means is capable of executing the development advance performance that is common both when the special development performance is executed and when the specific development performance is executed (for example, as shown in FIG. 11-51). , the part where a common form of pre-production is performed in the variable display of the variation pattern of super reach ι and the variable display of the variation pattern of super reach κ),
It is characterized by
According to this feature, by executing the development advance performance, it is possible to increase attention to the development performance, and to draw the player's attention to whether the special development performance or the specific development performance will be executed as the development performance. You can improve your interest in gaming.

The gaming machine of Form 3 of Invention 033SG is the gaming machine according to Form 1 or Form 2,
The development performance execution means executes a specific development performance different from the special development performance and the special development performance before execution of the specific suggestion performance if the special development performance is not performed after the predetermined performance is executed. possible (for example, as shown in FIG. 11-9, in a variable display with a variation pattern of super reach ι, the part where the reach performance H development notification performance is executed after the execution of the precursor performance),
A special development suggestion performance that suggests the execution of the special development performance (for example, a branch destination suggestion performance of pattern Z that displays the branch destination suggestion image 029SG005Z on the image display device 5), and a specific development that suggests the execution of the specific development performance. A suggestive effect (for example, a branch destination suggestion effect of pattern Y that displays a branch destination suggestion image 029SG005Y on the image display device 5) and a common development suggestion effect that suggests the execution of either the special development effect or the specific development effect (for example, , a branch destination suggestion effect of pattern X that displays the branch destination suggestion image 029SG005X on the image display device 5); After determining execution of the branch destination suggestion effect in the determination process, the variable display effect process shown in FIG. 10 is executed.
It is characterized by
According to this feature, since it is possible to draw the attention of the player to which of the special development suggestion performance, specific development suggestion performance, and common development suggestion performance will be executed as the development suggestion performance, the enjoyment of the game can be improved. .

The gaming machine of Form 4 of Invention 033SG is the gaming machine according to any one of Forms 1 to 3,
The second development is greater than the first difference, which is the difference between the rate at which the first suggestion effect is executed in the first development pattern and the rate at which the second suggestion effect is executed in the first development pattern. The second difference, which is the difference between the rate at which the first suggestion effect is executed in the pattern and the rate at which the second suggestion effect is executed in the second development pattern, is smaller (for example, 11-30 ( As shown in D), the variation pattern of super reach κ in which the high expectation level reach performance development notification performance and the reach performance I are executed before the performance result is announced as reach performance C or reach performance D, and the reach performance Regarding the fluctuation pattern of super reach θ in which reach performance G development notification performance and reach performance G are executed after the performance result is announced as performance C or reach performance D, when the variable display result becomes a jackpot, the super reach κ While the difference between the rate at which reach effect C is executed and the rate at which reach effect D is executed in the variable display of the variable pattern is 60%, the reach effect is reduced by the variable display of the variable pattern of super reach θ. (The part where the difference between the rate at which C is executed and the rate at which reach effect D is executed is 40%),
It is characterized by
According to this feature, depending on whether the first suggestive effect or the second suggestive effect is executed, it is either the first development pattern in which the special development effect is executed or the second development pattern in which the special development effect is executed. Since it becomes possible to guess which of the first and second suggestion effects will be executed, it is possible to draw attention to whether the first suggestion effect or the second suggestion effect is to be executed, thereby improving the interest in the game.

The gaming machine of Form 5 of Invention 033SG is the gaming machine according to Form 4,
The rate at which the first suggestion effect is executed in the second development pattern and the rate at which the second suggestion effect is executed in the second development pattern are the same or approximately the same (for example, modification 029SG- As shown in 10, regarding the variable display in the variation pattern of super reach θ, the execution determination ratio of reach performance C and the execution determination ratio of reach performance D are the same),
It is characterized by
According to this feature, regardless of whether the first suggestion effect is executed or the second suggestion effect is executed, it is expected that the second development pattern is the one in which the special development effect is executed. This will increase your interest in playing games.

The gaming machine of Form 6 of Invention 033SG is the gaming machine according to Form 4 or Form 5,
The expectation level when the first suggestion effect is executed in the second development pattern is the same or approximately the same as the expectation level when the second suggestion effect is executed in the second development pattern. (For example, as shown in Modified Example 029SG-11, regarding the variable display of super reach θ in a variation pattern, the jackpot expectation level and the execution of reach effect D are determined when execution of reach effect C is determined. (the part where the expected jackpot is the same as when
It is characterized by
According to this feature, regardless of whether the first suggestion effect is executed or the second suggestion effect is executed, when the special development effect is executed, it is possible to be in an advantageous state. Since the player can look forward to the future, his/her interest in the game can be improved.

The gaming machine according to Form 7 of Invention 033SG is the gaming machine according to any one of Forms 1 to 6,
a first advantageous result suggestion performance (for example, a branch destination suggestion performance) that suggests that the performance result of the first suggestion performance will be an advantageous result for the player during execution of the first suggestion performance; and the second suggestion. Execute an advantageous result suggestion performance capable of executing a second advantageous result suggestion performance (for example, a branch destination suggestion performance) that suggests that the performance result of the second suggestion performance will be an advantageous result for the player during execution of the performance. Means (for example, a portion that executes the variable displaying effect process shown in FIG. 10 after the effect control CPU 120 decides to execute the chance up effect in the chance up effect determination process shown in FIG. 11-31),
Development suggestion performance execution means (for example, performance control CPU 120) capable of executing at least a development suggestion performance (for example, a meter performance, a reach performance E development suggestion performance, a reach performance G development suggestion performance) that suggests execution of the special development performance. Deciding to execute the meter effect in the meter effect determination process shown in FIG. 11-23, deciding to execute the reach effect E development suggestion effect in the reach effect E development suggestion effect determination process shown in FIG. 11-26, After deciding to execute the reach effect G development suggestion effect in the reach effect G development suggestion effect determination process shown in -29, a part that executes the variable displaying effect processing shown in FIG. 10);
Equipped with
The rate at which the development suggestion performance is executed when the first suggestion performance is executed in the first development pattern is the same as the rate at which the development suggestion performance is executed when the second suggestion performance is executed in the first development pattern. The rate at which the effect is executed is different (for example, as shown in Modified Example 029SG-6, regarding the variable display in the variation pattern of super reach κ, the case where the reach effect of the super reach to be executed is reach effect C and the case where the reach effect is (a part where it is possible to decide whether or not to execute the branch destination suggestion performance at different rates depending on the case of performance D),
It is characterized by
According to this feature, since the execution ratio of the development suggestion performance that suggests the execution of the special development performance is different between the first suggestion performance and the second suggestion performance, the execution ratio of the development suggestion performance that suggests the execution of the special development performance is different. Since the game can be played in a suitable manner, it is possible to improve the game's interest.

The gaming machine of Form 8 of Invention 033SG is the gaming machine according to any one of Forms 1 to 7,
a first advantageous result suggestion performance (for example, a branch destination suggestion performance) that suggests that the performance result of the first suggestion performance will be an advantageous result for the player during execution of the first suggestion performance; and the second suggestion. Execute an advantageous result suggestion performance capable of executing a second advantageous result suggestion performance (for example, a branch destination suggestion performance) that suggests that the performance result of the second suggestion performance will be an advantageous result for the player during execution of the performance. Means (for example, a portion that executes the variable displaying effect process shown in FIG. 10 after the effect control CPU 120 decides to execute the chance up effect in the chance up effect determination process shown in FIG. 11-31),
Development suggestion performance execution means (for example, performance control CPU 120) capable of executing at least a development suggestion performance (for example, a meter performance, a reach performance E development suggestion performance, a reach performance G development suggestion performance) that suggests execution of the special development performance. Deciding to execute the meter effect in the meter effect determination process shown in FIG. 11-23, deciding to execute the reach effect E development suggestion effect in the reach effect E development suggestion effect determination process shown in FIG. 11-26, After deciding to execute the reach effect G development suggestion effect in the reach effect G development suggestion effect determination process shown in -29, a part that executes the variable displaying effect processing shown in FIG. 10);
Equipped with
When the first suggestion effect is executed in the first development pattern, the rate at which the first advantageous result suggestion effect is executed during the execution of the first suggestion effect is the same as the first suggestion effect in the first development pattern. When the second suggestion performance is executed, the rate at which the second advantageous result suggestion performance is performed during the execution of the second suggestion performance is different (for example, as shown in FIG. 11-60 as modification example 029SG-13, Regarding the fluctuation pattern of super reach κ, in which the high expectation level reach performance development notification performance and reach performance I are executed before the variable display result (missing) is announced as the performance result of reach performance C or reach performance D. , a part where it is possible to determine whether or not to execute the chance-up effect at different rates depending on whether the execution of the reach effect C is determined and the case where the execution of the reach effect D is determined),
It is characterized by
According to this feature, the execution ratio of the first advantageous result suggestion presentation and the second advantageous outcome suggestion presentation that suggest that the presentation result will be an advantageous result is different between the first suggestion presentation and the second suggestion presentation. Therefore, it is possible to appropriately suggest the performance results, thereby improving the interest in the game.

The gaming machine of Form 9 of Invention 033SG is the gaming machine according to Form 7 or Form 8,
The development performance execution means executes a specific development performance different from the special development performance and the special development performance before execution of the specific suggestion performance if the special development performance is not performed after the predetermined performance is executed. possible (for example, as shown in FIG. 11-9, in a variable display with a variation pattern of super reach ι, the part where the reach performance H development notification performance is executed after the execution of the precursor performance),
The degree of relationship between the first advantageous result suggestion performance and the suggestion by the second advantageous result suggestion performance is determined by the specific development performance or the special development performance after the execution of the first advantageous result suggestion performance or the second advantageous result suggestion performance. The relationship with respect to the execution of is higher than the relationship with respect to the effect of the specific development effect or the effect of the suggestion effect executed after the execution of the special development effect (for example, as shown in FIG. 11-28(A) As shown, the determination ratio of whether or not to execute a branch destination suggestion performance and the performance pattern differs depending on the fluctuation pattern of the variable display, and the determination ratio does not differ depending on the variable display result. , the presence or absence of execution of the branch destination suggestion performance and the performance pattern are whether or not it develops into any of reach performance G to reach performance I after reach performance C and reach performance D are executed, and whether these reach performance G to reach performance The part that is designed to be determined depending on which of
It is characterized by
According to this feature, the suggestion by the first special development performance and the second special development performance causes a specific development performance or special development performance to be executed close to the execution time of the first special development performance or the second special development performance. Therefore, by executing the first special development performance and the second special development performance, attention to the specific development performance or the special development performance can be increased, and the game enjoyment can be improved.

The gaming machine according to Form 10 of Invention 033SG is the gaming machine according to any one of Forms 7 to 9,
The development performance execution means executes a specific development performance different from the special development performance and the special development performance before execution of the specific suggestion performance if the special development performance is not performed after the predetermined performance is executed. possible (for example, as shown in FIG. 11-9, in a variable display with a variation pattern of super reach ι, the part where the reach performance H development notification performance is executed after the execution of the precursor performance),
The rate at which the first advantageous result suggestion performance or the second advantageous result suggestion performance is executed differs before and after the execution of the specific development performance or the special development performance (for example, as shown in Modification 029SG-12) (The part where the jackpot expectation level differs depending on whether the common effect of the red display of the reach title and the movement of the movable body 32 is executed in any of the reach effects A to F),
It is characterized by
According to this feature, it is possible to suitably execute the first advantageous result suggestion performance or the second advantageous result suggestion performance, thereby increasing the degree of attention to either the first development pattern or the second development pattern.

The gaming machine according to Form 11 of Invention 033SG is the gaming machine according to any one of Forms 7 to 10,
As a notification mode of the performance results in the first suggestion performance and the second suggestion performance, a first notification mode in which it is simply notified that the control is not controlled to the advantageous state (for example, as shown in FIG. 11-7, super reach In the variable display of the variation pattern of γ, there is a part where the variable display ends after the variable display result is announced as the performance result of reach effect C or reach effect D) and the part where the variable display ends after the variable display is notified that the advantageous state will not be controlled. A second notification mode in which it is announced that the control is in an advantageous state (for example, as shown in modification 029SG-7, the variable display result is once announced as a loss as the performance result of reach performance A to reach performance D, and then again It has a second notification mode (so-called revival mode) that notifies that the variable display result is a jackpot,
When the performance result of the first suggestion performance or the second suggestion performance is notified in the first notification mode, the rate at which the first advantageous result suggestion performance or the second advantageous result suggestion performance is executed is The ratio is the same as the rate at which the first advantageous result suggestion presentation or the second advantageous result suggestion presentation is executed when the presentation result of the first suggestion presentation or the second suggestion presentation is notified in the second notification mode (e.g. , as shown in modification example 029SG-7, when the performance results (variable display results) of reach performance C and reach performance D are notified in the first notification mode, the rate at which branch destination suggestion performance is executed in pattern Z and the rate at which the branch destination suggestion performance is executed in pattern Z when the performance results (variable display results) of reach performance C and reach performance D are notified in the second notification mode are the same),
It is characterized by
According to this feature, by notifying the first suggestion performance and the second suggestion performance in the second notification mode, it is possible to give the player a sense of surprise, and the performance of the first suggestion performance or the second suggestion performance The first advantageous result suggestion presentation or the second advantageous result suggestion presentation is different between the case where the result is announced in the first notification mode and the case where the presentation result of the first suggestion presentation or the second suggestion presentation is notified in the second notification mode. Since the process for determining the execution of the process can be shared, the amount of data required for the process can be reduced.

The gaming machine according to Form 12 of Invention 033SG is the gaming machine according to any one of Forms 7 to 11,
As a notification mode of the performance results in the first suggestion performance and the second suggestion performance, a first notification mode in which it is simply notified that the control is not controlled to the advantageous state (for example, as shown in FIG. 11-7, super reach In the variable display of the variation pattern of γ, there is a part where the variable display ends after the variable display result is announced as the performance result of reach effect C or reach effect D) and the part where the variable display ends after the variable display is notified that the advantageous state will not be controlled. A second notification mode in which it is announced that the control is in an advantageous state (for example, as shown in modification 029SG-7, the variable display result is once announced as a loss as the performance result of reach performance A to reach performance D, and then again It has a second notification mode (so-called revival mode) that notifies that the variable display result is a jackpot,
When the special development performance is executed after the performance result of the first suggestion performance or the second suggestion performance is notified in the first notification mode, in the suggestion performance executed after the special development performance, the In the case where it is announced that the control will be in an advantageous state, the rate at which the first advantageous result suggestion performance or the second advantageous result suggestion performance is executed is that the performance result of the first suggestion performance or the second suggestion performance is The rate at which the first advantageous result suggestion performance or the second advantageous result suggestion performance is executed when the notification is made in the second notification mode is different (for example, as shown in modification 029SG-8, the rate at which the first advantageous result suggestion performance or the second advantageous result suggestion performance is executed is the reach performance C or After the reach performance D is executed and it is reported that the variable display result is a failure as the performance result of the reach performance C or the reach performance D, the reach performance G development notification performance and the reach performance G are executed, and the reach performance G When it is announced that the variable display result is a jackpot as a performance result (when the variable display is executed in the super reach θ jackpot variation pattern (PB1-7)), the super reach θ jackpot variation pattern The rate at which the chance-up effect is executed during the variable display is the rate at which the chance-up effect is executed in the variable display where the effect (variable display result) of reach effect C or reach effect D is notified in the second notification mode. (the proportion that differs from the ratio),
It is characterized by
According to this feature, when the first suggestion performance or the second suggestion performance is executed, the first advantageous result is suggested depending on whether or not the special development performance is executed before being informed that the control will be in an advantageous state. Since the rate at which the performance or the second advantageous result suggesting performance is executed can be varied, the interest in the game can be improved.

The gaming machine according to Form 13 of Invention 033SG is the gaming machine according to any one of Forms 7 to 12,
The advantageous result suggestion performance execution means executes a plurality of advantageous result suggestion performances including the first advantageous result suggestion performance and the second advantageous result suggestion performance (for example, branch destination suggestion performances of pattern X, pattern Y, and pattern Z). is executable,
The execution rate of the special development effect differs depending on which of the advantageous outcome suggestion effects is executed (for example, as shown in Figure 11-28, if the branch destination suggestion effect is pattern X, pattern Y, or pattern Z) The execution rate of the high-expectation reach performance development notification performance differs depending on which stage it is executed in),
During the execution of the first suggestion performance or the second suggestion performance, the special development performance is not executed when the special advantageous result suggestion performance with the highest execution rate of the special development performance or the special suggestion performance is executed. In this case, the performance result of the first suggestion performance or the second suggestion performance being executed is a performance result that notifies that the performance is controlled to be in the advantageous state (for example, as shown in modification example 029SG-9, There are cases where the high expectation level reach performance development notification performance is not executed even though the branch destination suggestion performance is executed in the performance pattern Z, or the case where the high expectation level reach performance development notification performance is not executed but the reach performance I (The part where it is announced that the variable display result will be a jackpot if it is executed),
It is characterized by
According to this feature, it is possible to give the player a sense of surprise, and also to make the player pay attention to whether or not the special development performance will be executed when the special advantageous result suggestion performance or the special suggestion performance is executed. Therefore, it is possible to improve the interest in the game.

FIG. 11-1(A) is an explanatory diagram showing an example of the content of the production control command used in this feature section 029SG. The production control command has, for example, a 2-byte configuration, with the first byte indicating MODE (command classification) and the second byte indicating EXT (command type). The first bit (bit 7) of MODE data is always set to "1", and the first bit of EXT data is set to "0". Note that the command format shown in FIG. 11-1(A) is an example, and other command formats may be used. Further, in this example, the control command is made up of two control signals, but the number of control signals making up the control command may be one, or may be three or more.

In the example shown in FIG. 11-1(A), command 8001H is a first variable display start command that specifies the start of variable display in a special pattern game using the first special pattern on the first special pattern display device 4A. . Command 8002H is a second variable display start command that specifies the start of variable display in the special pattern game using the second special pattern on the second special pattern display device 4B. The command 81XXH is a decoration that is variably displayed in the "left", "middle", and "right" decorative symbol display areas 5L, 5C, and 5R of the image display device 5 in response to the variable display of special symbols in the special symbol game. This is a variation pattern specification command that specifies a variation pattern (variation time (variable display time)) of a symbol (also referred to as a performance symbol). Here, XXH indicates an unspecified hexadecimal number, and may be any value that can be arbitrarily set according to the content of the instruction by the production control command. Note that in the variation pattern designation command, different EXT data is set depending on the variation pattern to be specified.

Command 8CXXH is a variable display result designation command, and is an effect control command that designates variable display results such as special symbols and decorative symbols. The variable display result specification command, for example, as shown in Figure 11-1 (B), determines whether the variable display result (also referred to as variable display result) is a "miss" or a "jackpot" (predetermined result). ) and the result of determining which of a plurality of types of jackpot is to be selected when the variable display result is "jackpot" (jackpot type determination result), different EXT data is set.

Among the variable display result designation commands, for example, as shown in FIG. 11-1(B), command 8C00H is the first variable display result designation command that indicates a predetermined result that the variable display result is "miss". . Command 8C01H is a second variable display result designation command that notifies the pre-determined result that the variable display result is "jackpot" and the jackpot type is "probable variable jackpot A" and the jackpot type determination result. Command 8C02H is a third variable display result designation command that notifies the pre-determined result that the variable display result is "jackpot" and the jackpot type is "probable variable jackpot B" and the jackpot type determination result. Command 8C03H is a fourth variable display result designation command that notifies the pre-determined result that the variable display result is "jackpot" and the jackpot type is "probable variable jackpot C" and the jackpot type determination result. Command 8C04H is a fifth variable display result designation command that notifies the predetermined result that the variable display result is "jackpot" and the jackpot type is "uncertain variable jackpot" and the jackpot type determination result.

Command 8F00H is a symbol confirmation command that specifies stopping (determination) of variation of decorative symbols in each of the "left", "middle", and "right" decorative symbol display areas 5L, 5C, and 5R in the image display device 5. The command 95XXH is a gaming state designation command that designates the current gaming state of the pachinko gaming machine 1. In the gaming state designation command, different EXT data is set depending on the current gaming state in the pachinko gaming machine 1, for example. As a specific example, command 9500H is a first gaming state designation command corresponding to a gaming state in which neither time saving control nor probability variable control is performed (low probability low base state, normal state), and command 9501H is a command in which time saving control is performed. This is a second gaming state designation command corresponding to a gaming state (low probability high base state, time saving state) in which probability change control is not performed. In addition, command 9502H is a third gaming state designation command corresponding to a gaming state in which probability variable control is performed but time saving control is not performed (high probability low base state, probability variable state without time saving), and command 9503H is a command 9503H for time saving control and probability variable. This command is a fourth gaming state designation command corresponding to the gaming states (high probability high base state, time saving variable probability state) which are both controlled.

The command A0XXH is a winning start designation command (also referred to as a "fanfare command") that designates the display of an effect image indicating the start of a jackpot game. Command A1XXH is a big winning hole opening notification command that notifies that the big winning hole is in an open state in the jackpot gaming state. Command A2XXH is a post-opening notification command for the jackpot that notifies that the jackpot has changed from the open state to the closed state during the jackpot gaming state. Command A3XXH is a winning end designation command that designates the display of the effect image at the end of the jackpot game.

In the winning start designation command and the winning end designation command, for example, the same EXT data as the variable display result designation command may be set, so that different EXT data may be set depending on the predetermined result or the jackpot type determination result. . Alternatively, in the winning start designation command and the winning end designation command, the correspondence relationship between the pre-determined result and the jackpot type determination result and the set EXT data may be made different from the correspondence relationship in the variable display result designation command. . In the notification command while the big winning hole is open and the notification command after the big winning hole is opened, for example, in response to the number of rounds (for example, "1" to "10") in the normal open jackpot state and the high speed open jackpot state, which will be described later, Different EXT data is set.

The command B100H is based on the fact that the game ball that passed through (entered) the first starting prize opening formed by the winning ball device 6A was detected by the first starting opening switch 22A and a starting prize (first starting winning) occurred. This is a first starting opening winning designation command that notifies that the first starting condition for executing the special symbol game using the first special symbol on the first special symbol display device 4A is satisfied. The command B200H is based on the fact that the game ball that has passed (entered) the second starting prize opening formed by the variable winning ball device 6B is detected by the second starting opening switch 22B and a starting prize (second starting prize) has occurred. , is a second starting opening winning designation command that notifies that the second starting condition for executing the special symbol game using the second special symbol on the second special symbol display device 4B is satisfied.

Command C1XXH is a first pending memory number notification command that notifies the first special figure pending memory number in order to make it possible to specify the special figure pending memory number. Command C2XXH is a second pending memory number notification command that notifies the second special figure pending memory number in order to make it possible to specify the special figure pending memory number. The first pending storage number notification command is, for example, when the first starting opening winning designation command is sent based on the game ball passing (entering) the first starting winning opening and the first starting condition being satisfied. , is transmitted from the main board 11 to the production control board 12. The second pending storage number notification command is, for example, when the second starting opening winning designation command is sent based on the game ball passing (entering) the second starting winning opening and the second starting condition being satisfied. , is transmitted from the main board 11 to the production control board 12. In addition, the first pending memory number notification command and the second pending memory number notification command are executed when either the first start condition or the second start condition is satisfied (when the number of pending memories decreases), the special figure game It may also be transmitted in response to the start of execution.

Instead of the first pending memory number notification command and the second pending memory number notification command, a total pending memory number notification command that notifies the total number of pending memories may be transmitted. That is, a total number of pending memories notification command may be used to notify an increase (or decrease) in the total number of pending memories.

Command C4XXH and command C6XXH are production control commands (winning determination result designation commands) that indicate the content of the winning determination result. Among these, the command C4XXH is a symbol designation command that indicates whether the variable display result is a "jackpot" and the type of jackpot (probable variable or non-probable variable) as a winning determination result. In addition, the command C6XXH is a fluctuation category command that indicates whether the random value for fluctuation pattern determination is a "non-reach", "super reach", or "other" fluctuation pattern as a winning determination result. It is.

Note that the commands shown in Figure 11-1(A) are just examples; some of these commands may be omitted, different commands may be used in place of these commands, or these commands may not be included. You may add a command different from the one in . For example, a prize ball number notification command that allows you to specify the number of prize balls that will be paid out based on the game balls entering each winning slot, and a gate notification command that allows you to notify that the game ball has passed through the passage gate 41. A passage notification command, a notification command for notifying the remaining number of times the probability change control or time saving control will be executed, etc. may be provided.

FIG. 11-2 is an explanatory diagram illustrating random numbers counted on the main board 11 side. As shown in FIG. 11-2, in this feature section 029SG, on the side of the main board 11, a random number MR1 for determining the special figure display result, a random number MR2 for determining the jackpot type, and a random number MR3 for determining the fluctuation pattern. , and the random number MR4 for determining the display result of the ordinary figure are controlled to be countable. Note that random numbers other than these may be used to enhance the gaming effect. The random numbers used to control the progress of games are also referred to as gaming random numbers.

The random number circuit 104 may be one that counts numerical data indicating some or all of these random numbers MR1 to MR4. For example, the CPU 103 uses a random counter different from the random number circuit 104, such as a random counter provided in the game control counter setting section 029SG154, to update various numerical data by software, thereby updating one of the random numbers MR1 to MR4. Numerical data indicating the number of parts may be counted.

The random number value MR1 for determining the special pattern display result is a random number value used to determine whether or not to control a variable display result such as a special pattern in a special pattern game as a "jackpot" into a jackpot game state. For example, It takes a value in the range of "1" to "65536". The random number MR2 for determining the jackpot type determines whether the jackpot type is "probable variable jackpot A", "probable variable jackpot B", "probable variable jackpot C", or "non-probable variable jackpot" when the variable display result is "jackpot". This is a random number value used to determine the value, and takes, for example, a value in the range of "1" to "100".

The random number value MR3 for determining the variation pattern is a random number value used to determine the variation pattern in the variable display of special symbols and decorative symbols to one of multiple types prepared in advance, and is, for example, "1" to " Takes a value in the range of ``997''.

The random number MR4 for determining the general pattern display result is used to determine whether the variable display result in the general pattern game by the normal pattern display 20 is to be "normal pattern hit" or "normal pattern hit". This is a random number value, for example, in the range of "3" to "13".

FIG. 11-3 shows an example of the structure of the special figure display result determination table stored in the ROM 101. In this feature section 029SG, a common special figure display result judgment table is used for the first special figure and the second special figure as the special figure display result judgment table, but the present invention is not limited to this. , separate special figure display result determination tables may be used for the first special figure and the second special figure.

The special figure display result determination table is a variable display result and a special figure game using the first special figure by the first special figure display device 4A and a special figure game using the second special figure by the second special figure display device 4B. Before the finalized special symbol is derived and displayed, it is referred to in order to determine whether or not to control the variable display result into a jackpot game state as a "jackpot" based on the random value MR1 for determining the special symbol display result. This is the table that will be used.

In the special figure display result determination table in this characteristic section 029SG, the special figure display results are determined depending on whether the gaming state in the pachinko gaming machine 1 is a normal state, a time-saving state (low probability state), or a variable probability state (high probability state). A numerical value (judgment value) that is compared with the random value MR1 for determining the graphic display result is assigned to the special figure display result of "big hit" or "miss".

In the special figure display result determination table, the table data indicating the determination value to be compared with the random number MR1 for determining the special figure display result is used to determine whether or not to treat the special figure display result as a "jackpot" and control it to a jackpot gaming state. This is the judgment data assigned to the result. In the special figure display result determination table in this feature section 029SG, when the gaming state is in a variable probability state (high probability state), more judgment values are determined as " It is assigned to the special figure display result of "Jackpot". As a result, in a variable probability state (high probability state) in which probability variable control is performed in the pachinko game machine 1, when the pachinko game machine 1 is in a normal state or a time saving state (low probability state), the special figure display result is set as a "jackpot" and the jackpot game state is controlled. Then, compared to the probability determined (approximately 1/300 in this feature section 029SG), the probability that the special figure display result is determined to be a "jackpot" and the jackpot game state is controlled becomes higher (approximately 1/300 in this feature section 029SG). /30). That is, in the special figure display result determination table, when the gaming state in the pachinko gaming machine 1 is a variable probability state (high probability state), it is determined that control is to be made into a jackpot gaming state compared to when it is in a normal state or a time saving state. In order to increase the probability, the determination data is assigned to the determination result of whether or not to control the jackpot game state.

FIG. 11-4(A) shows a configuration example of the jackpot type determination table stored in the ROM 101. The jackpot type determination table in this feature section 029SG determines whether the jackpot type is one of multiple types based on the random number MR2 for jackpot type determination when it is determined that the special figure display result is a "jackpot" and the jackpot gaming state is controlled. This is a table that is referenced to determine the In the jackpot type determination table, the special symbol for which variable display (fluctuating display) was performed in the special symbol game is the first special symbol (special symbol game by the first special symbol display device 4A) or the second special symbol (the special symbol game by the first special symbol display device 4A) 2 special pattern display device 4B), the numerical value (judgment value) compared with the random value MR2 for determining the jackpot type may be "non-probable variable jackpot", "probable variable jackpot A", or " They are assigned to a plurality of jackpot types such as "probable variable jackpot B" and "probable variable jackpot C."

Here, to explain the jackpot types in this feature section 029SG using FIG. 11-4(B), in this feature section 029SG, as jackpot types, high accuracy control and time saving control are performed after the end of the jackpot game state. "Probability variable jackpot A" and "Probability variable jackpot B" which are executed and move to a high-precision high base state, and a high-probability low base state in which high-precision control is executed but time-saving control is not executed after the jackpot gaming state ends. A "probable variable jackpot C" that transitions, and a "non-probable variable jackpot" that transitions to a low-probability-high base state after the end of the jackpot gaming state where only the time saving control is executed are set.

The jackpot game state by the "probable variable jackpot A" is a normal open jackpot in which rounds of changing the special variable winning ball device 7 to the first state advantageous to the player are repeatedly executed 10 times (so-called 10 rounds). On the other hand, the jackpot game state of "Probable Variable Jackpot B" is a normal open jackpot in which rounds are repeated five times (so-called 5 rounds) in which the special variable winning ball device 7 is changed to the first state advantageous to the player. . The jackpot game state by the "probable variable jackpot C" is a normal open jackpot in which rounds are repeatedly executed twice (so-called 2 rounds) in which the special variable winning ball device 7 is changed to the first state advantageous to the player. In addition, the jackpot game state due to the "non-probable variable jackpot" is a normal open jackpot in which rounds of changing the special variable winning ball device 7 to the first state advantageous to the player are repeated 10 times (so-called 10 rounds). . Therefore, the "probable variable jackpot A" is referred to as the 10 round (10R) fixed variable jackpot, the "probable variable jackpot B" is referred to as the 5 round (5R) variable variable jackpot, and the "probable variable jackpot C" is referred to as the 2 round (2R) variable variable jackpot. Sometimes called.

The high probability control and time saving control executed after the end of the jackpot game state of probability variable jackpot A to probability variable jackpot C are continuously executed until the jackpot occurs again after the end of the jackpot game state. Therefore, if the jackpot that occurs again is one of the probability variable jackpot A to probability variable jackpot C, the high probability control and time saving control are executed again after the jackpot gaming state ends, so the jackpot gaming state changes from the normal state. This is a so-called consecutive winning situation, which occurs continuously without any intervention.

On the other hand, the time saving control that is executed after the end of the jackpot game state due to "non-probable variable jackpot" requires that the special figure game be executed a predetermined number of times (100 times in this feature part 029SG), or that the special figure game be executed the predetermined number of times. The game ends by entering a jackpot game state before the game is executed.

In the setting example of the jackpot type determination table shown in Figure 11-4(A), depending on whether the variably displayed special figure is the first special figure or the second special figure, "probable variable jackpot A", " The assignment of determination values to the jackpot types of "probable variable jackpot B", "probable variable jackpot C", and "non-probable variable jackpot" is different. In other words, when the variably displayed special figure is the first special figure, the judgment value in the predetermined range (value in the range of "81" to "100") is "Probable Variable Jackpot B" or "Probable Variable Jacket B" with a small number of rounds. If the variablely displayed special figure is the second special figure, a judgment value is assigned to the jackpot type of "probable variable jackpot B" or "probable variable jackpot C". It has not been done. With such settings, the jackpot type is determined to be one of a plurality of types based on the first starting condition for starting the special pattern game using the first special pattern displayed by the first special pattern display device 4A. and a case where the jackpot type is determined to be one of a plurality of types based on the fulfillment of the second start condition for starting the special symbol game using the second special symbol by the second special symbol display device 4B. Therefore, the ratio at which the jackpot type is determined to be "probable variable jackpot B" or "probable variable jackpot C" with a small number of rounds can be varied. In particular, in the special game using the second special map, the jackpot type is not determined to be "probable variable jackpot B" or "probable variable jackpot C" to control the jackpot state with a small number of rounds, so for example, due to time saving control. Due to the high opening control, in a game state in which game balls are likely to enter the second starting prize opening formed by the variable winning ball device 6B, the game interest is reduced by avoiding frequent occurrence of a jackpot state in which the number of prize balls obtained is small. This can be prevented.

In addition, in the setting example of the jackpot type determination table shown in Figure 11-4 (A), the assignment of the judgment value to the jackpot type of "non-probable variation" is determined by whether it is the first special figure game or the second special figure game. Since it is the same regardless of whether it is a special game or not, the probability of a non-probable jackpot and the probability of a definite jackpot are the same regardless of whether it is the first special game or the second special game. It is said that

Therefore, as mentioned above, the allocation of judgment values for "probable strange jackpot B" and "probable strange jackpot C" differs depending on whether it is a special game of the first special figure or the second special figure. Therefore, the assignment of the judgment value for "Probable Variable Jackpot A" also differs depending on whether it is the first special figure game or the second special figure game, and for "Probable Variable Jackpot A" which has a large number of rounds, It is set so that it is easier to decide if it is a special figure game of a special figure than if it is a special figure game of the first special figure.

In addition, even in the case of the special game of the second special figure, the judgment value in a predetermined range that is different from the case of the special figure game of the first special figure is the jackpot of "probable strange jackpot B" or "probable strange jackpot C". It may be possible to assign it to a type. For example, in the case of a special pattern game with the second special pattern, the judgment value is smaller than in the case of a special pattern game with the first special pattern, for the jackpot types of "probable variable jackpot B" and "probable variable jackpot C". May be assigned. Alternatively, the jackpot type may be determined by referring to common table data regardless of whether it is a first special figure game or a second special figure game.

FIG. 11-5 shows a variation pattern in this characteristic part 029SG. In this feature part 029SG, among the cases where the variable display result is "miss", the variable display mode of the decorative pattern is "non-reach" and "reach", and the variable A plurality of fluctuation patterns are prepared in advance in response to the case where the display result is a "jackpot". In addition, the variation pattern corresponding to the case where the variable display result is "miss" and the variation display mode of the decorative symbol is "non-reach" is called a non-reach variation pattern (also referred to as "non-reach variation pattern"), A variation pattern corresponding to a case where the variable display result is "miss" and the variation display mode of the decorative symbol is "reach" is referred to as a reach variation pattern (also referred to as "reach variation pattern"). Further, the non-reach variation pattern and the reach variation pattern are included in the off-reach variation pattern corresponding to the case where the variable display result is "off". A variation pattern corresponding to a case where the variable display result is a "jackpot" is referred to as a jackpot variation pattern.

The jackpot fluctuation pattern and the reach fluctuation pattern include a normal reach fluctuation pattern in which a normal reach reach effect is executed, and a super reach fluctuation pattern in which a super reach reach effect is executed. In addition, in this feature part 029SG, one type of normal reach variation pattern is provided, but the present invention is not limited to this, and two or more types of normal reach variation patterns may be provided. In addition, in this characteristic part 029SG, the super reach variation patterns are super reach α, super reach β, super reach γ, super reach δ, super reach ε, super reach ζ, super reach η, super reach θ, super reach ι, super reach Although 11 types of variation patterns of reach κ and super reach λ are provided, the present invention is not limited to this, and only 12 or more or 10 or less types of super reach variation patterns may be provided.

In addition, the super reach variation pattern in this feature part 029SG is a variation pattern of super reach α, a variation pattern in which the variable display result is a jackpot (PB1-2), a variation pattern in which the variable display result is a jackpot (PA2-2), and a variation pattern of super reach β. As a fluctuation pattern, there is a fluctuation pattern where the variable display result is a jackpot (PB1-3), a fluctuation pattern where the variable display result is a jackpot (PA2-3), and a fluctuation pattern where the variable display result is a jackpot (PB1-4) as a fluctuation pattern of super reach γ. ), a variation pattern (PA2-4) in which the variable display result deviates as a variation pattern for super reach δ, a variation pattern in which the variable display result deviates as a variation pattern in super reach ε (PA2-5), and a variation pattern in which the variable display result deviates as a variation pattern in super reach ε. A fluctuation pattern (PA2-6) in which the variable display result becomes a jackpot as a fluctuation pattern of super reach ζ (PB1-5), a fluctuation pattern (PA2-7) in which the variable display result is a jackpot, and a fluctuation pattern in super reach η There is a variation pattern (PB1-6) in which the variable display result is a jackpot, a variation pattern (PA2-8) in which the variable display result is a jackpot, and a variation pattern (PB1-7) in which the variable display result is a jackpot as a variation pattern of super reach θ. The fluctuation pattern that results in a loss (PA2-9), the fluctuation pattern that results in a variable display result as a jackpot (PB1-8) as a fluctuation pattern of Super Reach ι, the fluctuation pattern that results in a loss (PA2-10), and the fluctuation pattern of Super Reach κ. As a fluctuation pattern, there is a fluctuation pattern in which the variable display result is a jackpot (PB1-9), a fluctuation pattern in which the variable display result is a jackpot (PA2-11), and a fluctuation pattern in which the variable display result is a jackpot (PB1-10) as a fluctuation pattern of super reach λ. ) and a deviation pattern (PA2-12) are provided.

As shown in FIG. 11-5, the special symbol variation time of the normal reach variation pattern in which the normal reach variation pattern in this feature section 029SG is executed is set shorter than that of the super reach variation pattern.

In addition, in this feature section 029SG, since the variable display result is set to be a "jackpot" and the jackpot expectation level increases in the order of super reach, normal reach, and non-reach, in the normal reach variation pattern and the super reach variation pattern, With some exceptions, the longer the special symbol fluctuation time, the higher the expectation of a jackpot.

In particular, the special symbol variation time of the super reach β variation pattern is set longer than the special symbol variation time of the super reach alpha variation pattern, and the special symbol variation time of the super reach γ variation pattern is set to be longer than that of the super reach beta variation pattern. The special figure variation time of the super reach δ variation pattern is set longer than the special figure variation time of the super reach γ variation pattern, and the special figure variation time of the super reach ε variation pattern is set longer than the special figure variation time of the super reach δ variation pattern. The variation time is set longer than the special symbol variation time of the Super Reach δ variation pattern, and the special symbol variation time of the Super Reach ζ variation pattern is set longer than the special symbol variation time of the Super Reach ε variation pattern. Therefore, the special symbol fluctuation time of the super reach η fluctuation pattern is set longer than the special symbol fluctuation time of the super reach ζ fluctuation pattern, and the special symbol fluctuation time of the super reach θ fluctuation pattern is set longer than that of the super reach η fluctuation pattern. The special figure variation time of the super reach ι variation pattern is set longer than the special figure variation time of the super reach θ variation pattern, and the special figure variation time of the super reach κ variation pattern is set longer than the special figure variation time of the super reach θ variation pattern. The fluctuation time is set longer than the special figure fluctuation time of the super reach ι fluctuation pattern.

Note that among these super reach α variation patterns to super reach κ variation patterns, the super reach δ variation pattern and the super reach ε variation pattern do not have a variation pattern in which the variable display result becomes a jackpot. In other words, among these super reach α variation patterns to super reach κ variation patterns, of the variation patterns excluding the super reach δ variation pattern and the super reach ε variation pattern, the super reach α variation pattern has the shortest special symbol variation time and The jackpot expectation level is set low, and the jackpot expectation level is set to increase as the special symbol fluctuation time becomes longer.

Furthermore, in this feature section 029SG, a super reach λ variation pattern is provided as a super reach variation pattern that has a higher jackpot expectation than the super reach κ variation pattern. The super reach λ variation pattern is exceptionally set so that the special symbol variation time is longer than the super reach ζ variation pattern and shorter than the super reach η variation pattern.

In addition, in this feature section 029SG, as described later, these fluctuation patterns are determined using only the random number value MR3 for determining fluctuation patterns, but the present invention is not limited to this. For example, in addition to the random number MR3 for determining the variation pattern, a random number for determining the type of variation pattern is provided, and the type of the variation pattern is first determined from these random numbers for determining the type of variation, and then the type of variation pattern is determined. A variation pattern belonging to the determined type may be determined.

In addition, as shown in Figures 11-5 and 11-7 (A), the Super Reach α fluctuation pattern (PA2-2, PB1-2) changes the length of the execution period as a reach effect of Super Reach during variable display. is a variation pattern in which the ready-to-win effect A of L1 is executed and a variable display result is notified as the result of the ready-to-reach effect A. As shown in Figures 11-5 and 11-7 (B), the Super Reach β fluctuation pattern (PA2-3, PB1-3) has an execution period length of L2 as a reach effect of Super Reach during variable display. This is a variation pattern in which the ready-to-reach effect B of (L2>L1) is executed and a variable display result is notified as the effect of the ready-to-reach effect B.

As shown in FIGS. 11-7(A) and 11-7(B), the super reach α variation pattern and the super reach β variation pattern vary from the variable display start timing to the end timing of the reach effect (notification of variable display results). It is also a variation pattern in which it is possible to execute a meter effect that suggests the execution of a highly anticipated reach effect development notification effect over the timing). In addition, as mentioned above, the length L2 of the execution period of reach effect B is set to be longer than the length L1 of the execution period of reach effect A, so the length of the execution period of the meter effect in the super reach β variation pattern is The length L5 is set to be longer than the length L4 of the meter performance executable period in the super reach α variation pattern (L5>L4).

As shown in Figures 11-5 and 11-7 (C), the super reach γ variation pattern (PA2-4, PB1-4) is used as reach effect C or reach effect D for super reach during variable display. This is a variation pattern in which a variable display result is announced as a result of these ready-to-reach effects C or D. Incidentally, the execution period of both the ready-to-reach effect C and the ready-to-reach effect D is set to the length L3. In addition, the super reach γ variation pattern is such that during the execution period of reach effect C and reach effect D, after the variable display result is announced as the effect of reach effect C and reach effect D, reach effect H is further executed. Which one will be executed? The reach performance H development notification performance that notifies you that reach performance H development notification performance will notify you that either reach performance F or reach performance I will be executed. It is also a fluctuating pattern that allows execution of a branch destination suggestion effect.

As shown in Figures 11-5 and 11-7 (D), the super reach δ variation pattern (PA2-5) is a reach effect B with an execution period of L2 as a reach effect of super reach during variable display. After executing and notifying that the variable display result is a failure, it is possible to execute a reach performance E development suggestion performance that suggests development to reach performance E (length of executable period for reach performance E development suggestion performance: L6a) This is a fluctuating pattern that does not ultimately develop into reach effect E and notifies the failure. In addition, the super reach δ fluctuation pattern, like the super reach β fluctuation pattern, is a fluctuation that allows the meter performance to be executed from the start timing of the variable display to the end timing of the reach performance (length of the meter performance executable period: L5). It is also a pattern, and the length L5 of the meter effect executable period is set longer than the length L6a of the reach effect E development suggestion effect executable period.

As shown in FIG. 11-5 and FIG. 11-8 (E), the super reach ε variation pattern (PA2-6) is used as a reach effect of super reach during variable display, such as reach effect C or reach effect D (whichever reach effect). The length of the performance execution period is also variable. After executing L3) and notifying that the display result is a failure, it is possible to execute the reach performance G development suggestion performance that suggests the development to the reach performance G, and finally reach This is a fluctuating pattern that notifies performance G without developing it. Further, the super reach ε variation pattern is also a variation pattern that allows execution of a branch destination suggestion performance during the execution period of the reach performance C and the reach performance D.

As shown in Figures 11-5 and 11-8 (F), the super reach ζ fluctuation pattern (PA2-7, PB1-5) has an execution period length of L2 as a reach effect of super reach during variable display. After executing the reach performance B and notifying that the variable display result is a failure, the reach performance E development suggestion performance can be executed, and the reach performance E development notification performance ( Length of the execution period of the ready-to-reach effect E development notification effect: This is a variation pattern in which the ready-to-reach effect E is executed after executing L6b). The super reach ζ variation pattern is also a variation pattern in which the meter effect can be executed (length of the meter effect executable period: L5) from the start timing of the variable display to the end timing of the reach effect B. The length L5 of the meter performance executable period is set longer than the length L6a of the ready-to-reach performance E development suggestion performance executable period. In addition, the length L6b of the execution period of the reach effect E development notification effect is set shorter than the length L5 of the meter effect executable period. In addition, in the super reach ζ variation pattern, the length of the period from the start timing of the reach effect E development notification effect to the end timing of the reach effect E (the notification timing of the variable display result) is set to L11.

As shown in FIGS. 11-5 and 11-8 (G), the super reach η variation pattern (PA2-8, PB1-6) executes reach effect A as a reach effect of super reach during variable display, A high-expectation reach performance that notifies you that from the middle of the reach performance A, the reach performance A will be replaced by a reach performance with a high expectation of jackpot (for this feature, reach performance F or reach performance I, which will be described later). This is a variation pattern in which the development notification performance is executed for L7 (L7>L6b), which is longer than the execution period length L6b of the reach effect E development notification effect, and the reach effect F is further executed. In addition, with the super reach η variation pattern, the meter effect can be executed from the start timing of the variable display to the timing when reach effect A switches to high expectation reach effect development notification effect (reach effect A changes to high expectation reach in the middle) Since the performance is switched to the performance development notification performance, the length of the meter performance executable period is also a variation pattern of L4'), which is shorter than L4. In addition, in the super reach η fluctuation pattern, the length of the period from the start timing of the highly anticipated reach performance development notification performance to the end timing of the reach performance F (notification timing of variable display results) is the reach performance in the super reach ζ fluctuation pattern. The length of the period from the start timing of the E development notification performance to the end timing of the ready-to-reach performance E is set to be longer than L11 (L12>L11).

As shown in Figures 11-5 and 11-8 (H), the super reach θ variation pattern (PA2-9, PB1-7) is used as reach effect C or reach effect D for super reach during variable display. (The length of the execution period of any reach effect is L3), and after informing that the variable display result is a failure in these reach effects C or D, it is possible to execute the reach effect G development suggestion effect. , Furthermore, the reach performance G development notification performance that notifies that the reach performance G will develop is executed over L8 (L7>L8), which is shorter than the execution period L7 of the high expectation reach performance development notification performance. This is a variation pattern in which a reach effect G is further executed. Further, the super reach θ variation pattern is also a variation pattern that allows execution of branch destination suggestion performance during the execution period of reach performance C and reach performance D.

As shown in Figures 11-5 and 11-9 (I), the super reach ι variation pattern (PA2-10, PB1-8) is used as reach effect C or reach effect D for super reach during variable display. A reach performance H development notification is executed to inform that the reach performance H will be developed, and a preliminary performance and a precursor performance will be executed in place of the reach performance C or reach performance D from the middle of these reach performance C or reach performance D, and that the reach performance will further develop into reach performance H. This is a variation pattern in which a performance is executed and a reach performance H is executed. Further, the super reach ι variation pattern is also a variation pattern that allows execution of branch destination suggestion performance during the execution period of reach performance C and reach performance D.

As shown in Figures 11-5 and 11-9 (J), the super reach κ fluctuation pattern (PA2-11, PB1-9) is used as reach effect C or reach effect D for super reach during variable display. , and from the middle of reach performance C or reach performance D, perform a preliminary performance and a precursor performance instead of reach performance C or reach performance D, and further develop a high expectation reach performance whose execution period is L7. This is a variation pattern in which a notification effect is executed and a reach effect I is executed. Further, the super reach κ variation pattern is also a variation pattern that allows execution of a branch destination suggestion performance during the execution period of the reach performance C and the reach performance D. In addition, in the super reach κ fluctuation pattern, the length of the period from the start timing of the high expectation reach performance development notification performance to the end timing of reach performance I (the notification timing of variable display results) is the same as the high expectation level in the super reach η fluctuation pattern. It is set to L13 (L13>L12>L11), which is longer than L12, which is the length of the period from the start timing of the ready-to-win performance development notification performance to the end timing of the ready-to-win performance F.

The super reach λ fluctuation pattern (PA2-12, PB1-10) is a highly expected reach performance development whose execution period length is L7 from a timing earlier than the reach in other super reach fluctuation patterns during variable display. This is a variation pattern in which a notification effect is executed and a reach effect I is executed. In addition, with the super reach λ fluctuation pattern, the meter effect can be executed from the start timing of the variable display to the start timing of the high expectation reach effect development notification effect (from the timing before the reach to the high expectation reach effect development notification effect). Since the performance is executed, the length of the meter performance executable period is also a variation pattern of L4'': L4>L4'>L4'', which is even shorter than L4'. In addition, in the super reach λ variation pattern, the length of the period from the start timing of the highly anticipated reach performance development notification performance to the end timing of reach performance I (variable display result notification timing) is L13 (L13 >L12>L11).

In particular, as shown in FIGS. 11-10(A) and 11-10(B), the high expectation reach performance development notification performance in this feature section 029SG is by darkening the display area of the image display device 5. A blackout effect that makes it difficult to see the effect image displayed on the image display device 5, a pre-stage effect that displays the previous lines on the image display device 5 after the black-out effect, and a switching effect after the first-stage effect. , after the switching effect, displaying the last lines on the image display device 5; and after the subsequent effect, move the movable body 32 from the origin position above the image display device 5 to the front side of the display area of the image display device 5. A movable body performance is performed in which the movable body is caused to fall (move) to a performance position that overlaps the approximately central position.

As shown in FIGS. 11-10(B) and 11-55, the first stage performance displays the content of the lines spoken by the character displayed on the image display device 5 in the display area of the image display device 5 as a character image 029SG007. This is also an effect that is output as audio information from the speakers 8L and 8R.

As shown in FIGS. 11-10(B) and 11-55, the second-stage production displays, following the first-stage production, the content of the lines spoken by the character as a character image 029SG008 in the display area of the image display device 5, This is an effect that is output as audio information from the speakers 8L and 8R.

As shown in Figure 11-10 (B), the line in the first part is ``I'm not alone...I'll show you everyone's power!'' and the line in the second part is ``Miracle Attack!''

More specifically, the first stage performance consists of a first period and a second period, and in the first period, the line "You are not alone..." is output from the speakers 8L and 8R, and In the display area of the image display device 5, the seven characters "You are not alone..." are displayed. Then, in the second period, the line "I'll show you everyone's power!" is output from the speakers 8L and 8R, and the line "I'll show you everyone's power!" The text appears below the text "You're not alone...". In addition, the latter stage effect is also composed of a first period and a second period, and in the first period, the lines of "Miracle" are output from the speakers 8L and 8R, and are displayed in the display area of the image display device 5. The four characters of the word "miracle" are displayed. In the second period, the words "Attack!" are output from the speakers 8L and 8R, and the five letters "Attack!" are displayed below the word "Miracle" in the display area of the image display device 5. Is displayed.

In other words, in the first stage performance and the second stage performance in this feature part 029SG, the number of characters displayed in the first period of the first stage performance is greater than the number of characters displayed in the first period of the second stage performance, and The number of characters displayed in the second period is greater than the number of characters displayed in the second period of the subsequent stage effect.

In addition, as shown in Figure 11-10 (B), the manner in which the lines are displayed in the first stage performance is different from the manner in which the lines are displayed in the second stage performance. It is arranged to be displayed in a display mode with a higher degree of emphasis than the mode.

For example, in the first stage effect, the background screen and character image of the image display device 5 are displayed in a dark manner, and the character image 029SG007 consisting of multiple characters (for example, "You are not alone...") is gradually changed in the first period. The character image 029SG007, which is displayed in a manner that becomes larger and brighter (fade-in), and then consists of multiple characters (for example, "I'll show you everyone's power!"), gradually becomes larger and brighter in the second period. It is displayed in a fade-in manner. In addition, after the character image 029SG007 (for example, "I'm not alone...I'll show you everyone's strength!") is displayed the largest and brightest, it is displayed in a manner that gradually becomes smaller and darker (fade out). and eventually disappear. Note that the character image 029SG007 may be moved while fading in or out.

On the other hand, in the second stage effect, the background screen of the image display device 5 is displayed in a brighter manner than in the first stage effect, and a plurality of character images 029SG008 consisting of one character (for example, "mi", "ra", "ku", "ru") are displayed. ) is displayed (dynamically displayed) as it rotates from the right side of the display screen toward the center of the display screen in the first period (dynamic display), and displays multiple character images 029SG008 (for example, "A", "T", "T", "K", "!") are displayed (frame-in) as if they were rotating from the bottom of the display screen to the center in the second period (dynamic display). be done. In addition, after these character images 029SG008 (for example, "Miracle Attack!") are displayed the largest and brightest, they move in a radial manner toward the surroundings, and then eventually disappear outside the display screen. It is displayed in a frame-out mode.

As shown in Figure 11-10(B), the character image 029SG007 in the first stage effect is small, flat (two-dimensional), moves slowly (speed of change in display mode due to fade-in), and is displayed with low brightness. . On the other hand, the character image 029SG008 in the second stage rendering is larger, three-dimensional (three-dimensional), faster in movement (speed of change in display mode (moving speed) due to frame-in), and higher in brightness than the character image 029SG007 in the first stage rendering. (See Figure 11-55).

In addition, if the maximum size and brightness of character image 029SG008 in the latter stage performance are larger and brighter than the maximum size and brightness of character image 029SG007 in the first stage performance, the character image at the time of fade-in or frame-in The size and brightness of a portion of the image may have an inverse relationship. Further, although the contents of the dialogue are different between the first stage performance and the second stage performance, at least some of the contents may be the same.

In this way, the degree of emphasis is higher when the size of the character image that makes up the serif is larger than when it is small, the degree of emphasis is higher when the shape is three-dimensional than the one that is two-dimensional, and the degree is emphasized when the character image is fast rather than slow. It can be said that the degree of emphasis is higher when the brightness is higher than when the brightness is low. In addition, although the size, form, movement, and brightness of the character image have been exemplified in the latter stage rendering with a higher degree of emphasis than the earlier stage rendering, the present invention is not limited to this, and the latter stage rendering It is sufficient that the degree of emphasis of at least one of the size, form, movement, and brightness of the character image is higher than that of the character image of the preceding stage effect. In addition to the above, for example, the degree of emphasis includes, for example, for the thickness of characters, thicker ones are higher than thin ones, and for colors, higher saturation and brightness are higher than lower ones. Good too. Furthermore, in addition to the display mode of the character image itself, the degree of emphasis may be increased by displaying a special image such as an effect image around the character image.

FIG. 11-6 is an explanatory diagram of a method for determining a variation pattern in this feature section 029SG. In this feature section 029SG, the variation pattern determination table to be selected differs depending on the display result of the variable display to be executed and the number of pending memories.

Specifically, as shown in Figure 11-6, if the variable display result is a jackpot, select the jackpot variation pattern determination table, and change the variation pattern to PB1-1 using the jackpot variation pattern determination table. (Normal reach jackpot fluctuation pattern), PB1-2 (super reach α jackpot fluctuation pattern), PB1-3 (super reach β jackpot fluctuation pattern), PB1-4 (super reach γ jackpot fluctuation pattern), PB1-5 (Super reach ζ jackpot variation pattern), PB1-6 (super reach η jackpot variation pattern), PB1-7 (super reach θ jackpot variation pattern), PB1-8 (super reach ι jackpot variation pattern), PB1 -9 (super reach κ jackpot variation pattern) and PB1-10 (super reach λ jackpot variation pattern).

In addition, when determining the fluctuation pattern using the jackpot fluctuation pattern determination table, set the determination ratio of PB1-1 (normal reach jackpot fluctuation pattern) to the lowest, and set the determination ratio of PB1-2 (super reach α jackpot fluctuation pattern) to the lowest. , PB1-3 (Super reach β jackpot variation pattern), PB1-4 (Super reach γ jackpot variation pattern), PB1-5 (Super reach ζ jackpot variation pattern), PB1-6 (Super reach η jackpot variation) pattern), PB1-7 (Super reach θ jackpot variation pattern), PB1-8 (Super reach ι jackpot variation pattern), PB1-9 (Super reach κ jackpot variation pattern), PB1-10 (Super reach λ jackpot variation pattern) (variation pattern)) (Decision ratio of each super reach variation pattern when selecting jackpot variation pattern determination table: PB1-2<PB1-3<PB1-4<PB1-5< PB1-6<PB1-7<PB1-8<PB1-9<PB1-10).

In addition, in this feature part 029SG, if the variable display result is a jackpot, the same jackpot variation pattern determination table is used to determine the variation pattern regardless of the jackpot type. However, the present invention is not limited to, and provides a plurality of jackpot fluctuation pattern determination tables with different determination ratios among PB1-1, PB1-2, and PB1-3, and at least two or more jackpot fluctuation patterns have different determination ratios. A plurality of jackpot variation pattern determination tables may be provided, and the variation pattern may be determined using different jackpot variation pattern determination tables depending on the jackpot type. By doing this, it is possible to create a variable pattern that is easily determined for each jackpot type, so it is possible to draw the player's attention to which variable display of the variable pattern the variable display result is a jackpot, You can improve your interest in gaming.

In addition, if the variable display result is "Loss" in the normal gaming state (low base state) and the number of pending memory of variable special symbols is 2 or less, select the variation pattern determination table A for losses, and select the corresponding variation pattern judgment table A. Using variation pattern determination table A for misses, change the variation patterns to PA1-1 (non-reach variation pattern), PA2-1 (normal reach variation pattern), PA2-2 (super reach α variation pattern), PA2 -3 (variation pattern of deviation from super reach β), PA2-4 (variation pattern of deviation from super reach γ), PA2-5 (variation pattern of deviation from super reach δ), PA2-6 (variation pattern of deviation from super reach ε) , PA2-7 (variation pattern of super reach ζ deviation), PA2-8 (variation pattern of super reach η deviation), PA2-9 (variation pattern of super reach θ deviation), PA2-10 (variation pattern of super reach ι deviation) pattern), PA2-11 (a variation pattern in which super reach κ is off), and PA2-12 (a variation pattern in which super reach λ is off).

In addition, if the variable display result is "Low" in the normal gaming state (low base state) and the number of pending memory of variable special symbols is 3, select the fluctuation pattern determination table B for the loss, and Using the variation pattern determination table B, change the variation patterns to PA1-2 (shortened variation pattern with non-reach out), PA2-1 (variation pattern with normal reach out), PA2-2 (variation pattern with out of super reach α), PA2 -3 (variation pattern of deviation from super reach β), PA2-4 (variation pattern of deviation from super reach γ), PA2-5 (variation pattern of deviation from super reach δ), PA2-6 (variation pattern of deviation from super reach ε) , PA2-7 (variation pattern of super reach ζ deviation), PA2-8 (variation pattern of super reach η deviation), PA2-9 (variation pattern of super reach θ deviation), PA2-10 (variation pattern of super reach ι deviation) pattern), PA2-11 (a variation pattern in which super reach κ is off), and PA2-12 (a variation pattern in which super reach λ is off).

In addition, if the variable display result is "Low" in the normal gaming state (low base state) and the number of pending memory of variable special symbols is 4, select the fluctuation pattern determination table C for the loss, and Using the variation pattern determination table C, change the variation patterns to PA1-3 (shortened variation pattern with non-reach out), PA2-1 (variation pattern with normal reach out), PA2-2 (variation pattern with out of super reach α), PA2 -3 (variation pattern of deviation from super reach β), PA2-4 (variation pattern of deviation from super reach γ), PA2-5 (variation pattern of deviation from super reach δ), PA2-6 (variation pattern of deviation from super reach ε) , PA2-7 (variation pattern of super reach ζ deviation), PA2-8 (variation pattern of super reach η deviation), PA2-9 (variation pattern of super reach θ deviation), PA2-10 (variation pattern of super reach ι deviation) pattern), PA2-11 (a variation pattern in which super reach κ is off), and PA2-12 (a variation pattern in which super reach λ is off).

In addition, if the variable display result is "miss" in the time saving state (high base state), select the variation pattern determination table D for failure, and change the fluctuation pattern to PA1-4 using the fluctuation pattern determination table D for failure. (Non-reach deviation pattern for time saving), PA2-1 (Normal reach deviation pattern), PA2-2 (Super reach α deviation pattern), PA2-3 (Super reach β deviation pattern), PA2 -4 (variation pattern of deviation from super reach γ), PA2-5 (variation pattern of deviation from super reach δ), PA2-6 (variation pattern of deviation from super reach ε), PA2-7 (variation pattern of deviation from super reach ζ) , PA2-8 (variation pattern of deviation in super reach η), PA2-9 (variation pattern of deviation in super reach θ), PA2-10 (variation pattern of deviation in super reach ι), PA2-11 (variation pattern of deviation in super reach κ) pattern) and PA2-12 (variation pattern with super reach λ deviation).

In other words, when the variable display result in this feature section 029SG is "off", the special figure is Since the rate at which variable display is executed is higher due to the shortening variation patterns (PA1-2, PA1-3, PA1-4) whose variation time is shorter than the normal non-reach variation pattern (PA1-1), While preventing the game from being delayed, it is possible to shorten the period until the next variable display result becomes a jackpot.

In addition, when determining the fluctuation pattern using the fluctuation pattern determination tables A to D for a loss, the fluctuation pattern for a non-reach loss (PA1-1 for the fluctuation pattern determination table for a loss, PA1-1 for the fluctuation pattern determination table for a loss; If so, set the highest determination ratio for PA1-2, PA1-3 if the fluctuation pattern judgment table for loss is PA1-4, PA1-4 if the fluctuation pattern judgment table for loss is the highest, and set the determination ratio of PA2-1 (normal reach is ), PA2-2 (variation pattern of deviation from super reach α), PA2-3 (variation pattern of deviation from super reach β), PA2-4 (variation pattern of deviation from super reach γ), PA2-5 (variation pattern of deviation from super reach γ) δ deviation pattern), PA2-6 (super reach ε deviation pattern), PA2-7 (super reach ζ deviation pattern), PA2-8 (super reach η deviation pattern), PA2-9 ( PA2-10 (variation pattern of super reach θ deviation), PA2-11 (variation pattern of super reach κ deviation), PA2-12 (variation pattern of super reach λ deviation) It is only necessary to set the ratio to be lower (determination ratio of each super reach fluctuation pattern when selecting the outlier fluctuation pattern determination table: PA2-12<PA2-11<PA2-10<PA2-9<PA2-8<PA2-7 <PA2-6<PA2-5<PA2-4<PA2-3<PA2-2).

By setting the determination ratio of each fluctuation pattern in each fluctuation pattern determination table as described above, for the super reach fluctuation pattern, the jackpot expectation of the super reach α fluctuation pattern is set to be the lowest, and the super reach β fluctuation The jackpot expectation of the pattern is set higher than the jackpot expectation of the Super Reach α fluctuation pattern, and the jackpot expectation of the Super Reach γ fluctuation pattern is set higher than the jackpot expectation of the Super Reach β fluctuation pattern. The jackpot expectation for the Super Reach ζ variation pattern is set higher than the jackpot expectation for the Super Reach γ variation pattern, and the jackpot expectation for the Super Reach η variation pattern is set higher than the jackpot expectation for the Super Reach ζ variation pattern. The jackpot expectation of the super reach θ variation pattern is set higher than the jackpot expectation of the super reach η variation pattern, and the jackpot expectation of the super reach ι variation pattern is set higher than the jackpot expectation of the super reach θ variation pattern. The jackpot expectation of the super reach κ variation pattern is set higher than the jackpot expectation of the super reach ι variation pattern, and the jackpot expectation of the super reach λ variation pattern is set higher than the jackpot expectation of the super reach κ variation pattern. The expected jackpot is set higher than the expected jackpot. As for the super reach δ variation pattern and the super reach ε variation pattern, as described above, only the variation patterns in the case where the variable display result is off are provided, so the jackpot expectation level is 0.

Next, the image display device 5 in this feature section 029SG will be explained. In the display area of the image display device 5, "left", "middle", and "right" effect pattern display areas 5L, 5C, and 5R are arranged. Furthermore, a first pending storage display area 029SG005D and a second pending storage display area 029SG005U are set at two locations on the left and right at the bottom of the display area of the image display device 5. In the first pending memory display area 029SG005D and the second pending memory display area 029SG005U, a pending memory display that specifiably displays the variable display pending memory number (special figure pending memory number) corresponding to the special figure game is displayed. . In this feature section 029SG, these pending displays can be displayed in multiple display modes, and depending on which display mode the pending memory display is displayed, a jackpot can be won in the variable display corresponding to the pending memory display. It is possible to execute a look-ahead preview performance (also referred to as a pending display preview performance) that changes the rate of control in the gaming state (jackpot expectation level).

Furthermore, on the right side of the image display device 5 in the feature section 029SG, a meter 029SG005M is displayed that can change the display mode to five stages (six stages if the state of not performing the meter performance) is included as the aforementioned meter performance. .

The RAM 102 in this feature section 029SG includes a game control data holding area 029SG150 as shown in FIG. is provided. The game control data holding area 029SG150 shown in FIG. 11-12 includes a first special symbol reservation storage section 029SG151A, a second special symbol reservation storage section 029SG151B, a regular symbol reservation storage section 029SG151C, and a game control flag setting section 029SG152. , a game control timer setting section 029SG153, a game control counter setting section 029SG154, and a game control buffer setting section 029SG155.

The first special figure reservation storage unit 029SG151A stores special figures that have not yet been started, although the game ball has passed (entered) the first starting prize opening formed by the winning ball device 6A and a starting prize (first starting prize) has occurred. Stores pending data of a figure game (a special figure game using the first special figure on the first special figure display device 4A). As an example, the first special figure reservation storage unit 029SG151A associates the winning order (game ball detection order) to the first starting prize opening with the reservation number, and sets the first starting condition for the passing (entering) of the game ball. Numerical data indicating the random number MR1 for determining the special figure display result, the random number MR2 for determining the type of jackpot, the random number MR3 for determining the fluctuation pattern, etc., extracted from the random number circuit 104 etc. by the CPU 103 based on the establishment, are held as pending data. , and are stored until the number reaches a predetermined upper limit (for example, "4"). The pending data stored in the first special figure pending storage unit 029SG151A indicates that the execution of the special figure game using the first special figure is on hold, and the variable display result (special figure display) in this special figure game is suspended. This is pending information that makes it possible to determine whether or not there will be a jackpot based on the result).

The second special figure reservation storage unit 029SG151B indicates that the game ball has passed (entered) the second starting winning hole formed by the variable winning ball device 6B and a starting winning (second starting winning) has occurred, but has not started yet. Stores pending data of a special figure game (a special figure game using the second special figure on the second special figure display device 4B). As an example, the second special figure reservation storage unit 029SG151B associates the winning order (game ball detection order) to the second starting prize opening with the reservation number, and sets the second starting condition for the passing (entering) of the game ball. Numerical data indicating the random number MR1 for determining the special figure display result, the random number MR2 for determining the type of jackpot, the random number MR3 for determining the fluctuation pattern, etc., extracted from the random number circuit 104 etc. by the CPU 103 based on the establishment, are held as pending data. is stored until the number reaches a predetermined upper limit (for example, "4"). The pending data stored in the second special figure pending storage unit 029SG151B indicates that the execution of the special figure game using the second special figure is on hold, and the variable display result (special figure display) in this special figure game is suspended. This is pending information that makes it possible to determine whether or not there will be a jackpot based on the result).

In addition, there is hold information (first hold information) based on the establishment of the first starting condition due to the game ball passing (entering) the first starting winning opening, and holding information (first holding information) based on the establishment of the first starting condition due to the gaming ball passing (entering) the second starting winning opening. The reservation information (second reservation information) based on the establishment of the second starting prize may be stored in a common reservation storage unit in association with the reservation number. In this case, starting hole data indicating whether the game ball passed through (entered) the first starting winning hole or the second starting winning hole may be included in the hold information and stored in association with the holding number. .

The normal figure reservation storage unit 029SG151C stores the hold information of the normal figure game which has not been started by the normal symbol display 20 even though the game ball passing through the passage gate 41 has been detected by the gate switch 21. For example, the standard figure reservation storage unit 029SG151C associates the game balls with the reservation numbers in the order in which they pass through the passage gate 41, and determines the standard figure display result extracted from the random number circuit 104 etc. by the CPU 103 based on the passage of the game balls. Numerical data indicating the random number MR4 for the purpose is stored as pending data until the number reaches a predetermined upper limit (for example, "4").

The game control flag setting section 029SG152 is provided with a plurality of types of flags whose states can be updated according to the progress of the game in the pachinko game machine 1. For example, the game control flag setting unit 029SG152 stores data indicating the value of the flag and data indicating the on state or off state for each of the plurality of types of flags.

The game control timer setting section 029SG153 is provided with various timers used to control the progress of the game in the pachinko game machine 1. For example, the game control timer setting section 029SG153 stores data indicating timer values for each of a plurality of types of timers.

The game control counter setting section 029SG154 is provided with a plurality of types of counters for counting count values used to control the progress of the game in the pachinko game machine 1. For example, the game control counter setting section 029SG154 stores data indicating count values for each of a plurality of types of counters. Here, the game control counter setting unit 029SG154 may be provided with a random counter for counting part or all of the gaming random numbers so that the CPU 103 can update them by software.

The random counter of the game control counter setting unit 029SG154 stores random numbers not generated by the random number circuit 104, for example, numerical data indicating random numbers MR2 to MR4, as a random count value, and according to the execution of software by the CPU 103, Numerical data indicating each random value is updated regularly or irregularly. The software executed by the CPU 103 to update the random count value may be for updating the random count value separately from the numerical data updating operation in the random number circuit 104, or may be for updating the random count value separately from the numerical data updating operation in the random number circuit 104, or may be for updating the random count value separately from the numerical data updating operation in the random number circuit 104. The random count value may be updated by performing predetermined processing such as scrambling processing or arithmetic processing on all or part of the numerical data obtained.

The game control buffer setting unit 029SG155 is provided with various buffers that temporarily store data used to control the progress of the game in the pachinko game machine 1. For example, the game control buffer setting unit 029SG155 stores data indicating buffer values in each of a plurality of types of buffers.

The RAM 122 mounted on the production control board 12 shown in FIG. 3 has an area for holding various data used to control production operations, such as data storage for production control as shown in FIG. 11-13(A). Area 029SG190 is provided. The production control data holding area 029SG190 shown in FIG. 11-13(A) includes a production control flag setting section 029SG191, a production control timer setting section 029SG192, a production control counter setting section 029SG193, and a production control buffer setting section 029SG194. We are prepared.

The production control flag setting section 029SG191 has multiple types of flags whose states can be updated according to production operation states such as the display state of production images on the screen of the image display device 5, production control commands transmitted from the main board 11, etc. A flag is set. For example, the performance control flag setting unit 029SG191 stores data indicating the value of the flag and data indicating the on state or off state for each of the plurality of types of flags.

The performance control timer setting unit 029SG192 is provided with a plurality of types of timers used to control the progress of various performance operations, such as display operations of performance images on the screen of the image display device 5, for example. For example, the production control timer setting section 029SG192 stores data indicating timer values for each of a plurality of types of timers.

The performance control counter setting section 029SG193 is provided with a plurality of types of counters used to control the progress of various performance operations. For example, the performance control counter setting section 029SG193 stores data indicating count values of each of a plurality of types of counters.

The performance control buffer setting section 029SG194 is provided with various buffers that temporarily store data used to control the progress of various performance operations. For example, the performance control buffer setting section 029SG194 stores data indicating buffer values in each of a plurality of types of buffers.

In this feature section 029SG, data constituting the starting winning reception command buffer 029SG194A as shown in FIG. 11-13(B) is stored in a predetermined area of the production control buffer setting section 029SG194. The start winning reception command buffer 029SG194A has a storage area (buffer numbers "1-1" to "1-4") corresponding to the maximum value (for example, "4") of the total number of reserved memories of the first special symbol reserved memory. A corresponding area) and a storage area corresponding to the first special figure being variably displayed (area corresponding to buffer number "1-0") are provided. In addition, the start winning reception command buffer 029SG194A has a storage area (buffer numbers "2-1" to "2-4") corresponding to the maximum value of the total number of reserved memories (for example, "4") of the second special symbol reserved memory. ”) and a storage area corresponding to the second special figure being variably displayed (an area corresponding to the buffer number “2-0”). When there is a starting prize in the first starting winning opening or the second starting winning opening, the starting opening winning designation command (first starting opening winning designation command or second starting opening winning designation command), symbol designation command, variable category designation A set of four commands, a command and a pending storage number notification command (a first pending storage number notification command or a second pending storage number notification command), is transmitted from the main board 11 to the production control board 12. The storage area corresponding to the first special figure pending memory and the storage area corresponding to the second special figure pending memory in the starting winning reception command buffer 029SG194A are used for these starting opening winning designation commands, symbol designation commands, variable category designation commands, A storage area (entry) is secured for storing the number of pending storage notification commands in association with each other and storing them separately in a first special symbol pending storage and a second special pattern pending storage.

The storage contents of these storage areas (entries) will be explained later when the start condition is met and the variable display of the highest pending storage (buffer number "1-1" or buffer number "2-1") starts. The stored contents of the buffer number "1-0" or buffer number "2-0", which stores the contents of the suspended memory for which the start condition is satisfied, are shifted upward one by one so that the start condition is satisfied, and the stored contents of the buffer number "1-0" or "2-0" It is cleared in the special drawing waiting process that is executed when the process ends.

Furthermore, in the starting winning reception command buffer 029SG194A of this feature section 029SG, the display pattern associated with the determination of whether or not to execute the pre-read notice performance in the pre-read notice setting process (FIG. 11-20) has not yet been determined. In other words, with the occurrence of a new starting prize, a flag value is set according to the display pattern (display mode) of the starting opening winning designation command, symbol designation command, variable category designation command, and pending storage display. A storage area is secured for each storage area (entry) so that the flag can be stored in association with each buffer number corresponding to the first special figure pending storage and the second special figure pending storage.

In addition, in the case where execution of the pre-read notice performance is not determined in the pre-read notice setting process described later, "0" corresponding to the display pattern of the normal pending memory display is stored in the pending display flag. As a result, the reserved memory display in the normal display mode (for example, a white circle) is displayed in the first reserved memory display area 029SG5D and the second reserved memory display area 029SG5U provided at the bottom of the image display device 5, and When it is decided to execute the reading preview effect, "1" (blue ○ ) or "2" (red circle) is set, a special mode of pending memory display different from the normal display mode is displayed in the first pending memory display area 029SG5D and the second pending memory display area 029SG5U. , in the variable display corresponding to the pending memory display, it is foretold that there is a high possibility of a jackpot or a super reach.

At the time of starting winning into the first starting winning opening, the production control CPU 120 stores commands from the beginning (the entry with the lowest buffer number) of the free entry corresponding to the first special figure pending memory of the starting winning receiving command buffer 029SG194A. Then, when a starting prize is entered into the second starting prize opening, the command is stored from the beginning (the entry with the lowest buffer number) of the empty entry corresponding to the second special figure pending memory of the receiving command buffer 029SG194A at the time of starting winning. go. At the time of starting winning, the starting opening winning specifying command to the pending storage number notification command are sequentially transmitted. Therefore, when the command is received, the starting opening winning prize designation command is stored in the storage areas corresponding to the endings "1" to "4" of the buffer numbers corresponding to the first special figure pending memory or the second special figure pending memory. , symbol designation command, fluctuation category designation command, and pending storage number notification command are stored in this order.

The command stored in the start winning command buffer 029SG194A shown in Figure 11-13(B) is sent to the entry (buffer The entry stored in the buffer number "1-0" or "2-0") is deleted, and the entry corresponding to the pending storage of the variable display to be started (buffer number "1-1" or "2-0") is deleted. -1") and the stored contents of the entries subsequent to the pending storage of the variable display to be started are shifted. For example, in the storage state shown in FIG. 11-13(B), when the variable display of the decorative symbols in the first special symbol retention memory is completed, each command stored in the buffer number "0" is deleted, and the buffer number Each command stored in "1" is shifted to buffer number "0", and each command stored in the area corresponding to buffer number "2" is shifted to the area corresponding to buffer number "1". The commands that are shifted and stored in the areas corresponding to buffer numbers "3" and "4" are shifted to the areas corresponding to buffer numbers "2" and "3". Therefore, buffer number "0" becomes an area (entry) for storing each command related to pending storage that is variably displayed at that time.

Next, the starting winning determination process of the feature section 029SG executed in step S101 in FIG. 6 will be explained based on FIGS. 11-14. In the starting winning determination process, the CPU 103 first turns on the first starting opening switch 22A based on the detection signal from the first starting opening switch 22A provided corresponding to the first starting winning opening formed by the winning ball device 6A. It is determined whether the state is the same (step 029SGS101a). At this time, if the first starting port switch 22A is in the ON state (step 029SGS101a; Y), the number of reserved memories of the first special figure, which is the number of reserved memories of the special figure game using the first special figure, is set to the predetermined upper limit. It is determined whether the value (for example, "4" as the upper limit storage number) is reached (step 029SGS102). The CPU 103 may specify the first special symbol pending storage number by reading the first pending storage number count value, which is the stored value of the first pending storage number counter provided in the game control counter setting section 029SG154, for example. When the first special symbol pending storage number is not the upper limit value at step 029SGS102 (step 029SGS102; N), for example, the storage value of the starting opening buffer provided in the game control buffer setting section 029SG155 is set to "1" ( Step 029SGS103).

When the first starting port switch 22A is off at step 029SGS101a (step 029SGS101a; N), or when the number of first special symbols pending memory has reached the upper limit value at step 029SGS102 (step 029SGS102; Y), the variable Based on the detection signal from the second starting opening switch 22B provided corresponding to the second starting winning opening formed by the winning ball device 6B, it is determined whether the second starting opening switch 22B is in the on state ( Step 029SGS101b). At this time, if the second starting port switch 22B is in the ON state (step 029SGS101b; Y), the number of second special pattern pending memories, which is the number of pending memories of the special pattern game using the second special pattern, is set to the predetermined upper limit. It is determined whether the value (for example, "4" as the upper limit storage number) is reached (step 029SGS105). The CPU 103 may specify the second special symbol pending storage number by reading the second pending storage number count value, which is the stored value of the second pending storage number counter provided in the game control counter setting section 029SG154, for example. When the second special figure pending storage number is not the upper limit value at step 029SGS105 (step 029SGS105; N), for example, the storage value of the starting opening buffer provided in the game control buffer setting section 029SG155 is set to "2" ( Step 029SGS106).

After executing either of the processes of Step 029SGS103 and Step 029SGS106, the number of special symbols pending stored according to the starting opening buffer value, which is the storage value of the starting opening buffer, is updated by adding 1 (Step 029SGS107). For example, when the starting port buffer value is "1", the first pending storage number count value is incremented by 1, while when the starting port buffer value is "2", the second pending storage number count value is added by 1. In this way, the first pending memory number count value is 1 when the game ball passes (enters) the first starting prize opening and the first starting condition corresponding to the special pattern game using the first special pattern is satisfied. Updated to increase. In addition, the second pending memory number count value is 1 when the game ball passes (enters) the second starting prize opening and the second starting condition corresponding to the special pattern game using the second special pattern is established. Updated to increase. At this time, the total number of pending memories is also updated to add 1 (step 029SGS108). For example, the total pending storage number count value, which is the stored value of the total pending storage number counter provided in the game control counter setting section 029SG154, may be updated by adding one.

After executing the process of step 029SGS108, the CPU 103 selects the random number MR1 for special figure display result determination and the jackpot type determination from among the numerical data updated by the random number circuit 104 and the random counter of the game control counter setting unit 029SG154. Numerical data indicating a random number MR2 for use and a random number MR3 for determining a variation pattern are extracted (Step 029SGS109). Numerical data indicating each random number value extracted in this way is stored by being set as reservation information at the beginning of a free entry in the special figure reservation storage section according to the starting opening buffer value (step 029SGS110). For example, when the starting opening buffer value is "1", numerical data indicating random numbers MR1 to MR3 is stored in the first special figure reservation storage section 029SG151A, while when the starting opening buffer value is "2", Numerical data indicating random numbers MR1 to MR3 is stored in the second special figure reservation storage section 029SG151B.

The numerical data indicating the random number MR1 for determining the special symbol display result and the random number MR2 for determining the jackpot type determines whether or not the variable display result of the special symbol or decorative symbol is considered a "jackpot", and whether or not the variable display result is determined by the variable display result. It is used to determine the type of jackpot in the case of "jackpot". The random number value MR3 for determining a variation pattern is used to determine a variation pattern including variable display times of special symbols and decorative symbols. By executing the process of step 029SGS109, the CPU 103 extracts numerical data indicating all of the random numbers used for determining the variable display mode including the variable display results and variable display time of special symbols and decorative symbols.

Following the process of step 029SGS110, the transmission setting of the starting slot winning designation command according to the starting slot buffer value is performed (step 029SGS111). For example, when the starting opening buffer value is "1", the production control board Settings are made to send the first starting opening winning designation command to No. 12. On the other hand, when the starting opening buffer value is "2", by storing the storage address of the second starting opening winning designation command table in the ROM 101 in the buffer area of the sending command buffer, Make settings for transmitting the second starting opening winning designation command. The starting opening winning designation command set in this way is transmitted from the main board 11 to the production control board 12 by, for example, executing the command control process in step S27 shown in FIG. 5 after the special symbol process process is completed. transmitted.

Following the process of step 029SGS111, winning random value determination process is executed (step 029SGS112). After that, for example, by storing the storage address of the pending memory number notification command table in the ROM 101 in the buffer area specified by the sending command pointer in the sending command buffer, a pending storage number notification command is sent to the production control board 12. Settings are made for this purpose (Step 029SGS113). The pending storage number notification command set in this way is sent from the main board 11 to the production control board 12 by, for example, executing the command control process in step S27 shown in FIG. 5 after the special symbol process process is completed. transmitted.

After executing the process of step 029SGS113, it is determined whether the starting port buffer value is "1" (step 029SGS114). At this time, if the starting port buffer value is "1" (step 029SGS114; Y), the starting port buffer is cleared and its stored value is initialized to "0" (step 029SGS115), and then the process of step 029SGS104 is started. move on. On the other hand, when the starting opening buffer value is "2" (step 029SGS114; N), the starting opening buffer is cleared and its stored value is initialized to "0" (step 029SGS116), and then the starting winning prize is Finish the process. Thereby, even if both the first starting port switch 22A and the second starting port switch 22B simultaneously detect a valid starting winning of a game ball, processing based on the detection of both valid starting winnings can be surely completed.

FIG. 11-15(A) is a flowchart showing an example of the process executed in step 029SGS112 of FIG. 11-14 as the winning random value determination process. In this feature section 029SG, when variable display of special symbols and decorative symbols is started, special symbol normal processing (step S22 in FIG. 6, FIGS. A determination is made as to whether or not to treat the result) as a "jackpot" and control the game to a jackpot gaming state. In addition, in the variation pattern setting process (step S23 in FIG. 6, FIGS. 11-17) to be described later, a variation pattern that specifically defines the variable display mode of the decorative pattern is determined. On the other hand, apart from these determinations, at the timing when the game ball is detected at the starting winning hole (the first starting winning hole or the second starting winning hole), the CPU 103 executes the winning time random numerical value judgment process of step 029SGS112. By doing so, it is determined whether or not the jackpot symbol is determined to be stopped and displayed as a special symbol display result, and whether or not the variable display mode of the decorative symbol becomes a predetermined display mode with super reach is determined. As a result, before the variable display of special symbols and decorative symbols based on the detection of the game ball that entered the starting prize opening starts, that is, before it is decided whether or not to win the jackpot at the start of the variable display. Beforehand, it is determined whether the special figure display result will be a "jackpot" or which category the variable display mode of the decorative pattern will be, and based on this determination result, the production control CPU 120 etc. , as will be described later, a preview effect such as a pre-read preview effect is executed.

In the winning random value determination process shown in FIG. 11-15(A), the CPU 103 first checks the status of the time saving flag and probability change flag provided in the game control flag setting section 029SG152, etc. The current gaming state in machine 1 is specified (step 029SGS121). The CPU 103 specifies that the variable probability state is in the variable probability state when the variable probability flag is in the on state, and specifies that the state is in the reduced time state when the variable variable probability flag is in the off state and the time saving flag is in the on state, and when both the variable variable flag and the time saving flag are in the state When it is off, it may be specified that it is in the normal state.

Following the process of step 029SGS121, the display result determination table shown in FIG. 11-3 is selected and set (step 029SGS122). Thereafter, it is determined whether the numerical data indicating the random number MR1 for determining the special figure display result extracted in step 029SGS109 of FIG. 11-14 is within a predetermined jackpot determination range (step 029SGS123). In the jackpot judgment range, individual judgment values assigned to the special figure display result of "jackpot" in the special figure display result judgment table 1 selected by the process of step 029SGS122 are set, and the CPU 103 uses the random number MR1 and each judgment value. It is only necessary to determine the presence or absence of a judgment value that matches the random value MR1 by comparing the values one by one. Alternatively, by setting numerical values indicating the minimum value (lower limit value) and maximum value (upper limit value) of the judgment value included in the jackpot judgment range, the CPU 103 calculates the random value MR1 and the minimum value or maximum value of the jackpot judgment range. It is only necessary to determine whether or not the random number value MR1 is within the jackpot determination range by comparison. At this time, by determining that the random number MR1 is within the jackpot determination range, it can be determined that the variable display result based on the pending data including the random number MR1 is determined to be a "jackpot".

If it is determined in step 029SGS123 that it is not within the jackpot determination range, that is, if it is determined that there will be no jackpot in the variable display (step 029SGS123; N), that is, the variable display result will be a "miss" in the variable display. In this case, the transmission settings of the first symbol designation command, which is a symbol designation command corresponding to the variable display result being "miss", are executed (step 029SGS128), and the time saving flag is checked to see if it is in the on state, that is. , it is determined whether the current gaming state is a time saving state (step 029SGS129). If the time saving flag is off (step 029SGS129; N), select and set the fluctuation pattern determination table A for failure, and if the time saving flag is on (step 029SGS129; Y), determine the fluctuation pattern for failure. Select and set table D (step 029SGS131). The error variation pattern determination table A is used when the number of pending memories is two or less. Further, the losing variation pattern determination table D is a losing variation pattern determining table used when the gaming state is a high base state in which time saving control is being executed.

In addition, if it is determined in step 029SGS123 that it is within the jackpot determination range, that is, if it is determined that there will be a jackpot during variable display (step 029SGS123; Y), as shown in FIG. 11-15 (A), , the jackpot type is determined based on the random number value MR2 for determining the jackpot type (step 029SGS132). At this time, the CPU 103 operates according to the variable special figure (the "first special figure" corresponding to "1" or the "second special figure" corresponding to "2") specified corresponding to the starting opening buffer value. , selects table data for jackpot type determination from table data configuring the jackpot type determination table. Then, by referring to the selected table data for determining the jackpot type, it is determined which of the plurality of jackpot types is to be determined.

In addition, the symbol designation command according to the determined jackpot type, that is, the second symbol designation command if it is a probability variable jackpot A, the third symbol designation command if it is a probability variable jackpot B, and the third symbol specification command if it is a probability variable jackpot C. Execute the transmission setting of the 4th symbol designation command, and if it is a non-variable jackpot, the 5th symbol designation command (step 029SGS133), select and set the fluctuation pattern determination table for jackpot (step 029SGS135), and step Proceed to 029SGS138.

After executing any of the processes in step 029SGS130, step 029SGS131, and step 029SGS135, using each fluctuation pattern determination table set in each of these steps and numerical data indicating the random number MR3 for fluctuation pattern determination, A variation category is determined according to the range of determination values including the random value MR3 (step 029SGS138). In this characteristic part 029SG, as shown in FIG. 11-15(B), at least when the variable display result is "miss", the variable display mode is "non-reach" regardless of the total number of retained memories. A variable category that is a variable display mode of "Super Reach", a variable category of "Other" that is a variable display mode other than "Non-reach" and "Super Reach" (for example, normal reach), It is only necessary to be able to determine whether or not such a fluctuation category is determined based on the random value MR3.

Thereafter, a setting is made to transmit a variable category designation command according to the determination result of the process of step 029SGS138 to the production control board 12 (step 029SGS139), and then the winning random number value determination process is ended.

FIG. 11-16 is a flowchart showing an example of the process executed in S110 of FIG. 6 as the special symbol normal process. In the special symbol normal processing shown in FIGS. 11-16, the CPU 103 first determines whether or not the second special symbol pending storage number is "0" (step 029SGS141). The second special symbol pending memory number is the number of pending memories of the special symbol game using the second special symbol by the second special symbol display device 4B. For example, in the process of step 029SGS141, the second pending storage number count value stored in the game control counter setting section 029SG154 may be read out, and it may be determined whether or not the read value is "0".

When the second special figure reservation storage number is other than "0" at step 029SGS141 (step 029SGS141; N), reservation data stored in the second special figure reservation storage unit corresponding to reservation number "1" Then, numerical data indicating the random number MR1 for determining the special figure display result, the random number MR2 for determining the type of jackpot, and the random number MR3 for determining the fluctuation pattern are read out (step 029SGS142). The numerical data read at this time may be temporarily stored in, for example, a random number buffer for fluctuation.

Following the process of step 029 SGS142, the second special figure pending memory number and total pending memory number are subtracted by 1 by updating the second special figure pending memory count value and the total pending memory count value by 1. At the same time, the data in the second special figure reservation storage section is updated. Specifically, it indicates the random numbers MR1 to MR3 stored in the entries lower than the reservation number "1" (for example, the entries corresponding to the reservation numbers "2" to "4") in the second special figure reservation storage unit. The pending data is shifted upward one entry at a time (step 029SGS143).

Thereafter, after updating the variable special figure designation buffer value, which is the stored value of the variable special figure designation buffer, to "2" (step 029SGS144), the process moves to step 029SGS149.

On the other hand, when the second special figure pending memory number is "0" in step 029SGS141 (step 029SGS141; Y), it is determined whether the first special figure pending memory number is "0" (step 029SGS145) . The number of first special symbol pending memories is the number of pending memories of the special symbol game using the first special symbol by the first special symbol display device 4A. For example, in the process of step 029SGS145, the game control counter setting unit 029SG154 reads the first pending memory number count value stored in the first pending memory number counter, and determines whether or not the read value is "0". Bye. In this way, the process of step 029SGS145 is executed when it is determined in step 029SGS141 that the second special figure pending memory number is "0", and the first special figure pending memory number is "0". Determine whether or not. As a result, the special pattern game using the second special pattern starts to be executed with priority over the special pattern game using the first special pattern.

It should be noted that the special pattern game using the second special pattern is not limited to being executed with priority over the special pattern game using the first special pattern, for example, the first starting prize opening or the second starting prize opening may be executed. The execution of the special figure game may be started in the order in which the game ball enters (passes) and a starting prize occurs. In this case, a table is provided that stores data that can specify the order in which the starting winnings have occurred, and the execution of the special pattern game using either the first special pattern or the second special pattern is started from the stored data. It would be good if we could decide which.

When the first special figure reservation storage number is other than "0" at step 029SGS145 (step 029SGS145; N), reservation data stored in the first special figure reservation storage unit corresponding to reservation number "1" Then, numerical data indicating the random number MR1 for determining the special figure display result, the random number MR2 for determining the jackpot type, and the random number MR3 for determining the fluctuation pattern are read out (step 029SGS146). The numerical data read at this time may be temporarily stored in, for example, a random number buffer for fluctuation.

Following the process of step 029 SGS146, the first special figure pending memory count value and the total pending memory count value are subtracted by 1 and updated, so that the first special figure pending memory count value and the total pending memory count value are subtracted by 1. At the same time, the data in the first special figure reservation storage section is updated. Specifically, it indicates the random numbers MR1 to MR3 stored in the entries lower than the reservation number "1" (for example, the entries corresponding to the reservation numbers "2" to "4") in the first special figure reservation storage unit. The pending data is shifted upward one entry at a time (step 029SGS147).

Thereafter, after updating the variable special figure designation buffer value, which is the stored value of the variable special figure designation buffer, to "1" (step 029SGS148), the process moves to step 029SGS149.

In step 029SGS149, the special symbol display result judgment shown in FIG. Select and set the table. Next, the numerical data indicating the random number MR1 for judging the special figure display result stored in the random number buffer for fluctuation is compared with the judgment value assigned to each special figure display result of "jackpot" and "miss". , it is determined whether the special figure display result should be a "jackpot" or a "miss" (step 029 SGS 150a). In addition, in this step 029SGS150a, if the gaming state at that time is a high probability state (probability variation state) in which the probability variation flag is on, the random number MR1 for determining the special symbol display result is set to a high probability state (probability variation state). ), it is determined that it is a "jackpot", and if it is not, it is determined that it is a "miss". In addition, if the probability change flag is off and the probability is low, if the random number MR1 for determining the special figure display result falls within the range of 1 to 219, it will be judged as a "jackpot", and if it does not, it will be judged as a "miss". judge.

In this way, in the special figure display result determination table 1 selected in step 029SGS149, different determination values are assigned to "jackpot" depending on the gaming status at that time (high accuracy, low accuracy). , In the process of step 029 SGS150a, the special figure display result is determined using different judgment data (judgment value) depending on whether the gaming state when variable display such as a special figure game is started is a high certainty state or not. By determining whether or not to be considered a "jackpot", when the gaming state is a high probability state, it is judged (determined) as a "jackpot" with a higher probability than when the gaming state is a low probability state.

If it is determined in step 029SGS150a that it is a "jackpot" (step 029SGS150a; Y), the jackpot flag is turned on in the game control flag setting section 029SG152 (step 029SGS152). At this time, the jackpot type determination table shown in FIG. 11-4(A) is selected and set as a table to be used for determining the jackpot type to one of a plurality of types (step 029SGS153). By referring to the jackpot type determination table set in this way, the numerical data indicating the random number MR2 for jackpot type determination stored in the fluctuation random number buffer and the "non-probable variable jackpot" and "probable variable jackpot" are determined in the jackpot type determination table. Depending on which of the judgment values assigned to each jackpot type matches "A", "probable variable jackpot B", and "probable variable jackpot C", it is determined which of the plurality of jackpot types is to be used (step 029 SGS154 ).

By determining the jackpot type in the process of step 029SGS154, the gaming state after the end of the jackpot gaming state can be set to either a time-saving state or a variable probability state that is more advantageous to the player than the time-saving state. Whether to control or not is determined before the fixed special symbol as a variable display result is derived. Corresponding to the jackpot type determined in this way, for example, by setting a jackpot type buffer value which is a stored value of the jackpot type buffer provided in the gaming control buffer setting section 029SG155 (step 029SGS155), the determined jackpot type remember. As an example, if the jackpot type is "non-probable variable jackpot" corresponding to a non-probable variable jackpot, the jackpot type buffer value is set to "0", and if the jackpot type is "probable variable A" corresponding to probability variable jackpot A, it is set to "1", If it is "probable variable B" corresponding to B, it may be set to "2", and if it is "probable variable C" corresponding to probability variable jackpot C, it may be set to "3".

After the completion of step 029SGS155, or if it is determined in step 029SGS150a that it is not a "jackpot" (step 029SGS150a; N), it is determined whether to control the jackpot gaming state (whether the jackpot flag is turned on or not). A fixed special symbol is set in accordance with the pre-determined result of (2) and the determined result of the jackpot type in the case of a jackpot game state. As an example, in response to a pre-determined result that the special symbol display result is a "miss", a special symbol indicating a "-" symbol, which is a missed symbol, is set as a confirmed special symbol. In addition, if it is determined that the special symbol display result is a "jackpot" in step 029SGS150a, and if the jackpot type in step 029SGS154 is "probable variable jackpot A", a special symbol indicating the number "7" is displayed. Set as a confirmed special symbol. Further, when the jackpot type is "probable variable jackpot B", a special symbol showing the number "5" is set as a confirmed special symbol. Further, when the jackpot type is "non-probable variable jackpot", a special symbol showing the number "3" is set as a confirmed special symbol. Further, when the jackpot type is "probable variable jackpot C", a special symbol indicating the number "1" is set as a confirmed special symbol. Note that these confirmed special symbols are just examples, and other confirmed special symbols may be set, or multiple types of symbols may be set as confirmed special symbols.

After setting the confirmed special symbol in step 029SGS156, the value of the special symbol process flag is updated to "1", which is the value corresponding to the fluctuation pattern setting process (step 029SGS157), and then the special symbol normal process is ended. .

In addition, if the number of reserved memories of the special map game using the first special map is "0" at step 029SGS145 (step 029SGS145; Y), after performing predetermined demo display settings (step 029SGS158), Special symbol normal processing ends. In this demonstration display setting, a production control command (customer waiting demo designation command) that specifies a demonstration display (demonstration screen display) by displaying a predetermined production image on the image display device 5, for example, is sent from the main board 11 to the production control command. It is determined whether the transmission to the board 12 has been completed. At this time, if the customer waiting demo designation command has already been sent, the demo display setting is ended. On the other hand, if it has not yet been sent, settings are made to send the customer waiting demo designation command, and then the demo display settings are ended.

FIG. 11-17 is a flowchart showing an example of the process executed in step S111 of FIG. 6 as the variation pattern setting process. In the fluctuation pattern setting process shown in FIGS. 11-17, the CPU 103 first determines whether the jackpot flag is turned on (step 029SGS161). If the jackpot flag is turned on (step 029SGS161; Y), a jackpot variation pattern determination table is selected and set (step 029SGS164).

In the determination at step 029SGS161, if the jackpot flag is not turned on (step 029SGS161; N), the gaming state is changed by determining whether or not the time saving flag is turned on in the game control flag setting section. It is determined whether or not the time saving control is being performed in which the time saving control is performed in the state or the time saving state (step 029SGS168). If the time saving flag is turned on (step 029SGS168; Y), the failure variation pattern determination table D is selected and set as the table to be used for determining one of the plurality of variation patterns ( Step 029SGS169).

On the other hand, when the time saving control is not in progress, that is, when the time saving flag is not turned on (step 029SGS168; N), for example, the pending memory number counter for variable special symbols provided in the game control counter setting section 029SG154 is stored. By reading the value, etc., the number of pending memories of the variable special symbols is specified, and it is determined whether the specified number of pending memories of the variable special symbols is 1 or 2 (step 029SGS170).

If the number of pending memories of the specified variable special symbol is 1 or 2 (step 029SGS170; N), the variation pattern determination table A for failure is used as a table to be used for determining one of multiple types of variation patterns. Select and set (step 029SGS171).

In addition, if the number of pending memories of the specified variable special figure is not 1 or 2 (step 029SGS170; N), it is further determined whether the number of pending memories of the specified variable special figure is 3 (step 029SGS172 ).

If the number of pending memories of the specified variable special symbol is 3 (step 029SGS172; Y), select the variation pattern determination table B for failure as the table to be used for determining the variation pattern as one of multiple types. (Step 029SGS173).

In addition, if the number of pending memories of the specified variable special pattern is not 3, that is, if the number of pending memories of the specified variable special pattern is 4 (step 029SGS172; N), select one of the multiple types of variable patterns. As the table to be used for determining the deviation pattern, the error variation pattern determination table C is selected and set (step 029SGS174), and the process proceeds to step 029SGS175.

After executing any of the processes in step 029SGS164, step 029SGS169, step 029SGS171, step 029SGS173, and step 029SGS174, for example, the numerical data indicating the random number MR3 for fluctuation pattern determination stored in the fluctuation random number buffer etc. Based on the selected (set) jackpot fluctuation pattern determination table, special hit fluctuation pattern determination table, or loss fluctuation pattern determination table A to D, one of multiple types of fluctuation patterns can be selected. (Step 029SGS175).

Incidentally, when the jackpot flag is off, by determining the fluctuation pattern in the process of step 029SGS175, it is determined whether or not the variable display mode of the decorative symbol is to be "reach". That is, the process of step 029SGS170 includes a process of determining whether or not the variable display state of the decorative symbol should be set to the reach state when the variable display result is "miss".

After determining the fluctuation pattern in step 029SGS175, a special symbol game using the first special symbol on the first special symbol display device 4A and a special symbol game using the first special symbol on the second special symbol display device 4B are performed according to the variable special symbol designation buffer value. Settings are made to start changing the special symbols so as to start one of the special symbol games using the second special symbol (step 029SGS176). As an example, if the variable special symbol designation buffer value is "1", settings are made to transmit a drive signal that updates the display of the first special symbol on the first special symbol display device 4A. On the other hand, if the variable special symbol designation buffer value is "2", settings are made to transmit a drive signal that updates the display of the second special symbol on the second special symbol display device 4B.

Following the process of step 029SGS176, settings are made to transmit various commands for starting the variation of the special symbol (step 029SGS177). For example, when the variable special figure designation buffer value is "1", the CPU 103 sends a gaming state designation command, a first variable display start command, a fluctuation pattern designation command, a variable display command to the production control board 12 from the main board 11. In order to sequentially transmit the result designation command and the first pending storage number notification command, the game control buffer setting section sends setting data indicating the storage address (starting address) in the ROM 101 of the first fluctuation start command table prepared in advance. The command is stored in the buffer area specified by the send command pointer in the send command buffer provided in the 029SG155. On the other hand, when the variable special figure designation buffer value is "2", the CPU 103 sends a gaming state designation command, a second variable display start command, a fluctuation pattern designation command, and a variable display command from the main board 11 to the performance control board 12. In order to sequentially transmit the result designation command and the second pending storage number notification command, the game control buffer setting unit 029SG155 is provided with setting data indicating the storage address in the ROM 101 of the second fluctuation start command table prepared in advance. The command is stored in the buffer area specified by the send command pointer in the send command buffer.

After executing the process of step 029SGS177, the special symbol fluctuation time which is the variable display time of the special symbol according to the determination result of the fluctuation pattern is set (step 029SGS178). The special symbol fluctuation time, which is the variable display time of the special symbol, is the time required from when the variable display of the special symbol starts in the special symbol game until the fixed special symbol that becomes the variable display result (special symbol display result) is stopped and displayed. It's time. Thereafter, after updating the value of the special symbol process flag to "2" which is a value corresponding to the special symbol variation process (step 029SGS179), the variation pattern setting process is ended.

Based on the command transmission setting in step 029SGS177, each time the command control process in step S27 shown in FIG. The designation command, the first variable display start command or the second variable display start command, the fluctuation pattern designation command, the variable display result designation command, the first pending storage number notification command or the second pending storage number notification command are sent in sequence. It turns out. The order in which these production control commands are sent can be changed arbitrarily, for example, the variable display result specification command is sent first, and then the first variable display start command or the second variable display start command, and the variable pattern are sent. The designation command, the game state designation command, the first pending storage number notification command, or the second pending storage number notification command may be transmitted in this order.

FIG. 11-18 is a flowchart showing an example of the process executed in step S113 of FIG. 6 as the special symbol stop process. In the special symbol stop process, the CPU 103 turns on the end flag referred to in the special symbol variation process in step S112 to end the variation of the special symbol, and causes the first special symbol display device 4A and the second special symbol display device 4B to Control is performed to stop and display the stop symbols (step 029SGS180). In addition, when the variable special symbol designation buffer value is "1" indicating the first special symbol, the fluctuation of the first special symbol on the first special symbol display device 4A is ended, and the fluctuation special symbol designation buffer value is If it is "2" indicating the second special symbol, the variation of the second special symbol on the second special symbol display device 4B is ended. In addition, control is performed to send a symbol confirmation command to the production control board 12 (step 029SGS181).

Then, it is determined whether the jackpot flag is turned on (step 029SGS182). If the jackpot flag is turned on (step 029SGS182; Y) and the probability change flag and time saving flag are turned on, the CPU 103 clears the probability change flag and time saving flag and turns them off (step 029SGS184). , hit start 1 designation command (probability variable jackpot A), win start 2 designation command (probability variable jackpot B), hit start 3 designation command (probability variable jackpot C), according to the type of jackpot stored in the production control board 12. Settings are made to transmit the winning start 4 designation command (non-probable variable) (step 029 SGS185).

Furthermore, the CPU 103 performs settings for transmitting a gaming state designation command indicating the normal state to the production control board 12 (step 029SGS186).

Then, a value corresponding to the jackpot display time (for example, the time for notifying the occurrence of a jackpot on the image display device 5) is set in the jackpot display time timer (step 029SGS187). Also, set the number of openings (for example, 10 times in the case of a non-probable variable jackpot or a variable variable jackpot A, 5 times in the case of a variable variable jackpot B, and 2 times in the case of a variable variable jackpot C) in the number of openings counter. (Step 029SGS188). Then, the value of the special symbol process flag is updated to "4" (step 029SGS189), which is a value corresponding to the jackpot release preprocessing (step S114), and the special symbol stop processing is ended.

On the other hand, when the jackpot flag is off (step 029SGS182; N), the CPU 103 determines in step 029SGS190 whether the value of the time saving number counter is "0" or not. If the value of the time saving number counter is "0" (step 029SGS190; Y), the process advances to step 029SGS196.

On the other hand, if the value of the time saving number counter is not "0" (step 029SGS190; N), that is, if the time saving number of times remains and the high base state is reached, the value of the time saving number counter is decreased by 1 (step 029SGS190;N). 029SGS191). Then, it is determined whether or not the value of the time saving number counter after the subtraction is "0" (step 029SGS193), and if it is not "0" (step 029SGS193; N), the process proceeds to step 029SGS196, and the value of the time saving number counter is determined. is "0" (Step 029SGS193; Y), in order to end the time-saving control, the time-saving flag is cleared and turned off (step 029SGS194), and then the time-saving flag corresponding to the state of the probability change flag or the time-saving flag is After setting the transmission of a gaming state designation command corresponding to the gaming state (specifically, the low probability low base state) (step 029SGS195), the process advances to step 029SGS196.

In step 029SGS196, the value of the special symbol process flag is updated to "0", which is a value corresponding to the special symbol normal process, and then the special symbol stop process is ended.

FIG. 11-19 is a flowchart showing an example of the process executed in S117 of FIG. 6 as the jackpot end process.

In the jackpot end process, the CPU 103 determines whether the jackpot end display timer is in operation, that is, the timer is counting (step 029SGS201). When the jackpot end display timer is not operating (step 029SGS201; N), a value corresponding to the display time corresponding to the time for displaying the jackpot end on the image display device 5 (jackpot end display time) is set in the jackpot end display timer. is set (step 029SGS202), and the process ends.

On the other hand, if the jackpot end display timer is in operation (step 029SGS201; Y), the value of the jackpot end display timer is subtracted by 1 (step 029SGS203). Then, the CPU 103 checks whether the value of the jackpot end display timer is 0, that is, whether the jackpot end display time has elapsed (step 029SGS204). If the time has not elapsed, the process ends.

If the jackpot end display time has elapsed (step 029SGS204; Y), the CPU 103 determines whether the stored jackpot type is a variable jackpot (step 029SGS205).

If the stored jackpot type is not a non-probable variable jackpot (step 029SGS205; N), the probability variable flag is turned on (step 029SGS207), the time saving flag is turned on (step 029SGS208), and the time saving number counter is set to "0". After setting (step 029SGS209), the process advances to step 029SGS213.

On the other hand, if the jackpot type is a variable jackpot (step 029SGS205; Y), by executing step 029SGS211 and step 029SGS212, the time saving flag is turned on and the time saving number counter is set to "100". After that, the process proceeds to step 029SGS213.

In step 029SGS213, the jackpot flag is turned off, and settings are made to send a jackpot end designation command according to the jackpot type (step 029SGS214). Then, after setting the transmission of a gaming state designation command to notify the production control board 12 of the gaming state based on the probability change flag and time saving flag that have been turned on (step 029SGS215), the value of the special figure process flag is specially set. It is updated to "0" which is a value corresponding to the symbol normal processing (step 029SGS216).

Next, the operation of the production control board 12 will be explained. FIG. 11-20 is a flowchart showing an example of the process executed in step S161 of FIG. 6 as the prefetch notice setting process. In the prefetch notice setting process shown in FIG. 11-20, the performance control CPU 120 first checks the start winning reception command buffer 029SG194A (step 029SGS241), and determines whether there is a new storage of the starting winning command. is determined based on whether there is an entry for which the value of the pending display flag is not set (step 029 SGS242).

If there is no entry with the value of the pending display flag set (Step 029SGS242; N), the prefetch notice setting process is terminated, and if there is an entry without the value of the pending display flag set (Step 029SGS242; Y), it is further determined whether or not the symbol designation command of the entry is the first symbol designation command, that is, whether the symbol designation command is a symbol designation command that indicates a miss (step 029SGS243). If the symbol designation command is other than the first symbol designation command, that is, if it is a symbol designation command that indicates a jackpot (Step 029SGS243; N), based on the variable display result being a jackpot, a jackpot (not shown) is detected. By referring to the pre-read preview effect determination table, it is determined whether or not to execute the pre-read preview effect and the display pattern when executing the pre-read preview effect (step 029SGS245).

In step 029SGS245, for example, the presence or absence of execution of the pre-read preview performance and the display pattern (notice type) are determined at the determination ratio as shown in FIG. 11-21(A). Specifically, there are two types of display patterns (notice types) for the pre-read preview performance: display pattern α and display pattern β. Among these, when the display pattern of the advance notice effect is determined to be the display pattern α, the pending memory display is displayed in a blue circle in the first pending memory display area 029SG5D or the second pending memory display area 029SG5U, When the display pattern (notice type) of the advance notice effect is determined to be the display pattern β, the pending memory display is displayed as a red circle in the first pending memory display area 029SG5D or the second pending memory display area 029SG5U. Ru.

In step 029SGS245, as shown in FIG. 11-21(A), for example, non-execution of the pre-reading notice effect is determined at a rate of 5%, and execution of the pre-reading notice effect in the display pattern α is determined at a rate of 30%. However, it is sufficient to decide to execute the display pattern β of the pre-read preview effect at a rate of 65%.

Further, in step 029SGS243, if the symbol designation command of the entry for which the value of the pending display flag is not set is the first symbol designation command, that is, if it is a symbol designation command indicating a loss (step 029SGS243; Y), The fluctuation category indicated by the fluctuation category designation command of the entry is specified (step 029SGS247). Specifically, if the variation category designation command for the entry is C600H, it is specified as a category with a "non-reach" variation pattern, and if it is C601H, it is identified as a category with a "super reach" variation pattern. If it is C602H, it may be specified that it is in the "other" variation pattern category including normal reach.

Then, based on the numerical data indicating the random number value for the pre-read preview performance extracted from the random number circuit 124 or the random counter of the performance control counter setting unit 029SG193, and the category of the fluctuation pattern identified in step 029SGS247, By referring to the missed advance notice effect determination table, it is determined whether or not to execute the advance notice effect and the display pattern (notice type) when executing the advance notice effect (step 029SGS248).

In step 029SGS248, for example, the presence or absence of execution of a pre-read preview performance and the display pattern (notice type) are determined at the determination ratio as shown in FIG. 11-21(B). In the example of setting the determination ratio shown in FIG. 11-21(B), the determination ratio of the display pattern (notice type) and whether or not to execute a pre-read preview effect are determined depending on the category of the fluctuation pattern identified in the process of step 029SGS247. It's different.

In step 029SGS247, as shown in FIG. 11-21(B), for example, if the variable display result is off and the variable category is "non-reach", it is determined at a rate of 95% that the pre-read preview effect will not be executed. , the execution of the display pattern α of the pre-read preview effect is determined at a rate of 5%, and the execution of the display pattern β of the pre-read preview effect is determined at a rate of 0%. In addition, if the variable display result is incorrect and the variable category is "Other", the non-execution of the pre-reading notice effect is determined at a rate of 75%, and the execution of the pre-reading notice effect with display pattern α is determined at a rate of 20%. Then, the execution of the display pattern β of the pre-read preview performance is determined at a rate of 5%. Then, if the variable display result is wrong and the variable category is "Super Reach", it is determined that the pre-read preview effect will not be executed at a rate of 65%, and the execution of the pre-read preview effect in the display pattern α will be determined at a rate of 25%. , and the execution of the display pattern β of the pre-read preview effect is determined at a rate of 10%.

Due to these settings, when it is decided to execute the pre-read preview effect, the variable display result has a higher chance of becoming a jackpot than when it is decided not to execute the pre-read preview effect, so it is a target of the pre-read preview effect. It is possible to draw the player's attention to the variable display. Furthermore, when the pre-read preview effect is executed, the variable display result has a higher chance of becoming a jackpot when the pre-read preview effect is executed with the display pattern β than when it is executed with the display pattern α. , it is possible to draw the player's attention to which display pattern will be used to display the pending memory display that is the subject of the pre-read preview performance.

In addition, in this characteristic part 029SG, if the variable display result is a jackpot, the display pattern and whether or not to execute the pre-read preview effect are determined at the same rate regardless of the jackpot type, but the present invention is limited to this. However, if the variable display result is a jackpot, the execution or non-execution of the pre-read preview performance and the determination ratio of the display pattern may be varied depending on the type of jackpot. By doing so, the player can control which jackpot type of jackpot game state will be controlled depending on whether or not the look-ahead preview performance is executed and which display pattern the pending memory display is displayed. It is possible to attract attention.

After executing step 029SGS248, the performance control CPU 120 determines whether execution of the pre-read preview performance has been determined in step 029SGS247, that is, whether the display pattern (notice type) has been determined to be either display pattern α or display pattern β. It is determined whether or not (step 029SGS249).

After executing step 029SGS245 or when it is decided to execute a pre-read preview effect (step 029SGS249; Y), the flag value corresponding to the determined display pattern (notice type) is set to the pending display flag of the entry (step 029SGS246). Specifically, if the display pattern (notice type) determined in step 029SGS245 or step 029SGS248 is the display pattern α that shows the pending storage display as a blue circle, the pending display flag of the entry is set to "1", If the display pattern (notice type) determined in step 029SGS245 or step 029SGS248 is the display pattern β that shows the pending storage display as a red circle, set the pending display flag of the entry to "2", and then proceed to step 029SGS252. .

In addition, in step 029SGS249, if it is not decided to execute the advance notice effect (step 029SGS249; N), the pending display flag of the entry is set to "0" indicating a white circle (step 029SGS250 ), proceed to step 029SGS252.

In addition, after executing step 029SGS246 or step 029SGS250, the performance control CPU 120 updates the pending display based on the stored content of the start winning reception command buffer 029SG194A (step 029SGS252). As a result, the pending memory newly stored in the start winning reception command buffer 029SG194A is displayed in a display mode corresponding to "0", "1", or "2" set in the pending display flag. Ru.

FIG. 11-22 is a flowchart showing an example of the process executed in step S171 of FIG. 10 as the variable display start setting process. In the variable display start setting process shown in FIG. 11-22, the production control CPU 120 first determines whether or not the first variation start command reception flag is in the on state (step 029SGS271). If the first fluctuation start command reception flag is in the ON state (step 029SGS271; Y), the buffer numbers "1-0" to "1-4" of the first special symbol pending memory in the reception command buffer 029SG194A at the time of start winning are set. Various command data and various flags stored in correspondence are shifted upward by one buffer number (step 029SGS272). Note that the contents of buffer number "1-0" cannot be shifted because there is no destination to shift them to, so they are erased.

Specifically, various command data and various flags stored in association with buffer number "1-1" in the first special figure reservation memory are shifted to be stored in association with buffer number "1-0". Then, various command data and various flags stored in correspondence with the buffer number "1-2" of the first special figure reservation memory are shifted so as to be stored in correspondence with the buffer number "1-1", and the The various command data and various flags stored in correspondence with the buffer number "1-3" of the 1st special figure pending memory are shifted so as to be stored in correspondence with the buffer number "1-2", and the 1st special figure Various command data and various flags stored in association with buffer numbers "1-4" in the pending storage are shifted so as to be stored in association with buffer numbers "1-3".

If the first fluctuation start command reception flag is off in step 029SGS271 (step 029SGS271; N), it is determined whether the second fluctuation start command reception flag is on (step 029SGS273). If the second fluctuation start command reception flag is off (step 029SGS273; N), the variable display start setting process is ended, and if the second fluctuation start command reception flag is on (step 029SGS273; Y), The various command data and various flags stored in correspondence with the buffer numbers "2-0" to "2-4" of the second special figure pending memory in the start winning command buffer 029SG194A are stored for one buffer number each. Shift to the upper position (step 029SGS274). Note that the contents of buffer number "2-0" cannot be shifted because there is no destination to shift them to, so they are erased.

Specifically, various command data and various flags stored in association with buffer number "2-1" in the second special figure reservation memory are shifted to be stored in association with buffer number "2-0". Then, the various command data and various flags stored in correspondence with the buffer number "2-2" in the second special figure reservation memory are shifted so as to be stored in correspondence with the buffer number "2-1", and the The various command data and various flags stored in correspondence with the buffer number "2-3" of the 2nd special figure pending memory are shifted so as to be stored in correspondence with the buffer number "2-2", and the 2nd special figure Various command data and various flags stored in association with the buffer number "2-4" in the pending storage are shifted so as to be stored in association with the buffer number "2-3".

After executing step 029SGS272 or step 029SGS274, the production control CPU 120 reads the fluctuation pattern designation command from the fluctuation pattern designation command storage area (step 029SGS275).

Next, the display result (stop symbol) of the decorative symbol is determined according to the data stored in the display result designation command storage area (that is, the received display result designation command) (step 029SGS276). In this case, the performance control CPU 120 determines a stop symbol of the decorative symbol according to the display result specified by the display result designation command, and stores data indicating the determined stop symbol of the decorative symbol in the decorative symbol display result storage area. do.

In addition, in this feature part 029SG, when the received variable display result designation command is the second variable display result designation command corresponding to probability variable jackpot A, the performance control CPU 120, for example, displays 3 symbols as the stop symbols "7". ” to determine the combination of decorative patterns (jackpot pattern). In addition, if the received variable display result designation command is the third variable display result designation command that corresponds to probability variable jackpot B, or if it is the fourth variable display result designation command that corresponds to probability variable jackpot C, the stop symbol , and a plurality of combinations of odd number symbols other than "7" (for example, combinations of decorative symbols such as "111", "333", "555", and "999"). In addition, when the received variable display result designation command is the fifth variable display result designation command corresponding to a non-probable variable jackpot, the performance control CPU 120, for example, selects a decorative pattern in which three symbols are arranged in an even number as a stop symbol. Determine the combination (jackpot symbol). In addition, if the received variable display result designation command is the first variable display result designation command that corresponds to a loss, and the fluctuation pattern of the variable display is a non-reach fluctuation pattern, a decoration with three irregular symbols as a stop symbol. Determine the combination of symbols (missing symbols). In addition, if the received variable display result designation command is the first variable display result designation command that corresponds to a loss, and the fluctuation pattern of the variable display is a reach fluctuation pattern, the left and right symbols are the same as the stop symbol, but in the middle. Determine the combination of out-of-reach (out-of-reach symbols) with different symbols.

In determining these stop symbols, the performance control CPU 120 extracts random numbers for determining the stop symbols, and uses a stop symbol determination table in which numerical values are associated with data indicating combinations of decorative symbols. Then, the stop symbol of the decorative symbol can be determined. That is, the stop symbols may be determined by selecting data indicating a combination of decorative symbols corresponding to numerical values that match the extracted random numbers.

Next, the performance control CPU 120 executes a meter performance determination process that determines whether or not to perform a meter performance and the performance pattern (step 029SGS277), and determines whether the fluctuation pattern of the variable display is the super reach fluctuation pattern. Determination is made (step 029SGS278). It should be noted that whether or not the variation pattern of the variable display is a super reach variation pattern may be determined based on whether the variation pattern designation command read in the process of step 029SGS275 is a super reach variation pattern.

If the variation pattern of the variable display is a non-reach or normal reach variation pattern (step 029SGS278; N), proceed to step 029SGS283, and if the variation pattern of the variable display is a super reach variation pattern (step 029SGS278; Y). further determines whether the variation pattern of the variable display is one of super reach γ, super reach ε, super reach θ, super reach ι, and super reach κ (step 029SGS280).

If the variation pattern of the variable display is any one of super reach α, super reach β, super reach δ, super reach ζ, super reach η, and super reach λ (step 029SGS280; N), the variable display It is determined whether the displayed variation pattern is a variation pattern of super reach δ or super reach ζ (step 029SGS281). If the variation pattern of the variable display is the variation pattern of super reach δ or super reach ζ (step 029SGS281; Y), execute the reach performance E development suggestion performance determination process that determines whether or not to execute the reach performance E development suggestion performance. Then, the process proceeds to step 029SGS283 (step 029SGS282), and if the variation pattern of the variable display is one of super reach α, super reach β, super reach η, and super reach λ (step 029SGS281; N), The process proceeds to step 029SGS283 without executing the ready-to-reach performance E development notification performance determination process.

In addition, in the process of step 029SGS283, the performance control CPU 120 selects a process table according to the variation pattern and proceeds to step 029SGS289.

Then, in step 029SGS280, if the variation pattern of the variable display is any one of super reach γ, super reach ε, super reach θ, super reach ι, and super reach κ (step 029SGS280; Y), branch A branch destination suggestion effect determination process is executed to determine whether or not to perform the destination suggestion effect and the effect pattern (step 029SGS284). Then, it is determined whether the variation pattern of the variable display is a variation pattern of super reach ε or super reach θ (step 029SGS285).

If the variation pattern of the variable display is one of super reach γ, super reach ι, and super reach κ (step 029SGS285; N), the process proceeds to step 029SGS289, and the variation pattern of the variable display is super reach ε or super reach κ. If it is a variation pattern of super reach θ (step 029SGS285; Y), a reach effect G development suggestion performance determination process is executed to determine whether or not to execute a reach effect G development suggestion performance (step 029SGS286). Then, the performance control CPU 120 determines the super reach performance to be executed during the variable display from the reach performance C and the reach performance D according to the variable display result and the fluctuation pattern (step 029SGS287), and A process table corresponding to the reach performance and variation pattern is selected and the process proceeds to step 029SGS289 (step 029SGS288).

In the process of step 029SGS287, if the variable display result is a jackpot, as shown in FIG. Execution is determined at a rate of 50%, and execution of reach effect D is determined at a rate of 50%. Further, if the variation pattern is a super reach effect θ (PB1-7), execution of reach effect C is determined at a rate of 30%, and execution of reach effect D is determined at a rate of 70%. Further, if the variation pattern is a super reach effect ι (PB1-8), execution of reach effect C is determined at a rate of 0%, and execution of reach effect D is determined at a rate of 100%. Further, if the variation pattern is a super reach effect κ (PB1-9), execution of reach effect C is determined at a rate of 20%, and execution of reach effect D is determined at a rate of 80%.

On the other hand, if the variable display result is a failure, as shown in Figure 11-30 (B), if the variation pattern is super reach γ (PA2-4), the execution of reach effect C is changed to 90. %, and execution of reach effect D is determined at a rate of 10%. Furthermore, if the variation pattern is super reach ε (PA2-6), execution of reach effect C is determined at a rate of 80%, and execution of reach effect D is determined at a rate of 20%. Further, if the variation pattern is a super reach effect θ (PA2-9), execution of reach effect C is determined at a rate of 70%, and execution of reach effect D is determined at a rate of 30%. Furthermore, if the variation pattern is the super reach ι (PA2-10), the execution of the ready-to-reach effect C is determined at a rate of 0%, and the execution of the ready-to-reach effect D is determined at a rate of 100%. Further, if the variation pattern is a super reach effect κ (PA2-11), execution of reach effect C is determined at a rate of 60%, and execution of reach effect D is determined at a rate of 40%.

As shown in Figures 11-30(A) and 11-30(B), reach effect C and reach effect D are executed according to the variation pattern when the variable display result is a jackpot or a loss. By determining different ratios, as shown in FIG. 11-30(C), the overall jackpot expectation level is set higher for reach effect D than for reach effect C.

In addition, regardless of the variable display result, if the variable display is executed in the variation pattern of super reach ι (variation pattern in which reach effect H development notification effect and reach effect H are executed after execution of advance effect and precursor effect) , execution of reach effect D is always determined. On the other hand, when the variable display is executed in the super reach κ variation pattern (the variation pattern in which the high expectation reach performance development notification performance and the reach performance I are executed after the preliminary performance and the precursor performance are executed), the reach There are cases where the effect C is executed and cases where the reach effect D is executed.

In other words, in this feature section 029SG, for the variation patterns (the variation pattern of super reach ι and the variation pattern of super reach κ) in which the preliminary performance and the precursor performance are executed during the variable display, this feature is applied after the preliminary performance and the precursor performance are executed. In part 029, the rate at which the highly anticipated reach performance development notification performance is executed (the rate at which the reach performance I with the highest expectation of jackpot is executed) is higher than the reach performance D when execution of the reach performance C is determined. is set higher than when execution is decided. Therefore, in this feature section 029SG, even if reach effect C, which has a lower jackpot expectation level than reach effect D, is executed during variable display, the preliminary effect and the precursor effect are executed after the reach effect C. Since it is possible to draw the attention of the player to whether or not the jackpot will be won, the player will recognize that the level of expectation for a jackpot is low at the time when the reach effect C is executed, and the interest in the game will decrease while the reach effect C is executed. It is possible to prevent this from happening.

Furthermore, the variation pattern of super reach θ in which the reach effect G development notification effect is executed after the variable display result is once notified as reach effect C or reach effect D, and the variation pattern of super reach θ during execution of reach effect C or reach effect D. Comparing the fluctuation pattern of super reach κ when advance performance, precursor performance, and high-expectation reach performance development notification performance are executed in place of reach performance C and reach performance D, as shown in Figure 11-30 (D). In addition, when the variable display result is a jackpot, the difference between the determination ratio of reach performance C and the determination ratio of reach performance D in the fluctuation pattern of super reach θ is 40%, whereas the difference between the determination ratio of reach performance C and reach performance D in the variation pattern of super reach θ is 40%. The difference between the determination ratio of reach performance C and the determination ratio of reach performance D in the variable pattern is set to 60%. Furthermore, as shown in Figure 11-30 (E), in the case where the variable display result is off, the difference between the determination ratio of reach effect C and the determination ratio of reach effect D in the variation pattern of super reach θ is 40 %, whereas the difference between the determination ratio of reach performance C and the determination ratio of reach performance D in the variation pattern of super reach κ is set to 20%.

For this reason, when the variable display result is a jackpot, the variable display of the variation pattern of super reach θ and the variable display of the variation pattern of super reach κ will depend on which of the reach effects C and D is executed. Whether the variable display is a variable display of super reach κ in which advance performance, precursor performance, and high-expectation reach performance notification performance are executed during reach performance C or reach performance D, or as reach performance C or reach performance D. Once the variable display result (missing) is announced, it is possible to infer whether the variable display is super reach θ, in which reach performance G development notification performance is executed, so it is possible to guess whether the variable display is super reach θ, which is executed after the variable display result (missing) is announced, so the difference between reach performance C and reach performance D This makes it possible to draw the player's attention to which one is being executed, thereby increasing the player's interest in the game.

Returning to FIG. 11-22, in step 029SGS289, the performance control CPU 120 determines whether or not a chance-up performance has been executed, which indicates that the proportion of the variable display result becoming a jackpot (jackpot expectation level) has increased during the variable display, and the corresponding chance. A chance-up performance determining process for determining a performance pattern for the up performance is executed (step 029SGS289).

The performance control CPU 120 that executed the chance up performance determination process next starts a process timer corresponding to the process timer selected in the process of step 029SGS283 or step 029SGS288 (step 029SGS290).

In addition, each process table includes display control execution data for controlling the display of the image display device 5, lamp control execution data for controlling the lighting of each LED, and for controlling the sound output from the speakers 8L and 8R. Sound control execution data, operation part control execution data for controlling the operation of the push button 31B and stick controller 31A, etc. are arranged in chronological order in correspondence with each process data n (numbers 1 to N). ing.

Next, the performance control CPU 120 controls the performance device (image display as a performance component) according to the contents of the process data 1 (display control execution data 1, lamp control execution data 1, sound control execution data 1, operation unit control execution data 1). The device 5, various lamps as performance components, speakers 8L and 8R as performance components, and operation units (push button 31B, stick controller 31A, etc.) are controlled (step 213SGS288). For example, a command is output to the display control unit 123 in order to display an image according to the variation pattern on the image display device 5. Further, in order to control the lighting/extinguishing of various lamps, a control signal (lamp control execution data) is output to the lamp control board 14. Furthermore, in order to cause the speakers 8L and 8R to output audio, a control signal (sound number data) is output to the audio control board 13 (step 029SGS290).

Then, a value corresponding to the variable display time specified by the variable pattern designation command is set in the variable display time timer (step 029SGS292). Also, a predetermined time is set in the variable display control timer (step 029SGS293). Note that the predetermined time is, for example, 30 ms, and the performance control CPU 120 writes image data indicating the display state of the decorative symbol on the left center right to the VRAM every time the predetermined time elapses, and the display control unit 123 writes the image data to the VRAM. A signal corresponding to the image data obtained is output to the image display device 5, and the image display device 5 displays an image corresponding to the signal, thereby achieving variable display (fluctuation) of the decorative pattern. Next, the value of the production control process flag is updated to a value corresponding to the production process during variable display (step S172), and the variable display start setting process is ended (step 213SGS291).

In addition, in the variable display performance processing, the performance control CPU 120 increments the value of the process timer by -1 every time the variable display performance process is executed, and determines whether the value of the process timer has timed out. do. If the process timer has not timed out, the production device is controlled according to the contents of the process data corresponding to the process timer, and if the process timer has timed out, the process data is switched and the next What is necessary is to start the process timer and control the presentation device according to the contents of the next process data. By doing so, the variable display of the decorative pattern in the main feature section 029SG is executed.

FIG. 11-23 is a flowchart showing an example of the process executed in step S029SGS277 of FIG. 11-22 as the meter effect determination process. In the meter performance determination process shown in FIG. 11-23, the performance control CPU 120 first determines whether the variation pattern of the variable display is super reach γ, super reach ε, super reach θ, super reach ι, or super reach κ. It is determined whether it is a fluctuation pattern (step 029SGS301). If the variation pattern of the variable display is any one of super reach γ, super reach ε, super reach θ, super reach ι, and super reach κ (step 029SGS301; Y), the meter effect determination process is ended, If the fluctuation pattern of the variable display is any of the following fluctuation patterns: non-reach, shortened non-reach, normal reach, super reach α, super reach β, super reach δ, super reach ζ, super reach η, and super reach λ (step 029SGS301;N) determines whether the variable display variation pattern is a shortened non-reach variation pattern (step 029SGS302).

If the variation pattern of the variable display is a shortened non-reach variation pattern (step 029SGS302; Y), the meter effect determination process is terminated, and the variation pattern of the variable display is a non-reach, normal reach, super reach α, or super reach β. , super reach δ, super reach ζ, super reach η, and super reach λ (step 029SGS302; N), the performance control CPU 120 determines whether or not to execute the meter performance according to the fluctuation pattern. A performance pattern is determined (Step 029SGS303).

Specifically, as shown in FIG. 11-24 (A), if the variation pattern is a non-reach variation pattern (no shortening, non-reach), non-execution of the meter effect is determined at a rate of 90%, Execution of meter performance pattern A is determined at a rate of 10%, execution of meter performance pattern B is determined at a rate of 0%, and execution of meter performance pattern C is determined at a rate of 0%. , determines the execution of meter performance pattern D at a rate of 0%, determines the execution of meter performance pattern E at a rate of 0%, and determines the execution of meter performance pattern F at a rate of 0%. do. In addition, if the fluctuation pattern is a normal reach fluctuation pattern, the non-execution of meter effects is determined at a rate of 20%, the execution of meter effects pattern A is determined at a rate of 25%, and the execution of meter effects pattern B is determined at a rate of 25%. The execution of meter performance pattern C is determined at a rate of 50%, the execution of meter performance pattern C is determined at a rate of 0%, and the execution of meter performance pattern D is determined at a rate of 0%. The execution of pattern E is determined at a rate of 0%, and the execution of pattern F of the meter performance is determined at a rate of 0%.

In addition, if the fluctuation pattern is one of Super Reach α, Super Reach β, Super Reach δ, and Super Reach ζ, the non-execution of the meter performance is determined at a rate of 10%, and the meter performance pattern A The execution of meter effect pattern B is determined at a rate of 5%, the execution of meter effect pattern B is determined at a rate of 15%, the execution of meter effect pattern C is determined at a rate of 40%, and the execution of meter effect pattern B is determined at a rate of 40%. The execution of pattern D is determined at a rate of 30%, the execution of pattern E of the meter effect is determined at a rate of 0%, and the execution of pattern F of the meter effect is determined at a rate of 0%.

In addition, if the variation pattern is a super reach η variation pattern, non-execution of the meter effect is determined at a rate of 5%, execution of meter effect pattern A is determined at a rate of 5%, and the execution of the meter effect is determined at a rate of 5%. The execution of pattern B is determined at a rate of 0%, the execution of pattern C of the meter effect is determined at a rate of 0%, the execution of pattern D of the meter effect is determined at a rate of 0%, and the execution of the meter effect is determined at a rate of 0%. The execution of pattern E is determined at a rate of 95%, and the execution of pattern F of the meter performance is determined at a rate of 0%.

In addition, if the fluctuation pattern is a super reach λ fluctuation pattern, non-execution of the meter effect is determined at a rate of 0%, execution of pattern A of the meter effect is determined at a rate of 0%, and the execution of the meter effect is determined at a rate of 0%. The execution of pattern B is determined at a rate of 0%, the execution of pattern C of the meter effect is determined at a rate of 0%, the execution of pattern D of the meter effect is determined at a rate of 0%, and the execution of the meter effect is determined at a rate of 0%. The execution of pattern E is determined at a rate of 0%, and the execution of pattern F of the meter performance is determined at a rate of 100%.

As shown in Figures 11-24 (B) and 11-25, pattern A in the meter effect is the period from the start of the variable display to the reach (in the case of a non-reach variable pattern without shortening, the period from the start of the variable display to the reach). This is a performance pattern in which the meter 029SG005M increases by one step at the first timing during the period from the start of the variable display to the notification of variable display results), and pattern B is a production pattern in which the meter 029SG005M increases by one step during the period from the first timing and the start of the variable display to the reach (non-reach variation without shortening). If it is a pattern, it is a production pattern in which the meter 029SG005M increases by one step (total increase of two steps) at the second timing after the first timing during the period from the start of the variable display to the notification of the variable display result. , pattern C is the first timing, the second timing, and the period from reach to the start of the super reach reach effect (for the variable pattern of normal reach, the period from reach to variable display result notification). This is an effect pattern in which the meter 029SG005M increases by one step at three timings (increases by three steps in total).

In addition, in pattern D, the meter 029SG005M increases by one step at the first timing, second timing, third timing, and fourth timing when reach effect A or reach effect B is being executed (total increase of four steps). ) is a performance pattern. In addition, pattern E includes the first timing, the second timing, the third timing, the fourth timing, and the fifth timing (high expectation reach effect start/stop) which is during execution of reach effect A and is later than the fourth timing. This is an effect pattern in which the meter 029SG005M increases by one step (total increase of five steps) at a timing before the start timing of the notification effect. Pattern F is an effect pattern in which the meter 029SG005M increases by five steps at the second timing.

Returning to FIG. 11-23, after executing the process of 029SGS303, the effect control CPU 120 determines whether or not it has been decided to execute the meter effect (step 029SGS304). If the execution of the meter effect has not been decided (step 029SGS304; N), the meter effect determination process is ended, and if the execution of the meter effect has been decided (step 029SGS304; Y), the effect pattern of the determined meter effect is memorized. (Step 029SGS305), sets a meter performance start wait timer according to the fluctuation pattern, and ends the meter performance determination process (Step 029SGS306).

In addition, when the execution of the meter effect has been decided, the effect control CPU 120 subtracts the value of the meter effect start wait timer by 1 every time the variable display effect process is executed, and the value of the meter effect start wait timer is set to 1. Determine whether or not it is out. At this time, if the meter performance start waiting timer times out, a process table for meter performance corresponding to the determined performance pattern of meter performance is selected, and the process timer for meter performance is started. Thereafter, each time the variable display performance process is executed, the value of the meter performance process timer is incremented by 1, and it is determined whether or not the meter performance process timer has timed out. If the process timer for meter performance has not timed out, the performance device is controlled according to the contents of the process data corresponding to the process timer for meter performance, and if the process timer for meter performance has timed out, the process data and start the next process data. By doing so, it is possible to perform meter effects during variable display.

As described above, in this feature part 029SG, by executing the meter effect during variable display, it is possible to check whether the meter 029SG005M increases to 5 levels, and by increasing the meter 029SG005M to 5 levels, the high expected level of reach is determined. It is possible to draw the attention of the player to whether or not the performance development performance will be executed.

FIG. 11-26 is a flowchart showing an example of the process executed in step S029SGS282 of FIG. 11-22 as the reach effect E development suggestion effect determination process. In the reach performance E development suggestion performance determination process shown in FIG. 11-26, the performance control CPU 120 first determines whether or not to execute the reach performance E development suggestion performance according to the fluctuation pattern of the variable display (step 029SGS311). . For example, as shown in FIG. 11-26(B), if the fluctuation pattern of the variable display is the fluctuation pattern of super reach δ, it is determined that the reach performance E development suggestion performance is not executed at a rate of 50%, Determine the execution of reach performance E development suggestion performance at a rate of 50%. On the other hand, if the fluctuation pattern of the variable display is the fluctuation pattern of super reach ζ, it is determined that the reach performance E development suggestion performance is not executed at a rate of 20%, and the execution of the reach performance E development suggestion performance is determined at a rate of 80%. Determined by the ratio of

Then, the performance control CPU 120 determines whether or not it has been decided to execute the reach performance E development suggestion performance in the process of step 029SGS311 (step 029SGS312). If it has not been decided to execute the reach performance E development suggestion performance (step 029SGS312; N), the reach performance E development suggestion performance determination process is ended, and if it has been decided to execute the reach performance E development suggestion performance (step 029SGS312 ;Y) sets the ready-to-win performance E development suggestion performance start wait timer and ends the ready-to-reach performance E development suggestion performance determination process (step 029SGS313).

In addition, if the execution of the reach performance E development suggestion performance has been decided, the performance control CPU 120 reduces the value of the wait time for the start of the reach performance E development suggestion performance by 1 every time the performance processing during variable display is executed, and It is determined whether the value of the performance E development suggestion performance start wait timer has timed out. At this time, if the timer for waiting for the start of the ready-to-reach performance E development suggestion performance has timed out, the process table for the ready-to-reach performance E development suggestion performance is selected, and the process timer for the ready-to-reach performance E development suggestion performance is started. From then on, each time the variable display processing is executed, the value of the process timer for reach performance E development suggestion performance is decremented by -1, and it is determined whether the process timer for reach performance E development suggestion performance has timed out. . If the process timer for reach performance E development suggestion performance has not timed out, the production device is controlled according to the content of the process data corresponding to the process timer for reach performance E development suggestion performance, and the reach performance E development suggestion performance is executed. If the process timer times out, the process data is switched and the next process data is started. By doing so, the reach performance E development suggestion performance can be executed during variable display.

In particular, in this feature section 029SG, the variable display in the variable pattern of super reach ζ in which the reach effect E development notification effect is executed is better than the variable display in the variable pattern of super reach δ in which the reach effect E development notification effect is not executed. Since the reach performance E development suggestion performance is executed at a higher rate when the reach performance It is possible to make the player pay attention to whether or not the suggestive performance is executed, thereby increasing the interest in the game.

FIG. 11-27 is a flowchart showing an example of the process executed in step S029SGS284 of FIG. 11-22 as the branch destination suggestion effect determination process. In the branch destination suggestion performance determination process shown in FIG. 11-27, the performance control CPU 120 first determines whether or not to execute the branch destination suggestion performance and the performance pattern according to the fluctuation pattern of the variable display (step 029SGS321). .

Specifically, as shown in Figure 11-28 (A), if the fluctuation pattern of the variable display is the fluctuation pattern of super reach γ, non-execution of the branch destination suggestion effect is determined at a rate of 90%. , determine the execution of branch destination suggestion performance in pattern Determine at a rate of 0%. In addition, if the variation pattern of the variable display is a variation pattern of super reach ε, the non-execution of the branch destination suggestion effect is determined at a rate of 70%, and the execution of the branch destination suggestion effect in pattern X is determined at a rate of 30%. The execution of pattern Y of the branch destination suggestion effect is determined at a rate of 0%, and the execution of pattern Z of the branch destination suggestion effect is determined at a rate of 0%.

In addition, if the fluctuation pattern of the variable display is a super reach θ fluctuation pattern, the non-execution of the branch destination suggestion effect is determined at a rate of 50%, and the execution of the branch destination suggestion effect in pattern X is determined at a rate of 30%. The execution of pattern Y of the branch destination suggestion performance is determined at a rate of 15%, and the execution of pattern Z of the branch destination suggestion performance is determined at a rate of 5%. In addition, if the variation pattern of the variable display is a variation pattern of super reach ι, the non-execution of branch destination suggestion effects is determined at a rate of 10%, and the execution of branch destination suggestion effects in pattern X is determined at a rate of 10%. The execution of pattern Y of the branch destination suggestion effect is determined at a rate of 70%, and the execution of pattern Z of the branch destination suggestion effect is determined at a rate of 10%. In addition, if the fluctuation pattern of the variable display is a super reach κ fluctuation pattern, the non-execution of the branch destination suggestion effect is determined at a rate of 10%, and the execution of the branch destination suggestion effect in pattern X is determined at a rate of 30%. The execution of pattern Y of the branch destination suggestion performance is determined at a rate of 20%, and the execution of pattern Z of the branch destination suggestion performance is determined at a rate of 40%.

As shown in FIG. 11-28 (B), the pattern X of the branch destination suggestion effect is such that the image display device 5 executes the reach effect H development notification effect during the execution period of the reach effect C or the reach effect D. This is a performance pattern that displays a branch destination suggestion image This is a performance pattern that displays a branch destination suggestion image Y that suggests the execution of the reach performance H development notification performance during the execution period of . This is a performance pattern that displays a branch destination suggestion image Z that suggests execution of a highly anticipated reach performance development notification performance during the execution period of D.

In addition, in this feature section 029SG, among patterns X to pattern Z, pattern Z is determined to be executed at a higher rate than pattern In other words, pattern Z is a performance pattern that has a higher degree of expectation for execution of the high-expectation reach performance development notification performance than pattern X and pattern Y (execution expectation of high expectation reach performance development notification performance: pattern Z > pattern Y , pattern Z > pattern X). Furthermore, when the reach effect H development notification effect is executed, pattern Y is determined to be executed at a higher rate than pattern X or pattern X. In other words, pattern Y is more likely to be executed than pattern This is a performance pattern in which the execution expectation level of the development notification performance is high (reach performance H execution expectation level of the development notification performance: pattern Y>pattern Z, pattern Y>pattern X).

Furthermore, as shown in Figure 11-28 (A), the execution or non-execution of the branch destination suggestion effect and the effect pattern are determined at different rates depending on the fluctuation pattern of the variable display, and are determined according to the result of the variable display. The proportions are not different. In other words, the performance pattern and the presence or absence of execution of the branch destination suggestion effect depend on whether or not the reach effect G to reach effect I develops after reach effect C or reach effect D is executed, and whether or not the reach effect G to reach effect I will develop after reach effect C or reach effect D is executed. However, the present invention is not limited to this, and whether or not to execute the branch destination suggestion performance and the performance pattern are determined depending on which direction the variable display will develop. The determination ratio may be different depending on both the fluctuation pattern and the variable display result, or the determination ratio may be different depending only on the variable display result.

Returning to FIG. 11-27, the performance control CPU 120 determines whether or not execution of the branch destination suggestion performance has been determined in the process of step 029SGS321 (step 029SGS232). If execution of the branch destination suggestion effect has not been decided (Step 029SGS232; N), the branch destination suggestion effect determination process is ended; if execution of the branch destination suggestion effect has been decided (Step 029SGS232; Y), the decided branch The performance pattern of the destination suggestion performance is stored (step 029SGS323), a branch destination suggestion performance start wait timer is set, and the branch destination suggestion performance determination process is ended (step 029SGS324).

In addition, when execution of the branch destination suggestion effect is decided, the effect control CPU 120 decreases the value of the branch destination suggestion effect start wait timer by 1 every time the variable displaying effect process is executed, and starts the branch destination suggestion effect. Determine whether the value of the wait timer has timed out. At this time, if the timer for waiting for the start of a branch destination suggestion performance times out, a process table for branch destination suggestion performance is selected according to the performance pattern of the determined branch destination suggestion performance, and the process timer for branch destination suggestion performance is started. let Thereafter, each time the variable display performance process is executed, the value of the process timer for branch destination suggestion performance is incremented by one, and it is determined whether or not the process timer for branch destination suggestion performance has timed out. If the process timer for branch destination suggestion production has not timed out, the production device is controlled according to the contents of the process data corresponding to the process timer for branch destination suggestion production, and the process timer for branch destination suggestion production has timed out. If so, switch the process data and start the next process data. By doing so, it is possible to perform a branch destination suggestion effect during variable display.

In particular, in this characteristic part 029SG, by displaying any of the branch destination suggestion image X, branch destination suggestion image Y, and branch destination suggestion image Z on the image display device 5 during the execution period of the reach effect C and the reach effect D, , it is possible to draw the attention of the player to the fact that the variable display result is not notified as the ready-to-reach effect C or the ready-to-reach effect D, and the change is made to the preliminary effect. Furthermore, during the execution period of the reach effect C and the reach effect D, the advance effect is determined according to which of the branch destination suggestion image X, the branch destination suggestion image Y, and the branch destination suggestion image Z is displayed on the image display device 5. Since the rate at which the reach performance H development notification performance is executed after the precursor performance and the rate at which the high-expectation level reach performance development notification performance is executed are different, the image display device 5 displays the branch destination suggestion image X and the branch destination. It is possible to draw the player's attention to whichever of the suggestion image Y and the branch destination suggestion image Z is displayed, thereby increasing the player's interest in the game.

FIG. 11-29 is a flowchart showing an example of the process executed in step S029SGS286 of FIG. 11-22 as the reach effect G development suggestion effect determination process. In the ready-to-win performance G development suggestion performance determination process shown in FIG. 11-29, the performance control CPU 120 first determines whether or not to execute the ready-to-reach performance G development suggestion performance according to the fluctuation pattern of the variable display.

Specifically, as shown in FIG. 11-29 (B), if the fluctuation pattern of the variable display is the fluctuation pattern of super reach ε, the non-execution of reach performance G development suggestion performance is set at a rate of 50%. , and the execution of reach performance G development suggestion performance is determined at a rate of 50%. In addition, if the variation pattern of the variable display is a variation pattern of super reach θ, the non-execution of the reach effect G development suggestion effect is determined at a rate of 20%, and the execution of the reach effect G development suggestion effect is determined at a rate of 80%. Determined by the ratio of

Then, the performance control CPU 120 determines whether or not it has been decided to execute the reach performance G development suggestion performance in the process of step 029SGS331 (step 029SGS332). If it has not been decided to execute the reach performance G development suggestion performance (step 029SGS332; N), the reach performance G development suggestion performance determination process is ended, and if it has been decided to execute the reach performance G exhibition suggestion performance (step 029SGS332 ;Y) sets a timer for waiting for the start of the reach effect G exhibition suggestion effect and ends the reach effect G exhibition suggestion effect determination process (step 029SGS333).

In addition, if the execution of the reach effect G exhibition suggestion effect has been decided, the effect control CPU 120 subtracts the value of the reach effect G exhibition suggestion effect start wait timer by 1 every time the variable displaying effect process is executed, and It is determined whether the value of the production G exhibition suggested production start wait timer has timed out. At this time, if the timer for waiting for the start of the ready-to-reach presentation G exhibition suggestion performance has timed out, the process table for the ready-to-reach presentation G exhibition suggestion presentation is selected, and the process timer for the ready-to-reach presentation G exhibition suggestion presentation is started. From then on, each time the variable display processing is executed, the value of the process timer for reach performance G exhibition suggestion performance is decremented by 1, and it is determined whether the process timer for reach performance G exhibition suggestion performance has timed out. . If the reach production G exhibition suggestion production process timer has not timed out, the production device is controlled according to the content of the process data corresponding to the reach production G exhibition suggestion production process timer, and the reach production G exhibition suggestion production is executed. If the process timer times out, the process data is switched and the next process data is started. By doing so, the reach effect G exhibition suggestion effect can be executed during variable display.

In particular, in this characteristic part 029SG, the variable display in the super reach θ variation pattern in which the reach effect G notification effect is executed is higher than the variable display in the super reach ε variation pattern in which the reach effect G notification effect is not executed. Since the reach performance E development suggestion performance is executed in proportion, in the variable display with these super reach ε and super reach θ variation patterns, reach performance G development is executed after reach performance C and reach performance D are executed. It is possible to make the player pay attention to whether or not the suggestive performance is executed, thereby increasing the interest in the game.

FIG. 11-31 is a flowchart showing an example of the process executed in step S029SGS289 of FIG. 11-22 as the chance-up effect determination process. In the chance up performance determination process shown in FIG. 11-31, the performance control CPU 120 first determines whether the variable display variation pattern is a non-reach or normal reach variation pattern (step 029SGS340). If the variation pattern of the variable display is a non-reach or normal reach variation pattern (step 029SGS340; Y), the chance up effect determination process is ended, and if the variation pattern of the variable display is a super reach variation pattern, Furthermore, it is determined whether the variation pattern of the variable display is a variation pattern of super reach λ (step 029SGS341).

If the variation pattern of the variable display is a super reach λ variation pattern (step 029SGS341; Y), the chance-up effect determination process is terminated, and if the variation pattern of the variable display is not a super reach λ variation pattern (step 029SGS341; Y), the process ends. 029SGS341;N) further determines whether the variation pattern of the variable display is a variation pattern of super reach γ, super reach ε, super reach θ, super reach ι, or super reach κ (step 029SGS342).

If the variation pattern of the variable display is any one of super reach α, super reach β, super reach δ, super reach ζ, super reach η, and super reach λ (step 029SGS342; N), the variable display It is determined whether the displayed variation pattern is a variation pattern of super reach α or super reach η (step 029SGS343). When the variable display fluctuation pattern is a super reach α or super reach η fluctuation pattern (step 029SGS343; Y), the performance control CPU 120 controls the execution of the chance up performance during the execution of the reach performance A according to the variable display result. The presence/absence and performance pattern are determined (step 029SGS344).

Here, the contents of the ready-to-reach presentation A to the ready-to-reach presentation I in this feature section 029SG will be explained based on FIGS. 11-32(A) to 11-32(E). As shown in FIG. 11-32 (A) to FIG. 11-32 (I), each of reach effect A to reach effect I includes a reach title display period in which the title of each reach effect is displayed on the image display device 5; It consists of a subsequent battle performance execution period in which the image display device 5 displays a battle performance between an ally character and an enemy character.

During the reach title display period of each of these reach effects A to I, the reach titles can be displayed in red as part of the chance-up effect (see FIG. 11-33(A)).

In addition, regarding the battle performance execution period of reach performance A to reach performance D, the cut-in image can be displayed on the image display device 5 during the movable body operation period during which the movable body 32 can be operated in the first half of the battle performance execution period. A cut-in image displayable period is provided, and as part of the chance-up effect, the operation of the movable body 32 during the movable body operation possible period and the display of the cut-in image during the cut-in image displayable period can be performed. (See Figure 11-33(A)).

In addition, regarding the battle performance execution period of reach performance C and reach performance D, a branch destination suggestion performance execution possible period is provided after these movable body movement possible period and cut-in image display possible period.

In addition, regarding the battle execution period of reach effect E and reach effect F, the first half of the battle effect execution period is provided with a movable body movement period, and the second half of the battle effect execution period (the end of the battle effect (near the timing), an operation is performed to prompt the player to operate the push button 31B or the stick controller 31A in order to notify the variable display result in accordance with the operation of the push button 31B or the stick controller 31A on the image display device 5. An operation promotion image display period for displaying a promotion image is provided. Note that the operation promotion image display period is normally a period in which the image of the push button 31B is displayed.

In this feature section 029SG, during the battle execution period of reach performance E and reach performance F, the movement of the movable body during the movable body operation period as part of the chance-up performance, and the image of the stick controller 31A during the operation promotion image display period. (See Figure 11-33(B)).

Note that for reach effect G, reach effect H, and reach effect I, a movable body operable period, a cut-in image display period, and an operation promotion image display period are not provided. In other words, reach performance G, reach performance H, and reach performance I are reach performance in which chance-up performance is not executed.

Returning to step 029SGS344 in FIG. 11-31, as shown in FIG. 11-34 (A), if the variable display result is a failure, the performance control CPU 120 will not execute the chance-up performance at a rate of 60%. The execution of the chance-up effect pattern P is determined at a rate of 35%, the execution of the chance-up effect pattern Q is determined at a rate of 5%, and the execution of the chance-up effect pattern R is determined at a rate of 0. Determined in percentage. In addition, if the variable display result is a jackpot, it is determined at a rate of 5% whether or not to execute the chance-up effect, and at a rate of 35% whether the chance-up effect is to be executed in pattern P, and the pattern of the chance-up effect is determined at a rate of 35%. The execution of pattern Q is determined at a rate of 60%, and the execution of pattern R of the chance-up effect is determined at a rate of 0%.

Then, the performance control CPU 120 determines whether or not it has been decided to execute the chance up performance during the execution of the reach performance A (step 029SGS345). If it has not been decided to execute the chance-up effect while the reach effect A is being executed (step 029SGS345; N), proceed to step 029SGS347, and if it has been decided to execute the chance-up effect while the reach effect A is being executed (step 029SGS345; Y). stores the determined performance pattern, sets a chance up performance start timer for reach performance A according to the variation pattern, and proceeds to step 029SGS347 (step 029SGS346).

In step 029SGS347, the production control CPU 120 determines whether the variation pattern of the variable display is a variation pattern of super reach η (step 029SGS347). If the variation pattern of the variable display is a super reach α variation pattern (step 029SGS347; N), the chance up effect determination process is terminated, and if the variation pattern of the variable display is a super reach η variation pattern (step 029SGS347; N), the process ends. 029SGS347; Y) determines whether or not to execute the chance-up effect during the execution of the reach effect F and the effect pattern according to the variable display result (step 029SGS348).

Specifically, as shown in FIG. 11-34 (B), if the variable display result is a failure, it is decided to not execute the chance-up effect at a rate of 40%, and the pattern S of the chance-up effect is decided. The execution is determined at a rate of 30%, the execution of the pattern T of the chance-up effect is determined at a rate of 20%, and the execution of the pattern U of the chance-up effect is determined at a rate of 10%. In addition, if the variable display result is a jackpot, it is determined at a rate of 10% whether or not to execute the chance-up effect, and at a rate of 20% whether the chance-up effect is to be executed in pattern S, and the pattern of the chance-up effect is determined at a rate of 20%. The execution of pattern T is determined at a rate of 30%, and the execution of pattern U of the chance-up effect is determined at a rate of 40%.

Then, the performance control CPU 120 determines whether or not it has been decided to execute the chance up performance during the execution of the reach performance F (step 029SGS349). If it has not been decided to execute the chance-up effect while the reach effect F is being executed (step 029SGS349; N), the chance-up effect determination process is ended, and if it has been decided to execute the chance-up effect while the reach effect F is being executed. (Step 029SGS349; Y) stores the determined performance pattern, sets a chance-up performance start timer for reach performance F in accordance with the variation pattern, and ends the chance-up performance determination process (Step 029SGS350).

In addition, in step 029SGS343, if the variation pattern of the variable display is one of super reach β, super reach δ, and super reach ζ (step 029SGS343; N), the production control CPU 120 controls the reach production according to the variable display result. B determines whether or not to execute the chance-up effect during execution and the effect pattern (step 029SGS351).

Specifically, as shown in Fig. 11-34 (C), if the variable display result is a failure, it is determined that the chance-up effect will not be executed at a rate of 40%, and the chance-up effect pattern P will be executed. Execution is determined at a rate of 30%, execution at a rate of pattern Q of chance-up effect is determined at a rate of 20%, and execution at a rate of pattern R of the chance-up effect is determined at a rate of 10%. In addition, if the variable display result is a jackpot, it is determined at a rate of 10% whether or not to execute the chance-up effect, and at a rate of 20% whether the chance-up effect is to be executed in pattern P, and the pattern of the chance-up effect is determined at a rate of 20%. The execution of pattern Q is determined at a rate of 30%, and the execution of pattern R of the chance-up effect is determined at a rate of 40%.

Then, the performance control CPU 120 determines whether or not it has been decided to execute the chance up performance during the execution of the reach performance B (step 029SGS352). If it has not been decided to execute the chance-up effect during reach effect B (step 029SGS352; N), the process advances to step 029SGS354, and if it has been decided to execute the chance-up effect during reach effect B (step 029SGS352; Y). stores the determined performance pattern, sets a chance up performance start timer for reach performance B according to the variation pattern, and proceeds to step 029SGS354 (step 029SGS353).

In step 029SGS354, the performance control CPU 120 determines whether the variation pattern of the variable display is the variation pattern of super reach ζ (step 029SGS354). If the variation pattern of the variable display is the variation pattern of super reach β or super reach δ (step 029SGS354; N), the chance up effect determination process is ended, and the variation pattern of the variable display is the variation pattern of super reach ζ. If yes (step 029SGS354; Y), the presence or absence of the chance-up effect during execution of the reach effect E and the effect pattern are determined according to the variable display result (step 029SGS355).

Specifically, as shown in FIG. 11-34 (D), if the variable display result is a failure, it is determined that the chance-up effect will not be executed at a rate of 60%, and the pattern S of the chance-up effect will be executed. Execution is determined at a rate of 35%, execution at a rate of 5% for pattern T of chance-up effects, and execution at a rate of 0% for pattern U for chance-up effects. In addition, if the variable display result is a jackpot, the non-execution of the chance-up effect is determined at a rate of 5%, the execution of the chance-up effect pattern S is determined at a rate of 35%, and the pattern of the chance-up effect is determined at a rate of 35%. The execution of pattern T is determined at a rate of 60%, and the execution of pattern U of chance-up effect is determined at a rate of 0%.

Then, the performance control CPU 120 determines whether or not it has been decided to execute the chance up performance during the execution of the reach performance E (step 029SGS356). If it has not been decided to execute the chance-up effect while the reach effect E is being executed (step 029SGS356; N), the chance-up effect determination process is ended, and if it has been decided to execute the chance-up effect while the reach effect E is being executed. (Step 029SGS356; Y) stores the determined performance pattern, sets a chance-up performance start timer for reach performance E according to the variation pattern, and ends the chance-up performance determination process (Step 029SGS357).

In addition, in the process of step 029SGS342, if the variation pattern of the variable display is any of the variation patterns of super reach γ, super reach ε, super reach θ, super reach ι, and super reach κ (step 029SGS342; Y), the effect The control CPU 120 further determines whether the variation pattern of the variable display is either the super reach γ or super reach ε variation pattern (step 029SGS358).

If the fluctuation pattern of the variable display is one of the super reach θ, super reach ι, or super reach κ fluctuation patterns (step 029SGS358; N), the chance-up effect determination process is terminated, and the fluctuation pattern of the variable display is If it is a variation pattern of super reach γ or super reach ε (step 029SGS358; Y), the effect control CPU 120 determines whether or not to execute the chance up effect during reach effect C or reach effect D, according to the variable display result. A performance pattern is determined (step 029SGS359).

Specifically, as shown in Figure 11-34 (A), when the reach effect to be executed is reach effect C, if the variable display result is a failure, the chance-up effect is not executed at a rate of 60%. , the execution of pattern P of chance-up effect is decided at a rate of 35%, the execution of pattern Q of chance-up effect is decided at a rate of 5%, and the execution of pattern R of chance-up effect is decided. Determine at a rate of 0%. In addition, if the variable display result is a jackpot, it is determined at a rate of 5% whether or not to execute the chance-up effect, and at a rate of 35% whether the chance-up effect is to be executed in pattern P, and the pattern of the chance-up effect is determined at a rate of 35%. The execution of pattern Q is determined at a rate of 60%, and the execution of pattern R of the chance-up effect is determined at a rate of 0%.

On the other hand, as shown in Figure 11-34 (C), when the reach effect to be executed is reach effect D, if the variable display result is a failure, non-execution of the chance-up effect is determined at a rate of 40%. Then, the execution of pattern P of chance up effect is decided at a rate of 30%, the execution of pattern Q of chance up effect is decided at a rate of 20%, and the execution of pattern R of chance up effect is decided at a rate of 10%. Determined by the ratio of In addition, if the variable display result is a jackpot, it is determined at a rate of 10% whether or not to execute the chance-up effect, and at a rate of 20% whether the chance-up effect is to be executed in pattern P, and the pattern of the chance-up effect is determined at a rate of 20%. The execution of pattern Q is determined at a rate of 30%, and the execution of pattern R of the chance-up effect is determined at a rate of 40%.

Then, the performance control CPU 120 determines whether or not it has been decided to execute the chance up performance during the execution of the reach performance C or the reach performance D (step 029SGS360). If it has not been decided to execute the chance up effect during reach effect C or reach effect D (step 029SGS360; N), the chance up effect determination process is ended and the chance up effect during reach effect C or reach effect D is executed. If it is decided to execute (Step 029 SGS360; Y), the determined performance pattern is stored, and a chance up performance start timer for reach performance C or reach performance D is set according to the variation pattern, and the chance up performance determination process is performed. (Step 029SGS361).

In addition, when it has been decided to execute the chance up performance, the performance control CPU 120 decreases the value of the chance up performance start wait timer by 1 every time the variable display performance processing is executed, and sets the value of the chance up performance start wait timer to 1. Determine whether the value has timed out. At this time, if the timer for waiting for the start of chance up performance has timed out, a process table for chance up performance is selected and a process timer for chance up performance is started. Thereafter, each time the variable display performance process is executed, the value of the process timer for chance up performance is incremented by 1, and it is determined whether or not the process timer for chance up performance has timed out. If the process timer for chance up effect has not timed out, control the effect device according to the contents of the process data corresponding to the process timer for chance up effect, and if the process timer for chance up effect has timed out. , switches the process data, and starts the next process data. By doing so, it is possible to perform a chance-up effect during variable display.

In particular, in this feature section 029SG, the degree of jackpot expectation varies depending on whether or not the chance-up effect is executed and the number of times the chance-up effect is executed during the execution period of the reach effect, so whether the chance-up effect is executed or not. In fact, it is possible to draw the attention of the player to the number of executions of the chance-up effect, thereby improving the interest in the game.

Furthermore, in reach performances with relatively low expectations for jackpots, such as reach performances A to D, chance-up performances are performed up to three times, so chance-up performances are performed while reach performances A to D are in progress. It is possible to effectively suggest to the player that the variable display result will be a jackpot depending on the number of executions.

On the other hand, in reach performances with high expectations for jackpots such as reach performance G to reach performance I, the chance-up performance can only be performed once during the reach performance, so it is unnecessary to use the chance-up performance multiple times. By executing this, it is possible to prevent the interest of the reach performance with high expectations for a jackpot from decreasing.

As shown in FIG. 11-34(E), among the performance patterns for chance-up effects in reach effect A to reach effect D, pattern P displays the reach title in red, but the movement of the movable body 32 and Pattern Q is a production pattern in which the cut-in image is not displayed, pattern Q is a production pattern in which the reach title is displayed in red and the movement of the movable body 32 is executed, but no cut-in image is displayed, and pattern R is the production pattern in which the cut-in image is not displayed. This is a performance pattern that executes all of the red display, the movement of the movable body 32, and the display of the cut-in image.

Furthermore, as shown in FIG. 11-34 (F), among the performance patterns for chance-up effects in reach effect E and reach effect F, pattern S displays the reach title in red, but does not match the movement of the movable body 32. Pattern Q is a performance pattern that does not display the image of the stick controller 31A, pattern Q is a performance pattern that displays the reach title in red and executes the movement of the movable body 32, but does not display the image of the stick controller 31A, and pattern R is a performance pattern that does not display the image of the stick controller 31A. This is an effect pattern that executes all of the red display of the reach title, the movement of the movable body 32, and the display of the image of the stick controller 31A.

As mentioned above, as for the chance-up effect of this feature part 029SG, as shown in Figures 11-34 (A) to 11-34 (D), the chance-up effect as a whole in reach effect A to reach effect D is as follows: When the effect is not executed, the jackpot expectation level is set to be the lowest, and when the chance-up effect is executed in pattern P, the jackpot expectation level is set higher than when the chance-up effect is not executed. There is. When the chance-up performance is executed with pattern Q, the expectation level of jackpot is set higher than when the chance-up performance is executed with pattern P. When the chance-up effect is executed in pattern R, the expectation level of jackpot is set higher than when the chance-up effect is executed in pattern Q (the jackpot of the chance-up effect in reach effect A to reach effect D). Expectation level: pattern R > pattern Q > pattern P > non-execution).

In addition, as for the overall chance-up effect in reach effect E and reach effect F, the expectation of jackpot is set to be the lowest when the chance-up effect is not executed, and when the chance-up effect is executed in pattern S, The expected level of jackpot is set higher than when the chance-up effect is not executed. When the chance-up effect is executed in pattern T, the expectation level of jackpot is set higher than when the chance-up effect is executed in pattern S. When the chance-up effect is executed in pattern RU, the jackpot expectation level is set higher than when the chance-up effect is executed in pattern T (the jackpot of the chance-up effect in reach effect E and reach effect F). Expectation level: pattern U > pattern T > pattern S > non-execution).

Here, when comparing the case where reach effect A to reach effect D are executed and the case where reach effect E or reach effect F is executed, pattern P and pattern Q are common in reach effect A to reach effect D. While pattern R is set as an executable effect pattern, pattern R is executable only when reach effect B or reach effect D is executed. In other words, the red display of the reach title and the operation of the movable body 32 are effects that can be executed in any of the reach effects A to D, while the cut-in image 029SG200 is displayed only in the reach effects B and D. This is a performance that can be executed.

Also, when comparing the case where reach effect E is executed and the case where reach effect F is executed, it is found that in reach effect E and reach effect F, pattern S and pattern T are commonly set as executable effect patterns. On the other hand, pattern U can only be executed when reach effect F is executed. In other words, the red display of the reach title and the operation of the movable body 32 are effects that can be executed in either reach effect E or reach effect F, while the display of the image of the stick controller 31A as the operation promotion image is the effect of reach effect F. This is a performance that can only be performed in

Next, the performance mode of variable display of super reach in this feature section 029SG will be explained based on FIGS. 11-35 to 11-56. First, a case where reach effect A is executed as a reach effect of super reach will be explained. Note that the meter 029SG005M at the start timing of the variable display is displayed as having not increased by one step. As shown in Figures 11-35 (A) to 11-35 (D), the execution of the meter effect is determined at the start of the variable display (in this feature section 029SG, when execution in pattern D or pattern E is determined) (disclosed), the meter 029SG005M increases by one step each at the first timing before the reach, the second timing, and the third timing after the reach.

As shown in FIGS. 11-35 (E) and 11-35 (F), when the reach effect A is started, the title image of the reach effect A and the expectation of jackpot of the reach effect A are first displayed on the image display device 5. An expectation level image 029SG251 indicating the degree is displayed. At this time, if execution of the chance-up effect has not been decided, title image 029SG161A with black title characters is displayed as the title image of reach effect A, while any of Pattern P, Pattern Q, and Pattern R is displayed. When it is decided to execute the chance-up effect in the effect pattern, title image 029SG161B with red title characters is displayed as the title image of reach effect A.

Then, when the display of the title image of the reach effect A is finished, a battle effect between the ally character A and the enemy character A is started, as shown in FIG. 11-35 (G). As shown in FIG. 11-36 (H), even during the battle performance, the meter 029SG005M increases by one step at the fourth timing.

In addition, during the battle performance, if the performance pattern of pattern Q or pattern R is determined to execute the chance-up performance, as shown in FIG. 11-36 (I), from the origin position of the movable body 32 A motion toward the production position is executed. The movement of the movable body 32 as a chance-up performance is movement from the origin position toward the performance position, but the movement of the movable body 32 ends at an intermediate position between the origin position and the performance position. Thereafter, the movable body 32 returns from the intermediate position to the original position.

Furthermore, when it is decided to execute the chance-up effect in the effect pattern of pattern R, the cut-in image 029SG200 is displayed on the image display device 5 as shown in FIGS. 11-36 (J) and 11-36 (K). is displayed.

If the variable display is a variable display of the variation pattern (PA2-2) of super reach α, as shown in FIGS. 11-36 (L) and 11-36 (M), the battle performance will be As a result, when the ally character A is defeated by the enemy character A, it is reported that the variable display result is a loss, and after the battle performance (reach performance A) is finished, decorative symbols are stopped and displayed in a combination indicating a loss.

On the other hand, if the variable display is the variable display of the super reach α jackpot variation pattern (PB1-2), as shown in Figures 11-36 (N) and 11-36 (O), the battle performance When the friendly character A wins over the enemy character A as a performance result, it is announced that the variable display result is a jackpot, and after the battle performance (ready-to-reach performance A) ends, decorative symbols are stopped and displayed in a combination indicating the jackpot.

In addition, if the variable display is a variable display of super reach η, as shown in Figures 11-37 (P) and 11-37 (Q), at the fifth timing after the end of the cut-in image display period. The meter 029SG005M increases by one step (up to 5 steps) and becomes full. Then, at the bottom of the display area of the image display device 5, a telop image 029SG005T is displayed to notify that the meter 029SG005M has increased to 5 levels (it is full) and that the high expectation level reach performance development notification performance will be executed. be done.

Next, as shown in FIG. 11-37 (R), the battle performance is interrupted midway, and instead of the battle performance, a high expectation reach performance development notification image is displayed on the image display device 5 as a high expectation reach performance development notification performance. 029SG180 is displayed. Then, reach effect F is started. The details of the highly anticipated reach performance development notification performance will be described later with reference to FIG. 11-55.

As shown in FIG. 11-37 (S) and FIG. 11-37 (T), when the reach effect F is started, the title image of the reach effect F and the expectation of jackpot of the reach effect A are first displayed on the image display device 5. An expectation level image 029SG256 indicating the degree is displayed. At this time, if execution of the chance-up effect has not been decided, title image 029SG166A with black title characters is displayed as the title image of reach effect F, while any of Pattern S, Pattern T, and Pattern U is displayed. When it is decided to execute the chance-up effect in the effect pattern, the title image 029SG166B with red title characters is displayed as the title image of the reach effect F.

When the display of the title image of the reach effect F ends, a battle effect between the ally character B and the enemy character B starts, as shown in FIG. 11-37(U). During the battle performance, if the performance pattern of pattern T or pattern U is determined to execute the chance-up performance, the movable An operation (movement) of the body 32 from the origin position toward an intermediate position is performed. Thereafter, the movable body 32 returns from the intermediate position to the original position.

As the battle performance progresses, as shown in FIGS. 11-38 (X), 11-38 (Y), and 11-38 (Z), a message is displayed to the player in the center of the display area of the image display device 5. An operation promotion image is displayed that prompts the user to operate the push button 31B or stick controller 31A. In addition, at this time, if execution of the chance-up performance is not determined in the performance pattern of pattern U, the image of the push button 31B is displayed as an operation promotion image, while the performance of the chance-up performance is not determined in the performance pattern of pattern U. If execution has been determined, an image of the stick controller 31A is displayed as an operation promotion image.

After the operation promotion image is displayed on the image display device 5, when the player operates the operation means such as the push button 31B or the stick controller 31A, or when the period for accepting operation of these operation means ends, the battle production is started. A variable display result is notified as a presentation result.

Specifically, if the fluctuation pattern of the variable display is a fluctuation pattern (PA2-8) of super reach η, as shown in FIGS. 11-39(a) and 11-39(b), the battle As a result of the performance, when ally character B is defeated by enemy character B, it is announced that the variable display result is a failure, and after the battle performance (reach performance F) ends, the decorative symbols are stopped and displayed in a combination indicating failure. Ru.

On the other hand, if the variable display is the variable display of the super reach η jackpot variation pattern (PB1-6), as shown in Figures 11-39(c) and 11-39(d), the battle performance When the friendly character B wins over the enemy character B as a performance result, it is announced that the variable display result is a jackpot, and after the battle performance (reach performance F) ends, decorative symbols are stopped and displayed in a combination indicating the jackpot.

Next, a case where reach effect B is executed as a reach effect of super reach will be explained. Note that the meter 029SG005M at the start timing of the variable display is displayed as having not increased by one step. As shown in Figures 11-40(A) to 11-40(D), the execution of the meter effect is determined at the start of the variable display (in this feature section 029SG, when execution in pattern D or pattern E is determined) (disclosed), the meter 029SG005M increases by one step each at the first timing before the reach, the second timing, and the third timing after the reach.

As shown in FIGS. 11-40(E) and 11-40(F), when reach effect B is started, the title image of the reach effect B and the expectation of jackpot of the reach effect B are first displayed on the image display device 5. An expectation level image 029SG252 indicating the degree is displayed. At this time, if execution of the chance-up effect has not been decided, title image 029SG162A with black title characters is displayed as the title image of reach effect B, while any of Pattern P, Pattern Q, and Pattern R is displayed. When it is decided to execute the chance-up effect in the effect pattern, title image 029SG162B with red title characters is displayed as the title image of reach effect B.

Then, when the display of the title image of the reach effect B ends, a battle effect between the ally character B and the enemy character A is started, as shown in FIG. 11-40 (G). As shown in FIG. 11-41(H), even during the battle performance, the meter 029SG005M increases by one step at the fourth timing.

In addition, during the battle performance, if the performance pattern of pattern Q or pattern R is determined to execute the chance-up performance, as shown in FIG. 11-41(I), from the origin position of the movable body 32 A movement (movement) to an intermediate position is performed. Thereafter, the movable body 32 returns from the intermediate position to the original position.

Furthermore, if the execution of the chance-up effect is determined in the effect pattern of pattern R, the cut-in image 029SG200 is displayed on the image display device 5 as shown in FIGS. 11-41 (J) and 11-41 (K). is displayed.

If the variable display is a variable display of the super reach β deviation variation pattern (PA2-3), as shown in Figures 11-41 (L) and 11-41 (M), the battle performance will be As a result, when the friendly character B is defeated by the enemy character A, it is reported that the variable display result is a loss, and after the battle performance (reach performance B) is finished, decorative symbols are stopped and displayed in a combination indicating a loss.

On the other hand, if the variable display is the variable display of the super reach β jackpot variation pattern (PB1-3), as shown in Figures 11-41 (N) and 11-41 (O), the battle performance When the friendly character B wins over the enemy character A as a performance result, it is announced that the variable display result is a jackpot, and after the battle performance (ready-to-reach performance B) ends, decorative symbols are stopped and displayed in a combination indicating the jackpot.

In addition, if the variable display is a variable display of super reach δ or super reach ζ, as shown in Figure 11-42 (P) and Figure 11-42 (Q), after the cut-in image display period ends. When the friendly character B is defeated by the enemy character A, it is once announced that the variable display result is a failure.

After the battle effect (reach effect B) is finished, a swinging display is performed in a combination indicating the failure of the decorative symbols. At this time, if it has been decided to execute the reach effect E development suggestion effect, as shown in FIG. The reach effect E development suggestion images 029SG170 are displayed so that the display positions overlap.

In addition, if the variable display is a variable display of a variation pattern of super reach δ, as shown in FIG. When the machine stops, it is notified again that the variable display is off. On the other hand, if the variable display is a variable display of the variation pattern of super reach ζ, as shown in Figure 11-42 (T), after the reach effect E development suggestion execution possible period, the reach effect E development notification is displayed. As a performance, a reach performance E development notification image 029SG181 is displayed. Then, reach effect E is started.

As shown in FIGS. 11-42 (U) and 11-42 (V), when the reach effect E is started, the title image of the reach effect E is first displayed on the image display device 5, and the expectation of jackpot of the reach effect E is displayed. An expectation level image 029SG255 indicating the degree is displayed. At this time, if execution of the chance-up effect has not been decided, title image 029SG165A with black title characters will be displayed as the title image of reach effect E, while any of Pattern S, Pattern T, and Pattern U will be displayed. When it is decided to execute the chance-up effect with the effect pattern, title image 029SG165B with red title characters is displayed as the title image of reach effect E.

Then, when the display of the title image of the reach effect E ends, a battle effect between the ally character A and the enemy character B starts, as shown in FIG. 11-42 (W). During the battle performance, if the execution of the chance-up performance is determined by the performance pattern of pattern T or pattern U, as shown in Figures 11-43 (X) and 11-43 (Y), the movement An operation (movement) of the body 32 from the origin position toward an intermediate position is performed. Thereafter, the movable body 32 returns from the intermediate position to the original position.

As the battle performance progresses, as shown in FIG. 11-43(Z), FIG. 11-43(a), and FIG. 11-43(b), a message appears to the player in the center of the display area of the image display device An operation promotion image is displayed that prompts the user to operate the push button 31B or stick controller 31A. In addition, at this time, if execution of the chance-up performance is not determined in the performance pattern of pattern U, the image of the push button 31B is displayed as an operation promotion image, while the performance of the chance-up performance is not determined in the performance pattern of pattern U. If execution has been determined, an image of the stick controller 31A is displayed as an operation promotion image.

After the operation promotion image is displayed on the image display device 5, when the player operates the operation means such as the push button 31B or the stick controller 31A, or when the period for accepting operation of these operation means ends, the battle production is started. A variable display result is notified as a presentation result.

Specifically, if the fluctuation pattern of the variable display is a fluctuation pattern of super reach ζ (PA2-7), as shown in Figures 11-44(c) and 11-44(d), the battle As a result of the performance, when ally character A is defeated by enemy character B, it is announced that the variable display result is a failure, and after the battle performance (reach performance E) ends, the decorative symbols are stopped and displayed in a combination that indicates failure. Ru.

On the other hand, if the variable display is the variable display of the super reach ζ jackpot variation pattern (PB1-5), as shown in Figures 11-44 (e) and 11-44 (f), the battle performance When the friendly character A wins over the enemy character B as a performance result, it is announced that the variable display result is a jackpot, and after the battle performance (ready-to-reach performance E) ends, decorative symbols are stopped and displayed in a combination indicating the jackpot.

Here, the performance mode of the reach performance E development suggestion performance shown in FIGS. 11-42(Q) to 11-42(T) will be explained in more detail.

First, as shown in FIGS. 11-45(A) to 11-45(B), when it is decided to execute the reach effect E development suggestion effect, the decorative symbols are displayed oscillatingly in a combination indicating a miss. In this state, as the ready-to-reach effect E development suggestion effect, the first stage of the ready-to-reach effect E development suggestion image 029SG170 is displayed in the display area of the image display device 5 so as to overlap with the decorative pattern. In addition, the reach performance E development suggestion image 029SG170 of the first stage has lower visibility from the player, such as lower brightness and fewer display colors than other images displayed in the display area such as decorative symbols. Any image is fine.

After the first stage display period of the reach effect E development suggestion image 029SG170 ends, the reach effect E development suggestion image 029SG170 is temporarily displayed as shown in FIGS. After finishing the display, the second stage display of the reach effect E development suggestion image 029SG170 is performed again so as to overlap with the decorative pattern. The second stage reach performance E development suggestion image 029SG170 has higher brightness and more display colors than the first stage reach performance E development suggestion image 029SG170. It is sufficient if the image has higher visibility from the player than the above image.

When the variable display is a variable display based on a variation pattern of super reach δ, as shown in FIG. 11-45(E), a reach effect E development notification image is displayed on the image display device 5 as a reach effect E development notification effect. The display of 029SG181 is not executed, and the decorative symbols are stopped and displayed in a combination indicating a failure. On the other hand, if the variable display is a variable display based on a variation pattern of super reach ζ, as shown in FIG. Image 029SG181 is displayed and reach effect E is executed.

Next, a case where reach effect C or reach effect D is executed as a reach effect of super reach will be explained. In addition, when reach effect C or reach effect D is executed as a reach effect of super reach, meter effect is not executed, so explanation of the period from the start of variable display to reach effect will be omitted.

When the reach effect C is executed, as shown in FIGS. 11-46(A) to 11-46(C), when the reach effect C is started, the reach effect C is first displayed on the image display device 5. The title image and the expectation level image 029SG253 indicating the jackpot expectation level of the reach effect C are displayed. At this time, if execution of the chance-up effect has not been decided, title image 029SG163A with black title characters is displayed as the title image of reach effect C, while any of Pattern P, Pattern Q, and Pattern R is displayed. When it is decided to execute the chance-up effect in the effect pattern, title image 029SG163B with red title characters is displayed as the title image of reach effect C.

Then, when the display of the title image of the reach effect C ends, a battle effect between the ally character C and the enemy character A starts, as shown in FIG. 11-46(C).

On the other hand, when the reach effect D is executed, as shown in FIGS. 11-46(D) to 11-46(F), when the reach effect D is started, the image display device 5 first A title image of the reach effect D and an expectation level image 029SG254 indicating the jackpot expectation level of the reach effect D are displayed. At this time, if execution of the chance-up effect has not been decided, title image 029SG164A with black title characters is displayed as the title image of reach effect D, while any of Pattern P, Pattern Q, and Pattern R is displayed. When it is decided to execute the chance-up performance in the performance pattern, title image 029SG164B with red title characters is displayed as the title image of reach performance D.

Then, when the display of the title image of the reach effect D ends, a battle effect between the ally character D and the enemy character A starts, as shown in FIG. 11-46(F).

In addition, during the battle performance of reach performance C or reach performance D, if the execution of chance up performance is determined by pattern Q or pattern R performance pattern, in Figure 11-47 (G) and Figure 11- As shown in 47(H), the movement (movement) of the movable body 32 from the origin position to the intermediate position is performed. Thereafter, the movable body 32 returns from the intermediate position to the original position.

Furthermore, when it is decided to execute the chance-up effect in the effect pattern of pattern R, the cut-in image 029SG200 is displayed on the image display device 5 as shown in FIG. 11-47 (I) and FIG. 11-47 (J). is displayed.

Also, as shown in Figures 11-47(K) to 11-47-(M), if execution of the branch destination suggestion effect is determined, a cut during the battle effect of reach effect C or reach effect D After the in-image display period, a reach performance H development notification performance (reach performance H) is executed on the image display device 5 as a branch destination suggestion performance, and a high expectation reach performance development notification performance (reach performance I) is executed. A branch destination suggestion image 029SG005Y) or a branch destination suggestion image Z (branch destination suggestion image 029SG005Z) that suggests that a highly anticipated reach effect development notification effect (reach effect I) is to be executed.

After the branch destination suggestion performance executable period, if the variable display is a variable display with a variation pattern (PA2-4) of super reach γ, the ), when the reach effect C is executed, the variable display is notified that the ally character C is defeated by the enemy character A as a result of the battle effect, and when the reach effect D is executed. If so, it is reported that the variable display has failed because the friendly character D is defeated by the enemy character A as a result of the battle performance. Then, after the battle effect (reach effect C or reach effect D) ends, the decorative symbols are stopped and displayed in a combination indicating a loss.

On the other hand, if the variable display is a variable display of the super reach γ jackpot variation pattern (PB1-4), as shown in Figures 11-48 (Q) to 11-48 (S), the reach effect If C is executed, the variable display will notify that a jackpot is achieved when ally character C wins over enemy character A as a result of the battle effect, and if reach effect D is executed, the result of the battle effect will be announced. When the friendly character D wins over the enemy character A, the variable display is notified that the jackpot has been won. Then, after the battle effect (reach effect C or reach effect D) ends, the decorative symbols are stopped and displayed in a combination indicating a loss.

In addition, if the variable display is a variable display of super reach ε or super reach θ, as shown in Figures 11-49 (T) to 11-49 (V), the period in which branch destination suggestion effects can be executed ends. Later, when the ally character C or the ally character D is defeated by the enemy character A, it is once reported that the variable display result is a failure.

After the battle effect (reach effect C or reach effect D) ends, a swinging display is performed in a combination indicating the failure of the decorative symbols. At this time, if it has been decided to execute the reach effect G development suggestion effect, as shown in FIG. The reach effect G development suggestion images 029SG171 are displayed so that the display positions overlap.

In addition, if the variable display is a variable display of a variation pattern of super reach ε, as shown in FIG. 11-49 (X), the fluctuation of the decorative symbol will be When the machine stops, it is notified again that the variable display is off. On the other hand, if the variable display is a variable display of a variation pattern of super reach θ, as shown in FIG. 11-49 (Y), after the reach effect G development suggestion execution executable period, the reach effect G development notification As a performance, a reach performance G development notification image 029SG182 is displayed. Then, reach effect G is started.

As shown in FIG. 11-50 (Z), when the reach effect G is started, the title image 029SG167 of the reach effect G and the expectation level image 029SG257 indicating the jackpot expectation level of the reach effect G are first displayed on the image display device 5. is displayed.

Then, when the display of the title image 029SG167 of the reach effect G is finished, a battle effect between the ally character C and the enemy character B starts, as shown in FIGS. 11-50(a) and 11-50(b). . In addition, if the fluctuation pattern of the variable display is a fluctuation pattern (PA2-9) in which the super reach θ is off, the battle performance will be changed as shown in Figures 11-50(c) and 11-50(d). As a result, when the ally character C is defeated by the enemy character B, it is reported that the variable display result is a loss, and after the battle performance (reach performance G) is finished, decorative symbols are stopped and displayed in a combination indicating a loss.

On the other hand, if the variable display is the variable display of the super reach θ jackpot variation pattern (PB1-7), as shown in Figures 11-50(e) and 11-50(f), the battle performance When the friendly character C wins over the enemy character B as a performance result, it is announced that the variable display result is a jackpot, and after the battle performance (reach performance G) ends, decorative symbols are stopped and displayed in a combination indicating the jackpot.

Here, the presentation mode of the reach presentation G development suggestion presentation shown in FIGS. 11-49(V) to FIG. 11-49(Y) will be described in more detail.

First, as shown in FIGS. 11-54 (A) to 11-54 (B), when it is decided to execute the reach effect G development suggestion effect, the decorative symbols are displayed in a oscillating manner in a combination indicating a miss. In this state, as the ready-to-reach presentation G development suggestion presentation, the first stage display of the ready-to-make presentation G development suggestion image 029SG171 is performed in the display area of the image display device 5 so as to overlap with the decorative pattern. In addition, the reach effect G development suggestion image 029SG171 of the first stage has lower visibility from the player, such as lower brightness and fewer display colors than other images displayed in the display area such as decorative symbols. Any image is fine.

After the first stage display period of the reach effect G development suggestion image 029SG171 ends, as shown in FIGS. 11-54(C) to 11-54(D), the reach effect G development suggestion image 029SG171 After finishing the display, the second stage display of the reach effect G development suggestion image 029SG171 is performed again so as to overlap with the decorative pattern. The second stage reach performance G development suggestion image 029SG171 has higher brightness and more display colors than the first stage reach performance G development suggestion image 029SG171. It is sufficient if the image has higher visibility from the player than the above image.

When the variable display is a variable display based on a variation pattern of super reach ε, as shown in FIG. 11-45(E), a reach effect G development notification image is displayed on the image display device 5 as a reach effect G development notification effect. The display of 029SG182 is not executed, and the decorative symbols are stopped and displayed in a combination indicating a failure. On the other hand, if the variable display is a variable display based on a variation pattern of super reach θ, as shown in FIG. Image 029SG182 is displayed and reach effect G is executed.

In addition, if the variable display is a variable display with a super reach ι variation pattern or a super reach κ variation pattern, the reach effect will be displayed as shown in Figures 11-51 (g) to 11-51 (h). After the executable period of branch destination suggestion effect during execution of C or reach effect D, the shutter image 029SG006 is displayed in the display area of the image display device 5 as a preliminary effect (from the left and right of the display area to the center of the display area). The shutter image 029SG006 is moved and displayed), and the effect image displayed on the image display device 5 becomes temporarily invisible due to the shutter image 029SG006.

Then, when the execution period of the preliminary effect ends based on the elapse of a predetermined period, the shutter image 029SG006 retreats from the center of the display area of the image display device 5 toward the left and right sides as a precursor effect, and In response to the withdrawal of the shutter image 029SG006, the image of the character C becomes visible to the player in the display area of the image display device 5.

Then, when the variable display is a variable display with a variation pattern of super reach ι, as shown in FIG. After image 029SG183 is displayed, reach effect H is executed. In addition, when the variable display is a variable display with a variation pattern of super reach κ, as shown in FIG. After the reach effect development notification image 029SG180 is displayed, the reach effect I is executed. The details of the highly anticipated reach performance development notification performance will be described later with reference to FIG. 11-55.

If the variable display variation pattern is a variable display of super reach ι, as shown in FIG. 11-52(k), when the reach effect H is started, the image display device 5 first A title image 029SG168 of the ready-to-win effect H and an expectation level image 029SG258 indicating the jackpot expectation level of the ready-to-reach effect H are displayed.

When the display of the title image 029SG168 of the reach effect H ends, a battle effect between the ally character D and the enemy character C starts, as shown in FIGS. 11-52(l) and 11-52(m). . In addition, if the fluctuation pattern of the variable display is the fluctuation pattern of Super Reach ι (PA2-10), the battle performance will be changed as shown in Figures 11-52 (n) and 11-52 (o). As a result, when the ally character D is defeated by the enemy character C, it is reported that the variable display result is a loss, and after the battle performance (reach performance H) ends, decorative symbols are stopped and displayed in a combination indicating a loss.

On the other hand, if the variable display is the variable display of the super reach ι jackpot variation pattern (PB1-8), as shown in Figures 11-52 (p) and 11-52 (q), the battle performance When the friendly character D wins over the enemy character C as a performance result, it is announced that the variable display result is a jackpot, and after the battle performance (reach performance H) ends, decorative symbols are stopped and displayed in a combination indicating the jackpot.

In addition, if the variation pattern of the variable display is a variable display with a variation pattern of super reach κ, as shown in Figures 11-53 (r) to 11-53 (s), high expectation reach performance development When the ready-to-win effect I is started under the notification effect control, the title image 029SG169 of the ready-to-reach effect I and the expectation level image 029SG259 indicating the jackpot expectation level of the ready-to-win effect I are first displayed on the image display device 5. At this time, images of characters A to C are displayed together on the image display device 5 behind the title image 029SG169 and expectation image 029SG259 of the reach effect I, so that the reach effect I is It creates a special feeling because the expectation of jackpot is higher than the reach performance.

Then, when the display of the title image 029SG169 of reach effect I is finished, as shown in FIGS. 11-53(t) and 11-53(u), a battle effect between ally characters A to ally characters D and enemy character C is started. In addition, if the fluctuation pattern of the variable display is a fluctuation pattern of super reach κ (PA2-11), the battle performance will be changed as shown in Figures 11-53 (v) and 11-53 (w). As a result, when ally characters A to ally characters D are defeated by enemy character C, it is announced that the variable display result is a failure, and after the battle performance (reach performance H) ends, the decorative symbols are stopped and displayed in a combination that indicates a failure. be done.

On the other hand, if the variable display is the variable display of the super reach κ jackpot variation pattern (PB1-9), as shown in Figures 11-53 (x) and 11-53 (y), the battle performance As a performance result, when ally characters A to ally characters D win against enemy character C, the variable display result is announced to be a jackpot, and after the battle performance (reach performance H) ends, the decorative pattern stops at the combination indicating a jackpot. Is displayed.

Here, we will explain in more detail the high expectation level reach performance development notification performance from Figure 11-37 (R) to Figure 11-37 (T) and Figure 11-53 (r) to Figure 11-53 (s). .

First, as shown in FIGS. 11-55 (A) to 11-55 (B), when the high-expected reach performance development notification performance is started, the reach performance F or the reach performance is displayed in the display area of the image display device 5. A highly anticipated reach performance development notification image 029SG180 is displayed to notify that I will be executed. Furthermore, after the high expectation reach performance development notification image 029SG180 is displayed, the display area of the image display device 5 is darkened to make the performance image displayed on the image display device 5 difficult to see. is executed.

In addition, in the blackout effect, a darkened image is displayed on the image display device 5, making it difficult to see other effect images (variable display images of decorative patterns, character images, etc.), and making it difficult to see the display screen itself. At the same time, the volume of the performance sound output from the speakers 8L and 8R is lowered than before the execution of the high expectation reach performance development notification performance. Furthermore, the light intensity of the various light emitting means (for example, LED, etc.) provided in the gaming area, the movable body 32, the glass door frame, and the gaming machine frame 3 is checked before execution of the high-expected reach performance development notification performance. By lowering it more than that, it becomes even more difficult to visually recognize other performance images (variable display images of decorative patterns, character images, etc.).

After the blackout effect is executed, the image of the character C is displayed as a preliminary effect, as shown in FIG. 11-55(C). Furthermore, in the first stage performance, the content of the lines spoken by the character C is displayed in the display area of the image display device 5 as a character image 029SG007, and the lines are output as audio information from the speakers 8L and 8R.

As shown in FIGS. 11-55(D) and 11-55(E), a switching performance is executed after the first stage performance ends, and a second stage performance is performed after the end of the switching performance. As the switching effect, an image different from the image of the character C displayed in the previous stage effect is displayed. Note that although this feature section 029SG exemplifies a form in which only one image is displayed as a switching effect, the present invention is not limited to this, and any of a plurality of images may be displayed as a switching effect. may be displayed. In addition, when any one of a plurality of images can be displayed as a switching effect in this way, the rate at which the jackpot game state is controlled may be varied depending on which image is displayed.

In the latter stage production, as described above, the lines spoken by the characters are displayed in the display area of the image display device 5 as the character image 029SG008, and the lines are outputted as audio information from the speakers 8L and 8R. The character image 029SG008 displayed at this time has fewer characters than the character image 029SG007 displayed during the first stage performance, but the size per character is larger and brighter than the character image 029SG007 (see Figure 11-10). .

As shown in FIG. 11-55(F), after the latter stage performance ends, the movable body performance is executed. As the movable body effect, the movable body 32 falls from the origin position which is the upper position of the image display device 5 to the effect position which overlaps with the approximate center position on the front side of the display area of the image display device 5. The movable body 32 that has fallen to the production position is moved to the origin position by driving a drive motor (not shown) or the like.

After the movable object effect is finished, as shown in Figure 11-55 (G), the reach effect according to each variation pattern (if the variable display is a variable display with the variation pattern of super reach η, the reach effect F. If the variable display is a variable display with a variation pattern of super reach κ, reach effect I) is executed.

Next, variable display in a variation pattern of super reach λ will be explained. As shown in FIGS. 11-56(A) to 11-56(D), in the variable display using the variation pattern of the super reach λ, when the variable display starts, at the second timing before the reach The meter 029SG005M increases all at once to the 5th stage and becomes full. Next, at the bottom of the display area of the image display device 5, a telop image 029SG005T is displayed to notify that the meter 029SG005M has increased to 5 levels (it is full) and that a high-expectation reach performance development notification performance will be executed. Is displayed.

Then, the highly anticipated reach performance development notification performance is executed without becoming a reach or executing any of the reach performance A to reach performance D. Incidentally, the performance mode of the high expectation level reach performance development notification performance is the same as the performance mode described above with reference to FIG. 11-55. After the execution of the highly anticipated reach performance development notification performance, as shown in FIG. 11-53, the reach performance I is executed and finally it is announced that the variable display result is a loss or a jackpot.

As described above, in the pachinko gaming machine 1 in this feature section 029SG, as shown in FIGS. 11-8 and 11-9, the length L7 of the execution period of the high-expectation reach performance development notification performance is determined by the reach performance E development notification performance. The execution period length of the performance is set to be longer than L6b, and the reach performance E is executed after the reach performance E development notification performance is started, and the variable display result is a jackpot as the performance result of the reach performance E. The length of the period L11 until the notification is made is that after the highly anticipated reach performance development notification performance is started, the reach performance F is executed, and the variable display result is notified as a jackpot as the performance result of the reach performance F. L12, the length of the period from when the highly anticipated reach performance development notification performance is started until the reach performance I is executed and the variable display result is notified as a jackpot as the performance result of the reach performance I. Since the length is set to be shorter than L13, in the case where reach effect E is executed after execution of reach effect E development suggestion effect, the period until it is announced that the variable display result will be a jackpot. It is possible to suppress a decline in gaming interest due to an excessively long period of time. In addition, in the case where the reach performance I is executed after the execution of the highly expected reach performance development notification performance, the player is suitably made to pay attention to the reach performance I before the variable display result is notified that it is a jackpot. As a result, the player's enjoyment of the game can be improved.

In addition, as shown in FIG. 11-7, the length L2 of the execution period of the reach effect B is set longer than the length L1 of the execution period of the r-value effect A, so it is longer than the execution period L2 of the reach effect B. The player's attention can be drawn to the reach performance B over a period of time, and the game interest can be improved. In addition, as shown in Figures 11-7 to 11-9, reach effect B differs from reach effect A in that the development notification effect is executed before the variable display result is announced as the effect result. Therefore, even if the reach performance E development notification performance is not executed, the player is surely made to pay attention to whether or not the variable display result is notified as a jackpot as the performance result of the reach performance B. It is now possible.

In addition, as shown in Figures 11-7 to 11-9, while reach effect A or reach effect B is being executed, a meter effect may be executed as a effect suggesting the execution of a high expectation level reach effect development notification effect. Therefore, by executing the meter performance, it is possible to arouse the player's sense of expectation for the execution of the highly anticipated reach performance development notification performance.

In addition, in this feature section 029SG, a form in which a meter effect can be executed as an effect suggesting the execution of a high-expectation level reach effect development notification effect has been exemplified, but the present invention is not limited to this, and the meter effect Alternatively, or in addition, the execution of the highly anticipated reach performance development notification performance may be suggested by the sound output mode from the speakers 8L, 8R, the light emission mode of the game effect lamp 9, etc.

In addition, in this feature section 029SG, a mode in which the meter effect can be executed only when the reach effect A or the reach effect B is executed has been exemplified, but the present invention is not limited to this, and the reach effect C or the reach effect Even when executing D, it may be possible to perform meter effects. In particular, in the variable display of super reach κ in which the advance performance and precursor performance are executed from the middle of reach performance C and reach performance D, and then the high expectation level reach performance development notification performance and reach performance I are executed. , a case may be provided in which the meter 029SG005M increases to the fifth stage (changes to a display mode that notifies execution of high expectation level reach performance development notification performance) triggered by advance performance or omen performance. By doing this, by variable display of the fluctuation pattern of super reach ι and variable display of the fluctuation pattern of super reach κ, it is possible to check whether the meter 029SG005M increases to the 5th stage during the execution of the preliminary effect or the precursor effect. Since the player's attention can be drawn to the game, the player's interest in the game can be improved.

In addition, as shown in Figures 11-9 and 11-25, in the variable display of the variation pattern of super reach λ, the meter 029SG005M increases to the 5th stage at the second timing without going through the execution of reach effect A. Since the highly expected reach performance development notification performance is executed, even if the reach performance A is not executed, the player is not aware that the high expectation level reach performance development notification performance and the reach performance I are executed. Since the player can draw attention to the player, the player's interest in playing the game can be improved.

In addition, in this characteristic part 029SG, as shown in FIGS. 11-7 to 11-9, when reach performance B is executed, high expectation level reach performance development notification performance and reach performance I may be executed. Although the present invention is not limited to this, a case may be provided in which the highly anticipated reach performance development notification performance and the reach performance I are executed after the execution of the reach performance B. By doing this, even when reach effect B is executed, it is possible to draw the player's attention to whether or not the highly anticipated reach effect development notification effect and reach effect I will be executed. You can improve your interest.

Furthermore, in this feature section 029SG, as a meter effect, the meter 029SG005M increases by one step from the first timing to the fifth timing, but the present invention is not limited to this, and the meter 029SG005M A case may be provided in which the number is increased by two or more stages at any timing. Furthermore, when providing a timing in which the meter 029SG005M increases by two or more steps at any one of the first timing to the fifth timing, the meter 029SG005M increases at a timing before reach effect A or reach effect B starts. The rate of development to the ready-to-reach effect I may be different depending on the case where the meter 029SG005M increases to the fifth stage at the timing after the ready-to-reach effect A or the ready-to-reach effect B is started. In addition, in this feature section 029SG, as a meter effect, a mode in which the display mode of the meter 029SG005M can be changed up to the fifth stage is exemplified, but the present invention is not limited to this. The display mode may be changeable in four or less steps or six or more steps.

In addition, as shown in Figures 11-8 and 11-9, after the high expectation level reach performance development notification performance is started, the reach performance I is executed and the variable display result is the jackpot as the performance result of the reach performance I. The length of the period L13 until the notification is made is from when the highly anticipated reach performance development notification performance is started until the reach performance F is executed and the variable display result is notified as a jackpot as the performance result of the reach performance F. Since the length of the period is set to be longer than L12, the jackpot gaming state is controlled by lengthening the period until the performance result is announced when reach performance I, which has a higher jackpot expectation, is executed. It is possible to effectively increase expectations for

In addition, as shown in Figures 11-23 to 11-25, in this feature section 029SG, the meter performance that suggests the execution of the high expectation level reach performance development notification performance reaches a maximum from the first timing to the fifth timing of the variable display. This is an effect in which the display mode changes step by step over five stages (six stages if you include the state where the meter effect is not executed). On the other hand, as shown in FIG. 11-45, the reach performance E development suggestion performance that suggests execution of the reach performance E in this feature section 029SG changes the display mode of the reach performance E development suggestion image 029SG170 over two stages. This is a performance that continues. In other words, in this feature section 029SG, as a meter effect, the display mode of the meter 029SG005M can be changed up to 5 levels, but as a reach effect E development suggestion effect, the display mode of the reach effect E development suggestion image 029SG170 is 2 levels. It can only change up to. For this reason, in the meter performance, the target image (meter 029SG005M) changes more easily up to the 5th stage than in the reach performance E development suggestion performance, so the player pays attention to whether or not the meter 029SG005M increases to the 5th stage. It is possible to improve the player's interest in the game.

In addition, in this feature part 029SG, while the display mode of the meter 029SG005M can be changed up to the 5th stage as a meter effect, the display mode of the reach effect E development suggestion image 029SG170 can be changed up to the 2nd level as a reach effect E development suggestion effect. Although the present invention is not limited to this example, the display mode of the reach effect E development suggestion image 029SG170 may be changeable up to the fifth stage as a reach effect E development suggestion effect. In addition, in this way, when the display mode of the reach effect E development suggestion image 029SG170 can be changed up to the 5th stage as the reach effect E development suggestion image 029SG170, the display mode of the reach effect E development suggestion image 029SG170 can be changed up to the 5th level. The rate of change may be set lower than the rate at which the display mode of the meter 029SG005M changes to the fifth level.

In addition, as shown in Figures 11-7 to 11-9, in the variable display of the super reach δ and super reach ζ fluctuation patterns, the length L5 of the period in which the meter effect can be executed is the reach effect E development suggestion effect is possible. Since the length of the period is set longer than L6a, reach performance E indicates that reach performance F, which has a higher jackpot expectation than reach performance A, will be executed after the high-expectation reach performance development notification performance is executed. Since the ready-to-win performance E can be suggested for a longer period of time than when execution of the development notification performance is suggested, the game interest can be improved.

In this feature section 029SG, the length L5 of the meter performance executable period is set to be longer than the length L6a of the reach performance E development suggestion performance executable period, but the present invention is limited to this. Instead, the length L5 of the meter effect executable period may be set shorter than the length L6a of the reach effect E development suggestion effect executable period.

Furthermore, although this feature section 029SG exemplifies a form in which the meter 029SG005M can be displayed on the image display device 5 even when execution of the meter effect is not determined, the present invention is not limited to this. , the meter 029SG005M may be displayed on the image display device 5 only when execution of the meter effect is determined. Furthermore, the meter 029SG005M may be displayed on the image display device 5 for the first time at the first stage increase timing.

Furthermore, the reach performance E development suggestion performance is a performance that can be executed after the variable display result (missing) is notified as the performance result of the reach performance B, so the reach performance E development is performed while the reach performance B is being executed. By executing the suggestion performance, it is possible to prevent a decline in game interest due to the player recognizing that the variable display result is not reported as a jackpot as a performance result of the reach performance B.

In addition, in this feature part 029SG, as a pattern that develops from reach performance B to reach performance E, after a variable display result is announced as the performance result of reach performance B, reach performance E development notification performance and reach performance E are executed. However, the present invention is not limited to this, and as a pattern that develops from reach effect B to reach effect E, reach effect B is disclosed. A case may be provided in which the ready-to-reach performance E development notification performance and the ready-to-reach performance E are executed before the variable display result is notified as the performance result. In this way, when creating a case where reach performance E development notification performance and reach performance E are executed before the variable display result is announced as the performance result of reach performance B, when the reach performance E development notification performance and reach performance E are executed, It may be possible to execute reach performance E development suggestion performance.

Furthermore, as shown in Figures 11-31 to 11-34, during the execution of reach effect A to reach effect F, it is possible to execute a chance-up effect, and the chance-up effect is executed in any of the effect patterns. The level of jackpot expectation varies depending on the type of player.

In particular, regarding the variable display of the super reach η that executes the reach effect F after the reach effect A, during the execution of the reach effect A, the reach title is displayed in red and the movable body 32 moves twice in total. While it is possible to execute the effects that make up the chance-up effect, during the execution of the reach effect F, the reach title is displayed in red, the movement of the movable body 32, and the stick controller 31A as an operation promotion image. The effect constituting the chance-up effect can be executed over a total of three times of image display. For this reason, regarding the variable display of super reach η in a variation pattern, the number of executions of the effects that make up the chance-up effect increases during reach effect F than during reach effect A, so that the reach It is possible to suitably draw the attention of the player to the performance result of the performance F.

Furthermore, regarding the variable display of the super reach ζ that executes the reach effect E after the execution of the reach effect B, during the execution of the reach effect B, the red display of the reach title and the movement of the movable body 32 and the cut While it is possible to perform the effects that make up the chance-up effect three times in total with the display of in-image 029SG200, while the reach effect E is being executed, the reach title is displayed in red and movable as a chance-up effect. The effect constituting the chance-up effect can be executed twice in total with the movement of the body 32. For this reason, regarding the variable display of super reach ζ in the fluctuation pattern, the number of executions of the effects that make up the chance-up effect is smaller during reach effect E than during reach effect B, so the reach effect Since it is possible to prevent the player from drawing too much attention to the performance result of E, the interest in the game can be improved.

In addition, in this feature section 029SG, regarding the variable display in the variable pattern of super reach ζ that executes reach effect E after execution of reach effect B, while the reach effect B is executed, the red display of the reach title and the movable body 32 and the display of cut-in image 029SG200, which constitutes a chance-up effect, can be executed three times in total.While reach effect E is being executed, the reach title is displayed as a chance-up effect. Although the present invention is not limited to this example, the present invention is not limited to this, and the present invention is not limited to this. Regarding the variable display of Super Reach ζ that executes reach effect E after execution of effect B, while reach effect B is being executed, the same number of effects that make up the chance-up effect can be performed as when reach effect E is being executed. You can also use it as

In addition, in this feature section 029SG, as effects that constitute the chance-up effect, the red display of the reach title, the movement of the movable body 32, the display of the cut-in image 029SG200, and the display of the image of the stick controller 31A as the operation promotion image are exemplified. However, the present invention is not limited thereto; for example, the game effect lamp 9 emits light in a specific pattern, the speakers 8L and 8R output specific sounds, the light guide plate emits light, and the image display device 5 The display of the light guide plate (pseudo light guide plate), the operation of the image display device 5 itself, etc. may be included in the effects that constitute the chance-up effect.

In addition, in this feature section 029SG, as effects constituting the chance-up effect, the red display of the reach title, the movement of the movable body 32, the display of the cut-in image 029SG200, the display of the image of the stick controller 31A as an operation promotion image, etc. All of these examples are performances that are performed regardless of the player's operations (active performances), but the present invention is not limited to this. An effect (active) that is executed only when the player performs an operation such as changing the emitted light color of the game effect lamp 9 by operating an operating means such as a push button 31B or a stick controller 31A (so-called back button). (direction) may also be included.

In addition, as shown in Figures 11-7 to 11-9 and Figure 11-30, the variable display of the fluctuation patterns of super reach γ, super reach ε, super reach θ, super reach ι, and super reach κ is The reach performance of the super reach can be determined from the reach performance C and the reach performance D, which has a higher jackpot expectation than the reach performance C. Then, if the advance performance and the precursor performance are executed before the variable display result is notified as the performance result of reach performance C or reach performance D, and the high expectation level reach performance development notification performance is executed, the reach performance If reach performance G development notification performance is executed after reach performance I is executed and a variable display result (missing) is announced as the performance result of reach performance C or reach performance D, it is a reach with a lower jackpot expectation than reach performance I. Performance G is executed.

Furthermore, if the preliminary performance and the precursor performance are executed before the variable display result is announced as the performance result of reach performance C or reach performance D, and if the reach performance H development notification performance is executed, then reach performance I. Since the ready-to-win performance H, which has a low expectation of jackpot, is executed, it is possible to diversify the performance by combining the type of reach-to-win performance and the development notification performance.

In particular, regarding the variable display of the fluctuation patterns of super reach γ, super reach ε, super reach θ, super reach ι, and super reach κ, the ratios shown in Figures 11-30 (A) and 11-30 (B) are used. By determining which of reach performance C and reach performance D to perform, the foreshadowing performance is executed more when execution of reach performance C is decided than when execution of reach performance D is decided. Since the rate at which reach performance I (high expectation level reach performance development notification performance) is executed after reaching is set high, a predetermined relationship is established between the reach performance that is executed and the high expectation level reach performance development notification performance. It is possible to improve the performance interest of reach performance and development notification performance.

In addition, this feature section 029SG determines the reach effect to be executed from the reach effect C and the reach effect D in the variable display of the variation patterns of super reach γ, super reach ε, super reach θ, super reach ι, and super reach κ. Although possible forms have been illustrated, the present invention is not limited to this, and the variation pattern in which the reach effect C is executed during the variable display and the variation pattern in which the reach effect D is executed during the variable display are separately provided. may be provided.

In addition, as shown in FIG. 11-34, the feature section 029SG determines whether or not to execute a chance-up effect and the effect pattern at different rates depending on the variable display results.In other words, the chance-up effect is a reach effect. Although the embodiment has been exemplified in which the variable display result is executed as a performance that suggests a jackpot as a performance result, the present invention is not limited to this, and during the performance period of reach performance A to reach performance D. An executable chance-up performance may be executable as a performance that suggests that any of reach performance E to reach performance I will be executed (develop to any of reach performance E to reach performance I). .

Furthermore, as a chance-up performance, in addition to the variable display result becoming a jackpot or the execution of any of reach effects E to I, there is also a possibility of a jackpot game when the variable display result becomes a jackpot. It may be possible to suggest that the number of rounds is 10, that the probability is changed after the end of the jackpot game, etc.

In addition, as shown in FIG. 11-9, there are cases where the high-expectation reach performance development notification performance is executed after the reach performance C or D is executed, and cases where the reach performance development notification performance is executed after the reach performance C or the reach performance D is executed. In the case where reach performance H development notification performance is executed, the advance performance is executed because a common preliminary performance can be executed in the period between reach performance C or reach performance D and development notification performance. By doing so, it is possible to increase the player's attention to the development notification performance, and to make the player pay attention to which of the development notification performances, the high expectation level reach performance development notification performance and the reach performance H development notification performance, will be executed. You can improve your interest in gaming.

In addition, as shown in Figures 11-7 to 11-9 and Figures 11-27 to 11-28, during the execution period of reach effect C or reach effect D, the execution of these reach effect C or reach effect D It is suggested which of the reach performance H development notification performance and the high expectation level reach performance development notification performance will be executed later, and it is also suggested that both the execution of the reach performance H development notification performance and the execution of the high expectation level reach performance development notification performance are executed. Since it is possible to perform a possible branch destination suggestion performance, the execution of the development destination suggestion performance increases the player's attention to the execution of the development notification performance, and the reach performance H development notification performance. It is possible to draw a player's attention to which of the high-expectation reach performance development notification performances will be executed, and to improve the interest in the game.

In addition, this feature section 029SG exemplifies a form in which it is possible to suggest that the reach performance H development notification performance will be executed and that the high expectation level reach performance development notification performance will be executed as the development destination suggestion performance. However, the present invention is not limited to this, and the development destination suggestion performance may be capable of suggesting that the reach performance G development notification performance will be executed.

In addition, in this feature section 029SG, a form in which the development destination suggestion performance can be executed by variable display of the reach performance C or the fluctuation pattern for executing the reach performance C has been exemplified, but the present invention is not limited to this. , it may be possible to perform the development destination suggestion performance also in the variable display of the variable pattern for executing the ready-to-reach effect A and the variable display for the variable pattern for executing the ready-to-reach effect B.

In addition, as shown in FIG. 11-30 (D), a super reach performance in which the high expectation level reach performance development notification performance and the reach performance I are executed before the performance results are announced as reach performance C or reach performance D. Regarding the variation pattern of κ and the variation pattern of super reach θ in which reach performance G development notification performance and reach performance G are executed after the performance result is announced as reach performance C or reach performance D, the variable display result is a jackpot. When the variation pattern of super reach κ is displayed, the difference between the rate at which reach effect C is executed and the rate at which reach effect D is executed is 60%, while the variation pattern of super reach θ Since the difference between the rate at which reach effect C is executed and the rate at which reach effect D is executed in the variable display is 40%, reach effect I depends on whether reach effect C or reach effect D is executed. It becomes possible to guess whether it is a variable display of the variation pattern of super reach κ that is executed or a variable display of the variation pattern of super reach θ that is executed that reach effect H, so reach effect C and reach effect It is possible to draw the player's attention to which of D is executed, and the interest in the game can be improved.

In addition, in this feature part 029SG, if the variable display result is a jackpot for the variation pattern of super reach κ and the variation pattern of super reach θ, reach effect C is displayed in the variable display of the variation pattern of super reach θ. The difference between the execution rate and the rate at which reach effect D is executed is the difference between the rate at which reach effect C is executed and the rate at which reach effect D is executed in the variable display of the variation pattern of super reach κ. Although the present invention is not limited to this, in the case where the variable display result is a failure, the reach effect C is executed by variable display of the variation pattern of super reach θ. The difference between the rate at which reach effect D is executed and the rate at which reach effect D is executed is greater than the difference between the rate at which reach effect C is executed and the rate at which reach effect D is executed in the variable display of the variation pattern of super reach κ. It may be set small.

Although the embodiments of the present invention have been described above with reference to the drawings, the specific configuration is not limited to these embodiments, and any changes or additions that do not depart from the gist of the present invention are included in the present invention. It will be done.

For example, in the feature section 029SG, a configuration is exemplified in which a first pending storage display area 029SG005D and a second pending storage display area 029SG005U are provided in which a pending storage display can be displayed at the bottom of the display area of the image display device 5. The present invention is not limited to this, and as shown in FIG. 11-57 as modification 029SG-1, a predetermined position of the display area of the image display device 5 (for example, a lower part of the display area of the image display device 5) In the center), an active display area 029SG005F may be provided in which a pending storage display corresponding to the variable display being executed can be displayed as an active display.

In addition, if it is possible to display the active display in this way, similar to the pre-read preview performance described above, there are multiple display modes for the active display, and depending on which display mode the active display is displayed, the jackpot can be expected. It may also be possible to perform active display effects with different degrees. For example, there are three types of active display modes: a white circle, a blue circle, and a red circle, and when the active display mode is a red circle, the jackpot expectation is the highest. It is sufficient that the jackpot expectation level is set to be the lowest when it is displayed as a white circle (Jackpot expectation level of active display display mode: red > blue > white).

Furthermore, the display mode of the active display can be changed from a white circle or a blue circle to a red circle during variable display. It may be possible to suggest that the displayed jackpot expectation level has increased.

In this way, when the display mode of the active display can be changed during variable display, as shown in Figures 11-58 (A) and 11-58 (B), the variable display result is set as the effect of reach effect B. Regarding the variable display of the fluctuation pattern of super reach ζ in which reach effect E is executed after (missing) is once notified, the display mode of the active display changes from a white circle or a blue circle while reach effect E is executed. Let P1 be the rate at which the red circle changes.

In addition, regarding the variable display in the variation pattern of super reach η, in which the highly anticipated reach performance development notification performance is executed during the execution of reach performance A, and the reach performance F is further executed, active display is displayed during the execution of reach performance A. P2 is the rate at which the display mode changes from a white circle or blue circle to a red circle. Let P3 be the rate at which the round shape changes.

At this time, P3, which is the rate at which the display mode of the active display changes from a white circle or a blue circle to a red circle while the reach effect F is executed, is displayed in the active display while the reach effect E is executed. P1, which is the rate at which the aspect changes from a white circle or a blue circle to a red circle, or when the display aspect of the active display changes from a white circle or a blue circle to a red one while reach effect A is being executed. It may be set higher than P2, which is the rate of change to a round shape.

By doing this, when a variable display is executed with a variation pattern of super reach η (when reach effect A is executed and reach effect F is executed), the high expectation level reach effect development notification effect is By changing the display mode of the active display to a red circle shape before the start, it is possible to reduce the possibility that the player will recognize in advance that the ready-to-reach effect F will be executed. In addition, when reach effect E is executed and when reach effect F is executed, the display mode of the active display is a red circle at a higher rate in reach effect F, which has a higher jackpot expectation than reach effect E. By changing to , the display mode of the active display can be appropriately changed to a red round shape according to the degree of jackpot expectation, so that the game enjoyment can be improved.

In addition, in the modification 029SG-1, in the variable display with a variation pattern of super reach η, the display mode of the active display changes from a white circle or a blue circle to a red circle while the reach effect F is being executed. Although we have exemplified a form in which the rate of change P3 is higher than the rate P2 in which the display mode of the active display changes from a white circle or a blue circle to a red circle during execution of reach effect A, the present invention The present invention is not limited to this, and as a modified example 029SG-2, in a variable display with a variation pattern of super reach η as in the above-mentioned modified example 029SG-1, the display mode of the active display is white during execution of the reach effect F. The display mode of the active display changes from a white circle or a blue circle to a red circle during the execution of reach effect A. In addition to setting it higher than the ratio P2, in the variable display of the variation pattern of super reach ζ, the display mode of the active display changes from a white circle or a blue circle to a red circle while the reach effect E is being executed. The ratio P1 may be set higher than the ratio at which the display mode of the active display changes from a white circle or a blue circle to a red circle during execution of the ready-to-reach effect B.

In this way, by providing a plurality of active display modes and varying the jackpot expectation depending on which display mode the active display is displayed, it is possible to make it easier for the player to recognize the jackpot expectation. , the display mode of the active display changes to a red circle before execution of the reach performance E development notification performance or the high expectation reach performance development notification performance, causing the player to recognize in advance that the expectation of a jackpot is high. It is possible to reduce the risk of a decrease in interest in the game due to such factors.

In addition, in the characteristic part 029SG, a variation pattern of super reach λ in which a high expectation level reach performance development notification performance is executed and a reach performance I is executed without going through reach performances such as reach performance A and reach performance B is described. However, as modification 029SG-3, in the variable display of the variation pattern of the super reach λ, the display mode of the active display changes from a white circle or a blue circle to a red one before the start of the reach effect I. The rate P5 of changing to a round shape may be set higher than the rate P6 of changing the display mode of the active display from a white circle or a blue circle to a red circle after the start of the ready-to-reach effect I. In this way, by changing the display mode of the active display from a white circle or a blue circle to a red circle before executing the reach effect I, the player is made aware in advance that the reach effect I will be executed. Since it is easy to play, it can improve the interest in the game.

In addition, in this modification 029SG-3, in the variable display of the variation pattern of super reach λ, the display mode of the active display changes from a white circle or a blue circle to a red circle before the start of reach effect I. Although the embodiment has been exemplified in which the ratio P5 at which the display mode of the active display changes from a white circle or a blue circle to a red circle after the start of the reach effect I is set higher than the ratio P6 at which the display mode changes from a white circle or a blue circle to a red circle, the present invention This is not limited to, but in the variable display of the variation pattern of super reach λ, the display mode of the active display changes from a white circle or a blue circle to a red circle before the start of reach effect I. The ratio P5 may be set lower than the ratio P6 at which the display mode of the active display changes from a white circle or a blue circle to a red circle after the start of the ready-to-reach effect I. By doing this, it is possible to create a situation where reach effect I is executed without going through other reach effects even though the display mode of the active display has not changed to a red circle. It is possible to add surprise to the game and improve the interest in the game.

In addition, in the characteristic part 029SG and modifications 029SG-1 to 029SG-3, there are three types of display modes for the reserved memory display and active display: a white circle, a blue circle, and a red circle. Although we have exemplified a form in which the jackpot expectation level is different depending on which display mode the pending memory display or active display is displayed, the present invention is not limited to this, and these pending memory displays or active display The number of display modes may be only two or four or more.

Further, in the above-mentioned modifications 029SG-1 to 029SG-3, the display mode of the active display can be changed during execution of the reach effect, but the present invention is not limited to this, and the active The change timing of the display mode may include a timing other than when the ready-to-win effect is being executed, for example, during the execution of the development suggestion effect or the development notification effect, the start timing of the variable display, etc. Furthermore, if it is possible to perform a pseudo-continuous performance including temporary stopping and re-variable display of decorative symbols during variable display, the display mode of the active display may be changeable at the timing of temporary stop or re-variable display.

In addition, in the feature section 029SG, three types of display formats for the suspended memory display are provided: a white circle, a blue circle, and a red circle, and depending on which display format the suspended memory display is displayed. Although the present invention is not limited to this example, the present invention is not limited to this, and as a modified example 029SG-4, the display mode of the reservation memory table display may be a triangle, a square, or a star in addition to a round shape. Depending on which shape the pending memory display is displayed, it is suggested which reach effect will develop into reach effect E, reach effect F, reach effect G, reach effect H, or reach effect I. It may be possible. In this case, when the CPU 103 executes the winning random value determination process and determines that the fluctuation pattern (variation category) is a super reach, it also determines which super reach fluctuation pattern from super reach α to super reach λ. (which of reach effect A to reach effect I to execute during variable display) is determined, and the super reach variation category command according to the determination (includes information on which super reach variation pattern to execute) What is necessary is to send a variable category command) to the production control board 12. By doing so, the performance control CPU 120 can determine the display mode of the reserved memory table display from among round, triangle, square, star shape, etc. based on the super reach variation category command received from the CPU 103. . Furthermore, since it is possible to draw the player's attention to the shape of the reserved storage display even before the start of the variable display, the player's interest in the game can be improved.

In addition, in this modification 029SG-4, a form that can suggest a reach effect that develops depending on the shape of the pending memory display is exemplified, but the present invention is not limited to this, and for example, the color of the pending memory display In addition to suggesting the expectation level of a jackpot, it may be possible to further suggest a potential reach effect based on the shape of the reserved memory display. By doing so, it is possible to draw the player's attention to both the color and shape of the reserved memory display, thereby improving the interest in the game.

In addition, in this modified example 029SG-4, the shape of the pending memory display has been exemplified to suggest the reach effect of the destination, but the present invention is not limited to this, and the shape of the pending memory display can indicate the reach effect of the destination. The reach performance that can suggest the destination may be only a part of reach performance E, reach performance F, reach performance G, reach performance H, and reach performance I (for example, only reach performance E and reach performance I). .

Furthermore, in the characteristic section 029SG, as a chance-up effect, a mode is exemplified in which the characters of the reach title image can be displayed in red at the start of reach effects A to F, but the present invention is not limited to this. Instead, as a modified example 029SG-5, as a chance-up effect, the characters of the reach title image displayed in black may be changed to red halfway. In particular, when the characters of the reach title image are changed to red from the middle as a chance-up effect, the display mode of the expectation level image showing the jackpot expectation level displayed together with the reach title image can be changed (for example, , increasing the number of stars displayed as an expectation image, etc.). By doing this, the display mode of the expectation image changes as the text color of the reach title image changes from black to red, so it is possible to increase attention to the expectation image. To allow a player to accurately recognize the degree of expectation of a reach performance.

In addition, in the feature section 029SG, as shown in FIG. 11-28, regarding the variable display of super reach κ in a variation pattern, there are cases where the reach effect of the super reach to be executed is reach effect C, and reach effect D. Although the present invention is not limited to this, the present invention is not limited to this, and the present invention is not limited to this, and the present invention is not limited to this. Regarding the variable display in the fluctuation pattern, whether or not the branch destination suggestion effect is executed and the branch destination suggestion effect are displayed at different rates depending on whether the reach effect of the super reach to be executed is reach effect C or reach effect D. It may also be possible to determine the performance pattern.

Specifically, as shown in FIG. 11-59 as modification example 029SG-6, before the variable display results are announced as reach effect C or reach effect C during execution of reach effect C or reach effect C. In the variable display of the variation pattern of super reach κ in which a highly anticipated reach effect is executed, if the reach effect to be executed is determined to be reach effect C, the non-execution of the branch destination suggestion effect is set at a rate of 15%. The execution of pattern Decide on execution at a rate of 35%. In addition, in the variable display of the variation pattern of super reach κ, if the reach effect to be executed is determined to be reach effect D, non-execution of the branch destination suggestion effect is determined at a rate of 10%, and the branch destination suggestion effect is The execution of pattern X is determined at a rate of 30%, the execution of pattern Y of the branch destination suggestion performance is determined at a rate of 20%, and the execution of pattern Z of the branch destination suggestion performance is determined at a rate of 40%. do.

In particular, in this modification 029SG-6, if the execution of reach effect C is determined in the variable display of the variation pattern of super reach κ, the execution of reach effect D is determined in the variable display of the variation pattern of super reach κ. Since the execution decision ratio of the branch destination suggestion effect is set higher (the decision ratio of non-execution of the branch destination suggestion effect is set lower) than when the variable display is being executed, the reach effect H It is possible to suitably suggest that a development notification performance, such as a development notification performance, a high-expected reach performance, and a development notification performance, will be executed, thereby improving the interest in the game.

In addition, in this modification 029SG-6, if the execution of reach effect C is determined in the variable display of the variation pattern of super reach κ, the execution of reach effect D is determined in the variable display of the variation pattern of super reach κ. Although the embodiment has been exemplified in which the execution decision ratio of the branch destination suggestion effect is set higher than when the branch destination suggestion effect is When execution of performance C is determined, the execution determination ratio of branch destination suggestion performance is set lower than when execution of reach performance D is determined in the variable display of the variation pattern of super reach κ. Good too.

In addition, in this modification 029SG-6, if the execution of reach effect C is determined in the variable display of the variation pattern of super reach κ, the execution of reach effect D is determined in the variable display of the variation pattern of super reach κ. Since the execution determination rate for pattern Z of branch destination suggestion performance (performance pattern that suggests execution of high expectation level reach performance development notification performance) is set higher than when it is determined, variable display is being executed. It is possible to more suitably suggest that a development notification performance such as a reach performance H development notification performance or a highly expected reach performance development notification performance will be executed, thereby improving game interest.

In addition, in modification 029SG-6, if the execution of reach effect C is determined in the variable display of the variation pattern of super reach κ, the execution of reach effect D is determined in the variable display of the variation pattern of super reach κ. Although the example shows a form in which the execution decision rate in pattern Z of the branch destination suggestion effect is set higher than in the case where the execution decision rate is set higher than in the case where When the execution of reach effect C is determined in the variable display of super reach κ, the execution of reach effect D is determined in the variable display of the variable pattern of super reach κ. The execution determination rate may be set low.

In addition, in this modified example 029SG-6, as shown in FIG. 11-59, in the variable display of the variation pattern of super reach κ, there are cases where the reach performance of the super reach to be executed is reach performance C, and reach performance D. Although the embodiment has been exemplified in which it is possible to determine whether or not to execute the branch destination suggestion performance and the performance pattern of the branch destination suggestion performance at different rates depending on the case, the present invention is not limited to this, and the super reach θ, Regarding the variable display of the super reach ι fluctuation pattern, whether or not the branch destination suggestion effect is executed and the corresponding branch are determined at different rates depending on whether the super reach effect to be executed is reach effect C or reach effect D. It may also be possible to determine the performance pattern of the advance suggestion performance.

In addition, in this modification example 029SG-6, a branch destination suggestion performance that can be executed while the reach performance C is being executed (the first advantageous result suggestion performance in the invention 033SG) and a branch destination suggestion performance that can be executed while the reach performance D is being executed. (Second advantageous result suggestion performance in invention 033SG) is illustrated as an example of a form that can be executed as a performance of the same performance mode, but the present invention is not limited to this, and during execution of reach performance C. The executable branch destination suggestion performance and the branch destination suggestion performance that can be executed during execution of the reach performance D may be executable as performances of different performance modes.

In addition, in the feature section 029SG, as shown in FIGS. 11-5 to 11-9, reach effects A to D are executed as reach effects for super reach, and any of reach effects E to I is executed. Regarding the notification mode in which a variable display result is notified without development, a notification mode (first notification mode) in which any of these reach effects A to D is simply executed and a variable display result is notified is exemplified. However, the present invention is not limited to this, and as a modified example 029SG-7, reach effects A to D are executed as reach effects for super reach, and any of reach effects E to I are executed. Regarding the notification mode in which the variable display result is notified without developing, in addition to the above-mentioned first notification mode, after the variable display result is once notified as a result of reach effect A to reach effect D, A second notification mode (so-called resurrection mode) may be provided in which it is notified that the variable display result is a jackpot.

In addition, as described above, the first notification mode in which reach performance A to reach performance D are executed as reach performance of super reach, and variable display results are notified without developing to any of reach performance E to reach performance I. When providing a notification mode and a second notification mode, when the performance result (variable display result) of reach performance C or reach performance D is notified in the first notification mode, the branch destination suggestion performance is executed in pattern Z. and the rate at which the branch destination suggestion performance is executed in pattern Z when the performance results (variable display results) of reach performance C and reach performance D are notified in the second notification mode are the same. Good too.

In this way, the second notification mode is used as a notification mode in which reach effects A to D are executed as reach effects of super reach, and a variable display result is notified without developing to any of reach effects E to I. By providing this, it is possible to give the player a sense of surprise by being notified that the variable display result is a jackpot even though the variable display result is once reported as a loss. Furthermore, the performance results (variable display results) when performing reach performance C and reach performance D are notified in the first notification mode and in the case where they are notified in the second notification mode, and branch destination suggestion effects are executed. Since the process for determining can be shared, the amount of data required for the process can be reduced.

In addition, in this modified example 029SG-7, reach effects A to D are executed as reach effects for super reach, and a variable display result is notified without progressing to any of reach effects E to I. When providing a first notification mode and a second notification mode as modes, when the performance result (variable display result) of reach effect C or reach effect D is notified in the first notification mode, the branch destination suggestion effect is a pattern. The ratio of execution in pattern Z and the ratio of execution of branch destination suggestion performance in pattern Z when the performance results (variable display results) of reach performance C and reach performance D are notified in the second notification mode. Although the same form is illustrated, the present invention is not limited to this, and reach effects A to D are executed as reach effects of super reach, and any of reach effects E to I are executed. When providing a first notification mode and a second notification mode as notification modes in which a variable display result is notified without developing, the performance result (variable display result) of reach effect C or reach effect D is the first alert mode. The rate at which the branch destination suggestion effect is executed in pattern Z when it is notified in The rate at which the suggestion effect is executed in pattern Z may be different.

In addition, in the modification 029SG-7, reach effects A to D are executed as reach effects for super reach, and a variable display result is notified without progressing to any of reach effects E to I. Regarding the mode, the first notification mode is simply that any of these reach effects A to D is executed and the variable display result is notified, and the variable display result is once removed as the effect of reach effects A to D. Although the present invention is not limited to this, the present invention is not limited to this, and Modification Example 029SG -8, reach performance C or reach performance D is executed, and after it is announced that the variable display result is a failure as the performance result of these reach performance C or reach performance D, reach performance G development notification performance and reach performance G is executed and it is announced that the variable display result is a jackpot as the performance result of the reach effect G (when the variable display is executed in the super reach θ jackpot variation pattern (PB1-7)), The rate at which the chance up effect is executed during the variable display of the super reach θ jackpot variable pattern is variable in which the effect results (variable display results) of reach effect C and reach effect D are notified in the second notification mode. It may be different from the rate at which the chance-up effect is executed in the display. By doing this, when the reach effect C or the reach effect D is executed, the execution rate of the chance-up effect depends on whether the reach effect G is executed before the variable display result is notified that it is a jackpot. Since the numbers can be made different, the interest in the game can be improved.

Furthermore, in this modification, the rate at which the chance up effect is executed during the variable display in the variable pattern of super reach θ jackpot, the effect of reach effect C and reach effect D (variable display result) is the second notification mode. Although this example shows a different form from the rate at which the chance-up effect is executed in the variable display notified by, the present invention is not limited to this, and the variable display in the variable pattern of super reach θ jackpot is shown as an example. The rate at which the chance-up effect is executed is the same as the rate at which the chance-up effect is executed in the variable display where the effect (variable display result) of reach effect C or reach effect D is notified in the second notification mode. There may be.

In addition, in the feature section 029SG, as shown in FIG. 11-27, it is possible to execute a branch destination suggestion effect in a plurality of effect patterns, and depending on which production pattern the branch destination suggestion effect is executed. Examples are given of forms in which the rate at which the high-expectation reach performance development notification performance is executed is different. In particular, in the feature section 029SG, the case where the branch destination suggestion performance is executed in the performance pattern Z is exemplified as a form in which the high expectation level reach performance development notification performance is executed at the highest rate, but the present invention is not limited to this. Instead, when the branch destination suggestion performance is executed in the performance pattern Z, the high expectation reach performance development notification performance may be executed at an extremely high rate (for example, 99% rate).

In particular, when the branch destination suggestion performance is executed in the performance pattern Z, the high expectation level reach performance development notification performance is executed at an extremely high rate. In the case where the highly expected reach performance development notification performance is not executed even though it was executed in Z, or in the case where the reach performance I is executed even though the high expectation level reach performance development notification performance was not executed (so-called A pattern of production contradiction) may also be provided. In addition, if such a pattern of performance contradiction is provided, only when the variable display result is notified that it is a jackpot, branch destination suggestion performance and reach performance I in performance pattern Z are executed with the pattern of performance contradiction. By doing so, it is possible to give the player a sense of surprise, and when a branch destination suggestion effect is executed in pattern Z or a reach effect I is executed, a highly anticipated reach effect development notification effect is executed. Since it is possible to draw the attention of the player to whether or not the game will be played, the interest in the game can be improved.

In addition, in the feature section 029SG, as shown in FIG. 11-30, after the variable display result (missing) is announced as the performance result of reach performance C or reach performance D, reach performance G development notification performance and reach performance G Regarding the variable display in the variation pattern of the super reach θ in which the super reach θ is executed, an example is shown in which the execution determination ratio of the reach effect C and the execution determination rate of the reach effect D are different, but the present invention does not apply to this. However, as a modification 029SG-10, the execution determination ratio of the ready-to-reach performance C and the execution determination ratio for the ready-to-reach performance D may be made the same for the variable display in the variation pattern of the super reach θ. By doing this, in both cases where reach effect C is executed and reach effect D is executed, the variable display result (missing) is notified as the effect result of reach effect C or reach effect D. Since the player can expect that the reach performance development notification performance will be executed after the game is completed, the player can improve the interest in the game.

In addition, in this modification 029SG-10, regarding the variable display in the variation pattern of super reach θ, an example is given in which the execution determination ratio of reach performance C and the execution determination ratio of reach performance D are the same, but the present invention is not limited to this, and in both cases where reach effect C is executed and reach effect D is executed, the variable display result as the effect of reach effect C or reach effect D is (missing). ) is announced, and if it is possible to produce an effect that the player can expect from the execution of the reach effect development notification effect, the execution decision ratio of the reach effect C and the execution decision ratio of the reach effect D. (For example, the difference between the execution decision rate of reach effect C and the execution decision rate of reach effect D is about 1% to 5%, that is, the difference between the execution decision rate of reach effect C and the execution decision rate of reach effect D. may be substantially the same) or may be different.

In addition, in the feature section 029SG, as shown in FIG. 11-30, after the variable display result (missing) is notified as the performance result of reach performance C or reach performance D, reach performance G development notification performance and reach performance G Regarding the variable display in the variation pattern of super reach θ where is executed, the expected degree of jackpot when execution of reach effect C is decided is smaller than the expected degree of jackpot when execution of reach effect D is decided. However, the present invention is not limited to this, and as a modification 029SG-11, regarding the variable display in the variation pattern of super reach θ, when execution of reach effect C is decided. The jackpot expectation level and the jackpot expectation level when execution of the reach effect D is determined may be the same. By doing this, in both cases where reach effect C is executed and when reach effect is executed, when reach effect G development notification effect is executed, a variable display result is displayed as the effect of reach effect G. Since the player can expect to be notified that the game will be a jackpot, the player's interest in the game can be improved.

In addition, in this modification 029SG-11, regarding the variable display of the super reach θ variation pattern, the jackpot expectation level when execution of reach effect C is decided and the jackpot when execution of reach effect D is decided. Although the example shows a form in which the expectation level is the same, the present invention is not limited to this, and the reach If it is possible to produce an effect in which the player can expect to be notified that the variable display result will be a jackpot as a result of reach effect G when the effect G development notification effect is executed, reach There is a small difference between the jackpot expectation level of Reach Performance C and the jackpot expectation level of Reach Performance D. The jackpot expectation level of C and the jackpot expectation level of reach performance D may be substantially the same) but may be different.

In addition, in the characteristic part 029SG, as shown in FIG. 11-34, the reach title is displayed in red, the movement of the movable body 32, the cut-in image 029SG200 is displayed, and the stick is displayed as an operation promotion image as effects that constitute the chance-up effect. It is possible to display the image of the controller 31A, and the reach performance A to reach performance D, which are executed before the reach performance E development notification performance and the high expectation level reach performance development notification performance, and the reach performance E development notification performance and high expectation In the above example, the red display of the reach title and the operation of the movable body 32 can be performed as a common effect in the reach effect E and the reach effect F that are executed before the reach effect development notification effect, but the present invention is not limited to this. However, as a modified example 029SG-12, a common effect between the red display of these reach titles and the movement of the movable body 32 is executed in any of the reach effects from reach effect A to reach effect F. The jackpot expectation level may be set to differ depending on the situation. By doing this, while suppressing the increase in the number of performances that can be executed as chance-up performances (the number of performance patterns of chance-up performances), the red display of the reach title and the movement of the movable body 32 are Since the player can be made to pay attention to what is going on inside the game, the interest in the game can be improved.

In addition, in the feature section 029SG, as shown in FIG. 11-34, the variable display results indicate whether or not the chance-up effect is executed and the performance of the chance-up effect at different rates depending on whether the result is a jackpot or a loss. Although a form in which a pattern can be determined is illustrated, the present invention is not limited to this, and whether or not to execute a chance-up performance and the performance pattern of the chance-up performance can be any one of reach performance E to reach performance I. may be determined at different rates depending on whether or not it is executed.

In particular, as shown in FIG. 11-60 as modification example 029SG-13, the highly anticipated reach performance development notification is announced before the variable display result (missing) is announced as the performance result of reach performance C or reach performance D. Regarding the fluctuation pattern of super reach κ when the performance and reach performance I are executed, the chance-up performance is different depending on when the execution of reach performance C is decided and when the execution of reach performance D is decided. It may also be possible to determine whether or not to execute. In particular, in the variable display of the variation pattern of super reach κ, when reach effect D is decided to be executed, chance-up effect is decided to be executed at a higher rate than when reach effect C is decided to be executed. , when it is decided to execute the ready-to-win effect D, it is possible to clearly suggest to the player that the expectation of a jackpot is high, and the interest in the game can be improved.

In addition, in the modification 029SG-7, the second notification mode is such that after being once notified that the variable display result is a loss as the performance results of reach effect A to reach effect D, it is once again notified that the variable display result is a jackpot. (so-called restoration mode), but as the second notification mode, as shown in FIG. A revival effect may be performed to notify that the variable display result is a jackpot between the time and the stop timing of the variable display.

In particular, when the revival performance is executed after the variable display result is notified that the performance results of reach performance A to reach performance D are off (the variation of any of super reach α, super reach β, and super reach γ) In the case where a variable display is executed in a pattern and a jackpot occurs), as shown in Figures 11-61 (A) to 11-61 (C), the length L21 of the performance period of the revival performance is changed to the reach performance. When reach performance E development suggestion performance, reach performance E development notification performance, and reach performance E are executed after the variable display result is notified as a failure as a result of B (variable depending on the fluctuation pattern of super reach ζ) The length L22 of the period from the start timing of the reach effect E development suggestion effect (when the display is executed) to the end timing of the reach effect E (variable display result notification timing), and the effect results of the reach effect C and the reach effect D. When the reach effect G development suggestion effect, the reach effect G development notification effect, and the reach effect G are executed after the variable display result is once notified that it is a failure (the variable display is executed in a variation pattern of super reach θ) If the length of the period from the start timing of the reach effect G development suggestion effect to the end timing of the reach effect G (variable display result notification timing) is set shorter than L23, the effect becomes redundant. It may also be possible to prevent a decrease in gaming interest due to the above (L22>L21, L23>21).

Furthermore, as shown in Figures 11-61(A) to 11-61(C), the length L21 of the performance period of the revival performance is changed from the start timing of the reach performance E development suggestion performance to the reach performance E development notification performance. By setting the period shorter than L32, the length of the period from the start timing of the reach effect G development suggestion effect to the end timing of the reach effect G development notification effect, the variable display results can be It is possible to give a sense of surprise to the notification that the result is a failure.

In addition, in this modification example 029SG-14, a mode was exemplified in which a revival effect is executed after the variable display result is once notified that the result of reach effect A to reach effect D is a failure. This is not limited to, but when the highly anticipated reach performance development notification performance and the reach performance F are executed while the reach performance A is being executed (a variable display is executed in a variation pattern of super reach η and a jackpot occurs) ), when advance performance, precursory performance, reach performance H development notification performance, and reach performance H are executed while reach performance C or reach performance D is being executed (variable display is executed in the variation pattern of super reach ι) (in the case of a jackpot), when the advance performance, precursor performance, high expectation reach performance development notification performance, and reach performance I are executed during the execution of reach performance C or reach performance D (variable depending on the fluctuation pattern of super reach κ) Regarding the case where the display is executed and a jackpot is achieved, there may also be a case where a revival effect is executed.

In addition, as shown in the feature part 029SG, the percentage of reaching a jackpot when reach performance A to reach performance D are executed (jackpot expectation level) is the percentage of reaching a jackpot when reach performance F, reach performance G, and reach performance I are executed. Since it is set lower than the ratio (jackpot expectation level), if the variable display result becomes a jackpot, it will be notified that the variable display result is a loss as a result of reach effect A to reach effect D. By setting the rate at which the resurrection effect is executed after reaching the target to be higher than the rate at which reach effect F, reach effect G, and reach effect I are executed and result in a jackpot, reach effect A to reach effect D are executed and variable. Even if it is reported that the display result is a failure, it may be possible to draw the player's attention to the fact that the revival effect is executed.

In addition, once reach performance B is notified that the variable display result is a failure as the performance result of reach performance B, reach performance E development suggestion performance, reach performance E development notification performance, and reach performance E are executed and a jackpot is achieved. (when a variable display is executed with the fluctuation pattern of super reach ζ and a jackpot is achieved), or after the variable display result is notified as a loss as a result of reach effect C or reach effect D, reach effect G A revival performance is also executed when the development suggestion performance, reach performance G development notification performance, and reach performance G are executed and a jackpot is achieved (when a variable display is executed in the fluctuation pattern of super reach θ and a jackpot is achieved). You may set up a case, but in the case where the variable display is executed with these fluctuation patterns of super reach ζ and super reach θ, it will be announced that the variable display result will be off once before the revival performance, so In order to prevent the possibility that the variable display result will be out of reach as a result of the reach effect, the effect becomes redundant and the interest in the game decreases due to being notified more than once, super reach ζ and super If a variable display is executed with a variation pattern of reach θ and a jackpot occurs, the resurrection effect is not executed, or the variation pattern of super reach α to super reach γ, super reach η, super reach ι super reach κ is The revival effect may be executed at a lower rate than when the variable display is executed and a jackpot is achieved.

In addition, in the characteristic section 029SG, although the mode in which the time saving state can be controlled after the end of the jackpot game is illustrated, the present invention is not limited to this, and the number of executions of the variable display is a specific number (for example, 900 times, etc.). ) may be controlled to the time saving state in response to reaching the variable display result, or in the case where the variable display result is off, it may be possible to control the time saving state in response to some of the deviations being derived and displayed. good.

In particular, when the time saving state is controlled in response to the number of executions of variable display reaching a specific number, or in the case where the time saving state is controlled in response to a partial deviation being derived and displayed. , it is also possible to perform a performance that notifies that the highly anticipated reach performance development notification performance shown in the feature section 029SG or a revival performance shown in the modification 029SG-14 is controlled to a time-saving state after being executed. . By doing this, you can control the time saving state in response to the number of executions of variable display reaching a specific number, or in the case of controlling the time saving state in response to a partial deviation being derived and displayed. , Is it controlled to shorten the time by executing a highly anticipated reach performance development notification performance or a revival performance, or is the variable display result notified that it is a jackpot?A highly anticipated reach performance such as reach performance I Since it is possible to draw the attention of the player to whether or not the game will be executed, the interest in the game can be improved.

In addition, as the characteristic part 029SG, although a mode in which both the invention 029SG and the invention 033SG are implemented is illustrated, the present invention is not limited to this, and only one of the inventions 029SG and the invention 033SG is implemented. You may also do so.

Further, in the feature section 029SG, an example is given in which the present invention is applied to the pachinko gaming machine 1, but the present invention is not limited to this, and the present invention may be applied to a slot machine.

The present invention is not limited to what has been described above. In addition, the specific configuration is included in the present invention even if there are changes or additions within the scope of the present invention, in addition to the above-mentioned embodiments and other embodiments described below.

Further, all or some of the configurations shown in the embodiment and each modification example described above, and the configurations shown in the embodiment example and each modification example described later may be combined arbitrarily.

It should be noted that the above-described embodiments and the later-described embodiments disclosed this time are illustrative in all respects and should not be considered restrictive. The scope of the present invention is indicated by the claims rather than the above description and the following description, and it is intended that all changes within the meaning and scope equivalent to the claims are included.

The gaming machine of the present invention is also a gaming machine (for example, Pachinko gaming machine 1) that can perform variable display and can be controlled to an advantageous state (for example, jackpot gaming state) that is advantageous to the player. As a suggestion performance that suggests being controlled to the advantageous state, there is a special suggestion performance (for example, reach performance I) and a first suggestion performance (for example, a first suggestion performance that has a lower expectation level of being controlled to the advantageous state than the special suggestion performance). For example, multiple types of suggestion performances including a reach performance A), a second suggestion performance (for example, reach performance B), a third suggestion performance (for example, reach performance F), and a fourth suggestion performance (for example, reach performance E) (For example, a portion where the CPU 120 for effect control executes the effect processing during variable display shown in FIG. 10) capable of executing the above-mentioned first suggestion effect, and special development before the effect result of the first suggestion effect is announced. The effect can be executed as the first development pattern (for example, as shown in FIG. 11-8, in a variable display with a variation pattern of super reach η, high expectation level reach effect development notification can be performed from the execution of reach effect A). A special development performance different from the special development performance can be executed as a second development pattern (for example, As shown in Figure 11-8, in the variable display in the variation pattern of super reach ζ, after the variable display result (missing) is notified as the effect of reach effect B, the reach effect E development notification effect is executed. a development effect execution means (for example, a part where the effect control CPU 120 executes the variable display effect processing shown in FIG. 10); and a development suggestion effect (for example, a meter effect, Reach performance E development suggestion performance, reach performance G development suggestion performance) (for example, the performance control CPU 120 decides to execute the meter performance in the meter performance determination process shown in FIG. 11-23) , Deciding to execute the reach performance E development suggestion performance in the reach performance E development suggestion performance determination process shown in Figure 11-26, or determining the execution of the reach performance G development suggestion performance in the reach performance G development suggestion performance determination process shown in Figure 11-29 10) and a display area where an image can be displayed, and game-related information regarding the progress of the game (for example, the first A display means (for example, a first interface image 006SG005I or a second interface image 006SG005J) capable of displaying a display image (for example, a first interface image 006SG005I or a second interface image 006SG005J) of a special figure pending memory number, a second special figure pending memory number, or a small pattern whose display area is smaller than a decorative pattern. For example, an image display device 5), a storage means (for example, CGROM 205) and a plurality of display layers (for example, a layer 1 image drawing area, a layer 2 image drawing area, a layer 3 image drawing area, a displacement image creation area, shown in FIG. 12-5, in which images based on the image data can be placed), image processing means (e.g., display control unit 123 and SDRAM 210 ), and a performance execution means (for example, a portion where the performance control CPU 120 executes a variable display performance process shown in FIGS. 12-17) capable of executing a performance of displaying the specific image in the display area, When the first development pattern is executed by the development performance execution means, the suggestion performance execution means executes the third suggestion performance, which has a higher degree of expectation than the first suggestion performance after execution of the special development performance. (For example, as shown in Figure 11-8, in the variable display of the variation pattern of super reach η, the high expectation level reach performance development notification performance is executed during the execution of reach performance A, and further reach performance F), when the second development pattern is executed by the development effect execution means, the fourth suggestion effect can be executed after the special development effect is executed (for example, in FIG. As shown in 8, in the variable display with the variation pattern of super reach ζ, after the variable display result (missing) is once announced as the result of reach effect B, reach effect E development notification effect is executed, and then reach effect E), the development suggestion performance execution means executes a special development suggestion performance that suggests execution of the special development performance as the development suggestion performance, during the execution period of the first suggestion performance and during the execution period of the second suggestion performance. It can be executed both during the execution period of the suggestion effect (for example, as shown in Figures 11-7 and 11-8, super reach α, super reach β, super reach δ, super reach ζ, super reach In the variable display of the variation pattern of η, the part where the meter performance can be executed during the execution of reach performance A and during the execution of reach performance B), the performance period of the special development performance is longer than the performance period of the special development performance. (For example, as shown in FIGS. 11-8 and 11-9, the length L7 of the execution period of the high-expectation reach performance development notification performance is longer than the length L6b of the execution period of the reach performance E development notification performance. (part), the special development effect includes a first effect in which the visibility of the effect image is reduced (for example, a blackout effect shown in FIGS. 11-10 and 11-55), and a special development effect that is executed after the first effect. A secondary performance (for example, the first stage performance shown in FIGS. 11-10 and 11-55) in which the preceding stage information is displayed in a visible manner, and a stage performance that is executed after the second stage performance. and a tertiary effect (for example, the latter effect shown in FIGS. 11-10 and 11-55) in which subsequent information with a higher degree of emphasis than the previous information is displayed in a visible manner, and the special development effect is The period from when the special development effect is executed to when it is announced that it will be controlled to the advantageous state is shorter than the period from when it is executed until it is notified that it will be controlled to the advantageous state. (For example, as shown in FIGS. 11-8 and 11-9, the length L13 of the period from the start timing of the highly anticipated reach performance development notification performance to the end timing of the reach performance I (the notification timing of the variable display result) , the length L12 of the period from the start timing of the highly anticipated reach performance development notification performance to the end timing of the reach performance F is the length L12 from the start timing of the reach performance E development notification performance to the end timing of the reach performance E (notification of variable display results). timing)), the storage means sets the display position of at least some of the specific images in the display area to a first position (for example, a characteristic part 006SG). for example, the center of the display area of the image display device 5) to a second position different from the first position (for example, in the case of the characteristic portion 006SG, an upper position or a lower position of the display area of the image display device 5). The image processing means can store display position displacement information for displacing images (for example, the CGROM 205 stores displacement image data), and the image processing means can store the display position displacement information arranged in a specific display layer based on the image data. It is possible to generate a displacement specific image in which the specific image is displaced based on the display position displacement information (for example, as shown in FIG. 12-23, the decorative pattern drawn in the layer 2 image drawing area and the layer 3 image drawing By superimposing a background image drawn in the area to create a displacement target image and applying a displacement image to the displacement target image, a display image displayed on the image display device 5 during the development suggestion performance is created. , the effect execution means creates an image in which the images of the left area 006SG005L and the right area 006SG005R move upward and the image of the middle area 006SG005C moves downward), the effect execution means generates the image by the image processing means. It is possible to perform a specific effect (for example, a development suggestion effect in the feature section 006SG) in which the displacement specific image is displayed in the display area during variable display, and the display image of the game related information is The first interface image 006SG005I and the second interface image 006SG005J are arranged in a special display layer that is displayed preferentially in the display area than the specific display layer (for example, as shown in FIG. 12-26, the first interface image 006SG005I and the second interface image 006SG005J are An example is a gaming machine (a portion drawn in a layer 1 image drawing area with a high display priority).

According to such a configuration, when the fourth suggestion effect is executed after the execution of the special development effect, the period until it is announced that the advantageous state will be controlled becomes excessively long, resulting in a game failure. It is possible to suppress a decline in interest, and in the case where a special suggestion performance is executed after the execution of a special development performance, the special suggestion performance can suitably motivate the player by the time the player is informed that the player is controlled to be in an advantageous state. Since the player can draw attention to the player, the player's interest in the game can be improved. Moreover, during the execution period of the first suggestion performance and during the execution period of the second suggestion performance, the special development suggestion performance can arouse the player's sense of expectation for the execution of the special development performance. In addition, a displacement specific image in which at least a part of a specific image displayed in a predetermined effect is displaced can be generated from the image data of the specific image and display position displacement information and displayed in a specific effect. A specific effect can be executed with a smaller amount of data than when image data of a specific image is exclusively stored. Furthermore, it is possible to prevent the display image of the game-related information from being displaced due to the displacement of the specific image and the visibility of the display image of the game-related information from decreasing when a specific performance is executed.
In other words, depending on the type of development performance, the length of the performance period and the period from the execution of the development performance until the notification that it will be controlled in an advantageous state vary, and the length is appropriate depending on the type of development performance. Since the notification that the advanced performance and the advantageous state will be controlled is executed during the performance period, the game enjoyment can be improved, and the visibility of the display image of the game-related information is reduced when the specific performance is executed. You can prevent it from getting stuck. In other words, when installed in a game hall, it is possible to execute multiple types of advanced effects in a moderately long presentation period, and to execute specific effects using a small amount of data without reducing the visibility of the display image of game-related information. We can provide gaming machines that can

Furthermore, it is possible to improve gaming interest through advanced presentations, to execute specific presentations with a small amount of data, and to prevent the visibility of display images of game-related information from decreasing. As an example of the form, a gaming machine (for example, a pachinko gaming machine 1 or a slot machine) that can perform variable display has a display area that can display an image, and game-related information regarding the progress of the game is displayed in the display area. (For example, display image (for example, first interface image 006SG005I or second interface image 006SG005J) of the first special figure pending memory number, second special figure pending memory number, small pattern whose display area is smaller than the decorative pattern) capable of storing image data including at least a specific image (for example, a decorative pattern or a background image) displayed in the display area and a display image of the game-related information. A storage means (for example, CGROM 205) and a plurality of display layers (for example, a layer 1 image drawing area, a layer 2 image drawing area, a layer 3 image drawing area shown in FIG. 12-5, a displacement image creation area, a display image creation area, etc.), and is capable of generating an image to be displayed in the display area by superimposing and synthesizing each image arranged in the plurality of display layers (for example, a display control unit 123 and SDRAM 210), and a performance execution means capable of executing a performance of displaying the specific image in the display area (for example, a portion where the performance control CPU 120 executes the variable displaying performance process shown in FIGS. 12-17). and, the storage means is configured to change the display position of at least some of the specific images in the display area from a first position (for example, in the case of characteristic part 006SG, the center of the display area of the image display device 5). It is possible to store display position displacement information for displacing the display to a second position different from the first position (for example, in the case of the characteristic part 006SG, a position above or below the display area of the image display device 5). , the CGROM 205 is a portion in which data of a displacement image is stored), and the image processing means displaces the specific image placed in the specific display layer based on the image data based on the display position displacement information. It is possible to generate a displacement specific image (for example, as shown in Figure 12-23, the decorative pattern drawn in the layer 2 image drawing area and the background image drawn in the layer 3 image drawing area are superimposed to determine the displacement target). By creating an image and applying the displacement image to the displacement target image, the images of the left area 006SG005L and right area 006SG005R are moved upward as the display images displayed on the image display device 5 during the development suggestion performance. (a part that creates an image in which the image of the middle area 006SG005C moves downward), the effect execution means is configured to move the image of the middle area 006SG005C downward while displaying the displacement specific image generated by the image processing means in the display area. It is possible to execute a specific effect (for example, a development suggestion effect in the feature section 006SG) to be displayed in the display area, and the display image of the game-related information is displayed with priority in the display area over the specific display layer. (For example, as shown in Figure 12-26, the first interface image 006SG005I and the second interface image 006SG005J are drawn in the layer 1 image drawing area, which has the highest image display priority.) 2) gaming machines. Below, one example of the form of these gaming machines will be explained as another example of the form.

(Explanation regarding characteristic part 006SG in embodiment of the present invention)
Next, the characteristic part 006SG in the embodiment of the present invention will be explained.

Type 1 gaming machine is
A gaming machine (for example, a pachinko gaming machine 1 or a slot machine) capable of performing a variable display,
It has a display area that can display images, and the display area contains game-related information regarding the progress of the game (for example, the number of reserved special symbols, the number of reserved special symbols, and the small display area that is smaller than the decorative symbols). a display means (for example, an image display device 5) capable of displaying a pattern);
a storage means (for example, CGROM 205) capable of storing image data including at least a specific image (for example, a decorative pattern or a background image) displayed in the display area and a display image of the game-related information;
A plurality of display layers in which images based on the image data can be arranged (for example, a layer 1 image drawing area, a layer 2 image drawing area, a layer 3 image drawing area, a displacement image creation area, a display image creation area shown in FIG. 12-5) etc.), and is capable of generating an image to be displayed in the display area by superimposing and synthesizing each image arranged in the plurality of display layers (for example, display control unit 123 and SDRAM 210);
a performance execution means capable of executing a performance of displaying the specific image in the display area (for example, a portion where the performance control CPU 120 executes a variable display performance process shown in FIGS. 12-17);
Equipped with
The storage means changes the display position of at least some of the specific images in the display area from a first position (for example, in the case of characteristic part 006SG, the center of the display area of the image display device 5) to the first position. can store display position displacement information for displacing to a different second position (for example, in the case of the characteristic part 006SG, an upper position or a lower position of the display area of the image display device 5) (for example, the CGROM 205 can store display position displacement information (the part where image data is stored),
The image processing means can generate a displacement specific image in which the specific image placed in the specific display layer based on the image data is displaced based on the display position displacement information (for example, as shown in FIG. 12-23). A displacement target image is created by superimposing a decorative pattern drawn in the layer 2 image drawing area and a background image drawn in the layer 3 image drawing area, and a displacement image is applied to the displacement target image. As a result, the images of the left area 006SG005L and the right area 006SG005R move upward, and the image of the middle area 006SG005C moves downward as the display images displayed on the image display device 5 during the development suggestion performance. the part that creates the image),
The effect executing means is configured to perform a specific effect (for example, a development suggestion effect in the feature section 006SG, a reach suggestion in the modified example 006SG-1), which displays the displacement specific image generated by the image processing means in the display area during variable display. performance, revival performance in modification example 006SG-2, look-ahead preview performance in modification example 006SG-3, promotion performance in modification example 006SG-5, provisional stop suggestion performance and temporary stop notification performance in modification example 006SG-6). be,
It is characterized by
According to this feature, the display position of the specific image can be changed from the first position to the first position by simply using the image data for displaying the specific image in the display area and the display position displacement information for displacing the display position of the specific image. Since the specific effect can be executed by displacing the image to two positions, the amount of data stored in the storage means for executing the specific effect can be reduced compared to the case where the specific effect is executed using dedicated image data. .

The gaming machine of Form 2 is the gaming machine described in Form 1,
The display image of the game-related information is arranged in a special display layer where the arranged image is preferentially displayed in the display area than the specific display layer (for example, as shown in FIG. 12-26, the first interface Image 006SG005I and second interface image 006SG005J are parts drawn in the layer 1 image drawing area that has the highest image display priority),
It is characterized by
According to this feature, when a specific effect is executed, the display position of the game-related information together with at least a part of the specific image is not displaced, so that the game-related information is difficult for the player to see when the specific effect is executed. You can prevent this from happening.

The gaming machine of Form 3 is the gaming machine described in Form 2,
At least some of the game-related information is displayed in an area that overlaps with the displacement specific image (for example, the second interface image 006SG005J is the image of the right area 006SG005R that slides upward during the development suggestion presentation). duplicate parts),
It is characterized by
According to this feature, even if the specific image is displaced to the second position and becomes the displaced specific image, the game-related information is not displaced and is displayed overlapping with the displaced specific image, so the player may feel that something is wrong. You can recognize game-related information without any problems.

The gaming machine of Form 4 is the gaming machine described in Form 2,
At least some of the game-related information is displayed in an area that does not overlap with the displacement specific image in the display area (for example, the first interface image 006SG005I is displayed in the left area 006SG005L, the middle area 006SG005C, and the right area during the development suggestion presentation). (a portion displayed at the bottom of the image display device 5 so as not to overlap with each image of area 006SG005R),
It is characterized by
According to this feature, even if the specific image is displaced to the second position and becomes a displacement specific image, the game-related information is not displaced and is displayed so as not to overlap with the displacement specific image, so the player can accurately can recognize game-related information.

The gaming machine of Form 5 is the gaming machine according to any one of Forms 2 to 4,
Comprising gaming identification information variable display execution means (for example, the first special symbol display device 4A and the second special symbol display device 4B shown in FIG. 3) capable of variably displaying the gaming identification information (for example, special symbols). ,
The performance execution means is
In a first area within the display area, it is possible to variably display the performance identification information in accordance with the variable display of the gaming identification information (for example, as shown in FIG. 12-21, the image display device 5 (In the center of the display area, a portion where a decorative pattern can be displayed variably in accordance with the variable display of the special pattern),
In a second area that is different from the first area in the display area and is smaller than the first area, it is possible to variably display the reduced identification information in accordance with the variable display of the gaming identification information. (For example, as shown in FIG. 12-21, in the upper right part of the display area of the image display device 5, a portion where small symbols can be displayed variably in accordance with the variable display of special symbols),
The display image of the performance identification information is arranged in the specific display layer, and changes from a first visibility state to a second visibility state that is less visible to the player than the first visibility state according to execution of the specific performance. (For example, as shown in FIGS. 12-21 and 12-23, the decorative pattern is drawn and arranged in the layer 2 image drawing area, and when the development suggestion effect is executed, the decorative pattern is displayed on the image display device 5. areas where visibility decreases when moving upward or downward from the center of the display area),
The display image of the reduced identification information is arranged in the special display layer, and the visibility state does not change from the first visibility state according to the execution of the specific effect (for example, as shown in FIGS. 12-21 and 12-23). As shown, the small designs are drawn and arranged in the layer 1 image drawing area, and unlike the decorative designs, they do not move from the top right of the display area of the image display device 5 when performing the development suggestion effect, so the visibility is not reduced. ),
It is characterized by
According to this feature, the visual recognition state of the performance identification information changes from the first visual recognition state to the second visual recognition state by executing a specific performance, so that the performance effect of the specific performance can be improved, and the performance can be reduced by executing the specific performance. Since the visible state of the identification information does not change from the first visible state, the player can easily grasp the progress of the game by visually recognizing the reduced identification information even during execution of a specific performance.

The gaming machine of Form 6 is the gaming machine according to any one of Forms 1 to 5,
The display area includes a first specific display area (for example, the upper area 006SG005T shown in FIG. 12-31) and a second specific display area different from the first specific display area (for example, the lower area shown in FIG. 12-31). 006SG005B),
The performance execution means is
In the specific effect, the specific image is displayed across the first specific display area and the second specific display area (for example, as shown in FIG. (a portion where a decorative pattern and a background image are displayed over the area), and an image in which the relative positions of the first specific display area and the second specific display area are displaced can be displayed as the displacement specific image (for example, As shown in 12-31 (D), the portion where the upper region 006SG005T and the lower region 006SG005B move in the left-right direction),
When displacing the relative positions of the first specific display area and the second specific display area, the first specific display area and the second specific display area are moved at the boundary between the first specific display area and the second specific display area. 2 Displaying an effect image different from the image displayed in the specific display area (for example, cutting effect image 006SG005S shown in FIG. 12-31);
It is characterized by
According to this feature, it is possible to more effectively make the player recognize the displacement of the specific image to the second position as a specific effect, thereby improving the interest in the game.

The gaming machine of Form 7 is the gaming machine described in Form 6,
The effect execution means is capable of displacing the first specific display area in a first direction as a displacement of the specific image from the first position to the second position in the specific effect; The display area can be displaced in a second direction that is opposite to the first direction (for example, as shown in FIG. (as shown in FIG. 12-31(E), the part that moves the upper region 006SG005T upward and the lower region 006SG005B downward),
It is characterized by
According to this feature, the displacement of the specific image to the second position as the specific effect is the displacement of the first specific display area in the first direction and the second specific display area in the second direction opposite to the first direction. By executing this as a displacement in the direction, the performance effect of the specific performance can be further improved.

The gaming machine of Form 8 is the gaming machine described in Form 6 or Form 7,
The amount of displacement of the first specific display area and the amount of displacement of the second specific display area in the specific effect are different (for example, as shown in modification 006SG-3, the upper area 006SG005T and the lower area 006SG005B as a pre-read preview effect) When the upper region 006SG005T and the lower region 006SG005B are moved in opposite directions, the amount of movement (displacement) is different),
It is characterized by
According to this feature, the performance effect of a specific performance can be further improved.

The gaming machine of Form 9 is the gaming machine according to any one of Forms 6 to 8,
The effect image is arranged in a special display layer where the arranged image is preferentially displayed in the display area than the specific display layer (for example, as shown in FIG. 12-32, the cut effect image 006SG005S is (portions drawn and placed in the layer 2 image drawing area as images with higher display priority than designs and background images),
It is characterized by
According to this feature, even if the display position of a specific image changes as a specific effect, the display position of the effect image does not change, so the displacement of the display position of the specific image can be made more noticeable by comparing these specific images and the effect image. This allows the production effect of a specific production to be further improved.

The gaming machine of Form 10 is the gaming machine according to any one of Forms 6 to 9,
A gaming machine (for example, a pachinko gaming machine 1 or a slot machine) that can be controlled to an advantageous state (for example, a jackpot gaming state) that is advantageous for the player,
The effect execution means can display the effect image in a plurality of display modes (for example, as shown in FIG. 12-30, a portion where the crack effect image 006SG005H can be displayed in two colors, blue and red; As shown in Figure 12-33, the part where the cutting effect image 006SG005S can be displayed in three colors of blue, green, and red),
The rate at which the effect image is controlled to the advantageous state differs depending on the display mode in which the effect image is displayed (for example, as shown in FIG. 12-30, in which color the crack effect image 006SG005H is displayed). (as shown in FIG. 12-33, the part where the jackpot expectation differs depending on which color the cutting effect image 006SG005S is displayed in),
It is characterized by
According to this feature, since it is possible to draw the player's attention to the display mode of the effect image displayed during the specific performance, the performance effect of the specific performance can be further improved.

The gaming machine of Form 11 is the gaming machine according to any one of Forms 1 to 10,
The specific effect is a effect in which the specific image changes in stages (for example, as shown in FIG. 12-21, in the development suggestion effect of the characteristic part 006SG, it is displayed in the left area 006SG005L, the middle area 006SG005C, and the right area 006SG005R. As shown in Figure 12-27, there is a part where the amount of movement of the image being displayed increases step by step, and as shown in Figure 12-27, in the revival performance of modified example 006SG-2, the decorative pattern inside expands step by step and the corresponding As shown in Figure 12-35, where the amount of movement of the fragments that make up the decorative pattern gradually increases, the distortion of the decorative pattern and the background image gradually increases in the promotion performance of Modified Example 006SG-5. going part),
It is characterized by
According to this feature, the performance effect of the specific performance can be improved by changing the specific image in stages.

The gaming machine of Form 12 is the gaming machine described in Form 11,
The specific effect is a effect in which the display position of the specific image is gradually displaced from the first position to the second position (for example, as shown in FIG. 12-21, the development suggestion of the characteristic part 006SG In the presentation, the amount of movement of the images displayed in the left area 006SG005L, middle area 006SG005C, and right area 006SG005R gradually moves upward or downward from the center of the display area of the image display device 5, As shown in FIG. 12-27, in the revival performance of Modified Example 006SG-2, the fragments constituting the decorative pattern inside gradually move from the center of the display area of the image display device 5 toward the periphery of the display area. The part that moves, the part where the decorative design and background image are gradually distorted to the left in the promotion production of modification 006SG-5),
It is characterized by
According to this feature, it is possible to emphasize the displacement of the specific image from the first position to the second position in the specific performance, so that the entertainment of the performance can be further improved.

The gaming machine of Form 13 is the gaming machine according to Form 11,
The specific image is composed of a plurality of image pieces (for example, as shown in FIG. 12-28, a part in which a decorative pattern is composed of a plurality of pieces),
The specific effect is an effect in which the number of the displayed image pieces increases step by step (for example, as shown in modification 006SG-2, a plurality of fragments constituting a decorative pattern inside (the part that increases in stages according to the
It is characterized by
According to this feature, the visual effect of increasing the number of image pieces in stages can strongly impress the player with a specific effect.

The gaming machine of Form 14 is the gaming machine according to Form 11,
The specific effect is a effect in which the ratio of the area where the specific image is displayed to the display area increases in stages (for example, in the bath shown in FIG. 1-28, in the revival effect, the image display device 5 is (a portion where the proportion of the display area of the decorative design in the display area increases step by step),
It is characterized by
According to this feature, the ratio of the area where the specific image is displayed to the display area increases in stages, thereby making it possible to more effectively draw the player's attention to the specific performance.

The gaming machine of Form 15 is the gaming machine according to any one of Forms 11 to 14,
A gaming machine (for example, a pachinko gaming machine 1 or a slot machine) that can be controlled to an advantageous state (for example, a jackpot gaming state) that is advantageous for the player,
The storage means is capable of storing a plurality of display position displacement information having different displacement modes of the specific image (for example, a portion in which a plurality of displacement image data are stored in the CGROM 206),
The rate at which the specific image is controlled to the advantageous state differs depending on which of the display position displacement information is displaced (for example, in the variable display with the super reach variation pattern, the left area 006SG005L, While displacement image data is used to slide the images of the middle area 006SG005C and right area 006SG005R to the third stage, in the variable display with the normal reach variation pattern, the left area 006SG005L, the middle area 006SG005C, and the right area Since displacement image data is used for the image of 006SG005R to slide to the first stage or second stage, the rate at which the jackpot game state is controlled differs depending on the displacement image data used in the development suggestion performance. part),
It is characterized by
According to this feature, since it is possible to draw the player's attention to the displacement mode of the specific image in the specific performance, it is possible to improve the performance interest of the specific performance.

The gaming machine of Form 16 is the gaming machine according to any one of Forms 11 to 15,
The plurality of pieces of display position displacement information include first display position change information in which the specific image changes from a first mode to a second mode different from the first mode (for example, as shown in FIG. 12-21, super reach Displacement image data for sliding the images of the left area 006SG005L, middle area 006SG005C, and right area 006SG005R to the third stage) and the specific image change from the first aspect to the first aspect. Second display position change information that does not change in two modes (for example, as shown in Figure 12-22, in variable display with normal reach variation pattern, images of left area 006SG005L, middle area 006SG005C, and right area 006SG005R are the first stage) or displacement image data for sliding to the second stage),
The first display position change information and the second display position change information include a common changing section in which the image processing means changes the specific image from the first aspect to the second aspect (for example, as shown in FIG. 12-21 and FIG. 12-22, when using displacement image data in which the images of the left area 006SG005L, the middle area 006SG005C, and the right area 006SG005R slide to the third stage, and the left area 006SG005L, the middle area 006SG005C, In the case of using displacement image data in which the image of the right area 006SG005R slides to the first stage, the parts in which the images of the left area 006SG005L, the middle area 006SG005C, and the right area 006SG005R slide to the first stage are common, When using displacement image data in which the images of the left area 006SG005L, middle area 006SG005C, and right area 006SG005R slide to the third stage, and the images of the left area 006SG005L, middle area 006SG005C, and right area 006SG005R slide to the second stage. In the case of using displacement image data, the parts in which the images of the left area 006SG005L, middle area 006SG005C, and right area 006SG005R slide to the second stage are common),
It is characterized by
According to this feature, it is possible to draw the player's attention to the process in which the specific image changes from the first mode to the second mode as the specific performance, so that the performance interest of the specific performance can be further improved.

The gaming machine of Form 17 is the gaming machine according to any one of Forms 1 to 16,
The display area includes a first specific display area (for example, an upper area 006SG005T) and a second specific display area different from the first specific display area (for example, a lower area 006SG005B),
The performance execution means is
In the specific effect, the specific image is displayed across the first specific display area and the second specific display area (for example, as shown in FIG. (a portion where a decorative pattern and a background image are displayed over the area), and an image in which the relative positions of the first specific display area and the second specific display area are displaced can be displayed as the displacement specific image (for example, As shown in 12-31 (D), the portion where the upper region 006SG005T and the lower region 006SG005B move in the left-right direction),
After displaying the displacement specific image, the boundary between the first specific display area and the second specific display area can be displaced (for example, as shown in FIGS. 12-31(D) and 12-31(E)). After moving the upper region 006SG005T to the right and the lower region 006SG005B to the left, the boundary between the upper region 006SG005T and the lower region 006SG005B is further moved upward and downward, respectively),
It is characterized by
According to this feature, after the displacement specific image is displayed, the boundary between the first specific display area and the second specific display area is further displaced, so that the production effect of the specific production can be enhanced, and the production is interesting. can be improved.

The gaming machine of Form 18 is the gaming machine described in Form 17,
The boundary between the first specific display area and the second specific display area is different from at least one display area among the plurality of display areas including the first specific display area and the second specific display area. (For example, as shown in FIGS. 12-31(D) and 12-31(E), the upper region 006SG005T moves toward the right side, the lower region 006SG005B moves toward the left side, The boundary between area 006SG005T and lower area 006SG005B is a portion that moves in the vertical direction),
It is characterized by
According to this feature, the synergistic effect of the displacement of the plurality of display areas and the displacement of the boundary between the first specific display area and the second specific display area can further enhance the production effect of the specific production.

The gaming machine of Form 19 is the gaming machine according to any one of Forms 1 to 18,
At least in the specific display layer, it is possible to arrange an image across an area corresponding to the display area and an area outside the area corresponding to the display area (for example, as shown in FIG. At this time, the decorative pattern drawn and placed in the layer 2 image drawing area and the background image drawn and placed in the layer 3 image drawing area are enlarged, and a part of the background image is moved outside the display area of the image display device 5. part to be placed),
It is characterized by
According to this feature, when displaying a displacement specific image in the display area as a specific effect, it is possible to reduce the possibility that an inappropriate display will be performed in the display area.
In modification 006SG-5 of the present invention, when performing the promotion effect (specific effect), the displacement target image is enlarged so that the left and right width dimensions are longer than the display area of the image display device 5. Although an example is given in which an image for promotion effect is created by applying a displacement image to the entire image, the present invention is not limited to this, and the range to which the displacement image is applied in the displacement target image is as follows: It is not necessary to displace only the portion corresponding to the display area of the image display device 5, that is, the image outside the display area of the image display device 5.

The gaming machine of Form 20 is the gaming machine according to Form 19,
The effect execution means is capable of enlarging the image displayed in the display area during a period in which the specific image is displaced from the first position to the second position as the specific effect (for example, according to the progress of the promotion effect). (a part in which the decorative pattern drawn and placed in the layer 2 image drawing area and the background image drawn and placed in the layer 3 image drawing area are enlarged step by step),
It is characterized by
According to this feature, it is possible to prevent inappropriate display from being performed in the display area during the process up to displaying the displacement specific image while maintaining the production effect of the specific production.

The gaming machine of Form 21 is the gaming machine according to any one of Forms 1 to 20,
The display area includes a first specific display area (for example, an upper area 006SG005T) and a second specific display area different from the first specific display area (for example, a lower area 006SG005B),
The effect execution means displays the specific image across the first specific display area and the second specific display area in the specific effect, and displays the specific image in the first specific display area and the second specific display area as the displacement specific image. It is possible to display an image whose relative position with respect to the display area is displaced (for example, as shown in FIG. 12-31(D), a decorative pattern and a background image are displayed across the upper area 006SG005T and the lower area 006SG005B. , the upper area 006SG005T is displayed moving toward the right side, and the lower area 006SG005B is displayed moving toward the left side),
When the displacement specific image is displayed in the display area, the image displayed in the first specific display area and the image displayed in the second specific display area are different (for example, As shown in modification example 006SG-3, the part where the image displayed by the hand in the upper area 006SG005T and the image displayed in the lower area 006SG005B are different),
It is characterized by
According to this feature, the specific performance can be performed without giving the player a sense of discomfort, so it is possible to prevent the player from losing interest in the game.

The gaming machine of Form 22 is the gaming machine according to any one of Forms 1 to 20,
The display area includes a first specific display area (for example, an upper area 006SG005T) and a second specific display area different from the first specific display area (for example, a lower area 006SG005B),
The effect execution means displays the specific image across the first specific display area and the second specific display area in the specific effect, and displays the specific image in the first specific display area and the second specific display area as the displacement specific image. It is possible to display an image whose relative position with respect to the display area is displaced (for example, as shown in FIG. 12-31(D), a decorative pattern and a background image are displayed across the upper area 006SG005T and the lower area 006SG005B. , the upper area 006SG005T is displayed moving toward the right side, and the lower area 006SG005B is displayed moving toward the left side),
When the displacement specific image is displayed in the display area, at least a portion of the image displayed in the first specific display area and the image displayed in the second specific display area are (For example, as shown in modification 006SG-3, the image displayed in the upper area 006SG005T after moving to the right and the image displayed in the lower area 006SG005B after moving to the left) (at least a part of which is common),
It is characterized by
According to this feature, since it is possible to add surprise to a specific performance, it is possible to improve the interest in the game.

The gaming machine of Form 23 is the gaming machine according to Form 21 or Form 22,
A part of the image displayed in the first specific display area and the second specific display area when the specific image is displayed is the first specific display when the displacement specific image is displayed. (For example, as shown in modification 006SG-3, the upper area 006SG005T and the lower area 006SG005B in the display area of the image display device 5 are A part of the image that is displayed across is not displayed as an image that is displayed across the upper area 006SG005T after moving to the right side and the lower area 006SG005B after moving to the left side as a pre-read preview effect. part),
It is characterized by
According to this feature, it is possible to further improve the performance interest of a specific performance.

The gaming machine of Form 24 is the gaming machine according to any one of Forms 1 to 23,
The display means is capable of displaying a stereoscopic image composed of a right-eye image and a left-eye image in the display area (for example, as shown in FIG. 12-44, an autostereoscopic image display device 5' is a portion where a stereoscopic image (video) consisting of a right eye image (R image) and a left eye image (L image) can be displayed),
The performance execution means is
It is possible to execute a stereoscopic effect that displays the stereoscopic image (for example, as shown in FIG. 12-45(B), a portion where a preview effect during variable display can be displayed as a stereoscopic image),
When executing the specific effect, a non-stereoscopic image is displayed as the displacement specific image in the display area (for example, as shown in FIG. 12-45(D), when executing the development suggestion effect, the development (The part where the image displayed as a suggestive effect is displayed as a two-dimensional image)
It is characterized by
According to this feature, the player's interest can be improved by the stereoscopic presentation, and since the displacement specific image is not displayed as the stereoscopic image in the specific presentation, the specific presentation can be carried out suitably.

The gaming machine of Form 25 is the gaming machine according to Form 24,
The right-eye image and the left-eye image are arranged in a stereoscopic display layer in which the arranged images are preferentially displayed in the display area than in the specific display layer.
It is characterized by
According to this feature, when executing a specific effect, it is possible to suitably perform a stereoscopic effect.

The gaming machine of Form 26 is the gaming machine according to Form 24 or Form 25,
The performance execution means is capable of executing the stereoscopic performance as an introductory performance of the specific performance during a period before the execution period of the specific performance during variable display;
It is characterized by
According to this feature, by executing the stereoscopic presentation, the player can be made aware in advance that the specific presentation will be executed, so that the presentation effect of the specific presentation can be further improved.

As shown in FIG. 12-1, the performance control board 12 is equipped with a performance control CPU 120, a RAM 122, a display control section 123, and the like. In the production control board 12, the production control CPU 120 operates according to a program stored in the built-in ROM 121, and receives production control commands via the input circuit 260. In addition, the performance control CPU 120 causes the display control unit (VDP (video display processor)) 123 to perform display control of the image display device 5, such as generation of an image to be displayed on the image display device 5, based on the performance control command. Execute the process to

As shown in FIG. 12-1, the display control unit 123 uses characters (also called image data such as people, animals, characters, figures, symbols, etc., CG data), decorative designs, and backgrounds as image element data used as sprite images. Image, a first reservation memory display area 006SG005D that specifiably displays the first special symbol reservation memory number as game-related information in the main feature section 006SG, and a second reservation memory that specifiably displays the second special symbol reservation memory number. Displayed together with a CGROM 205 in which data such as a first interface image 006SG005I for displaying a display area 006SG005U and a second interface image 006SG005J including a small pattern are stored, and an SDRAM 210 (synchronous DRAM) used as a VRAM (video RAM) area. Configure the control circuit.

The performance control CPU 120 outputs a command to the display control unit 123 to read necessary data from the CGROM 205 in which image data is stored in accordance with the received performance control command. The CGROM 205 stores in advance character image data and moving image data to be displayed on the image display device 5, specifically, image data of people, characters, figures, symbols, etc. (including decorative designs), and background images. This is a ROM for storing. Note that the CGROM 205 in the feature section 006SG also stores a plurality of displacement image data for displacing the positions of pixels constituting the displacement target image to other positions by applying it to the displacement target image, which will be described later. There is. The display control unit 123 reads image data from the CGROM 205 in response to instructions from the performance control CPU 120. Then, the display control unit 123 executes display control based on the read image data.

The display control unit 123 includes a system register 202 in which various settings of the display control unit 123 are stored, and attributes (parameters used when drawing characters, such as character drawing order, number of colors, scaling ratio, etc.). an attribute register 203 that stores data specifying palette numbers, coordinates, etc.; a drawing control unit 206 that controls drawing of images to a drawing area (described later) in the VRAM area; A data transfer control unit 211 that controls the transfer, video signals (R (red), G (green), B (blue)) for displaying image data stored in a display image creation area described later in the VRAM area. It is an integrated circuit equipped with a display control unit 213 that outputs a signal and a synchronization signal, a DA converter 214 that converts a video signal output from the display control unit 213 into an analog signal, and outputs the analog signal to the image display device 5.

A system bus and a CG bus are provided inside the display control unit 123, and the system bus and the CG bus are connected to the production control CPU 120 via a CPU interface 201, and an infrared camera 60 is connected. An image processing DSP 264 is connected. Furthermore, the CG bus is connected to the CGROM 205 via a CG bus interface 204. A system register 202 is connected to the system bus, and an attribute register 203 is connected to the CG bus, so that the effect control CPU 120 can access the system register 202 and the attribute register 203.

Further, the drawing control unit 206, data transfer control unit 211, and display control unit 213 are connected to the system bus, and can access the system register 202. Further, the drawing control unit 206 and the data transfer control unit 211 are connected to the CG bus, and can access the CGROM 205 and the attribute register 203.

Further, a VRAM bus is further provided inside the display control unit 123, and the VRAM bus is connected to the SDRAM 210 via a VRAM bus interface 209. A drawing control unit 206, a data transfer control unit 211, and a display control unit 213 are connected to the VRAM bus, and the VRAM area of the SDRAM 210 can be accessed via the VRAM bus.

The system register 202 includes a system control register that stores instructions for initial settings, drawing, data transfer, etc., an interrupt control register that stores instructions for outputting interrupt signals (described later), a drawing area in the VRAM area, and arrangement of palette data. A drawing register that stores an area, a data transfer register that stores a source address, a destination address, etc. during data transfer, a display register that stores a display image creation area in the VRAM area, etc. are allocated.

The CPU interface 201 outputs a V blank interrupt signal to the production control CPU 120 every time a V blank (image update period) starts, and also outputs various other interrupt signals to the production control CPU 120. do.

The display control unit 213 performs display processing to output image data in the display image creation area of the VRAM area specified by the display register as a video signal. In this feature section 006SG, the display image creation area and drawing area are switched for each V blank. Therefore, in one V blank, the area assigned as the drawing area is drawn, and in the next V blank, the area is switched to the display image creation area, so the image data drawn in the previous V blank is displayed and output. During this time, drawing will continue to be performed in the other area.

In particular, as shown in FIGS. 12-2(a) and 12-2(b), in this feature part 006SG, an image to be displayed on the image display device 5 is created by superimposing (synthesizing) a plurality of layers. is being generated. The VRAM area includes a layer image drawing area for drawing and arranging images of each layer, and images drawn and arranged in each layer image drawing area are further superimposed (synthesized) and displayed on the image display device 5. A display image creation area for generating an image to be displayed is arranged (see FIG. 12-5). Note that each layer has the concepts of upper, middle, and lower layers, and images in higher layers are set to have higher display priority on the image display device 5, and images in lower layers have higher display priority on the image display device 5. is set low.

As shown in Figures 12-5 (A) and 12-5 (B), the VRAM area has a layer 1 image drawing area for drawing and arranging layer 1 images, and a layer 1 image drawing area for drawing and arranging layer 2 images. A layer 2 image drawing area for drawing and arranging the layer 3 image and a layer 3 image drawing area for drawing and arranging the layer 3 image are arranged. Further, a displacement image creation area for creating a displacement image, which will be described later, and a display image creation area are also arranged in the VRAM area.

The displacement image creation area creates an image as a displacement target image by superimposing (synthesizing) the image drawn and placed in the layer 2 image drawing area and the image drawn and placed in the layer 3 image drawing area, and This is an area in which a displacement image is created by applying a displacement image, which will be described later, to the displacement target image.

The display image creation area superimposes images drawn and placed in the layer 1 image drawing area, images drawn and placed in the layer 2 image drawing area, and images drawn and placed in the layer 3 image drawing area ( A display for displaying on the image display device 5 an image obtained by superimposing (synthesizing) an image drawn and placed in the layer 1 image drawing area and a displacement image created in the displacement image creation area. This is the area to be created as an image for use.

Note that the image drawn and placed in the layer 1 image drawing area is the image with the highest display priority (display priority: high) in the image display device 5, and the image drawn and placed in the layer 2 image drawing area is the image display An image with a lower display priority (display priority: medium) than an image drawn and placed in the layer 1 image drawing area in the device 5, and an image drawn and placed in the layer 3 image drawing area are the highest in the image display device 5. Each is set to an image with a low display priority (display priority: low).

In other words, layer 1 is the upper layer with the highest image display priority, layer 2 is the middle layer with lower image display priority than layer 1, and layer 3 is the lower layer with the lowest image display priority. It's a layer.

As shown in FIGS. 12-2(b) and 12-5(B), the layer 1 image drawing area displays the number of reserved first special symbols in a manner that allows identification at the bottom of the display area of the image display device 5. In the first interface image 006SG005I, which includes a first reserved memory display area 006SG005D for displaying the data and a second reserved memory display area 006SG005U for specifyably displaying the number of reserved special figures, and in the upper right corner of the display area of the image display device 5, This is a drawing area where these images are drawn in order to display the second interface image 006SG005J that includes small patterns whose display area is smaller than the decorative patterns.

The layer 2 image drawing area is a drawing area in which left, middle, and right decorative patterns are drawn in the center of the display area of the image display device 5 in order to perform variable display of decorative patterns.

The layer 3 image drawing area is a drawing area in which a background image is drawn in order to display the background image in the entire display area of the image display device 5.

In this feature section 006SG, images drawn and arranged in the layer 1 image drawing area (layer 1 image), images drawn and arranged in the layer 2 image drawing area (layer 2 image), and layer 3 image drawing area An image to be displayed in the display area of the image display device 5 can be generated by superimposing each of the images drawn and arranged (images of layer 3). In particular, as described above, the images drawn in the layer 1 image drawing area (first interface image 006SG005I and second interface image 006SG005J) are set to have the highest display priority, and therefore are the most The image (decorative design) that is displayed as an upper layer image and drawn in the layer 2 image drawing area has a lower display priority than the image drawn in the layer 1 image drawing area, so the image display device 5 The image (background image) that is displayed as a middle layer image and drawn in the layer 3 image drawing area is set to have the lowest display priority, and is therefore displayed as a low layer image on the image display device 5.

In addition, the images drawn and arranged in each image drawing area in this feature section 006SG have a transparency of 0% so that when superimposed, the upper layer image makes the overlapping area of the lower layer image invisible to the player. However, the present invention is not limited to this, and depending on the situation, the transparency of the image drawn and arranged in each image drawing area is set higher than 0%, and the image display device 5 An image that is transparently displayed in the display area or an image that is temporarily hidden may be provided.

Next, a method for displacing the displacement target image in the feature section 006SG will be described. As shown in FIG. 12-3(A), a plurality of pixels having a red component value (R value) and a green component value (G value) are arranged in the displacement image applied to the displacement target image. These R value and G value each take a value in the range of 1 to 256.

Taking one pixel A among these plurality of pixels as an example, the display control unit 123 moves the image into the displacement target image from the position corresponding to pixel A in the displacement target image according to the R value and G value of the pixel A. The position of the pixel X to be displaced is specified from . Specifically, if the R value of pixel A is 1 to 127, the display control unit 123 displays a position moved in the negative direction (left direction) of the X axis from the position corresponding to pixel A in the displacement target image. is specified as the coordinate (position) of pixel X in the X-axis direction, and if the R value of pixel A is 129 to 256, move in the positive direction (rightward) of the The position of the pixel X is specified as the coordinate of the pixel X in the X-axis direction. Note that the amount of movement in the X-axis direction from the position corresponding to pixel A in the displacement target image is the difference from 128, which is the median R value.

In addition, if the G value of pixel A is 1 to 127, the coordinate of pixel If the G value of pixel A is 129 to 256, the position moved in the positive direction (upward) of the Y axis from the position corresponding to pixel A in the displacement target image is set in the Y axis direction of pixel X. Specify as the coordinates (position) of Note that the amount of movement in the Y-axis direction from the position corresponding to pixel A in the displacement target image is the difference from 128, which is the median value of the G values.

After specifying the position of pixel X in the displacement target image, pixel X is designated as a pixel to be displayed at a position corresponding to pixel A in the displacement target image. That is, pixel X is displaced to a position corresponding to pixel A. In other words, in this feature section 006SG, by individually adjusting the R value and G value of pixel A, it is possible to displace any pixel X to a position corresponding to pixel A, and also to By adjusting the values to be the same, it is also possible to displace a specific pixel X, which is the same amount away from the position corresponding to pixel A, to the position corresponding to pixel A.

The display control unit 123 executes the above process for a plurality of pixels. Specifically, as shown in FIG. 12-3(B), the displacement image is divided into multiple regions with different R values and G values (displacement image a, displacement image b, displacement image c, displacement image The displacement image is generated by applying each region to the displacement target image.

For example, as shown in Figures 12-4(A) to 12-4(C), the R value is 128 and the G value is any one of 1 to 127 as the area composing the displacement image. A certain displacement image a has an R value of 128 and a G value of 1 between 129 and 256. A displacement image b has an R value of 1 between 1 and 127 and a G value of 128. A certain displacement image c and a displacement image d having an R value of 1 from 129 to 256 and a G value of 128 are provided, and a triple circle image is set as a displacement target image.

In this case, as shown in Figure 12-4 (D), for the displacement image a, the range moved downward by the difference in G value from the corresponding position of the displacement image a in the displacement target image is converted into a displacement image. Specify the display range. In addition, as shown in Figure 12-4 (E), regarding the displacement image b, in the displacement target image, the range moved upward by the difference in G value from the corresponding position of the displacement image b is displayed in the displacement image. Specify a range. In addition, as shown in Figure 12-4 (F), regarding the displacement image c, in the displacement image, the range moved to the left by the difference in R value from the corresponding position of the displacement image c is Specify the display range. In addition, as shown in Figure 12-4 (G), regarding the displacement image d, in the displacement image, the position moved to the right by the difference in R value from the corresponding position of the displacement image d is Specify the display range.

As described above, the range specified from the displacement target image by the R value and G value of displacement image a, displacement image b, displacement image c, and displacement image d is defined as displacement image a, displacement image b, displacement image By displacing the image c and the displacement image d, a displacement image as shown in FIG. 12-4(H) is generated.

In addition, in this feature part 006SG, by setting either the R value or the G value of the displacement image a, displacement image b, displacement image c, and displacement image d to a fixed value, these displacement images a, Although the boundaries of displacement image b, displacement image c, and displacement image d are clearly demarcated, the present invention is not limited to this. For example, these displacement image a, displacement image b, and displacement image It is also possible to generate a gradation-like image as a displacement image by gradually varying the R value and G value of pixels near each boundary of the image c and the displacement image d.

FIG. 12-6(A) is an explanatory diagram showing an example of the content of the production control command used in this feature section 006SG. The production control command has, for example, a two-byte configuration, with the first byte indicating MODE (command classification) and the second byte indicating EXT (command type). The first bit (bit 7) of MODE data is always set to "1", and the first bit of EXT data is set to "0". Note that the command format shown in FIG. 12-6(A) is an example, and other command formats may be used. Further, in this example, the control command is made up of two control signals, but the number of control signals making up the control command may be one, or may be three or more.

In the example shown in FIG. 12-6(A), command 8001H is a first variable display start command that specifies the start of variable display in a special pattern game using the first special pattern on the first special pattern display device 4A. . Command 8002H is a second variable display start command that specifies the start of variable display in the special pattern game using the second special pattern on the second special pattern display device 4B. The command 81XXH is a decoration that is variably displayed in the "left", "middle", and "right" decorative symbol display areas 5L, 5C, and 5R of the image display device 5 in response to the variable display of special symbols in the special symbol game. This is a variation pattern specification command that specifies a variation pattern (variation time (variable display time)) of a symbol (also referred to as a performance symbol). Here, XXH indicates an unspecified hexadecimal number, and may be any value that can be arbitrarily set according to the content of the instruction by the production control command. Note that in the variation pattern designation command, different EXT data is set depending on the variation pattern to be specified.

Command 8CXXH is a variable display result designation command, and is an effect control command that designates variable display results such as special symbols and decorative symbols. The variable display result specification command, for example, as shown in Figure 12-6 (B), determines whether the variable display result (also referred to as variable display result) is a "miss" or a "jackpot" (predetermined result). ) and the result of determining which of a plurality of types of jackpot is to be selected when the variable display result is "jackpot" (jackpot type determination result), different EXT data is set.

Among the variable display result designation commands, for example, as shown in FIG. 12-6(B), command 8C00H is the first variable display result designation command that indicates the predetermined result that the variable display result is "miss". . Command 8C01H is a second variable display result designation command that notifies the pre-determined result that the variable display result is "jackpot" and the jackpot type is "probable variable jackpot A" and the jackpot type determination result. Command 8C02H is a third variable display result designation command that notifies the pre-determined result that the variable display result is "jackpot" and the jackpot type is "probable variable jackpot B" and the jackpot type determination result. Command 8C03H is a fourth variable display result designation command that notifies the pre-determined result that the variable display result is "jackpot" and the jackpot type is "probable variable jackpot C" and the jackpot type determination result. Command 8C04H is a fifth variable display result designation command that notifies the predetermined result that the variable display result is "jackpot" and the jackpot type is "uncertain variable jackpot" and the jackpot type determination result.

Command 8F00H is a symbol confirmation command that specifies stopping (determination) of variation of decorative symbols in each of the "left", "middle", and "right" decorative symbol display areas 5L, 5C, and 5R in the image display device 5. The command 95XXH is a gaming state designation command that designates the current gaming state of the pachinko gaming machine 1. In the gaming state designation command, different EXT data is set depending on the current gaming state in the pachinko gaming machine 1, for example. As a specific example, command 9500H is a first gaming state designation command corresponding to a gaming state in which neither time saving control nor probability variable control is performed (low probability low base state, normal state), and command 9501H is a command in which time saving control is performed. This is a second gaming state designation command corresponding to a gaming state (low probability high base state, time saving state) in which probability change control is not performed. In addition, command 9502H is a third gaming state designation command corresponding to a gaming state in which probability variable control is performed but time saving control is not performed (high probability low base state, probability variable state without time saving), and command 9503H is a command 9503H for time saving control and probability variable. This command is a fourth gaming state designation command corresponding to the gaming states (high probability high base state, time saving variable probability state) which are both controlled.

The command A0XXH is a winning start designation command (also referred to as a "fanfare command") that designates the display of an effect image indicating the start of a jackpot game. Command A1XXH is a big winning hole opening notification command that notifies that the big winning hole is in an open state in the jackpot gaming state. Command A2XXH is a post-opening notification command for the jackpot that notifies that the jackpot has changed from the open state to the closed state during the jackpot gaming state. Command A3XXH is a winning end designation command that designates the display of the effect image at the end of the jackpot game.

In the winning start designation command and the winning end designation command, for example, the same EXT data as the variable display result designation command may be set, so that different EXT data may be set depending on the predetermined result or the jackpot type determination result. . Alternatively, in the winning start designation command and the winning end designation command, the correspondence relationship between the pre-determined result and the jackpot type determination result and the set EXT data may be made different from the correspondence relationship in the variable display result designation command. . In the notification command while the big winning hole is open and the notification command after the big winning hole is opened, for example, in response to the number of rounds (for example, "1" to "10") in the normal open jackpot state and the high speed open jackpot state, which will be described later, Different EXT data is set.

The command B100H is based on the fact that the game ball that passed through (entered) the first starting prize opening formed by the winning ball device 6A was detected by the first starting opening switch 22A and a starting prize (first starting winning) occurred. This is a first starting opening winning designation command that notifies that the first starting condition for executing the special symbol game using the first special symbol on the first special symbol display device 4A is satisfied. The command B200H is based on the fact that the game ball that has passed through (entered) the second starting prize opening formed by the variable winning ball device 6B is detected by the second starting opening switch 22B and a starting prize (second starting prize) has occurred. , is a second starting opening winning designation command that notifies that the second starting condition for executing the special symbol game using the second special symbol on the second special symbol display device 4B is satisfied.

The command C1XXH is a first pending memory number notification command that notifies the first special figure pending memory number in order to make it possible to specify the special figure pending memory number. Command C2XXH is a second pending memory number notification command that notifies the second special figure pending memory number in order to make it possible to specify the special figure pending memory number. The first pending memory number notification command is, for example, when the first starting opening winning designation command is sent based on the game ball passing (entering) the first starting winning opening and the first starting condition being satisfied. , is transmitted from the main board 11 to the production control board 12. The second pending storage number notification command is, for example, when the second starting opening winning designation command is sent based on the game ball passing (entering) the second starting winning opening and the second starting condition being satisfied. , is transmitted from the main board 11 to the production control board 12. In addition, the first pending memory number notification command and the second pending memory number notification command are used when either the first start condition or the second start condition is satisfied (when the number of pending memories decreases), the special figure game It may also be transmitted in response to the start of execution.

Instead of the first pending memory number notification command and the second pending memory number notification command, a total pending memory number notification command that notifies the total number of pending memories may be transmitted. That is, a total number of pending memories notification command may be used to notify an increase (or decrease) in the total number of pending memories.

Note that the commands shown in Figure 12-6(A) are just examples; some of these commands may be omitted, different commands may be used in place of these commands, or these commands may not be included. You may add a command different from the one in . For example, a prize ball number notification command that allows you to specify the number of prize balls that will be paid out based on the game balls entering each winning slot, and a gate notification command that allows you to notify that the game ball has passed through the passage gate 41. A passage notification command, a notification command for notifying the remaining number of times the probability change control or time saving control will be executed, etc. may be provided.

FIG. 12-7 is an explanatory diagram illustrating random numbers counted on the main board 11 side. As shown in FIG. 12-7, in this feature section 006SG, on the side of the main board 11, a random number MR1 for determining the special figure display result, a random number MR2 for determining the jackpot type, and a random number MR3 for determining the fluctuation pattern. , and numerical data indicating the random number MR4 for determining the display result of ordinary figures are controlled to be countable. Note that random numbers other than these may be used to enhance the gaming effect. The random numbers used to control the progress of games are also referred to as gaming random numbers.

The random number circuit 104 may be one that counts numerical data indicating some or all of these random numbers MR1 to MR4. The CPU 103 uses a random counter different from the random number circuit 104, such as a random counter provided in a game control counter setting section (not shown), to update various numerical data by software, thereby updating the random numbers MR1 to MR4. Numerical data indicating a portion may be counted.

The random number value MR1 for determining the special pattern display result is a random number value used to determine whether or not to control the variable display result such as a special pattern in the special pattern game as a "jackpot" into a jackpot game state. For example, It takes a value in the range of "1" to "65536". The random number MR2 for determining the jackpot type determines whether the jackpot type is "probable variable jackpot A", "probable variable jackpot B", "probable variable jackpot C", or "non-probable variable jackpot" when the variable display result is "jackpot". This is a random number value used to determine the value, and takes, for example, a value in the range of "1" to "100".

The random number value MR3 for determining the variation pattern is a random number value used to determine the variation pattern in the variable display of special symbols and decorative symbols to one of multiple types prepared in advance, and is, for example, "1" to " Takes a value in the range of ``997''.

The random number MR4 for determining the general pattern display result is used to determine whether the variable display result in the general pattern game by the normal pattern display device 20 is to be "normal pattern hit" or "normal pattern hit". This is a random number value, for example, in the range of "3" to "13".

FIG. 12-8 shows an example of the structure of the special figure display result determination table stored in the ROM 101. In this feature section 006SG, a common special figure display result judgment table is used for the first special figure and the second special figure as the special figure display result judgment table, but the present invention is not limited to this. , separate special figure display result determination tables may be used for the first special figure and the second special figure.

The special figure display result determination table is a variable display result and a special figure game using the first special figure by the first special figure display device 4A and a special figure game using the second special figure by the second special figure display device 4B. Before the finalized special symbol is derived and displayed, it is referred to in order to determine whether or not to control the variable display result as a "jackpot" into a jackpot game state based on the random number MR1 for determining the special symbol display result. This is the table that will be used.

In the special figure display result determination table in this characteristic section 006SG, the special figure display results are determined depending on whether the gaming state in the pachinko gaming machine 1 is a normal state, a time-saving state (low probability state), or a variable probability state (high probability state). A numerical value (judgment value) that is compared with the random number MR1 for determining the figure display result is assigned to the special figure display result of "big hit" or "miss".

In the special figure display result determination table, the table data indicating the determination value to be compared with the random number MR1 for determining the special figure display result is used to determine whether or not to treat the special figure display result as a "jackpot" and control it to a jackpot gaming state. This is the judgment data assigned to the result. In the special figure display result determination table in this feature section 006SG, when the gaming state is in a variable probability state (high probability state), more judgment values are determined as " It is assigned to the special figure display result of "Jackpot". As a result, in a variable probability state (high probability state) in which probability variable control is performed in the pachinko game machine 1, when the pachinko game machine 1 is in a normal state or a time saving state (low probability state), the special figure display result is set as a "jackpot" and the jackpot game state is controlled. Then, compared to the probability determined (approximately 1/300 in this feature section 006SG), the probability that the special figure display result is determined as a "jackpot" and the jackpot game state is controlled becomes higher (approximately 1/300 in this feature section 006SG). /30). That is, in the special figure display result determination table, when the gaming state in the pachinko gaming machine 1 is in a variable probability state (high probability state), it is determined that control is to be made into a jackpot gaming state compared to when it is in a normal state or a time saving state. In order to increase the probability, the determination data is assigned to the determination result of whether or not to control the jackpot game state.

FIG. 12-9(A) shows an example of the structure of the jackpot type determination table stored in the ROM 101. The jackpot type determination table in this feature section 006SG selects one of multiple jackpot types based on the random number MR2 for jackpot type determination when it is determined that the special figure display result is a "jackpot" and the jackpot gaming state is controlled. This is a table that is referenced to determine the In the jackpot type determination table, the special symbol for which variable display (fluctuating display) was performed in the special symbol game is the first special symbol (special symbol game by the first special symbol display device 4A) or the second special symbol (the special symbol game by the first special symbol display device 4A) 2 special pattern display device 4B), the numerical value (judgment value) compared with the random value MR2 for determining the jackpot type may be "non-probable variable jackpot", "probable variable jackpot A", or " They are assigned to a plurality of jackpot types such as "probable variable jackpot B" and "probable variable jackpot C."

Here, to explain the jackpot types in this feature section 006SG using FIG. 12-9(B), in this feature section 006SG, as jackpot types, high accuracy control and time saving control are performed after the end of the jackpot game state. "Probability variable jackpot A" and "Probability variable jackpot B" which are executed and move to a high-precision high base state, and a high-probability low base state in which high-precision control is executed but time-saving control is not executed after the jackpot gaming state ends. A "probable variable jackpot C" that transitions, and a "non-probable variable jackpot" that transitions to a low-probability-high base state after the end of the jackpot gaming state where only the time saving control is executed are set.

The jackpot game state by the "probable variable jackpot A" is a normal open jackpot in which rounds of changing the special variable winning ball device 7 to the first state advantageous to the player are repeatedly executed 10 times (so-called 10 rounds). On the other hand, the jackpot game state of "Probable Variable Jackpot B" is a normal open jackpot in which rounds are repeated five times (so-called 5 rounds) in which the special variable winning ball device 7 is changed to the first state advantageous to the player. . The jackpot game state by the "probable variable jackpot C" is a normal open jackpot in which rounds are repeatedly executed twice (so-called 2 rounds) in which the special variable winning ball device 7 is changed to the first state advantageous to the player. In addition, the jackpot game state due to the "non-probable variable jackpot" is a normal open jackpot in which rounds of changing the special variable winning ball device 7 to the first state advantageous to the player are repeated 10 times (so-called 10 rounds). . Therefore, the "probable variable jackpot A" is referred to as the 10 round (10R) fixed variable jackpot, the "probable variable jackpot B" is referred to as the 5 round (5R) variable variable jackpot, and the "probable variable jackpot C" is referred to as the 2 round (2R) variable variable jackpot. Sometimes called.

The high probability control and time saving control executed after the end of the jackpot game state of probability variable jackpot A to probability variable jackpot C are continuously executed until the jackpot occurs again after the end of the jackpot game state. Therefore, if the jackpot that occurs again is one of the probability variable jackpot A to probability variable jackpot C, the high probability control and time saving control are executed again after the jackpot gaming state ends, so the jackpot gaming state changes from the normal state. This is a so-called consecutive winning situation, which occurs continuously without any intervention.

On the other hand, the time saving control that is executed after the end of the jackpot game state due to the "non-probable variable jackpot" requires that the special figure game be executed a predetermined number of times (100 times in this feature part 006SG), or that the special figure game be executed the predetermined number of times. The game ends by entering a jackpot game state before the game is executed.

In the setting example of the jackpot type determination table shown in FIG. 12-9(A), depending on whether the variably displayed special symbol is the first special symbol or the second special symbol, "probable variable jackpot A", " The assignment of determination values to the jackpot types of "probable variable jackpot B", "probable variable jackpot C", and "non-probable variable jackpot" is different. In other words, when the variably displayed special figure is the first special figure, the judgment value in the predetermined range (value in the range of "81" to "100") is "Probable Variable Jackpot B" or "Probable Variable Jacket B" with a small number of rounds. If the variablely displayed special figure is the second special figure, a judgment value is assigned to the jackpot type of "probable variable jackpot B" or "probable variable jackpot C". It has not been done. With such settings, the jackpot type is determined to be one of a plurality of types based on the first starting condition for starting the special pattern game using the first special pattern displayed by the first special pattern display device 4A. and a case where the jackpot type is determined to be one of a plurality of types based on the fulfillment of the second start condition for starting the special symbol game using the second special symbol by the second special symbol display device 4B. Therefore, the ratio at which the jackpot type is determined to be "probable variable jackpot B" or "probable variable jackpot C" with a small number of rounds can be varied. In particular, in the special game using the second special map, the jackpot type is not determined to be "probable variable jackpot B" or "probable variable jackpot C" to control the jackpot state with a small number of rounds, so for example, due to time saving control. Due to the high opening control, in a game state in which game balls are likely to enter the second starting prize opening formed by the variable winning ball device 6B, the game interest is reduced by avoiding frequent occurrence of a jackpot state in which the number of prize balls obtained is small. This can be prevented.

In addition, in the setting example of the jackpot type determination table shown in Figure 12-9 (A), the assignment of the determination value to the jackpot type of "non-probable variation" is determined by whether it is the first special figure game or the second special figure game. Since it is the same regardless of whether it is a special game or not, the probability of a non-probable jackpot and the probability of a definite jackpot are the same regardless of whether it is the first special game or the second special game. It is said that

Therefore, as mentioned above, the allocation of judgment values for "probable strange jackpot B" and "probable strange jackpot C" differs depending on whether it is a special game of the first special figure or the second special figure. Therefore, the assignment of the judgment value for "Probable Variable Jackpot A" also differs depending on whether it is the first special pattern game or the second special pattern game, and for "Probable Variable Jackpot A" with a large number of rounds, It is set so that it is easier to decide if it is a special figure game of a special figure than if it is a special figure game of the first special figure.

In addition, even in the case of the special game of the second special figure, the judgment value in a predetermined range that is different from the case of the special figure game of the first special figure is the jackpot of "probable strange jackpot B" or "probable strange jackpot C". It may be possible to assign it to a type. For example, in the case of a special pattern game with the second special pattern, the judgment value is smaller than in the case of a special pattern game with the first special pattern, for the jackpot type of "probable strange jackpot B" or "probable strange jackpot C". May be assigned. Alternatively, the type of jackpot may be determined by referring to common table data regardless of whether it is a first special figure game or a second special figure game.

FIG. 12-10 shows a variation pattern in this feature section 006SG. In this characteristic part 006SG, among the cases where the variable display result is "miss", the variable display mode of the decorative pattern is "non-reach" and "reach", and the variable A plurality of fluctuation patterns are prepared in advance in response to the case where the display result is a "jackpot". In addition, the variation pattern corresponding to the case where the variable display result is "miss" and the variation display mode of the decorative symbol is "non-reach" is called a non-reach variation pattern (also referred to as "non-reach variation pattern"), A variation pattern corresponding to a case where the variable display result is "miss" and the variation display mode of the decorative symbol is "reach" is referred to as a reach variation pattern (also referred to as "reach variation pattern"). Furthermore, the non-reach variation pattern and the reach variation pattern are included in the off-reach variation pattern corresponding to the case where the variable display result is "off". A variation pattern corresponding to a case where the variable display result is a "jackpot" is referred to as a jackpot variation pattern.

The jackpot fluctuation pattern and the reach fluctuation pattern include a normal reach fluctuation pattern in which a normal reach reach effect is executed, and a super reach fluctuation pattern in which a super reach reach effect is executed. In addition, although this characteristic part 006SG provides one type of normal reach variation pattern, the present invention is not limited to this, and two or more types of normal reach variation patterns may be provided. In addition, in this feature part 006SG, two types of variation patterns, super reach α and super reach β, are provided as super reach variation patterns, but the present invention is not limited to this, and two types of super reach variation patterns are provided. More than one type or only one type may be provided.

In addition, the super reach variation pattern in this feature section 006SG is a variation pattern of super reach α, a variation pattern where the variable display result is a jackpot (PB1-2), a variation pattern where the variable display result is a jackpot (PA2-2), and a variation pattern of super reach β. As the fluctuation patterns, there are provided a fluctuation pattern (PB1-3) in which the variable display result is a jackpot and a fluctuation pattern (PA2-3) in which the variable display result is a jackpot.

As shown in FIG. 12-10, the special symbol variation time of the normal reach variation pattern in which the normal reach variation pattern in this feature section 006SG is executed is set shorter than that of the super reach variation pattern.

In addition, in this feature part 006SG, the variable display result is set to be a "jackpot" and the expectation of a jackpot increases in the order of super reach, normal reach, and non-reach, so in the normal reach variation pattern and the super reach variation pattern, The longer the special figure fluctuation time, the higher the expectation of a jackpot.

In particular, the special figure variation time of the super reach β variation pattern is set longer than the special figure variation time of the super reach α variation pattern. In other words, the super reach β variation pattern is set so that the expectation level of a jackpot where the variable display result is a “jackpot” is higher than the super reach α variation pattern.

In addition, in this feature section 006SG, as described later, these fluctuation patterns are determined using only the random number MR3 for determining the fluctuation pattern, but the present invention is not limited to this. For example, in addition to the random number MR3 for determining the variation pattern, a random number for determining the type of variation pattern is provided, and the type of the variation pattern is first determined from these random numbers for determining the type of variation, and then the type of variation pattern is determined. A variation pattern belonging to the determined type may be determined.

Note that the normal reach variation pattern (PA2-1 and PB1-1) and the super reach variation pattern (PA2-2, PA2-3, PB1-2, PB1-3) in this feature section 006 are displayed during variable display. It is also a variation pattern that executes a performance that suggests the development of a super reach performance after a reach is established. In the normal reach variation pattern (PA2-1 and PB1-1), the variable display result is displayed without developing into the super reach reach effect after the development suggestion effect is executed, while the super reach variation pattern (PA2-2 , PA2-3, PB1-2, PB1-3), the reach effect of super reach is executed after the execution of the development suggestion effect.

In addition, in this feature part 006SG, the normal reach variation pattern (PA2-1 and PB1-1) and the super reach variation pattern (PA2-2, PA2-3, PB1-2, PB1-3) are displayed during variable display. , exemplifies a form in which a development suggestion performance to a super reach reach performance is executed after a reach is established, but the present invention is not limited to this, and the normal reach variation pattern and the super reach variation pattern are different from each other. A variation pattern may be provided in which the development suggestion effect is not executed. Note that when the development suggestion performance is executed, the rate of development to the super reach reach performance may be set higher than when the development suggestion performance is not executed.

FIG. 12-11 is an explanatory diagram of a method for determining a variation pattern in this feature section 006SG. In this feature section 006SG, the variation pattern determination table to be selected differs depending on the display result of the variable display to be executed and the number of pending memories.

Specifically, as shown in FIG. 12-11, if the variable display result is a jackpot, select the jackpot variation pattern determination table, and change the variation pattern to PB1-1 using the jackpot variation pattern determination table. (Normal reach jackpot variation pattern), PB1-2 (Super reach α jackpot variation pattern), and PB1-3 (Super reach β jackpot variation pattern).

Specifically, in the jackpot variation pattern determination table, PB1-1 is determined at a rate of 5%, PB1-2 is determined at a rate of 35%, and PB1-3 is determined at a rate of 60%.

In addition, in this feature section 006SG, if the variable display result is a jackpot, the same jackpot variation pattern determination table is used to determine the variation pattern regardless of the jackpot type. The present invention is not limited to the above, but includes a plurality of jackpot fluctuation pattern determination tables with different determination ratios among PB1-1, PB1-2, and PB1-3, and different jackpot fluctuation pattern determination tables depending on the jackpot type. may be used to determine the variation pattern. By doing this, it is possible to create a variable pattern that is easily determined for each type of jackpot, so it is possible to draw the player's attention to which variable display of the variable pattern the variable display result is a jackpot, You can improve your interest in gaming.

In addition, if the variable display result is "Loss" in the normal gaming state (low base state) and the number of pending memory of variable special symbols is 2 or less, select the variation pattern determination table A for losses, and select the corresponding variation pattern judgment table A. Using variation pattern determination table A for misses, change the variation patterns to PA1-1 (non-reach variation pattern), PA2-1 (normal reach variation pattern), PA2-2 (super reach α variation pattern), PA2 Determine from -3 (fluctuation pattern of super reach β deviation).

Specifically, in the deviation pattern determination table A, PA1-1 is determined at a rate of 50%, PA2-1 is determined at a rate of 40%, PA2-2 is determined at a rate of 7%, Determine PA2-3 at a rate of 3%.

In addition, if the variable display result is "Low" in the normal gaming state (low base state) and the number of pending memory of variable special symbols is 3, select the fluctuation pattern judgment table B for the loss, and Using the variation pattern determination table B, change the variation patterns to PA1-2 (shortened variation pattern with non-reach out), PA2-1 (variation pattern with normal reach out), PA2-2 (variation pattern with super reach α out), PA2 Determine from -3 (fluctuation pattern of super reach β deviation).

Specifically, in the deviation pattern determination table B, PA1-2 is determined at a rate of 60%, PA2-1 is determined at a rate of 30%, PA2-2 is determined at a rate of 7%, Determine PA2-3 at a rate of 3%.

In addition, if the variable display result is "Low" in the normal gaming state (low base state) and the number of pending memory of variable special symbols is 4, select the fluctuation pattern judgment table C for the loss, and select the fluctuation pattern judgment table C for the loss. Using the variation pattern determination table C, change the variation patterns to PA1-3 (shortened variation pattern with non-reach out), PA2-1 (variation pattern with normal reach out), PA2-2 (variation pattern with out of super reach α), PA2 Determine from -3 (fluctuation pattern of super reach β deviation).

Specifically, in the deviation pattern determination table C, PA1-3 is determined at a rate of 70%, PA2-1 is determined at a rate of 20%, PA2-2 is determined at a rate of 7%, Determine PA2-3 at a rate of 3%.

In addition, if the variable display result is "miss" in the time saving state (high base state), select the variation pattern determination table D for failure, and change the fluctuation pattern to PA1-4 using the fluctuation pattern determination table D for failure. Determined from (Variation pattern for shortening time saving when non-reach is off), PA2-1 (Variation pattern when normal reach is off), PA2-2 (Variation pattern when super reach α is off), and PA2-3 (Variation pattern when super reach β is off) do.

Specifically, in the deviation variation pattern determination table D, PA1-4 is determined at a rate of 70%, PA2-1 is determined at a rate of 20%, PA2-2 is determined at a rate of 7%, Determine PA2-3 at a rate of 3%.

In other words, if the variable display result in this feature section 006SG is "off", the special figure is Since the rate at which variable display is executed is higher due to shortening variation patterns (PA1-2, PA1-3, PA1-4) whose variation time is shorter than the normal non-reach variation pattern (PA1-1), While preventing the game from being delayed, it is possible to shorten the period until the next variable display result becomes a jackpot.

The RAM 102 in the feature section 006SG is provided with, for example, a game control data holding area (not shown) as an area for holding various data used to control the progress of games in the pachinko game machine 1. The data holding area for game control includes a first special figure reservation storage section, a second special figure reservation storage section, a regular figure reservation storage section, a game control flag setting section, a game control timer setting section, and a game control counter. It includes a setting section and a game control buffer setting section.

The first special figure holding storage unit stores special figures that have not yet been started, although a game ball has passed (entered) the first starting prize opening formed by the winning ball device 6A and a starting prize (first starting prize) has occurred. Stores pending data of the game (special symbol game using the first special symbol on the first special symbol display device 4A). As an example, the first special figure holding storage unit associates the winning order (game ball detection order) to the first starting prize opening with the holding number, and the first starting condition is satisfied when the game ball passes (enters). Based on this, the CPU 103 extracts from the random number circuit 104 etc. numerical data indicating the random number MR1 for determining the special figure display result, the random number MR2 for determining the jackpot type, the random number MR3 for determining the fluctuation pattern, etc. as pending data. , are stored until the number of stored items reaches a predetermined upper limit (for example, "4"). In this way, the suspension data stored in the first special figure suspension storage section indicates that the execution of the special figure game using the first special figure is on hold, and the variable display result (special figure display result) in this special figure game is suspended. ) is the pending information that makes it possible to determine whether or not it will be a jackpot.

The second special figure holding storage unit stores special figures that have not yet been started, although the game ball has passed (entered) the second starting prize opening formed by the variable winning ball device 6B and a starting prize (second starting prize) has occurred. Stores pending data of a figure game (a special figure game using the second special figure on the second special figure display device 4B). As an example, the second special figure holding storage unit associates the winning order (game ball detection order) to the second starting prize opening with the holding number, and the second starting condition is satisfied when the game ball passes (enters). Based on this, the CPU 103 extracts from the random number circuit 104 etc. numerical data indicating the random number MR1 for determining the special figure display result, the random number MR2 for determining the jackpot type, the random number MR3 for determining the fluctuation pattern, etc. as pending data. , are stored until the number reaches a predetermined upper limit (eg, "4"). In this way, the suspension data stored in the second special figure suspension storage section indicates that the execution of the special figure game using the second special figure is on hold, and the variable display result (special figure display result) in this special figure game is suspended. ) is the pending information that makes it possible to determine whether or not it will be a jackpot.

In addition, there is hold information (first hold information) based on the establishment of the first starting condition due to the game ball passing (entering) the first starting prize opening, and holding information (first holding information) based on the establishment of the first starting condition due to the gaming ball passing (entering) the second starting winning opening. The reservation information (second reservation information) based on the establishment of the second starting winning may be stored in a common reservation storage unit in association with the reservation number. In this case, starting hole data indicating whether the game ball passed through (entered) the first starting winning hole or the second starting winning hole may be included in the hold information and stored in association with the holding number. .

The standard figure holding storage section stores the hold information of the standard figure game which has not yet been started by the normal symbol display 20 even though the game ball passing through the passage gate 41 has been detected by the gate switch 21. For example, the normal figure reservation storage unit associates the game balls with the hold numbers in the order in which they pass through the passage gate 41, and is used for determining the normal figure display result extracted from the random number circuit 104 etc. by the CPU 103 based on the passing of the game balls. The numerical data indicating the random number MR4 of is stored as pending data until the number reaches a predetermined upper limit (for example, "4").

The game control flag setting section is provided with a plurality of types of flags whose states can be updated according to the progress of the game in the pachinko game machine 1 and the like. For example, the game control flag setting section stores data indicating the value of the flag and data indicating the on state or off state for each of the plurality of types of flags.

The game control timer setting section is provided with various timers used to control the progress of the game in the pachinko game machine 1. For example, the game control timer setting section stores data indicating timer values for each of a plurality of types of timers.

The game control counter setting section is provided with a plurality of types of counters for counting count values used to control the progress of the game in the pachinko game machine 1. For example, the game control counter setting section stores data indicating count values for each of a plurality of types of counters. Here, the game control counter setting section may be provided with a random counter for counting part or all of the gaming random numbers so that the CPU 103 can update them by software.

In the random counter of the game control counter setting section, random numbers not generated by the random number circuit 104, for example, numerical data indicating random numbers MR2 to MR4, are stored as random count values, and are periodically counted according to the execution of software by the CPU 103. Numerical data indicating each random value is updated periodically or irregularly. The software executed by the CPU 103 to update the random count value may be for updating the random count value separately from the numerical data updating operation in the random number circuit 104, or may be for updating the random count value separately from the numerical data updating operation in the random number circuit 104, or may be for updating the random count value separately from the numerical data updating operation in the random number circuit 104. The random count value may be updated by performing predetermined processing such as scrambling processing or arithmetic processing on all or part of the numerical data obtained.

The game control buffer setting section is provided with various buffers that temporarily store data used to control the progress of the game in the pachinko game machine 1. For example, the game control buffer setting section stores data indicating buffer values in each of a plurality of types of buffers.

The RAM 122 mounted on the performance control board 12 shown in FIG. 12-1 is provided with, for example, a performance control data holding area as an area for holding various data used to control performance operations. The performance control data holding area shown in FIG. 12-15(A) includes a performance control flag setting section, a performance control timer setting section, a performance control counter setting section, and a performance control buffer setting section.

The effect control flag setting section includes a plurality of types of flags whose states can be updated according to the effect operation state such as the display state of the effect image on the screen of the image display device 5, the effect control command transmitted from the main board 11, etc. A flag is set. For example, the production control flag setting section stores data indicating the value of the flag and data indicating the on state or off state for each of the plurality of types of flags.

The effect control timer setting section is provided with a plurality of types of timers used to control the progress of various effect operations, such as display operations of effect images on the screen of the image display device 5, for example. For example, the production control timer setting section stores data indicating timer values for each of a plurality of types of timers.

The performance control counter setting section is provided with a plurality of types of counters used to control the progress of various performance operations. For example, the production control counter setting section stores data indicating count values for each of a plurality of types of counters.

The performance control buffer setting section is provided with various buffers that temporarily store data used to control the progress of various performance operations. For example, the performance control buffer setting section stores data indicating buffer values for each of a plurality of types of buffers.

In this feature section 006SG, data constituting the starting winning reception command buffer is stored in a predetermined area of the production control buffer setting section. The reception command buffer at the time of starting a winning is a storage area (corresponding to buffer numbers "1-1" to "1-4") corresponding to the maximum value of the total number of reserved memories (for example, "4") of the first special figure reserved memory. A storage area (an area corresponding to buffer number "1-0") corresponding to the first special figure being variably displayed is provided. In addition, the start winning command buffer has a storage area (buffer numbers "2-1" to "2-4") corresponding to the maximum value (for example, "4") of the total number of reserved memories of the second special figure reserved memory. (an area corresponding to the buffer number "2-0") and a storage area (an area corresponding to the buffer number "2-0") corresponding to the second special figure being variably displayed. When there is a starting prize in the first starting winning opening or the second starting winning opening, a starting opening winning prize designation command (first starting opening winning prize designation command or second starting opening winning prize designation command) and a pending storage number notification command ( The first pending memory number notification command or the second pending memory number notification command) are transmitted as one set from the main board 11 to the production control board 12. The storage area corresponding to the first special figure pending memory and the storage area corresponding to the second special figure pending memory in the receiving command buffer at the time of starting winning are associated with these starting opening winning designation command and pending memory number notification command, Storage areas (entries) are secured for separately storing the first special figure pending memory and the second special figure pending memory.

The storage contents of these storage areas (entries) will be explained later when the start condition is met and the variable display of the highest pending storage (buffer number "1-1" or buffer number "2-1") starts. The stored contents of the buffer number "1-0" or buffer number "2-0", which stores the contents of the suspended memory for which the start condition is satisfied, are shifted upward one by one so that the start condition is satisfied, and the stored contents of the buffer number "1-0" or "2-0" It is cleared in the special drawing waiting process that is executed when the process ends.

FIG. 12-12 is a flowchart showing an example of the process executed in S110 of FIG. 6 as the special symbol normal process. In the special symbol normal processing shown in FIG. 12-12, the CPU 103 first determines whether or not the second special symbol pending storage number is "0" (step 006SGS141). The second special symbol pending memory number is the number of pending memories of the special symbol game using the second special symbol by the second special symbol display device 4B. For example, in the process of step 006SGS141, the second pending storage number count value stored in the game control counter setting section may be read out, and it may be determined whether or not the read value is "0".

When the second special figure reservation storage number is other than "0" in step 006SGS141 (step 006SGS141;N), reservation data stored in the second special figure reservation storage unit corresponding to reservation number "1" Then, the numerical data indicating the random number MR1 for determining the special figure display result, the random number MR2 for determining the jackpot type, and the random number MR3 for determining the fluctuation pattern are read out (step 006SGS142). The numerical data read at this time may be temporarily stored in, for example, a random number buffer for fluctuation.

Following the process of step 006 SGS142, the second special figure pending memory count value and the total pending memory count value are subtracted by 1 and updated, so that the second special figure pending memory count value and the total pending memory count value are subtracted by 1. At the same time, the data in the second special figure reservation storage section is updated. Specifically, it indicates the random numbers MR1 to MR3 stored in the entries lower than the reservation number "1" (for example, the entries corresponding to the reservation numbers "2" to "4") in the second special figure reservation storage unit. The pending data is shifted upward one entry at a time (step 006SGS143).

Thereafter, after updating the variable special figure designation buffer value which is the stored value of the variable special figure designation buffer to "2" (step 006SGS144), the process moves to step 006SGS149.

On the other hand, when the second special figure reservation memory number is "0" in step 006SGS141 (step 006SGS141; Y), it is determined whether the first special figure reservation memory number is "0" (step 006SGS145) . The number of first special symbol pending memories is the number of pending memories of the special symbol game using the first special symbol by the first special symbol display device 4A. For example, in the process of step 006SGS145, the game control counter setting section reads out the first pending memory number count value stored in the first pending memory number counter, and determines whether or not the read value is "0". good. In this way, the process of step 006SGS145 is executed when it is determined in step 006SGS141 that the second special figure pending memory number is "0", and the first special figure pending memory number is "0". Determine whether or not. As a result, the special pattern game using the second special pattern starts to be executed with priority over the special pattern game using the first special pattern.

Note that the special pattern game using the second special pattern is not limited to being executed with priority over the special pattern game using the first special pattern, for example, the first starting prize opening or the second starting winning opening The execution of the special figure game may be started in the order in which the game ball enters (passes) and a starting prize occurs. In this case, a table is provided that stores data that can specify the order in which the starting winnings occur, and the execution of the special pattern game using either the first special pattern or the second special pattern is started from the stored data. It would be good if we could decide which.

When the first special figure reservation memory number is other than "0" at step 006SGS145 (step 006SGS145; N), the reservation data stored in the first special figure reservation storage unit corresponding to the reservation number "1" Then, numerical data indicating the random number MR1 for special figure display result determination, the random number MR2 for jackpot type determination, and the random number MR3 for fluctuation pattern determination are read out (step 006SGS146). The numerical data read at this time may be temporarily stored in, for example, a random number buffer for fluctuation.

Following the process of step 006 SGS146, the first special figure pending memory number and total pending memory number are subtracted by 1 by subtracting and updating the first special figure pending memory number count value and the total pending memory number count value. At the same time, the data in the first special figure reservation storage section is updated. Specifically, it indicates the random numbers MR1 to MR3 stored in the entries lower than the reservation number "1" (for example, the entries corresponding to the reservation numbers "2" to "4") in the first special figure reservation storage unit. The pending data is shifted upward one entry at a time (step 006SGS147).

Thereafter, after updating the variable special figure designation buffer value, which is the stored value of the variable special figure designation buffer, to "1" (step 006SGS148), the process moves to step 006SGS149.

In step 006SGS149, the special symbol display result judgment shown in FIG. Select and set the table. Next, the numerical data indicating the random number MR1 for judging the special figure display result stored in the random number buffer for fluctuation is compared with the judgment value assigned to each special figure display result of "jackpot" and "miss". , it is determined whether the special figure display result is a "jackpot" or a "miss" (step 006 SGS150a). In addition, in this step 006SGS150a, if the gaming state at that time is a high probability state (probability variation state) in which the probability variation flag is in the ON state, the random value MR1 for determining the special symbol display result is in a high probability state (probability variation state). ), it is determined that it is a "jackpot", and if it is not, it is determined that it is a "miss". In addition, if the probability change flag is off and the probability is low, if the random number MR1 for determining the special figure display result falls within the range of 1 to 219, it will be judged as a "jackpot", and if it does not, it will be judged as a "miss". judge.

In this way, in the special figure display result determination table 1 selected in step 006SGS149, different determination values are assigned to "jackpot" depending on the gaming state at that time (high accuracy, low accuracy). , In the process of step 006 SGS150a, the special figure display result is determined using different judgment data (judgment value) depending on whether the gaming state when variable display of the special figure game etc. is started is a high certainty state or not. By determining whether or not to be considered a "jackpot", when the gaming state is a high probability state, it is determined (determined) to be a "jackpot" with a higher probability than when the gaming state is a low probability state.

If it is determined in step 006SGS150a that it is a "jackpot" (step 006SGS150a; Y), the jackpot flag is turned on in the game control flag setting section (step 006SGS152). At this time, the jackpot type determination table shown in FIG. 12-9(A) is selected and set as a table to be used for determining the jackpot type to one of a plurality of types (step 006SGS153). By referring to the jackpot type determination table set in this way, the numerical data indicating the random number MR2 for jackpot type determination stored in the fluctuation random number buffer and the "non-probable variable jackpot" and "probable variable jackpot" are determined in the jackpot type determination table. The jackpot type is determined to be one of the plurality of types depending on which of the judgment values assigned to each jackpot type of ``A'', ``Probable variable jackpot B'', and ``Probable variable jackpot C'' matches (Step 006 SGS154 ).

By determining the jackpot type in the process of step 006 SGS154, the gaming state after the end of the jackpot gaming state can be set to either a time-saving state or a variable probability state that is more advantageous to the player than the time-saving state. Whether to control or not is determined before the fixed special symbol as a variable display result is derived. Corresponding to the jackpot type determined in this way, for example, by setting a jackpot type buffer value which is a stored value of the jackpot type buffer provided in the game control buffer setting section (step 006SGS155), the determined jackpot type is set. Remember. As an example, if the jackpot type is "non-probable variable jackpot" corresponding to a non-probable variable jackpot, the jackpot type buffer value is set to "0", and if the jackpot type is "probable variable A" corresponding to probability variable jackpot A, it is set to "1", If it is "probable variable B" corresponding to B, it may be set to "2", and if it is "probable variable C" corresponding to probability variable jackpot C, it may be set to "3".

After step 006SGS155 ends, or if it is determined in step 006SGS150a that it is not a "jackpot" (step 006SGS150a; N), it is determined whether to control the jackpot gaming state (whether the jackpot flag is turned on or not). A fixed special symbol is set in accordance with the pre-determined result of (2) and the determined result of the jackpot type in the case of a jackpot game state. As an example, in response to a pre-determined result that the special symbol display result is a "miss", a special symbol indicating a "-" symbol, which is a missed symbol, is set as a confirmed special symbol. In addition, if the special symbol display result is determined to be a "jackpot" in step 006SGS150a, and if the jackpot type in step 006SGS154 is "probable variable jackpot A", a special symbol indicating the number "7" is displayed. Set as a confirmed special symbol. Further, when the jackpot type is "probable variable jackpot B", a special symbol showing the number "5" is set as a confirmed special symbol. Further, when the jackpot type is "non-probable variable jackpot", a special symbol showing the number "3" is set as a confirmed special symbol. Further, when the jackpot type is "probable variable jackpot C", a special symbol indicating the number "1" is set as a confirmed special symbol. Note that these confirmed special symbols are just examples, and other confirmed special symbols may be set, or multiple types of symbols may be set as confirmed special symbols.

After setting the confirmed special symbol in step 006SGS156, the value of the special symbol process flag is updated to "1", which is the value corresponding to the fluctuation pattern setting process (step 006SGS157), and then the special symbol normal process is ended. .

In addition, if the number of reserved memories of the special pattern game using the first special pattern is "0" in step 006SGS145 (step 006SGS145; Y), after performing predetermined demo display settings (step 006SGS158), Special symbol normal processing ends. In this demonstration display setting, a production control command (customer waiting demo designation command) that specifies a demonstration display (demonstration screen display) by displaying a predetermined production image on the image display device 5, for example, is sent from the main board 11 to the production control command. It is determined whether the transmission to the board 12 has been completed. At this time, if the customer waiting demo designation command has already been sent, the demo display setting is terminated. On the other hand, if it has not yet been sent, settings are made to send the customer waiting demo designation command, and then the demo display settings are ended.

FIGS. 12-13 are flowcharts illustrating an example of the process executed in step S111 of FIG. 6 as the variation pattern setting process. In the fluctuation pattern setting process shown in FIGS. 12-13, the CPU 103 first determines whether the jackpot flag is turned on (step 006SGS161). If the jackpot flag is turned on (step 006SGS161; Y), a jackpot variation pattern determination table is selected and set (step 006SGS164).

In the determination at step 006SGS161, if the jackpot flag is not turned on (step 006SGS161; N), the gaming state is changed by determining whether or not the time saving flag is turned on in the game control flag setting section. It is determined whether or not time saving control is being performed in which time saving control is performed in the state or time saving state (step 006 SGS168). If the time saving flag is turned on (step 006SGS168; Y), the failure variation pattern determination table D is selected and set as the table to be used for determining one of the plurality of variation patterns ( Step 006SGS169).

On the other hand, when the time-saving control is not in progress, that is, when the time-saving flag is not turned on (step 006SGS168; N), for example, the stored value of the pending storage number counter for variable special symbols provided in the game control counter setting section By reading, etc., the number of pending memories of the variable special symbols is specified, and it is determined whether the number of pending memories of the identified variable special symbols is 1 or 2 (step 006 SGS170).

If the number of pending memories of the specified variable special symbol is 1 or 2 (step 006SGS170; N), the variation pattern determination table A for failure is used as a table to be used for determining one of multiple types of variation patterns. Select and set (step 006SGS171).

In addition, if the number of pending memories of the specified variable special figure is not 1 or 2 (step 006SGS170; N), it is further determined whether the number of pending memories of the specified variable special figure is 3 (step 006SGS172). ).

If the number of pending memories of the specified variable special symbol is 3 (step 006SGS172; Y), select the variation pattern determination table B for failure as the table to be used for determining the variation pattern as one of multiple types. (Step 006SGS173).

In addition, if the number of pending memories of the specified variable special pattern is not 3, that is, if the number of pending memories of the specified variable special pattern is 4 (step 006SGS172; N), select one of the multiple types of variable patterns. As the table to be used for determining the deviation pattern, the error variation pattern determination table C is selected and set (step 006SGS174), and the process proceeds to step 006SGS175.

After executing any of the processes in step 006SGS164, step 006SGS169, step 006SGS171, step 006SGS173, and step 006SGS174, for example, the numerical data indicating the random number MR3 for fluctuation pattern determination stored in the fluctuation random number buffer etc. Based on the selected (set) jackpot fluctuation pattern determination table, special hit fluctuation pattern determination table, or loss fluctuation pattern determination table A to D, one of multiple types of fluctuation patterns can be selected. (Step 006SGS175).

Incidentally, when the jackpot flag is off, by determining the fluctuation pattern in the process of step 006SGS175, it is determined whether or not the variable display mode of the decorative symbol is set to "reach". That is, the process of step 006SGS170 includes a process of determining whether or not the variable display state of the decorative symbol should be set to the reach state when the variable display result is "miss".

After determining the fluctuation pattern in step 006SGS175, a special symbol game using the first special symbol on the first special symbol display device 4A and a special symbol game using the first special symbol on the second special symbol display device 4B are performed according to the variable special symbol designation buffer value. Settings are made to start the variation of the special symbols so as to start one of the special symbol games using the second special symbol (step 006 SGS176). As an example, if the variable special symbol designation buffer value is "1", settings are made to transmit a drive signal that updates the display of the first special symbol on the first special symbol display device 4A. On the other hand, if the variable special symbol designation buffer value is "2", settings are made to transmit a drive signal that updates the display of the second special symbol on the second special symbol display device 4B.

Following the process of step 006SGS176, settings are made to transmit various commands for starting the variation of the special symbol (step 006SGS177). For example, when the variable special figure designation buffer value is "1", the CPU 103 sends a gaming state designation command, a first variable display start command, a fluctuation pattern designation command, a variable display command to the production control board 12 from the main board 11. In order to sequentially transmit the result designation command and the first pending storage number notification command, the game control buffer setting section sends setting data indicating the storage address (starting address) in the ROM 101 of the first fluctuation start command table prepared in advance. The command is stored in the buffer area specified by the send command pointer in the send command buffer provided in the send command buffer. On the other hand, when the variable special figure designation buffer value is "2", the CPU 103 sends a gaming state designation command, a second variable display start command, a fluctuation pattern designation command, and a variable display command from the main board 11 to the performance control board 12. In order to sequentially transmit the result specification command and the second pending storage number notification command, setting data indicating the storage address in the ROM 101 of the second fluctuation start command table prepared in advance is provided in the game control buffer setting section. Store in the buffer area specified by the send command pointer in the send command buffer.

After executing the process of step 006SGS177, the special symbol fluctuation time which is the variable display time of the special symbol according to the determination result of the fluctuation pattern is set (step 006SGS178). The special symbol fluctuation time, which is the variable display time of the special symbol, is the time required from when the variable display of the special symbol starts in the special symbol game until the fixed special symbol that becomes the variable display result (special symbol display result) is stopped and displayed. It's time. Thereafter, after updating the value of the special symbol process flag to "2" which is a value corresponding to the special symbol variation process (step 006SGS179), the variation pattern setting process is ended.

Based on the command transmission setting in step 006SGS177, each time the command control process in step S27 shown in FIG. The designation command, the first variable display start command or the second variable display start command, the fluctuation pattern designation command, the variable display result designation command, the first pending storage number notification command or the second pending storage number notification command are sent in sequence. It turns out. The order in which these production control commands are sent can be changed arbitrarily, for example, the variable display result specification command is sent first, and then the first variable display start command or the second variable display start command, and the variable pattern are sent. The designation command, the game state designation command, the first pending storage number notification command, or the second pending storage number notification command may be transmitted in this order.

FIG. 12-14 is a flowchart showing an example of the process executed in step S113 of FIG. 6 as the special symbol stop process. In the special symbol stop process, the CPU 103 turns on the end flag referred to in the special symbol variation process in step S112 to end the variation of the special symbol, and causes the first special symbol display device 4A and the second special symbol display device 4B to Control is performed to stop and display the stop symbols (step 006SGS180). In addition, when the variable special symbol designation buffer value is "1" indicating the first special symbol, the fluctuation of the first special symbol on the first special symbol display device 4A is ended, and the fluctuation special symbol designation buffer value is If it is "2" indicating the second special symbol, the variation of the second special symbol on the second special symbol display device 4B is ended. In addition, control is performed to transmit a symbol confirmation command to the production control board 12 (step 006SGS181).

Then, it is determined whether the jackpot flag is turned on (step 006SGS182). If the jackpot flag is turned on (step 006SGS182; Y) and the probability change flag and time saving flag are turned on, the CPU 103 clears the probability change flag and time saving flag and turns them off (step 006SGS184). , hit start 1 designation command (probability variable jackpot A), win start 2 designation command (probability variable jackpot B), win start 3 designation command (probability variable jackpot C), depending on the type of jackpot stored in the production control board 12. Settings are made to transmit the winning start 4 designation command (non-probable variable) (step 006 SGS185).

Further, the CPU 103 performs settings for transmitting a gaming state designation command indicating the normal state to the production control board 12 (step 006SGS186).

Then, a value corresponding to the jackpot display time (for example, the time for notifying the occurrence of a jackpot on the image display device 5) is set in the jackpot display time timer (step 006SGS187). Also, set the number of openings (for example, 10 times in the case of a non-probable variable jackpot or a variable variable jackpot A, 5 times in the case of a variable variable jackpot B, and 2 times in the case of a variable variable jackpot C) in the number of openings counter. (Step 006SGS188). Then, the value of the special symbol process flag is updated to "4" (step 006SGS189), which is a value corresponding to the jackpot release preprocessing (step S114), and the special symbol stop processing is ended.

On the other hand, when the jackpot flag is off (step 006SGS182; N), in step 006SGS190, the CPU 103 determines whether the value of the time saving number counter is "0" or not. If the value of the time saving counter is "0" (step 006SGS190; Y), the process advances to step 006SGS196.

On the other hand, if the value of the time saving number counter is not "0" (step 006 SGS190; N), that is, if the number of time saving times remains and the high base state is reached, the value of the time saving number counter is -1 (step 006SGS190;N). 006SGS191). Then, it is determined whether the value of the time saving number counter after the subtraction is "0" (step 006SGS193), and if it is not "0" (step 006SGS193; N), the process proceeds to step 006SGS196, and the value of the time saving number counter is determined. is "0" (Step 006SGS193; Y), in order to end the time-saving control, the time-saving flag is cleared and turned off (step 006SGS194), and then the time-saving flag corresponding to the state of the variable probability flag or the time-saving flag is cleared. After setting the transmission of a gaming state designation command corresponding to the gaming state (specifically, the low probability/low base state) (step 006SGS195), the process advances to step 006SGS196.

In step 006SGS196, the value of the special symbol process flag is updated to "0", which is a value corresponding to the special symbol normal process, and then the special symbol stop process is ended.

FIG. 12-15 is a flowchart showing an example of the process executed in S117 of FIG. 6 as the jackpot end process.

In the jackpot end process, the CPU 103 determines whether the jackpot end display timer is in operation, that is, the timer is counting (step 006SGS201). If the jackpot end display timer is not operating (step 006SGS201; N), a value corresponding to the display time corresponding to the time for displaying the jackpot end on the image display device 5 (jackpot end display time) is set in the jackpot end display timer. is set (step 006 SGS202), and the process ends.

On the other hand, if the jackpot end display timer is in operation (step 006SGS201; Y), the value of the jackpot end display timer is subtracted by 1 (step 006SGS203). Then, the CPU 103 checks whether the value of the jackpot end display timer is 0, that is, whether the jackpot end display time has elapsed (step 006 SGS204). If the time has not elapsed, the process ends.

If the jackpot end display time has elapsed (step 006SGS204; Y), the CPU 103 determines whether the stored jackpot type is a variable jackpot (step 006SGS205).

If the stored jackpot type is not a non-probable variable jackpot (step 006SGS205; N), the probability variable flag is turned on (step 006SGS207), the time saving flag is turned on (step 006SGS208), and the time saving number counter is set to "0". After setting (step 006SGS209), the process advances to step 006SGS213.

On the other hand, if the jackpot type is a variable jackpot (step 006SGS205; Y), step 006SGS211 and step 006SGS212 are executed to turn on the time-saving flag and set "100" to the time-saving counter. After that, the process proceeds to step 006SGS213.

In step 006SGS213, the jackpot flag is turned off, and settings are made to send a jackpot end designation command according to the jackpot type (step 006SGS214). Then, after setting the transmission of a gaming state designation command to notify the production control board 12 of the gaming state based on the probability change flag and time saving flag that have been turned on (step 006 SGS215), the value of the special figure process flag is specially set. It is updated to "0", which is a value corresponding to the symbol normal processing (step 006 SGS216).

Next, the operation of the production control CPU 120 will be explained. 12-16 is a part of the flowchart of the production control process shown in FIG. 10. In the performance control process processing, the performance control CPU 120 performs a background image change process (step 006SG162) for changing the background image displayed on the image display device 5 after executing the prefetch notice setting process (step S161) described above. ), and any one of steps S170 to S175 is executed.

As the background image change process, for example, the performance control CPU 120 changes the image display at the start timing of variable display (timing when the performance control process process is executed with the value of the performance control process flag set to 1). It is sufficient to decide to change the background image displayed on the device 5 at a predetermined rate (for example, a rate of 20%), and start displaying a new background image on the image display device 5 in accordance with the determination. In other words, in this feature section 006SG, when any one of a plurality of background images is displayed on the image display device 5, a variable display of the decorative pattern and an effect corresponding to the variable display are executed. There is.

In addition, in the background image change process, the production control CPU 120 changes when the gaming state changes (for example, from the normal state to the jackpot gaming state, from the jackpot gaming state to the probability change state or time saving state, from the probability change state or time saving state to the jackpot state or normal When the state changes), the image display device 5 may be able to display a background image corresponding to the game state to which the change is made.

FIG. 12-17 is a diagram showing a flowchart showing the variable display performance process of the performance control process process. In the variable display production process, the production control CPU 120 uses a process timer according to the process table selected by the production control CPU 120 in accordance with the variation pattern in the variable display start setting process; Each value of the set variable display time timer and variable display control timer is decreased by 1 (step 006SGS901, step 006SGS902, step 006SGS903).

Then, the performance control CPU 120 determines whether the process timer has timed out (step 006SGS906). If the process timer has timed out, the process data is switched (step 006SGS907). That is, the process timer is restarted by setting the next set process timer setting value in the process table to the process timer (step 006SGS908). In addition, the control state for the presentation device (performance component) is changed based on the contents of the next set process data (display control execution data, lamp control execution data, sound control execution data, operation part control data, etc.) (Step 006SGS909). On the other hand, if the process timer has not timed out, the production device (for production control of the parts) is executed (step 006SGS910).

Next, it is checked whether the variable display control timer has timed out (step 006SGS921). If the variable display control timer has timed out (step 006SGS921; Y), the performance control CPU 120 causes the display control unit 123 to display the next display screen of the decorative pattern at the center left (display switching of the previous decorative pattern). Image data for the screen to be displayed after 30 ms has elapsed from the point in time is created (step 006SGS922). In addition, the production control CPU 120 determines whether the variable display is a variable display of a normal reach or super reach variation pattern (step 066SGS923).

If the variable display is a variable display with a non-reach variation pattern (step 066SGS923; N), proceed to step 006SGS927; if the variable display is a normal reach or super reach variable display (step 006SGS923; Y), proceed to step 006SGS927. Furthermore, it is determined whether a display image processing flag, which will be described later, is on (step 006SGS924).

If the display image processing flag is on (step 006SGS924; Y), proceed to step 006SGS926; if the display image processing flag is off (step 006SGS924; N), check the contents of the process data being executed. It is determined whether or not it is the timing to start suggesting the development of Super Reach to reach effect (Step 006SGS925). If it is not the timing to start suggesting the development of Super Reach to the reach effect (Step 006SGS925; N), proceed to Step 006SGS927, and if it is the timing to start suggesting the development of Super Reach to the reach effect (Step 006SGS925; Y), proceed to Step 006SGS926. move on.

As step 006SGS926, the performance control CPU 120 executes a display image processing process for processing (displacing) a part of the image displayed on the image display device 5, and proceeds to step 006SGS927.

In step 006SGS927, the performance control CPU 120 causes the display control unit 123 to execute a process of compositing (superimposing) the images created in the above-described steps 006SGS922 and 006SGS921 on the display image creation area of the VRAM 209. Then, the variable display control timer is reset (step 006SGS928). In this way, variable display control of decorative patterns is realized in the image display device 5. The display control unit 123 outputs to the image display device 5 a signal based on an image obtained by superimposing an image such as a set background image and an image based on display control execution data set in the process table. In this manner, the background image, character image, decorative pattern, etc. in the variation of the decorative pattern are displayed on the image display device 5.

As shown in FIG. 12-19, the image displayed within the display area of the image display device 5 in this feature section 006SG includes a part of the background image and a position that has been pre-positioned so as to be displayed within the display area. are the adjusted first interface image 006SG005I, second interface image 006SG005J, and decorative pattern. In particular, the background image in this feature section 006SG is drawn as an image that is longer in the horizontal and vertical width directions than the display area of the image display device 5, and the background image in the display area of the image display device 5 is The center portion of the image in the left and right width direction is displayed. In other words, in this feature section 006SG, at least the layer 3 image drawing area for drawing and arranging the background image, the displacement image creation area, and the display image creation area are larger in vertical width and horizontal width than the display area of the image display device 5. This is an area for drawing and arranging a long image, and the display area of the image display device 5 displays only a portion of the image that corresponds to the display area.

In addition, in this characteristic part 006SG, an image whose vertical width dimension and horizontal width dimension are longer than the display area of the image display device 5 is drawn and arranged in the layer 3 image drawing area, displacement image creation area, and display image creation area. Although the present invention is not limited to this example, the layer 3 image drawing area and the displacement image creation area are set to have a vertical width smaller than the display area of the image display device 5. While the display image creation area is used as an area for drawing and arranging images with long dimensions and horizontal width dimensions, the display image creation area is an image whose vertical width dimensions and left and right width dimensions are the same as the display area of the image display device 5. It may also be an image that is drawn and placed. In this case, out of the image (background image) drawn in the layer 3 image drawing area or the displacement image creation area, only the part corresponding to the display area of the image display device 5 is placed in the display image creation area. The background image may be displayed in the display area of the display device 5.

In addition, the performance control CPU 120 checks whether the variable display time timer has timed out (step 006SGS929). If the variable display time timer has timed out, the value of the production control process flag is updated to a value corresponding to the special figure waiting process (step S173) (step 006SGS931). Even if the variable display time timer has not timed out, if the confirmation command reception flag indicating that the symbol confirmation designation command has been received is on (step 006 SGS930; Y), the value of the production control process flag is changed to the special symbol. It is updated to a value according to the waiting process (step S173) (step 006SGS931). Even if the variable display time timer has not timed out, once a pattern confirmation designation command is received, the control will stop the fluctuation, so for example, a fluctuation pattern designation command that indicates a long fluctuation time due to noise between boards, etc. Even in such a case, when the regular variable display time has elapsed (at the end of the variable display of the special symbol), the variable display of the decorative symbol can be ended.

FIG. 12-18 is a flowchart showing display image processing processing (step 006SGS926) during the variable display effect processing shown in FIG. 12-17. In the display image processing process, the effect control CPU 120 first determines whether the display image processing flag is on (step 006SGS941). If the display image processing flag is off (step 006SGS941; N), it is determined whether the variable display being executed is a variable display based on the super reach variation pattern (step 006SGS942). If the variable display being executed is a variable display based on the variation pattern of super reach (step 006SGS942; Y), image data for displacement for successful development to super reach performance (for notification of execution of super reach performance) is selected. The process then proceeds to step 006SGS948 (step 006SGS943).

Note that the image data for displacement in this feature section 006SG includes the displacement target image (in the case of this feature section 006SG, an image obtained by superimposing an image placed in the layer 2 image drawing area and an image placed in the layer 3 image drawing area). This is data in which displacement images to be applied to (images placed in the displacement image creation area) are arranged in chronological order.

In addition, when the variable display being executed is a variable display based on the normal reach variation pattern (step 006SGS942; N), the performance control CPU 120 controls the performance control CPU 120 for failure to develop to the super reach performance (for notification of non-execution of the super reach performance). It is determined at a predetermined ratio which one of the displacement image data for super reach performance development failure A and the displacement image data for super reach performance development failure B to be selected as the displacement image data (step 006SGS944). For example, the selection of displacement image data for super reach effect development failure A may be determined at a rate of 50%, and the selection of displacement image data for super reach effect development failure B may be determined at a rate of 50%.

In addition, in this feature section 006SG, two displacement image data, A for failure to develop super reach performance and displacement image data for B for failure to develop super reach performance, are used as displacement image data for failure to develop to super reach performance. Although a form in which displacement image data can be selected is illustrated, the present invention is not limited to this, and there are three types of displacement image data that can be selected as displacement image data for failure to develop to super reach performance. There may be more than one.

Then, the performance control CPU 120 determines whether or not the selection of the displacement image data for super reach performance development failure A has been determined in step 006SGS944 (step 006SGS945). If it is determined in step 006SGS944 that the displacement image data for super reach effect development failure A has been selected (step 006SGS945; Y), the displacement image data for super reach effect development failure A is selected and the process proceeds to step 006SGS948. (Step 006SGS946), if it has been decided to select the displacement image data for super reach effect development failure B (step 006SGS945; N), select the displacement image data for super reach effect development failure B and step 006SGS948 (Step 006SGS947).

In step 006SGS948, the effect control CPU 120 turns on the display image processing flag. Then, the first displacement image is selected from the selected displacement image data (step 006SGS949), and the process proceeds to step 006SGS951.

Further, if the display image processing flag is on in step 006SGS941 (step 006SGS941; Y), the effect control CPU 120 selects the next displacement image from the selected displacement image data and proceeds to step 006SGS951 (step 006SGS941; Y). 006SGS950).

In step 006SGS951, the effect control CPU 120 executes displacement image drawing processing. In the displacement image drawing process, the effect control CPU 120, for example, draws an image placed in the layer 2 image drawing area and an image placed in the layer 3 image drawing area shown in FIG. 12-5 in the displacement image creation area. A process of creating a displacement image by creating a displacement target image by combining (superimposing) and applying the displacement image selected in step 006SGS949 or step 006SGS950 to the image may be executed.

After executing the displacement image drawing process, the performance control CPU 120 determines whether the displacement image created in the displacement image drawing process is the last displacement image (step 006SGS952). Whether the displacement image created in the displacement image drawing process is the last displacement image is determined by, for example, whether the displacement image selected in step 006SGS950 is the last displacement image in the displacement image data. do it.

If the displacement image created in the displacement image drawing process is the last displacement image (step 006SGS952; Y), the display image processing flag is turned off to end the display image processing process (step 006SGS953), and the displacement image drawing process ends. If the displacement image created in is not the last displacement image (step 006SGS952; N), the display image processing process is ended without going through step 006SGS953.

Next, the display mode of the image display device 5 in variable display of decorative patterns in the feature section 006SG will be described based on FIGS. 12-20 to 12-23. First, as shown in FIGS. 12-20(A) and 12-20(B), in this feature section 006SG, the display mode of the decorative symbols displayed on the image display device 5 differs depending on the gaming state. . Specifically, as shown in FIG. 12-20 (A), when the gaming state is the normal state (low probability low base state), a character image and a numerical image are combined as decorative symbols for the normal state. A decorative pattern is displayed. On the other hand, as shown in FIG. 12-20(B), when the gaming state is a time-saving state (low-accuracy low base state or high-accuracy high base state), a decoration for the time-saving state with only numeric images is used as a decorative pattern. The pattern will be displayed.

Then, in the variable display with the super reach variation pattern, first, as shown in Figures 12-21 (A) and 12-21 (B), the left and right decorative symbols stop swinging depending on the combination of reach. After that, the inner decorative pattern with a different numerical value from the left and right decorative patterns stops swinging. Next, a development suggestion performance is executed. As shown in FIG. 12-21(C), the development suggestion effect is such that the display area displayed on the image display device 5 excluding the first interface image 006SG005I is the left area 006SG005L that includes the left decorative pattern. , a middle area 006SG005C including the inner decorative pattern, and a right area 006SG005R including the right decorative pattern. Then, as shown in Figures 12-21(C) to 12-21(E), the image displayed in the middle area 006SG005C (the decorative pattern and background image included in the middle area 006SG005C) is gradually changed. A development notification pattern that notifies you that a super reach effect will develop from above by sliding downward (written as "Development!" as shown in Figures 12-21 (C) to 12-21 (E)) 2) is moved and displayed toward the center of the display area of the image display device 5.

Incidentally, the development notification symbol in the feature section 006SG is a symbol that is displayed only when the development suggestion performance is executed, and is not displayed during the execution period of other performances during variable display.

In addition, as the image displayed in the middle area 006SG005C slides downward, the image displayed in the left area 006SG005L (left decorative pattern and background image) and the image displayed in the right area 006SG005R ( The decorative pattern and background image on the right slide upward.

The amount of slide movement of each image displayed in the left area 006SG005L, middle area 006SG005C, and right area 006SG005R is the first step shown in Figure 12-21 (C) and the second step shown in Figure 12-21 (D). The number increases as the number of stages progresses through the third stage shown in Figure 12-21(E).

When the third stage of sliding movement of each image displayed in the left area 006SG005L, middle area 006SG005C, and right area 006SG005R is completed, the image is displayed in the center of the display area of the image display device 5 (the center of the middle area 006SG005C). The movement of the development notification symbol is completed and the development of super reach to reach effect is announced.

On the other hand, in the variable display with the normal reach variation pattern, first, as shown in Figures 12-22 (A) and 12-22 (B), the left and right decorative symbols stop swinging depending on the combination of reach. After that, the inner decorative pattern with a different numerical value from the left and right decorative patterns stops swinging. Next, a development suggestion performance is executed. As shown in FIG. 12-22(C), the development suggestion effect is such that the display area displayed on the image display device 5 excluding the first interface image 006SG005I is the left area 006SG005L that includes the left decorative pattern. , a middle area 006SG005C including the inner decorative pattern, and a right area 006SG005R including the right decorative pattern. Then, as shown in Figures 12-22(C) to 12-22(E), the image displayed in the middle area 006SG005C (the decorative pattern and background image included in the middle area 006SG005C) is gradually changed. By sliding downward, a development notification pattern is displayed moving toward the center of the display area of the image display device 5 to notify that the super reach performance will develop from above.

In addition, as the image displayed in the middle area 006SG005C slides downward, the image displayed in the left area 006SG005L (left decorative pattern and background image) and the image displayed in the right area 006SG005R ( The decorative pattern and background image on the right slide upward.

The amount of slide movement of each image displayed in the left area 006SG005L, middle area 006SG005C, and right area 006SG005R is the first step shown in Figure 12-22 (C) and the second step shown in Figure 12-22 (D). It will increase as you progress through the stages.

However, in the normal reach variable display, after the first slide movement of each image displayed in the left area 006SG005L, middle area 006SG005C, and right area 006SG005R is executed, or the second step slide movement is After execution, as shown in FIG. 12-22(E), the development suggestion effect ends without executing the third-stage slide movement, and the image displayed on the image display device 5 changes to the image shown in FIG. The state returns to the state shown in -22(B), and the decorative pattern and small pattern stop at a combination indicating a miss.

Furthermore, as shown in Figures 12-21(C) to 12-21(E), in this feature section 006SG, the amount of slide movement of each image displayed in the left area 006SG005L, middle area 006SG005C, and right area 006SG005R exemplifies a form in which the number increases as the stage progresses; however, the present invention is not limited to this. The amount of movement may decrease as the stages progress, or the amount of movement may increase or decrease only in any of the first to third stages.

In addition, in this feature section 006SG, as an example of a development suggestion effect, each image displayed in the left area 006SG005L, middle area 006SG005C, and right area 006SG005R is exemplified as being able to be moved and displayed up to three levels. However, the number of steps in which each image displayed in the left area 006SG005L, middle area 006SG005C, and right area 006SG005R is slid as a development suggestion effect may be two or less or four or more.

In addition, as shown in Figures 12-21(C) to 12-21(E), in this feature section 006SG, the sliding direction of the images displayed in the left area 006SG005L and right area 006SG005R is displayed in the middle area 006SG005C. Although the present invention is not limited to this example, the sliding direction of the images displayed in the left area 006SG005L and right area 006SG005R is the middle area 006SG005C. It may be in the same direction as the image displayed on the screen.

Further, in the present feature section 006SG, an example is given in which the image displayed on the image display device 5 is displaced regarding the development suggestion performance when the gaming state is the normal state (low probability low base state), but the present invention The image displayed on the image display device 5 may also be displaced for the development suggestion performance when the gaming state is a time saving state (low probability high base state or high probability high base state). .

In addition, as a development suggestion effect in this characteristic part 006SG, as shown in FIGS. 12-23(A) to 12-23(E), the layer 1 image drawing area of the VRAM area has a first reserved storage display area. A first interface image 006SG005I including 006SG005D and a second reserved storage display area 006SG005U and a second interface image 006SG005J including a small pattern are drawn, and a decorative pattern including the development notification pattern described above is drawn in the layer 2 image drawing area. A background image is drawn in the 3-image drawing area. Furthermore, in the displacement image creation area, the image drawn in the layer 2 image drawing area and the image drawn in the layer 3 image drawing area are superimposed to create a displacement target image, and the displacement target image is A displacement image is created by applying the displacement image to the image.

In the display image creation area, the image drawn in the layer 1 image drawing area and the image (displacement image) drawn in the displacement image creation area are superimposed to display a display on the image display device 5. The image is now created.

In other words, as shown in FIGS. 12-21 and 12-22, the first interface image 006SG005I and The second interface image 006SG005J is an image drawn and arranged in the layer 1 image drawing area, and therefore is not subject to displacement. For this reason, the visibility from the player is reduced by moving the decorative pattern upward or downward in the display area of the image display device 5 as a development suggestion effect, while the first interface image 006SG005I is displayed on the image display device 5. Since the display of the second interface image 006SG005J at the bottom of the display area of the image display device 5 is maintained at the upper right of the display area of the image display device 5, the visibility of the first interface image 006SG005I and the second interface image 006SG005J is reduced. There isn't.

In addition, as shown in Figures 12-21 and 12-22, in the variable display using the super reach variation pattern, the images in the left area 006SG005L, middle area 006SG005C, and right area 006SG005R slide to the third stage. On the other hand, in the variable display with the normal reach variation pattern, the displacement image data for the images in the left area 006SG005L, middle area 006SG005C, and right area 006SG005R is used to slide to the first or second stage. Image data is used. Here, as mentioned above, the variable display in the super reach variation pattern is set to have a higher proportion of being controlled to the jackpot gaming state than the variable display in the normal reach variation pattern, so in this feature section 006SG, the development The rate at which the jackpot game state is controlled differs depending on the displacement image data used in the suggestion effect.

In addition, in the development suggestion production of this feature section 006SG, the left area 006SG005L contains the left decorative pattern, the middle area 006SG005C contains the middle decorative pattern, and the right area 006SG005R contains the right decorative pattern, and these left, middle, and right The decorative patterns, including characters and numbers, slide and move without being separated, so it is possible to prevent the deterioration of the interest of the development suggestion performance due to the separation of the left, middle, and right decorative patterns. ing.

Note that in this feature section 006SG, an example is shown in which the images of the left area 006SG005L, middle area 006SG005C, and right area 006SG005R are moved upward or downward, respectively, but the present invention is not limited to this. , only one or two of the images in the left region 006SG005L, middle region 006SG005C, and right region 006SG005R may be moved upward or downward.

As described above, in the pachinko game machine 1 in this feature section 006SG, image data for displaying decorative patterns and background images, and displacement image data for displacing the display positions of these decorative patterns and background images. Specific effects that change the display position of these decorative patterns and background images just by using them (development suggestion effect in characteristic part 006SG, reach suggestion effect in modification example 006SG-1, revival effect in modification example 006SG-2, modification example 006SG- 3, promotion performance in modification 006SG-5, temporary stop suggestion performance and temporary stop notification performance in modification 006SG-6), these specific performances can be executed using dedicated data. The amount of data stored in the CGROM 205 can be reduced compared to the case where the data is stored in the CGROM 205.

In particular, in this feature section 006SG, since it is possible to display a plurality of images as background images on the image display device 5, originally it would be possible to produce a specific effect depending on whether each background image is displayed or the variable display mode. The pattern must be stored in the CGROM 205 in advance, but in this feature section 006SG, the image displayed on the image display device 5 can be instantly displaced by simply using the displacement image data, so the pattern is stored in the CGROM 205. The amount of data can be reduced. In addition, in this feature section 006SG, as game related information, a first reservation storage display area 006SG005D that can specify the number of first reserved special symbols stored and a second reservation storage display area 006SG005U that can specify the number of second reserved special symbols stored. , and small symbols whose display area is smaller than the decorative symbols are displayed on the image display device 5. However, the present invention is not limited to this, and the game-related information includes information such as information indicating that the game state is time-saving. A fourth device that can specify that a firing promotion display or a variable display that prompts the player to launch (launch) the game ball toward the big prize opening or the gate 41 is in progress based on the state or probability change state. A pattern or the like may be displayed on the image display device 5.

Furthermore, as shown in FIG. 12-26, the first interface image 006SG005I and the second interface image 006SG005J are drawn in the layer 1 image drawing area that has the highest image display priority, that is, the main feature part 006SG Since this is a non-target image for image displacement in the development suggestion performance, the display position will not shift with the image of the left area 006SG005L, the image of the right area 006SG005R, and the image of the middle area 006SG005C, which are the displacement targets, and the development suggestion. It is possible to prevent game-related information such as the number of stored special symbols and the variable display of small symbols from becoming difficult for players to visually recognize when performing performances.

Further, among the first interface image 006SG005I and the second interface image 006SG005J, the second interface image 006SG005J is displayed overlappingly with the image of the right area 006SG005R that slides upward during the development suggestion performance. Since the display position of the second interface image 006SG005J itself does not change, the player can recognize the variable display of the small symbols in the second interface image 006SG005J without any discomfort. On the other hand, since the first interface image 006SG005I is displayed at the bottom of the image display device 5 so as not to overlap with the images of the left area 006SG005L, middle area 006SG005C, and right area 006SG005R during the development suggestion performance, the player can A first method that accurately displays the number of stored first special symbols in the first interface image 006SG005I in a specifiable manner without being affected by the displacement (slide movement) of each image of the left area 006SG005L, the middle area 006SG005C, and the right area 006SG005R. It is possible to recognize the pending memory display area 006SG005D and the second pending memory display area 006SG005U that specifiably displays the number of second special symbol pending memories.

In addition, as shown in FIGS. 12-21 and 12-23, the decorative pattern is drawn and arranged in the layer 2 image drawing area, and when the development suggestion effect is executed, the decorative pattern is placed in the center of the display area of the image display device 5. By moving upward or downward from the section, the visibility is reduced, which improves the performance effect of the development suggestion performance. Furthermore, the small designs are drawn and arranged in the layer 1 image drawing area, and when the development suggestion performance is executed, unlike decorative designs, they do not move from the upper right of the display area of the image display device 5, so visibility does not decrease. The player can easily understand the progress of the game by visually recognizing the small symbols even during execution of the development suggestion performance.

In addition, as shown in Figure 12-21, the development suggestion effect of this feature section 006SG is such that the amount of movement of the images displayed in the left area 006SG005L, middle area 006SG005C, and right area 006SG005R increases in stages. , while improving the performance effect of the development suggestion performance, it is possible to emphasize the amount of movement of the images displayed in the left area 006SG005L, middle area 006SG005C, and right area 006SG005R at each stage, further improving the performance effect. can.

In addition, as shown in Figures 12-21 and 12-22, in the variable display using the super reach variation pattern, the images in the left area 006SG005L, middle area 006SG005C, and right area 006SG005R slide to the third stage. While displacement image data is used, in the variable display with the normal reach variation pattern, the displacement image is used to slide the images of the left area 006SG005L, middle area 006SG005C, and right area 006SG005R to the first or second stage. data is used, and the ratio of being controlled to the jackpot game state is different depending on the displacement image data used in the development suggestion production. It is possible to draw the player's attention to the number of moving stages of the image, and it is possible to improve the performance interest of the development suggestion performance.

In addition, as shown in Figures 12-21 and 12-22, when using displacement image data in which the images of the left area 006SG005L, the middle area 006SG005C, and the right area 006SG005R slide to the third stage, and the left area 006SG005L, the middle area When using displacement image data in which the images of area 006SG005C and right area 006SG005R slide to the first step, the parts where the images of left area 006SG005L, middle area 006SG005C, and right area 006SG005R slide to the first step are common. When using displacement image data in which the images of the left area 006SG005L, middle area 006SG005C, and right area 006SG005R slide to the third stage, and the images of the left area 006SG005L, middle area 006SG005C, and right area 006SG005R move to the second stage. In the case of using displacement image data that slides, the left area 006SG005L, middle area 006SG005C, and right area 006SG005R have the same part that slides to the second stage, so the left area 006SG005L is used as a development suggestion effect. , the middle area 006SG005C, and the right area 006SG005R can draw the player's attention to the process such as the number of steps in which the images slide, so that the entertainment of the development suggestion performance can be further improved.

Although the embodiments of the present invention have been described above with reference to the drawings, the specific configuration is not limited to these embodiments, and any changes or additions that do not depart from the gist of the present invention are included in the present invention. It will be done.

For example, in the characteristic section 006SG, a development suggestion effect that suggests the development of a super reach into a reach effect is exemplified as an effect of displacing the image displayed on the image display device 5, but the present invention is not limited to this. Instead, as shown in FIGS. 12-24 and 12-25 as modified example 006SG-1, it is suggested that the effect of displacing the image displayed on the image display device 5 is reach during variable display. It may also be possible to perform a reach suggestion effect.

The production mode of the reach suggestion production will be explained based on FIGS. 12-24 and 12-25. First, in a variable display with a normal reach or super reach variation pattern, as shown in Figures 12-24 (A) to 12-24 (C), the left ornament is displayed at the timing immediately before the left ornament stops. An effect image such as a character acts on the pattern, and the left decorative pattern stops. At this time, a part of the background image whose display position overlaps with the lower part of the left decorative pattern is displayed in a distorted manner.

Next, as shown in FIGS. 12-24(D) to 12-24(F), an action image such as a character acts on the right decorative pattern at the timing immediately before the right decorative pattern stops, and the right decorative pattern The decorative pattern stops and becomes a reach. At this time, a part of the background image whose display position overlaps with the lower part of the right decorative pattern is displayed in a distorted manner.

On the other hand, in a variable display with a non-reach variation pattern, as shown in Figures 12-25(A) to 12-25(C), the left decorative symbol is displayed at the timing immediately before the left decorative symbol stops. An effect image such as a character acts on the image, and the left decorative pattern stops. At this time, a part of the background image whose display position overlaps with the lower part of the left decorative pattern is displayed in a distorted manner.

Next, as shown in FIGS. 12-25(D) to 12-25(F), an action image such as a character acts on the right decorative pattern at the timing immediately before the right decorative pattern stops. A number of symbols that do not match the reach combination stop as decorative symbols. At this time, the decorative pattern on the right stops and becomes a reach. At this time, a part of the background image whose display position overlaps with the lower part of the right decorative pattern is displayed without distortion.

In addition, as for the reach suggestion effect in this modified example 006SG-1, as shown in FIGS. 12-26(A) to 12-26(F), the layer 1 image drawing area of the VRAM area is A first interface image 006SG005I including a display area 006SG005D and a second reserved memory display area 006SG005U and a second interface image 006SG005J including a small pattern are drawn, an action image is drawn in the layer 2 image drawing area, and a layer 3 image drawing area is drawn. A decorative pattern is drawn on. Further, in the VRAM area of the present modification 006SG-1, a layer 4 image drawing area for drawing an image lower than the layer 3 image drawing area is arranged. A background image is drawn in the layer 4 image drawing area. Furthermore, in the displacement image creation area, the image drawn in the layer 3 image drawing area and the image drawn in the layer 4 image drawing area are superimposed to create a displacement target image, and the displacement target image is A displacement image is created by applying the displacement image to the image.

In the display image creation area, the image drawn in the layer 1 image drawing area, the image drawn in the layer 2 image drawing area, and the image drawn in the displacement image creation area (displacement image) are superimposed. By doing so, a display image to be displayed on the image display device 5 is created.

In addition, in this modified example 006SG-1, a form in which reach suggestion performance can be executed in variable display of non-reach, normal reach, and super reach variation patterns has been exemplified, but the present invention is not limited to this. The reach suggestion performance may not be executed in part of the variable display of non-reach, normal reach, and super reach variation patterns.

In addition, in this modified example 006SG-1, a form in which action images such as characters act on the left and right decorative patterns is exemplified as a reach suggestion effect, but the present invention is not limited to this, and is not limited to this. As the reach suggestion performance in the variable display of the reach variation pattern, a case may be provided in which the effect image acts on the decorative pattern only once (acts only on the left decorative pattern).

Furthermore, in this modification example 006SG-1, a form in which an action image such as a character acts on a decorative pattern as a reach suggestion effect is exemplified, but the present invention is not limited to this, and multiple reach suggestion effects may be used. The effect image may be displayed, and the proportion of the reach may be changed depending on which effect image acts on the decorative pattern.

In addition, in this modification 006SG-1, in the case where a reach is not achieved even though an effect image such as a character acts as a reach suggestion effect, the effect image or the background image whose display area overlaps with the decorative pattern Although a form in which a part of the image is not distorted is illustrated, the present invention is not limited to this, and when an effect image such as a character acts as a reach suggestion effect, the effect image must be used regardless of whether or not it becomes a reach. A part of the background image whose display area overlaps with the decorative pattern on which the effect is applied may be distorted.

In addition, in this modified example 006SG-1, when an effect image such as a character acts as a reach suggestion effect, a part of the background image whose display area overlaps with the decorative pattern on which the effect image acts is distorted. However, the present invention is not limited to this, and when an effect image such as a character acts as a reach suggestion effect, the display area overlaps with the decorative pattern on which the effect image acts. Only one of the parts of the background image may be distorted.

Further, in the feature section 213SG, a development suggestion effect that suggests the development of super reach into a reach effect is exemplified as an effect of displacing the image displayed on the image display device 5, but the present invention is not limited to this. Instead, as shown in FIGS. 12-27 and 12-28 as modification 006SG-2, the effect of displacing the image displayed on the image display device 5 is to use a decorative pattern that is once stopped and displayed in an incorrect combination. It may also be possible to perform a revival performance in which the characters change into a jackpot combination.

The performance mode of the revival performance will be explained based on FIGS. 12-27 and 12-28. First, in the case where the variable display result is a jackpot, as shown in Figure 12-27 (A), after the variable display result is suggested to be a hit as a reach effect of normal reach or super reach, the decorative symbol is a hit. Wrong combinations are displayed oscillatingly.

Next, as shown in FIG. 12-27(B), the crack effect image 006SG005H is displayed overlappingly on the inner decoration pattern, and a plurality of inner decoration patterns are displayed along the crack effect image 006SG005H as the first stage crack. appears divided into pieces. Then, as shown in FIG. 12-27(C), the crack effect image 006SG005H and each fragment are displayed in an enlarged manner from the state shown in FIG. 12-27(B) as the second stage crack, and each fragment is displayed as an image. They move in different directions from the center of the device 5 so as to spread out.

Furthermore, as shown in FIG. 12-27(D), the crack effect image 006SG005H and each fragment are further enlarged from the state shown in FIG. 12-27(C) as the third stage crack, and each fragment is further enlarged. Move to spread.

Then, as a crack in the fourth stage, an image of fragments of the decorative pattern inside scattering is finally displayed, and then a new decorative pattern is displayed as the decorative pattern inside, indicating that it is a jackpot. Variable display stops.

On the other hand, in the case where the variable display result is a miss, as shown in Figure 12-28 (A), after the variable display result is suggested to be a miss as a reach effect for normal reach or super reach, the decorative pattern is displayed. The reach is displayed oscillatingly depending on the combination.

Next, as shown in FIG. 12-28(B), the crack effect image 006SG005H is displayed overlappingly on the inner decoration pattern, and a plurality of inner decoration patterns are displayed along the crack effect image 006SG005H as the first stage crack. appears divided into pieces. Then, as shown in FIG. 12-28(C), the crack effect image 006SG005H and each fragment are displayed in an enlarged manner from the state shown in FIG. 12-28(B) as the second stage crack, and each fragment is displayed as an image. They move in different directions from the center of the device 5 so as to spread out.

Furthermore, as shown in FIG. 12-28(D), the crack effect image 006SG005H and each fragment are further enlarged from the state shown in FIG. 12-28(C) as the third stage crack, and each fragment is further enlarged. Move to spread.

However, in a variable display in which the variable display result is incorrect, after the first stage cracking is performed, after the second stage cracking is performed, or after the third stage cracking is performed, The revival effect ends without the fourth stage of cracking being performed, the image displayed on the image display device 5 returns to the state shown in FIG. 12-28(A), and the decorative pattern and small pattern are removed. Stop at the combination shown.

In addition, as a revival effect in this modified example 006SG-2, as shown in FIGS. 12-29(A) to 12-29(F), the first reserved memory display is displayed in the layer 1 image drawing area of the VRAM area. A first interface image 006SG005I including area 006SG005D and a second reserved storage display area 006SG005U and a second interface image 006SG005J including a small pattern are drawn, a crack effect image 006SG005H is drawn in the layer 2 image drawing area, and a layer 3 image is drawn. A decorative pattern is drawn in the area. Further, in the VRAM area of the present modification 006SG-2, a layer 4 image drawing area for drawing an image lower than the layer 3 image drawing area is arranged. A background image is drawn in the layer 4 image drawing area. Furthermore, in the displacement image creation area, a displacement target image is created using the image drawn in the layer 3 image rendering area, and a displacement image (middle image) is created by applying the displacement image to the displacement target image. An image in which the decorative pattern is divided into multiple pieces and each piece is displayed as if it were spread out is created.

In the display image creation area, the image drawn in the layer 1 image drawing area, the image drawn in the layer 2 image drawing area, the image drawn in the displacement image creation area (displacement image), and the layer 4 A display image to be displayed on the image display device 5 is created by superimposing the image drawn in the image drawing area.

In particular, in this modification 006SG-2, the decorative pattern inside expands step by step as a revival effect. In other words, in the resurrection effect, the proportion of the display area of the decorative pattern inside the display area of the image display device 5 Since the number increases in stages, it is possible to more effectively draw the attention of the player to the revival performance by expanding the decorative symbols therein in stages.

In addition, in this modified example 006SG-2, a mode is illustrated in which the crack effect image 006SG005H is displayed overlappingly on the decorative pattern inside as a revival effect, but the present invention is not limited to this, and the crack effect image A plurality of display modes of 006SG005H may be provided, and the rate at which the variable display result becomes a jackpot may be varied depending on which display mode the crack effect image 006SG005H is displayed.

For example, as shown in Figure 12-30, blue and red are provided as the display colors of the crack effect image 006SG005H, and when the variable display result is a jackpot, the blue crack is displayed at a rate of 20% when the revival effect is executed. The effect image 006SG005H is displayed, and the red crack effect image 006SG005H is displayed at a rate of 80% when the revival performance is executed. On the other hand, if the variable display result is incorrect, the blue crack effect image 006SG005H will be displayed when the revival effect is executed at a rate of 80%, and the red crack effect will be displayed when the resurrection effect is executed at a 20% rate. The image 006SG005H may be displayed.

In addition, in this modified example 006SG-2, two colors, red and blue, are provided as the display colors of the crack effect image 006SG005H, but the present invention is not limited to this, and the display colors of the crack effect image 006SG005H are Three or more colors may be provided.

In addition, in the present modification 006SG-2, a mode is exemplified in which a revival effect is executed when the gaming state is a time saving state (low probability high base state or high probability high base state), but the present invention is not limited to this. Instead, the revival performance may be executed when the gaming state is the normal state (low probability low base state).

In addition, in this modified example 006SG-2, as shown in FIG. 12-28, the decorative pattern inside is composed of a plurality of fragments in the resurrection performance, and the number of these fragments is maintained as the resurrection performance progresses. , an example is given in which the fragments are moved in stages from the center of the display area of the image display device 5 toward the periphery, but the present invention is not limited to this, and the decorative patterns in these The plurality of constituent fragments may be increased in stages as the revival performance progresses. By doing this, the resurrection performance can strongly impress the player with the visual effect that the number of fragments forming the inner decoration pattern increases as the resurrection performance progresses.

Furthermore, in the feature section 006SG, a development suggestion effect that suggests the development of super reach into a reach effect is exemplified as an effect of displacing the image displayed on the image display device 5, but the present invention is not limited to this. Instead, as shown in FIG. 12-31 as modification 006SG-3, as an effect of displacing the image displayed on the image display device 5, a variable display is executed in a super reach variation pattern in the reserved memory. A look-ahead preview performance may be performed that suggests from a plurality of previous variable displays that a variable display in which the variable display result is a jackpot will be executed.

The appearance of the look-ahead preview effect will be explained based on FIG. 12-31. First, in a state where a plurality of pending memories exist, as shown in FIGS. 12-31(A) and 12-31(B), the variable display being executed stops when the combination of decorative symbols is out of order. Next, as shown in FIGS. 12-31 (C) and 12-31 (D), when the next variable display is started, a cutting effect that crosses the display area left and right in the display area of the image display device 5 is created. Image 006SG005S is displayed overlappingly with the decorative pattern and background image. Among the display areas displayed on the image display device 5, the display area excluding the first interface image 006SG005I is divided into a lower lower area 006SG005B including the decorative pattern and a part of the background image, and the remaining area with the cutting effect image 006SG005S as the border. It is divided into an upper region 006SG005T containing a decorative pattern and a background image. In other words, the boundary between the lower region 006SG005B and the upper upper region 006SG005T is hidden from the player by the cutting effect image 006SG005S.

In addition, as shown in FIGS. 12-31(D) to 12-31(E), the lower area 006SG005B moves to the left along the cutting effect image 006SG005S, and the upper area 006SG005T moves to the right along the cutting effect image 006SG005S. Slide at the same time. The lower area 006SG005B, which has slid to the left along the cutting effect image 006SG005S, further slides downward, and the upper area 006SG005T, which has slid to the right along the cutting effect image 006SG005S, further slides upward. . At this time, the cutting effect image 006SG005S is moved and displayed on both the boundary on the lower region 006SG005B side and the boundary on the upper region 006SG005T side so as to follow.

Furthermore, as shown in FIGS. 12-31(E) and 12-31(F), in the display area of the image display device 5, the lower area 006SG005B slides downward and the upper area 006SG005T slides upward. The display of a black image starts. The display area of the black image expands as the lower area 006SG005B slides downward and the upper area 006SG005T slides upward, and the lower area 006SG005B and the upper area 006SG005T move outside the display area. By completing the movement, the display area enters a so-called blackout state in which only the first interface image 006SG005I and the second interface image 006SG005J are displayed.

Thereafter, when the blackout ends, display of a new background image and decorative pattern is started in the display area of the image display device 5. It should be noted that this pre-read preview performance is repeatedly executed until the variable display of the external pre-read target starts.

In addition, as for the pre-read preview effect in this modified example 006SG-3, as shown in FIGS. 12-32(A) to 12-32(F), the layer 1 image drawing area of the VRAM area has the first reserved memory. A first interface image 006SG005I including a display area 006SG005D and a second reserved storage display area 006SG005U and a second interface image 006SG005J including a small pattern are drawn, a cutting effect image 006SG005S is drawn in the layer 2 image drawing area, and a layer 3 image is drawn. A decorative pattern is drawn in the drawing area. Furthermore, the VRAM area of this modified example 006SG-3 includes a layer 4 image drawing area for drawing images in a lower layer than the layer 3 image drawing area and a layer 5 image drawing area for drawing images in a lower layer. It is located. A background image is drawn in the layer 4 image drawing area, and a black image (blackout image) is drawn in the layer 5 image drawing area.

Furthermore, in the displacement image creation area, the image drawn in the layer 3 image drawing area and the image drawn in the layer 4 image drawing area are superimposed to create a displacement target image, and the displacement target image is By applying the displacement image to the image, a displacement image including the lower region 006SG005B and the upper region 006SG005T is created.

In the display image creation area, the image drawn in the layer 1 image drawing area, the image drawn in the layer 2 image drawing area, the image (displacement image) drawn in the displacement image creation area, and the layer 5 A display image to be displayed on the image display device 5 is created by superimposing the image drawn in the image drawing area.

As described above, in this modified example 006SG-3, in the pre-read preview performance as a specific performance in the present invention, as shown in FIGS. 12-31(C) and 12-31(D), the upper area 006SG005T and the lower The decorative pattern and the background image are displayed across the area 006SG005B, and the upper area 006SG005T moves to the right and the lower area 006SG005B moves to the left, and the border between the upper area 006SG005T and the lower area 006SG005B moves. Since the cutting effect image 006SG005S is displayed, it is possible to more effectively make the player recognize the left and right movement of the upper area 006SG005T and the lower area 006SG005B as the pre-read preview effect, and increase the interest in the game. can be improved.

Furthermore, as shown in Figure 12-32, the cutting effect image 006SG005S is drawn and placed in the layer 2 image drawing area as an image with a higher display priority than the decorative pattern or background image, so the upper area 006SG005T and the lower area Since the display position of the cutting effect image 006SG005S does not change even if the display position with the area 006SG005B changes, the display position of the upper area 006SG005T and the lower area 006SG005B can be changed by comparing the upper area 006SG005T and the lower area 006SG005B with the cutting effect image 006SG005S. The displacement can be made more conspicuous, and the performance effect of the pre-read preview performance can be further improved.

Further, as shown in FIGS. 12-31(D) and 12-31(E), after moving the upper region 006SG005T toward the right side and the lower region 006SG005B toward the left side, the upper region 006SG005T and the lower region By moving the boundary portions with 006SG005B upward and downward, respectively, it is possible to further enhance the performance effect of the preview preview performance and improve the interest of the performance. In particular, as a look-ahead preview effect, as shown in Figures 12-31(D) and 12-31(E), the upper area 006SG005T moves towards the right side, the lower area 006SG005B moves towards the left side, but the upper area 006SG005T moves towards the left side. Since the boundary between the upper region 006SG005T and the lower region 006SG005B moves in the vertical direction, the synergistic effect of the displacement (movement) of the upper region 006SG005T and the lower region 006SG005B and the displacement (movement) of the boundary can further enhance the performance effect of the pre-read preview performance. I can do it.

In this modification 006SG-3, the moving direction of the boundary between the upper region 006SG005T and the lower region 006SG005B is a vertical direction that is different from the right side, which is the moving direction of the upper region 006SG005T, and the left side, which is the moving direction of the lower region 006SG005B. Although the present invention is not limited to this, the moving direction of the boundary between the upper region 006SG005T and the lower region 006SG005B is the same as the moving direction of the upper region 006SG005T and the moving direction of the lower region 006SG005B. It is sufficient if it is different from either one of them.

In this modification 006SG-3, the cutting effect image 006SG005S is displayed on the image display device 5 as a pre-read preview effect, and the lower area 006SG005B and the upper area 006SG005T divided along the cutting effect image 006SG005S are moved and displayed. Although the present invention is not limited to this, a plurality of display modes of the cutting effect image 006SG005S are provided, and a variable display of the pre-read target is provided depending on which display mode the cutting effect image 006SG005S is displayed. The rate at which the variable display result becomes a jackpot may be varied.

For example, as shown in Figure 12-33, three types of display colors, blue, green, and red, are provided as the display colors of the cutting effect image 006SG005S, and when the variable display result of the prefetch target is a jackpot, the cutting effect image 006SG005S is displayed. It is displayed in blue at a rate of 10%, displayed in green at a rate of 30%, and displayed in red at a rate of 60%. On the other hand, if the variable display result of the prefetch target is incorrect, the cutting effect image 006SG005S is displayed in blue at a rate of 60%, green at a rate of 30%, and red at a rate of 10%. Bye.

By doing so, it is possible to draw the player's attention to the display color of the cutting effect image 006SG005S displayed during the pre-reading preview performance, so that the performance effect of the pre-reading preview performance can be further enhanced.

In this modified example 006SG-3, the cutting effect image 006SG005S is provided with three types of display colors, blue, green, and red. However, the present invention is not limited to this, and the cutting effect image 006SG005S The display colors of the image 006SG005S may be two colors or four or more colors. Furthermore, the ratio at which the variable display result of the prefetch target becomes a jackpot (jackpot expectation level) may be varied depending on aspects other than color, such as the shape and size of the cutting effect image 006SG005S, the number of displayed cutting effect images 006SG005S, etc. .

Further, in the present modification example 006SG-3, the image displayed on the image display device 5 is divided into two areas along the cutting effect image 006SG005S as a pre-read preview effect, but the present invention is not limited to this. The present invention is not limited to this, and the image displayed on the image display device 5 may be divided into three or more areas as a pre-read preview effect. In this case, the performance effect of the pre-read preview performance may be improved by varying the direction in which each area slides.

In addition, in this modification 006SG-3, a form in which the upper area 006SG005T and the lower area 006SG005B are moved respectively is exemplified as a pre-read preview effect, but the present invention is not limited to this, and the pre-read preview effect The region to be moved may be only one of the upper region 006SG005T and the lower region 006SG005B.

In addition, in this modified example 006SG-3, the decorative pattern and the background image are displayed across the upper area 006SG005T and the lower area 006SG005B, and the image displayed in the upper area 006SG005T after moving to the right side and the left side The image is different from the image displayed in the lower area 006SG005B after moving to. Therefore, even if the upper area 006SG005T and the lower area 006SG005B move, the image displayed in the upper area 006SG005T and the image displayed in the lower area 006SG005B are different, so the pre-read preview effect is This can be performed without giving the player a sense of discomfort, and it is possible to prevent the player from losing interest in the game.

In addition, in this modification 006SG-3, the image displayed in the upper area 006SG005T after moving to the right side is different from the image displayed in the lower area 006SG005B after moving to the left side. Although shown as an example, the present invention is not limited to this, and the image displayed in the upper area 006SG005T after moving to the right and the image displayed in the lower area 006SG005B after moving to the left At least a portion may be common to the image. By doing so, it is possible to add surprise to the pre-read preview performance, thereby improving the interest in the game.

In addition, in this modification example 006SG-3, as shown in FIGS. 12-31(C) and 12-31(D), the upper area in the display area of the image display device 5 is The image displayed across 006SG005T and the lower area 006SG005B is the same as the image displayed across the upper area 006SG005T after moving to the right and the lower area 006SG005B after moving to the left as a pre-read preview effect. However, the present invention is not limited to this, and is displayed across the upper area 006SG005T and the lower area 006SG005B in the display area of the image display device 5 at a timing before the execution of the pre-read preview effect. A part of the image may not be displayed as an image that is displayed across the upper area 006SG005T after moving to the right side and the lower area 006SG005B after moving to the left side as a pre-read preview effect. By doing so, it is possible to enhance the performance interest of the pre-read preview performance.

In this modified example 006SG-3, the upper area 006SG005T and the lower area 006SG005B are moved in opposite directions as a preview effect (in FIG. 12-31(D), the upper area 006SG005T is moved to the right side, and the lower area 006SG005B is moved to the right side). When the upper region 006SG005T is moved upward and the lower region 006SG005B is moved downward in FIG. 12-31 (E)), the amount of movement (displacement) between the upper region 006SG005T and the lower region 006SG005B is the same. It is. However, the present invention is not limited to this, and when the upper area 006SG005T and the lower area 006SG005B are moved in opposite directions as a preview effect, the amount of movement (displacement amount ) may be different. In this way, by varying the amount of movement of the upper region 006SG005T and the lower region 006SG005B, which move in opposite directions as a pre-read preview effect, the performance effect of the pre-read preview effect can be further improved.

In addition, in this modified example 006SG-3, as shown in FIG. 12-33, the proportion of the variable display result of the prefetch target being a jackpot is varied depending on the display color of the cutting effect image 006SG005S, but the present invention However, the display color of the cut effect image 006SG005S may be changeable each time variable display is performed, as shown in FIG. 12-34 as a modification 006SG-4. In this case, the rate at which the variable display result of the prefetch target becomes a jackpot (jackpot expectation level) may vary depending on the display color of the final cutting effect image 006SG005S or the display color change pattern.

Furthermore, in the feature section 006SG, a development suggestion effect that suggests the development of super reach into a reach effect is exemplified as an effect of displacing the image displayed on the image display device 5, but the present invention is not limited to this. Instead, as shown in FIG. 12-35 as modified example 006SG-5, as an effect of displacing the image displayed on the image display device 5, during the variable display, once there is a non-probable variable jackpot or a 2-round definite variable with a small number of rounds. A combination of decorative patterns in which decorative patterns are displayed in a combination that indicates the type of jackpot, such as a jackpot, and then the left, middle, and right decorative patterns are variably displayed in a combination that indicates a jackpot, and then they finally stop. You may perform a promotion performance (also referred to as a re-lottery performance) that notifies you of the jackpot type.

The performance mode of the promotion performance will be explained based on FIG. 12-35. First, after announcing that the variable display result is a jackpot as a normal reach or super reach reach effect, as shown in Figure 12-35 (A), after these reach effects are finished, the decorative symbols are displayed as a non-probable variable jackpot or a 2-round guaranteed variable. A combination indicating a jackpot type that is relatively less advantageous to the player, such as a jackpot (in the example shown in FIG. 12-35(A), a combination of even numbers "2" indicating a variable jackpot) is displayed.

Then, as shown in Figure 12-35 (B), during the remaining period of the variable display, the decorative symbols on the left, middle, and right are displayed as promotion effects such as a 2-round probability-variable jackpot, a 5-round probability-variable jackpot, a 10-round probability-variable jackpot, etc. The combinations of decorative symbols of other jackpot types are variably displayed at a constant speed.

During execution of the promotion effect, as shown in FIGS. 12-35(C) and 12-35(D), the vertical center of the display area of the image display device 5 is directed leftward in two steps. It gets distorted.

Then, the jackpot type determined at the start of this variable display is a jackpot type that is more advantageous to the player than the jackpot type indicated by the initially displayed combination of decorative symbols (see Figure 12-35 (A)). In some cases, after the first or second stage of distortion of the promotion effect, the decorative pattern stops at the combination of the corresponding jackpot type (in the example shown in FIG. 12-35(E), the combination of probability variable jackpot). On the other hand, if the jackpot type determined at the start of this variable display is the same as the jackpot type indicated by the initially displayed combination of decorative symbols, the decorative symbol will be displayed after the first stage of distortion of the promotion effect. It stops at a combination of jackpot types (in the example shown in FIG. 12-35(F), a non-probable jackpot combination).

In addition, the "advantage for the player" between the jackpot types in this modification 006SG-5 refers to whether or not the game is controlled to a variable probability state after the jackpot game ends, or whether it is controlled to the time-saving state after the jackpot game ends. Refers to games with a different number of variable displays and games with a different number of rounds in a jackpot game.

In addition, as a promotion effect in this modified example 006SG-5, as shown in FIGS. 12-36(A) to 12-36(E), the layer 1 image drawing area of the VRAM area has a first reserved memory display. A first interface image 006SG005I including area 006SG005D and a second reserved memory display area 006SG005U and a second interface image 006SG005J including a small pattern are drawn, a decorative pattern is drawn in the layer 2 image drawing area, and a decorative pattern is drawn in the layer 3 image drawing area. The background image is drawn.

Furthermore, in the displacement image creation area, the image drawn in the layer 2 image drawing area and the image drawn in the layer 3 image drawing area are superimposed to create a displacement target image, and the displacement target image is By applying the displacement image to the image, a displacement image is created in which the center portion in the vertical direction is distorted toward the left side.

In the display image creation area, the image drawn in the layer 1 image drawing area and the image (displacement image) drawn in the displacement image creation area are superimposed and displayed on the image display device 5. A display image is now created.

Note that the display image displayed on the image display device 5 in this modified example 006SG-5 is an image that is longer than the display area of the image display device 5 in the left-right width direction and the top-bottom width direction, as in the characteristic portion 006SG. (See FIG. 12-19) However, the present invention is not limited to this. As shown in FIG. 12-37, the horizontal width dimension of the display image displayed on the image display device 5 is It may be the same as the dimension in the left and right width direction of the display area of the display device 5.

In this case, when the promotion effect is executed as described above, as shown in FIG. 12-38(A) to FIG. When the central portion is distorted to the left, an image non-display area where no image is displayed is formed on the right side of the display area.

Therefore, in the case where the dimension in the horizontal width direction of the display image displayed on the image display device 5 is the same as the dimension in the horizontal width direction of the display area of the image display device 5 as shown in FIG. -39 (A) to Figure 12-39 (D), when performing promotion effects, the decorative designs drawn and placed in the layer 2 image drawing area and the decorative patterns drawn and placed in the layer 3 image drawing area are By enlarging the placed background image or enlarging the displacement target image (background image and decorative pattern) created in the displacement image creation area, a part of the background image can be moved outside the display area of the image display device 5. Deploy. In this way, by applying the displacement image to the displacement target image, even if the vertical center of the display area of the image display device 5 is distorted to the left as a promotion effect, the right side of the image display device 5 As a result of being enlarged, a background image placed outside the display area of the image display device 5 will be displayed, which may cause inappropriate image display on the image display device 5, such as the formation of the above-mentioned image non-display area. It is possible to reduce the possibility that an inappropriate display will occur.

In addition, in FIG. 12-39, when the vertical center of the display area of the image display device 5 is distorted to the left as a promotion effect, an image non-display area where no image is displayed on the right side of the display area is shown. Although the embodiment has been exemplified in which both the background image and the decorative pattern are enlarged in order to prevent the formation of image non-display areas, the present invention is not limited to this. In order to prevent this, only the background image may be enlarged.

In addition, in this modified example 006SG-5, when performing the promotion effect, the displacement image is applied to the entire displacement target image enlarged so that the left and right width dimensions are longer than the display area of the image display device 5. Although the embodiment has been exemplified in which an image for promotion effect is created by applying the image, the present invention is not limited to this. It is not necessary to displace only the portion corresponding to the area, that is, the image outside the display area of the image display device 5.

In addition, in this modification 006SG-5, the promotion effect is executed when the dimension in the horizontal width direction of the display image displayed on the image display device 5 is the same as the dimension in the horizontal width direction of the display area of the image display device 5. When doing so, an image non-display area is formed during execution of the promotion effect by enlarging the decorative pattern drawn and placed in the layer 2 image drawing area and the background image drawn and placed in the layer 3 image drawing area. Although the present invention is not limited to this example, the present invention is not limited to this example, and the present invention is not limited to this. The enlargement of the background image may be performed in stages according to the progress of the promotion effect (according to an increase in the distortion of the image displayed in the display area of the image display device 5). By doing so, it is possible to reduce the sense of discomfort caused by the sudden enlarged display of decorative patterns and background images on the image display device 5. Therefore, while maintaining the promotion effect, the display area of the image display device 5 can be reduced. In the process of increasing the distortion of the displayed image, it is possible to prevent inappropriate display such as display of an image non-display area on the image display device 5.

In addition, in the feature section 006SG, a form is exemplified in which a development suggestion effect that suggests the development of the super reach reach effect can be executed during variable display, but the present invention is not limited to this, and the present invention is not limited to this. In this case, it is possible to perform a pseudo continuous performance including temporary stoppage and re-variable display of decorative symbols, and the rate at which the jackpot game state is controlled (jackpot expectation level) may be varied depending on the number of executions of the pseudo continuous performance. .

In particular, in a variable display that executes such a pseudo-continuous effect, there is a temporary stop suggestion effect that suggests that the decorative pattern will temporarily stop immediately before the temporary stop timing of the decorative pattern, or a temporary stop suggestion effect that suggests that the decorative pattern will temporarily stop when the decorative pattern temporarily stops. It may also be possible to perform a temporary stop notification effect to notify temporary stop of the decorative pattern.

In addition, in the present modification example 006SG-5, when executing the promotion effect, by enlarging the image (display image) displayed on the image display device 5, the display image can also be displayed outside the display area of the image display device 5. Although the embodiment has been exemplified in which the image non-display area is prevented from being formed during execution of the promotion effect by arranging a part of the image, the present invention is not limited to this, and the image is previously promoted in the CGROM 205. Store an image that is larger in size than the display area of the image display device 5 (in the case of this modification 006SG-5, at least the left and right width dimensions are longer than the left and right width dimensions of the display area of the image display device 5) as an image for presentation. Then, by drawing and arranging the image in the displacement image creation area or the display image creation area, it may be possible to prevent the image non-display portion from being formed during execution of the promotion effect.

Furthermore, in this modified example 006SG-5, when executing the promotion effect, by enlarging the image (display image) displayed on the image display device 5, the display image can be displayed outside the display area of the image display device 5. Although the embodiment has been exemplified in which the image non-display area is prevented from being formed during execution of promotion effect by arranging a part of the image, the present invention is not limited to this, and the present invention is not limited to this. In this case, in the display image creation area, the image is displayed on the image display device 5 at a position outside the display area of the image display device 5 (in the case of this modification 006SG-5, on the right outer side of the display area of the image display device 5). An image (non-display image) different from the displayed image (display image) may be placed adjacent to the displayed image. By doing so, when the promotion effect is executed, the display image and the non-display image are arranged adjacent to each other across the display area and non-display area of the image display device 5, so that the image is replaced with the non-display area. A part of the hidden image will be displayed.

In the feature section 006SG, a development suggestion effect that suggests the development of a super reach into a reach effect is exemplified as an effect of displacing the image displayed on the image display device 5, but the present invention is not limited to this. Instead, as shown in FIGS. 12-40 to 12-42 as modified example 006SG-6, these temporary stop suggestion effects and temporary stop notification effects are used as effects to displace the image displayed on the image display device 5. May be executed.

The performance mode of the temporary stop suggestion performance will be explained based on FIG. 12-40. First, as shown in FIG. 12-40(A), when a certain period of time has elapsed from the start of the variable display, the left and right decorative symbols stop (swinging stops) and become a reach. Thereafter, as a temporary stop suggestion effect, a pseudo-continuous pattern (a pattern displayed as "NEXT"), which is a part of the decorative pattern, moves from the top to the bottom. At this time, on the image display device 5, the ripple effect image 006SG005P is displayed so as to converge from the periphery of the display area toward the center of the display area, and the images surrounding the ripple effect image 006SG005P ( The left and right decorative patterns and background images are displayed distorted.

If the variable display is a variable display that performs a pseudo-continuous performance (a variable display in which the pseudo-continuous symbols temporarily stop), as shown in FIG. 12-40 (B), the pseudo-continuous symbols temporarily stop and , a ripple effect image 006SG005P is displayed around the temporarily stopped pseudo-continuous pattern. On the other hand, if the variable display is a variable display that does not perform a pseudo-continuous effect (a variable display in which the pseudo-continuous pattern does not temporarily stop), as shown in Figure 12-40 (C), the pseudo-continuous pattern temporarily stops as it is. It moves to the lower part of the display area of the image display device 5 and disappears from display, and a symbol indicating that the variable display result is a failure is displayed as a decorative symbol inside.

In addition, in this modification example 006SG-6, as shown in FIG. 12-40, by displaying the ripple effect image 006SG005P on the image display device 5, a form that suggests that the decorative pattern (pseudo continuous pattern) is temporarily stopped is provided. Although shown as an example, the present invention is not limited to this, and a plurality of display modes of the ripple effect image 006SG005P are provided, and it is determined in which display mode the ripple effect image 006SG005P is displayed as a pseudo-association suggestion effect. Accordingly, the rate at which the decorative pattern (pseudo continuous pattern) temporarily stops may be varied.

For example, in FIG. 12-40, two ripple effect images 006SG005P are displayed (double display) as a pseudo-association suggestion effect, but as shown in FIG. 12-41, ripple effect images 006SG005P are displayed as a pseudo-association suggestion effect. It is sufficient to provide a case where only one is displayed, and to vary the rate at which the decorative pattern (pseudo continuous pattern) temporarily stops depending on the number of ripple effect images 006SG005P displayed in the pseudo continuous effect.

In addition, in this modification 006SG-6, the pseudo continuous pattern is displayed as a part of the decorative pattern, that is, the pseudo continuous pattern is a pattern that is displayed as part of the variable display even in periods other than the pseudo continuous performance. Although the present invention is not limited to this example, the pseudo-continuous pattern may be a pattern different from the decorative pattern, and may be a special pattern that is displayed only during the pseudo-continuous performance.

In addition, as shown in FIGS. 12-42(A) and 12-42(B), the temporary stop notification effect is such that after the temporary stop suggestion effect is executed and the pseudo continuous pattern is temporarily stopped, the ripple effect image 006SG005P is displayed. The ripple effect image 006SG005P is displayed so as to be diffused from the center of the display area to the periphery of the display area of the image display device 5, and images around the ripple effect image 006SG005P (left and right decorative patterns and background images) are distorted. Is displayed.

The temporary stop suggestion effect and temporary stop notification effect in this modified example 006SG-6 are as shown in Figures 12-43 (A) to 12-43 (F), in the layer 1 image drawing area of the VRAM area. , a first interface image 006SG005I including a first reserved memory display area 006SG005D and a second reserved memory display area 006SG005U and a second interface image 006SG005J including a small pattern are drawn, and a ripple effect image 006SG005P is drawn in the layer 2 image drawing area. A decorative pattern including a pseudo continuous pattern is drawn in the layer 3 image drawing area. Furthermore, a layer 4 image drawing area for drawing an image lower than the layer 3 image drawing area is arranged in the VRAM area of the present modification 006SG-6. A background image is drawn in the layer 4 image drawing area. Furthermore, in the displacement image creation area, a displacement target image is created using the image drawn in the layer 3 image rendering area, and a displacement image (ripples) is created by applying the displacement image to the displacement target image. A distorted decorative pattern and background image) are created using the effect image 006SG005P.

In the display image creation area, the image drawn in the layer 1 image drawing area, the image drawn in the layer 2 image drawing area, and the image drawn in the displacement image creation area (displacement image) are superimposed. By doing so, a display image to be displayed on the image display device 5 is created.

In addition, in the feature section 006GS, a mode in which the effect image is displayed using the image display device 5 capable of displaying only a two-dimensional image has been exemplified, but the present invention is not limited to this, and the modification 006SG- 7, as shown in FIGS. 12-44 and 12-45, the effect image may be displayed using a display device capable of displaying a stereoscopic image.

Modified example 006SG-7 will be explained below. Note that in the above-described characteristic part 006SG and the modified examples, the image display device 5 is a display device such as an LCD (Liquid Crystal Display) or an organic EL (Electro Luminescence) capable of displaying a two-dimensional image (2D image). However, in this modified example 006SG-7, as shown in FIG. 12-44, an autostereoscopic image display device 5 that allows a player to view a stereoscopic image with the naked eye by a parallax barrier method is used. The feature is that by using ', stereoscopic images (3D images) can be displayed in addition to monoscopic images (2D images) as various images.

As shown in FIG. 12-44, the autostereoscopic image display device 5' of this modified example 006SG-7 is a stereoscopic image (video) consisting of a right eye image (R image) and a left eye image (L image). an image liquid crystal panel 006SG900 capable of displaying images, a backlight 006SG901 that emits planar light from the back to the front of the image liquid crystal panel 006SG900, and an image liquid crystal panel on the front side of the image liquid crystal panel 006SG900. 006SG900 and a parallax barrier liquid crystal panel 006SG910 provided at a predetermined interval.

The parallax barrier liquid crystal panel 006SG910 allows the player's left eye to visually recognize the right eye image (R image) displayed in a vertical strip shape on the image liquid crystal panel 006SG900, and the left eye image (L image) to be viewed by the player's right eye. The player has a vertically striped black part that acts as a shutter to prevent the player from viewing the image, and a transparent part that allows the right eye image to be seen by the player's right eye and the left eye image to be seen by the player's left eye. A relatively highly optically transparent liquid crystal capable of displaying a parallax barrier image in a parallax barrier image display state and a transmissive display state in which all pixels are transparent without vertical striped black areas. It is considered a panel.

Note that the image liquid crystal panel 006SG900 displays, for example, a right eye image (R image) instead of the left eye image (L image), and the parallax barrier liquid crystal panel 006SG910 does not display the above-mentioned parallax barrier image ( By using a fully transparent display), a two-dimensional image (2D image) can also be displayed.

In other words, the autostereoscopic image display device 5', which is the display means of the present modification 006SG-7, is composed of a right-eye image and a left-eye image in addition to a monoscopic image (2D image) that is a non-stereoscopic image. It is possible to display autostereoscopic images.

Note that the stereoscopic image consisting of the right-eye image and the left-eye image displayed on the image liquid crystal panel 006SG900 is also drawn in the above-mentioned layers like the monoscopic image (2D image), while the parallax barrier liquid crystal panel The parallax barrier image displayed on the parallax barrier liquid crystal panel 006SG910 is drawn on a dedicated layer provided exclusively for the parallax barrier liquid crystal panel 006SG910 and displayed on the parallax barrier liquid crystal panel 006SG910.

When displaying an effect image using such an autostereoscopic image display device 5', other effects may be stereoscopically displayed at a timing different from the specific effect (for example, development suggestion effect) in the present invention during variable display. It may also be possible to perform this by displaying a visual image (3D image).

As shown in FIG. 12-45(A) to FIG. 12-45(D), during variable display, the autostereoscopic image display device 5' has an image that moves upward, which is a displacement specific image, as described above. It is possible to perform a development suggestion performance, which is a specific performance in which images of the left area 006SG005L and right area 006SG005R that have been moved, and an image of the middle area 006SG005C that has moved downward, can be executed, and the development suggestion performance has a different execution period. A variable display preview performance that suggests that the variable display result will be a jackpot is executed as a non-overlapping preview performance, and a stereoscopic image is displayed in the variable display preview performance.

In other words, a development suggestion effect is executed, which is a specific effect in which the images of the left area 006SG005L and right area 006SG005R that have moved upward, which are displacement specific images, and the image of the middle area 006SG005C that has moved downward are displayed. In this case, only a monoscopic image (2D image), which is a non-stereoscopic image, is displayed, and a stereoscopic image (3D image) is not displayed.

When the images of the left area 006SG005L and the right area 006SG005R that have moved upward, which are displacement specific images, and the image of the middle area 006SG005C that has moved downward are displayed in this way, the display is displayed in a non-stereoscopic manner. By using a two-dimensional image (2D image) as an image, it becomes difficult for the player to recognize whether or not the displacement is due to a stereoscopic image, which reduces the interest of the performance. It can be prevented.

In this embodiment, the effects of displaying a stereoscopic image (3D image) and the images of the left area 006SG005L and right area 006SG005R that have moved upward, which are displacement specific images, and the middle area 006SG005C that has moved downward Since the execution period of the image is different from the development suggestion performance, which is a specific performance that is displayed, the display of stereoscopic images (3D images) is restricted based on the execution period of the performance. The present invention is not limited to this. For example, when displaying a displacement specific image and a stereoscopic image (3D image) during the same performance, the stereoscopic image (3D image) is displayed while the displacement specific image is displayed. In order to prevent the displacement specific image from being displayed, data such as a display flag that can identify that a displacement specific image is being displayed is stored, and based on this data, a stereoscopic image (3D image) is displayed. The display may be restricted. In addition, regarding these restrictions, in order to prevent stereoscopic images (3D images) from being displayed immediately after or just before the display of the displacement specific image ends, there are certain restrictions before and after the period in which the displacement specific image is displayed. Also during the period, display of stereoscopic images (3D images) may be restricted by storing data such as a display flag.

In addition, although the above-mentioned modification 006SG-7 exemplifies a parallax barrier type autostereoscopic image display device 5' using the parallax barrier liquid crystal panel 006SG910, the present invention is not limited to this. Alternatively, a stereoscopic image (3D image) may be displayed using an autostereoscopic image display device using a lenticular lens method or an integral imaging method other than the parallax barrier method.

In addition, although this modified example 006SG0-7 exemplifies a form in which a stereoscopic image (3D image) is not displayed in the development suggestion performance, the present invention is not limited to this, and stereoscopic vision is also displayed in the development suggestion performance. There may also be a case where an image (3D image) is displayed. In addition, when displaying a stereoscopic image (3D image) in the exhibition presentation, the images (right eye image and left eye image) of the stereoscopic image (3D image) are drawn and the monoscopic image (2D image) is It is sufficient to draw and arrange the image in an image drawing area (for example, layer 1 image drawing area) higher than the image drawing area to be placed. By doing this, the stereoscopic image (3D image) will be displayed with priority over the monoscopic image (2D image), so the stereoscopic image (3D image) will be suitably displayed in the development suggestion performance. can do.

In addition, in this modification example 006SG-7, as a performance for displaying a stereoscopic image (3D image), a variable display preview performance that suggests that the variable display result will be a jackpot is different from the development suggestion performance (specific performance). Although the embodiment has been exemplified in a form that can be executed during the period, the present invention is not limited to this. A stereoscopic image (3D image) may also be displayed. By doing this, it is possible to make the player aware in advance that the development suggestion performance (specific performance) will be executed by displaying the stereoscopic image (3D image), so the development suggestion performance (specific performance) The production effect can be further improved. Furthermore, there are multiple performance modes for the introductory performance and for the development suggestion performance (specific performance), and the practice mode for the development suggestion performance (specific performance) can be changed depending on which performance mode the introduction performance is performed in. It may be different.

In addition, in the introduction performance, the movable body 32 is operated, and the movement of the movable body 32 and the display of the stereoscopic image (3D image) are linked to produce the performance effects of the introduction performance and the development suggestion performance (specific performance). may be improved.

Further, in the feature section 006SG, an example is given in which the present invention is applied to the pachinko gaming machine 1, but the present invention is not limited to this, and the present invention may be applied to a slot machine.

In addition, when the present invention is applied to a slot machine, as shown in FIG. 12-46 as a modified example 006SG-8, the game-related information in the present invention (the first interface image 006SG005I and the second interface in the feature section 006SG) (corresponding to image 006SG005J), a medal payout display, an AT (assist time) remaining game number display, a medal display stored as credits, etc. are displayed on the image display device 5 along with the performance image, and these game-related information are displayed. It is sufficient to use an image that is not subject to displacement.

In addition, in the characteristic part 006SG and each modification example, as a specific effect of the present invention, a form of effect that changes or distorts (distorts) the display position of the image displayed on the image display device 5 is exemplified, but The present invention is not limited to this, and as the specific effect, the display position of the image displayed on the image display device 5 may be changed or distorted repeatedly.

In addition, in the characteristic part 006SG and each modification example, the development suggestion performance, the reach suggestion performance, the revival performance, the advance notice performance, the promotion performance, the temporary stop suggestion performance, and the temporary stop notification performance are exemplified as specific performances in the present invention, A plurality of performances may be possible as these specific performances. In addition, in the case where a plurality of specific effects can be executed in this way, for example, in the normal state, it is possible to execute an effect in which decorative patterns (characters and numbers) are not separated, such as a development suggestion effect, in the normal state. On the other hand, a performance in which a decorative pattern (numbers only) is divided into a plurality of pieces or display areas may be performed, such as a revival performance or a look-ahead preview performance. By doing this, in the normal state, it is possible to prevent a decrease in the interest of a specific performance due to the fact that the decorative patterns containing characters and numbers are not separated, and in the time-saving state, on the contrary, the decorative patterns containing only numbers can be prevented. By dividing, the performance effect of a specific performance can be improved.

In addition, in the feature section 006SG, the decorative pattern is composed of characters and numbers in the normal state, and the decorative pattern is composed of only numbers in the time saving state, but the present invention is not limited to this. The display mode of the decorative pattern may be changed from the middle of the variable display in a specific variation pattern such as the variable display in the super reach variation pattern. For example, in the variable display of super reach, a decorative pattern consisting of characters and numbers is displayed variablely during the period from the start of the variable display until reach, and after reach, a decorative pattern consisting only of numbers is displayed. All you have to do is display the variable. Furthermore, in the period after the reach, as a specific performance in the present invention, a performance in which decorative symbols are divided, such as a resurrection performance, may be made possible.

Furthermore, in the characteristic portion 006SG and each modification example, an example is given in which an image in which at least a part of the specific image according to the present invention is displaced in the horizontal direction or vertical direction is displayed on the image display device 5 as a displacement specific image. However, the present invention is not limited to this, and an image in which at least a portion of the specific image is enlarged or reduced may be displayed on the image display device 5 as a displacement specific image. That is, the image displacement direction in the present invention may include the enlargement/reduction direction (Z-axis direction) in addition to the left-right direction (X-axis direction) and the up-down direction (Y-axis direction).

In addition, in the characteristic part 006SG, as shown in FIGS. 12-3 and 12-4, in the displacement target image, from the position corresponding to the pixel A of the displacement image, the Although the form of generating a displacement image using a replacement method in which a pixel X is identified and the pixel X is displaced (replaced) to a position corresponding to a pixel A of a displacement image has been illustrated, the present invention is not limited to this. Instead, for example, in a displacement target image, a displacement image is created using a method (moving method) in which pixel X at a position corresponding to pixel A of the displacement image is moved to a position according to the R value and G value of the pixel A. May be generated. In addition, in the replacement method, as in Modified Example 006SG-3, it is necessary to edit the displacement image of the area close to the boundary into a displacement image that takes into account the width of the boundary between areas with different moving directions. On the other hand, in the case of the replacement method, there is no need to perform these edits, so it is possible to reduce the video creation load, and when placing an effect image etc. at the boundary, it is necessary to set the boundary where the effect image is placed. Since the degree of freedom can be increased, the burden of creating video including effect images can be reduced.

1 Pachinko gaming machine 4A First special symbol display device 4B Second special symbol display device 5 Image display device 103 CPU
120 CPU for production control

Claims (1)

A gaming machine that can be controlled to an advantageous state advantageous to a player ,
A plurality of types of suggestion performances including a first suggestion production, a second suggestion production , a third suggestion production , and a fourth suggestion production can be executed as the suggestion production suggesting that the control is to be carried out in the advantageous state. Suggestion performance execution means,
The first development performance can be executed before the performance result of the first suggestion performance is announced, and the first development performance can be performed after the fact that the control is not controlled to the advantageous state as a performance result of the second suggestion performance is announced. A development performance execution means capable of executing a second development performance different from the first development performance;
a chance-up performance execution means capable of executing a chance-up performance with different expectations to be controlled to the advantageous state depending on the number of times the suggestion performance is executed;
a resurrection special performance execution means capable of executing a resurrection special performance that notifies that the control will be in the advantageous state after the suggestive performance is executed and it is announced that the control will not be in the advantageous state as a result of the performance;
a display means having a display area capable of displaying an image;
a storage means capable of storing image data of an image displayed in the display area;
an image processing means having a plurality of display layers in which images based on the image data can be arranged, and capable of generating an image to be displayed in the display area by superimposing and synthesizing each image arranged in the plurality of display layers; ,
Equipped with
The suggestive performance execution means is
The third suggestion performance can be executed after the first development performance is executed ,
The fourth suggestion performance can be executed after the second development performance is executed ,
The chance up effect execution means is
The number of times the chance-up effect is executed while the third suggestion effect is being executed is greater than the number of times the chance-up effect is executed when the first suggestion effect is being executed. It is possible to perform the above-mentioned chance-up production as follows,
The number of executions of the chance-up effect executed when the fourth suggestion effect is executed is set to be equal to or less than the number of executions of the chance-up effect executed when the second suggestion effect is executed. It is possible to perform the above-mentioned chance-up production,
The resurrection special effect execution means does not execute the resurrection special effect when the fourth suggestion effect is executed after the second development effect is executed.
A gaming machine characterized by:

Images